GE Medical Systems

gemedical.com

Technical Publication
Direction 2106358-100 Revision 13

HiSpeed Advantage RP - 1.X and 2.X General System Service Manual

Copyright © 1996, 1997, 1998, 2000 & 2002 by General Electric Company, Inc. All rights reserved.

Operating Documentation

GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS Rev. 8
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Direction 2106358–100
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

WARNING

AVISO

D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS. CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN. D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA.

AVERTISSEMENT

ATENÇÃO

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.

D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS. D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES. DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.

D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO. D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA. D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS, MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

WARNUNG

AVVERTENZA

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.

D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN WURDE. D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

0–3

GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS Rev. 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Direction 2106358–100

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION
X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use. Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation. It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury. The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment. Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT
All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period. Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item damaged and extent of damage. Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.

OMISSIONS & ERRORS
GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this 0–4 documentation. Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service represenatives.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

IEC 601–1–2 EMI/EMC Statement:

(CT HiSpeed Advantage System B7999EM)
Note: The GE CT HiSpeed Advantage system (Catalog Number B7999EM) has been tested and found to comply with emissions limits for a Class A Medical Device per IEC 601–1–2. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a medical installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to both other medical devices and radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment is found to cause harmful interference (which may be determined by turning the equipment on and off), the user (or qualified Service Personnel) is encouraged to attempt to correct the problem by one or more of the following measure(s): • • • • reorient or relocate the affected device increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver power the equipment from a source different from that of the receiver consult the point of purchase of Service Representative for further suggestions

The Manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by using other than recommended interconnect cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users’ authority to operate the equipment. Note: To comply with regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A Medical Device, all interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded. Use of cables not properly shielded and grounded may result in violation of Medical Device Directive and FCC regulations.

0–5

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

Notes:

0–6

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13

HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

REVISION HISTORY
REV 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 DATE December 15, 1993 September 26, 1994 February 25, 1995 May 1, 1995 June16, 1995 October18, 1995 June 10, 1996 August 15, 1996 February 10, 1997 September 1, 1997 September 15, 1998 August 4, 2000 November 17, 2000 September 19, 2002 Initial release. HSA 1.3 software features and new RP hardware. Hardware upgrades 2.0 IG Upgrade 2.1 HP–DAS Upgrade, Document styles made electronic media compatible 2.2 SmartBeam Release 2.3 Release Software Features and Compact PDU (2113764) Hardware 1.5, 2.4 Release Software Features Update CQA 940120, 941190, 951999, 952001, 960126, 960207, 961550, 961882, 963416 & 931691 Load Rotor patch tape CQA 984141 PCN 199808 Added S/A Slipring CQA 1007468 CQA 1026214; SN T-1448 REASON FOR CHANGE

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Page Number Title/Blank 0–3 to 0–6 0–7 to 0-8 0–9 to 0–10 0–11 to 0–14 0–15 0–16 to 0–18 0–19 to 0–31 0-31A to 031B 0-32 0–33 to 0–36 0–37 to 0-38 1–1 1–2 2–1 2–2 2–3 2–4 2–5 to 2–6 3–1 to 3–3 3–4 to 3–6 3–7 to 3–12 3–13 3–14 3–15 3–16 3–17 to 3–21 3–22 3–23 3–24 3–25 Revision Number Page Number 3–26 3–27 3–28 to 3–30 4–1 4–2 4–3 4–4 4–5 to 4–7 4–8 4–9 4–10 4–11 to 4–12 4–13 to 4–15 4–16 4–17 to 4–18 4–19 4–20 to 4–22 4–23 4–24 5–1 to 5–2 5–3 to 5–6 5–7 5–8 5–9 5–10 to 5–13 5–14 5–15 to 5–16 5–17 5–18 5–19 5–20 0–7 Revision Number 5 4 5 6 4 7 4 5 8 5 4 7 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 7 5 6 5 7 5 4 6 7 5 12 6 Page Number 6–1 6–2 6–3 6–4 6–5 to 6–6 7–1 to 7–2 8–1 to 8–2 8–3 8–4 8–5 8–6 8–7 8–8 8–9 to 8–10 8–11 8–12 to 8–13 8–14 8–15 to 8–17 8–18 8–19 to 8–21 8–22 8–23 to 8–24 9–1 to 9–4 9–5 to 9–8 9–9 9–10 to 9–18 9–19 to 9–20 9–21 to 9–31 9–32 Revision Number 6 5 6 5 4 5 5 4 5 6 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 5 7 5 4 5 8 5 8 5 4 8 9

13 8 13 8 9 8 9 8 13 8 9 13 5 6 5 7 5 7 5 7 5 8 4 7 4 8 7 5 4 5 4

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13

HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SER VICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES -continuedPage Number 10-1 to 10-2 10-3 to 10-4 11-1 to 11-13 11-14 to 11-20 11-21 to 11-25 11-26 11-27 11-28 11-29 to 11-31 11-32 to 11-33 11-34 to 11-35 11-36 to 11-38 11-39 11-40 11-41 to 11-43 11-44 11-45 to 11-46 11-47 to 11-57 11-58 to 11-61 11-62 11-63 to 11-67 11-68 11-69 to 11-70 11-71 to 11-73 11-74 to 11-78 11-79 11-80 to 11-82 11-83 to 11-84 11-85 to 11-96 11-97 11-98 to 11-104 11-105 11-106 to 11-111 11-112 11-113 to 11-122 11-123 11-124 to 11-131 11-132 11-133 to 11-138 12-1 12-2 to 12-5 12-6 12-7 to 12-12 12-13 to 12-15 12-16 12-17 12-18 12-19 to 12-22 12-23 12-24 12-25 12-26 to 12-30 12-31 Revision Number 5 7 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 6 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 8 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 8 5 8 4 8 Page Number 12-32 12-33 to 12-34 12-35 to 12-36 12-37 to 12-41 12-42 to 12-43 12-44 12-45 12-46 12-47 to 12-50 12-51 12-52 12-53 12-54 to 12-57 12-58 to 12-59 12-60 12-61 to 12-62 12-63 to 12-64 12-65 12-66 to 12-67 12-68 12-69 12-70 to 12-71 12-72 to 12-73 12-74 to 12-7 5C 12-76 to 12-7 8 12-79 to 12-81 12-8 2 12-8 3 to 12-83A 12-84 to 12-86 12-8 7 12-88 12-89 to 12-93 12-94 12-95 12-96 to 12-97 12-98 to 12-99 12-100 12-101 12-102 12-103 12-104 to 12-105 12-106 12-107 to 12-109 12-110 to 12-111 12-112 to 12-113 12-114 to 12-115 12-116 12-117 to 12-118 12-118 to 12-119 12-120 to 12-121 12-122 to 12-123 12-124 12-125 to 12-127 Revision Number 5 4 5 4 5 4 8 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 8 4 5 11 11 4 11 11 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 7 6 5 4 5 13 4 8 5 4 5 13 10 4 5 4 5 4 Page Number
12-128 to 12-129 12-130 12-131 to 12-132 12-133 to 12-134 12-135 12-136 12-137 12-138 12-139 to 12-141 12-142 to 12-143 12-144 to 12-159 12-160 to 12-164 12-165 12-166 to 12-175 12-176 to 12-178 12-179 to 12-183 12-184 12-185 to 12-186 12-187 12-188 to 12-189 12-190 12-191 12-192 12-193 to 12-196 12-197 12-198 12-199 12-200 12-201 12-202 12-203 to 12-206 12-207 to 12-210 12-21 1 to 12-213 12-214 A-1 to A-15 A-16 to A-17 A-18 to A-19 A-20 A-21 to A-23 A-24 to A-25 A-26 to A-33 A-34 A-35 A-36 to A-47 A-48 to A-54 A-55 to A-56 A-57 A-58 B-1 to B-6

Revision Number
5 4 5 4 6 4 5 4 5 4 8 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 8 5 8 4 8 4 5 4 4 6 4 6 4 5 4 6 4 6 4 5 6 4 13

0-8

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 – Customer Operating and Service Materials
1–1 1–2 1–3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Documentation (Class A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Software (Class B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 1–1 1–2

CHAPTER 2 – CT Diagnostics and Tools Menu Descriptions
2–1 2–2 2–3 2–4 2–5 2–6 2–7 Menu Function Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1 2–1 2–2 2–3 2–4 2–5 2–5

CHAPTER 3 – CT Diagnostics And Tools Procedures
3–1 3–2 3–3 3–4 3–5 3–6 3–7 3–7–1 3–7–2 3–8 3–9 3–9–1 3–9–2 3–9–3 3–9–4 3–9–4–1 3–9–4–2 3–9–4–3 3–9–4–4 3–9–4–5 3–9–4–6 System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access the Diagnostic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exposure Backup Timer Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X–ray Interlock Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate X–Ray Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access the Unix Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EZLog Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Service Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access CT Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Tool Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Soak and Seasoning Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detector Slope Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access DDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run SmartScan DDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating X–Ray On Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary X–Ray On Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reconstruct DDC images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other SmartScan Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1 3–2 3–3 3–3 3–7 3–9 3–14 3–15 3–16 3–17 3–18 3–19 3–20 3–21 3–22 3–22 3–23 3–24 3–27 3–29 3–29

CHAPTER 4 – Table/Gantry Maintenance
4–1 4–2 4–3 4–4 4–5 4–6 Input (PDU) Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Display Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoder Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Brake Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intercom Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1 4–2 4–5 4–7 4–7 4–8

0–9

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 4 – continued
4–7 4–7–1 4–7–2 4–7–3 4–7–4 4–8 4–9 4–10 4–10–1 4–10–2 4–10–3 4–10–4 4–10–4–1 4–10–5 4–10–6 4–10–7 4–10–8 Alignment Light Position Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Axial Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Axial to Internal Axial Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coronal Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alignment Light Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access CT Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Characterization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Tilt Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Elevation Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cradle Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characterization Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8 4–9 4–9 4–9 4–9 4–10 4–11 4–12 4–14 4–15 4–17 4–18 4–18 4–20 4–21 4–22 4–24

CHAPTER 5 – HV Subsystem Maintenance
5–1 5–2 5–2–1 5–2–2 5–2–3 5–2–4 5–2–4–1 5–2–4–2 5–2–4–3 5–2–5 5–2–6 5–2–7 5–2–8 5–2–9 5–2–10 5–3 5–4 Access CT Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Calseed Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anode and Cathode Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total kV Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install New Tube Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto mA Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KV Rise and Fall Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Internal Scan Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install HV Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove the external HV Divider: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube Usage Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Tube Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1 5–1 5–4 5–6 5–9 5–9 5–9 5–11 5–11 5–12 5–12 5–13 5–15 5–15 5–16 5–17 5–19

0–10

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 6 – PDU Maintenance
6–1 6–2 6–2–1 6–3 6–4 PDU Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU Major Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU 2133533 Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Bus Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Transformer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1 6–2 6–3 6–4 6–4

CHAPTER 7 – DAS Maintenance
7–1 7–2 7–3 X–Ray Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDC Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1 7–1 7–2

CHAPTER 8 – System Alignments
8–1 8–2 8–3 8–4 8–5 8–6 8–7 8–8 8–9 8–9–1 8–9–2 8–10 8–11 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plane Of Rotation (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beam On Window (BOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Noise Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isocenter Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isocenter Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isocenter Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Configuration Files With New Isovalues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update ScanHardware.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update INFO File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF and SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1 8–2 8–5 8–9 8–10 8–15 8–15 8–21 8–22 8–22 8–23 8–23 8–23

CHAPTER 9 – Software Load From Cold
9–1 9–2 9–3 9–4 9–4–1 9–4–2 9–4–3 9–4–4 9–4–5 9–4–6 9–4–7 9–5 9–6 9–7 9–7–1 9–7–2 9–7–3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Suite Internet Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Optical Disk Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Magnetic Reel Tape Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Window Width/Level Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Batch Film Protocols: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre–Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot the Host Load From Cold (HLFC) Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partition and Label the Disk; Load OS and Applications (OC) . . . HiSpeed Advantage Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Config Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1 9–4 9–4 9–4 9–4 9–5 9–5 9–5 9–6 9–6 9–7 9–7 9–7 9–8 9–9 9–9 9–9

0–11

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
9–8 9–8–1 9–8–2 9–8–3 9–9 9–10 9–10–1 9–10–2 9–10–3 9–11 9–12 9–13 9–13–1 9–13–2 9–13–3 9–14 9–14–1 9–14–2 9–14–3 9–14–4 9–14–5 9–14–6 9–14–7 9–14–8 9–15 9–16 9–17 9–18 9–19 9–19–1 9–20 9–20–1 9–20–2 9–20–3 9–20–4 9–20–5 9–21 9–21–1 9–21–2 9–21–3 9–21–4 9–21–5 9–22 9–22–1 9–22–2 9–22–3 9–22–4 9–22–5 9–22–6 Tip Into the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tip command notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Login as genesis on OC: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network boot the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load SunOS and Applications on SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Login as root on SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load SunOS and CT Applications: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit tip: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Patch Tape or Perform Workarounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start up the HiSpeed Advantage RP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Window Width/Level Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Batch Film Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load OC Non–Proprietary Diagnostics (HNS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Network Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adoption of non–Genesis suites and hosts: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run setAdoption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adopt MR Signa, PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adopt ID/NET II Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adopt Genesis Hosts in Other Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adoption Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown System Applications and Start Reconfiguration . . . . . Run reconfig on the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Suite ID (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Hospital Name (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Patient Exam number (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace the High Speed Disk on the SBC (OC and SBC) . . . System Formats & Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Timezone (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Time Format, Date Format, or Date Separator (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Doctor’s Title (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Units for Patient Weight (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Optical Disk or Reel Tape number (OC only) . . . . Hardware Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Camera Configuration (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the IP Refresh Rate (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Video Tape Interface (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add/Remove a Printer (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add New Tube Information (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the E–DAS type (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0–12 9–11 9–11 9–11 9–12 9–12 9–12 9–12 9–12 9–13 9–13 9–13 9–13 9–13 9–13 9–14 9–15 9–15 9–15 9–15 9–15 9–16 9–16 9–17 9–17 9–18 9–21 9–21 9–22 9–22 9–22 9–23 9–23 9–23 9–24 9–24 9–24 9–25 9–25 9–26 9–26 9–26 9–26 9–22 9–27 9–27 9–28 9–28 9–28 9–28

. . . . . . . . . . Test Points. Heurikon CPU Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board LEDs . . FEP Board (G2) 46–327036G2 & (G1) 46–327036G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heurikon CPU Board Test Points . . . Phantom Calibration CT# Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alpha Vector Cal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCU Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . Change the Internet Addresses (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration DIP Switch .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF CONTENTS 9–23 9–23–1 9–23–2 9–23–3 9–23–4 9–23–5 9–23–6 9–24 9–25 9–26 Network Configuration . Jumpers and Switches 46–264370G1 Cradle Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Primary Archive Node (PAN) (OC only) . . . Cradle Amplifier Board Switch Settings . . Crosstalk Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heurikon CPU Board LEDs . . . Cradle Amplifier Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add/Remove Hosts for Image Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Switch Settings . . . . Fujitsu Disk Drive Self–Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Mode . . . . Cradle Amplifier Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on the OC (OC only) Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on an IC in the Suite (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power–up Mode . . Change the ACRNEMA Address (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–29 9–30 9–30 9–30 9–30 9–31 9–31 9–32 9–32 9–32 CHAPTER 10 – Image Performance 10–1 10–2 10–3 10–4 10–5 10–6 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1 10–1 10–2 10–3 10–3 10–4 CHAPTER 11 – Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q–CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Suite Configuration (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .X IG Subsystem Chassis Layout And Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0–13 11–1 11–1 11–13 11–14 11–15 11–15 11–16 11–17 11–17 11–18 11–18 11–19 11–20 11–20 11–20 11–20 11–22 11–22 11–22 11–22 11–22 11–26 11–26 11–26 11–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Jumper Settings 11–1 11–2 11–3 11–3–1 11–4 11–4–1 11–4–2 11–4–3 11–4–4 11–4–5 11–4–6 11–4–7 11–5 11–5–1 11–5–2 11–5–3 11–6 11–6–1 11–6–2 11–6–3 11–6–4 11–7 11–7–1 11–7–2 11–7–3 SCU switches. . . . . Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs and jumper settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load the 8K rpm rotor patch tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status LEDs . . . . . . . . Applications Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
11–8 11–8–1 11–8–2 11–8–3 11–9 11–9–1 11–9–2 11–10 11–10–1 11–10–2 11–10–3 11–11 11–11–1 11–11–2 11–12 11–12–1 11–12–2 11–12–3 11–13 11–13–1 11–13–2 11–13–3 11–13–4 11–14 11–14–1 11–14–2 11–14–3 11–15 11–15–1 11–15–2 11–15–3 11–16 11–16–1 11–16–2 11–16–3 11–17 11–17–1 11–17–2 11–17–3 11–18 11–18–1 11–18–2 11–18–3 11–18–4 11–19 11–19–1 11–19–2 11–19–3 11–19–4 46–288856G1 Collimator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Board Test Points (46–288856G1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321276G1 Collimator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Board Test Points (46–321276G1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2138293 CTVRC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTVRC Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTVRC Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTVRC Board Jumper and Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288886G1 mA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321064G1 KV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46–321064G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46–321064G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46–321064G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321198G1 KV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46–321198G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46–321198G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46–321198G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46–321198G1 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288512G1 Gentry I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gentry I/O Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gentry I/O Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gentry I/O Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264806G1 Axial Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Control Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Control Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297475G1 SCOM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCOM Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCOM Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCOM Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288854G1 RCOM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCOM Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCOM Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCOM Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288778G1 Rot. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Test Points . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Connectors . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Switch Settings . . . 46–321054G1 Rot. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0–14 11–28 11–28 11–28 11–28 11–30 11–30 11–30 11–32 11–32 11–32 11–32 11–34 11–34 11–35 11–36 11–36 11–39 11–39 11–40 11–40 11–41 11–41 11–41 11–42 11–42 11–43 11–43 11–44 11–44 11–45 11–45 11–47 11–47 11–47 11–47 11–52 11–52 11–52 11–52 11–57 11–57 11–57 11–57 11–57 11–58 11–58 11–58 11–58 11–58

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
11–20 11–20–1 11–20–2 11–20–3 11–20–4 11–21 11–21–1 11–21–2 11–21–3 11–21–4 11–22 11–22–1 11–22–2 11–22–3 11–22–4 11–23 11–23–1 11–23–2 11–23–3 11–23–4 11–24 11–24–1 11–24–2 11–24–3 11–24–4 11–25 11–25–1 11–25–2 11–25–3 11–25–4 11–26 11–26–1 11–26–2 11–26–3 11–27 11–27–1 11–27–2 11–27–3 11–28 11–28–1 11–28–2 11–28–3 46–288776G1 Rot. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . 46–288774G1 Stat. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board 46–288774G1 Test Points . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board (Old) Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . 46–321058G1 Rot. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321052G1 Stat. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288772G1 Stat. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . 46–321056G1 Stationary Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264756G1 Console Autovoice Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Autovoice Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Autovoice Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Autovoice Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264888G1 Relay Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Control Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Control Board LEDS and Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Control Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264884G1 DCRGS Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCRGS Control Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCRGS Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCRGS Control Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–60 11–60 11–60 11–60 11–60 11–62 11–62 11–62 11–62 11–62 11–63 11–63 11–63 11–63 11–63 11–65 11–65 11–65 11–65 11–65 11–67 11–67 11–67 11–67 11–67 11–69 11–69 11–69 11–69 11–69 11–71 11–71 11–71 11–71 11–72 11–72 11–73 11–73 11–75 11–75 11–75 11–75

0–15

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
11–29 11–29–1 11–29–2 11–29–3 11–30 11–30–1 11–30–2 11–30–3 11–31 11–32 11–33 11–34 11–35 11–35–1 11–35–2 11–35–3 11–36 11–36–1 11–36–2 11–36–3 11–37 11–37–1 11–37–2 11–37–3 11–38 11–38–1 11–38–2 11–38–3 11–39 11–40 11–40–1 11–40–2 11–40–3 11–40–4 11–41 11–41–1 11–41–2 11–41–3 11–41–4 SCR Firing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCR Firing Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCR Firing Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCR Firing Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264368G1 ETC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETC Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETC Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETC Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Westamp Servo Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Westamp Servo Amp Internal Test Points (Non–Accessible) . . . Westamp Servo Amp LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Westamp Servo Amp Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Servo Amp Control Board – Allen Bradley Servo Amp . . . . Axial Servo Amp Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches Axial Servo Amp Control Board–AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Interface Board–AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Interface Board–AB Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Interface Board–AB LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Interface Board–AB Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zeus Remote Intercom X Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zeus Remote Intercom X Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Measurement Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Measurement Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Measurement Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Measurement Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 Mag Tape Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LM02 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMO2 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board 46–327036G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–77 11–77 11–77 11–77 11–79 11–79 11–80 11–80 11–81 11–81 11–81 11–81 11–83 11–83 11–86 11–86 11–87 11–87 11–87 11–87 11–89 11–89 11–89 11–89 11–90 11–90 11–90 11–90 11–92 11–93 11–93 11–93 11–93 11–93 11–95 11–95 11–95 11–96 11–96

0–16

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
11–42 11–42–1 11–42–2 11–42–3 11–43 11–43–1 11–43–2 11–43–3 11–43–4 11–43–5 11–43–6 11–44 11–44–1 11–44–2 11–44–3 11–44–4 11–44–5 11–45 11–45–1 11–45–2 11–45–3 11–46 11–46–1 11–46–2 11–46–3 11–46–4 11–46–5 11–46–6 11–46–7 11–46–8 11–46–9 11–46–10 11–46–11 11–46–12 11–47 11–47–1 11–48 11–49 11–49–1 11–49–2 11–49–3 11–49–4 11–49–5 Ethernet Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Transceiver Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Transceiver LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Transceiver Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . EPROM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Changing EPROM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBC EPROM Setup Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Changing the Self Test Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MVME167 (SBC Board) Masked Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Changing the Network I/O Teach (NIOT) Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIOT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME166 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME166 Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Chassis Backplane Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP 1.x Scan Chassis Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–97 11–97 11–97 11–98 11–99 11–99 11–99 11–99 11–99 11–99 11–100 11–102 11–102 11–102 11–102 11–102 11–103 11–104 11–104 11–104 11–104 11–106 11–106 11–106 11–107 11–107 11–108 11–108 11–109 11–112 11–112 11–112 11–113 11–113 11–115 11–115 11–117 11–118 11–118 11–118 11–118 11–118 11–118

0–17

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
11–50 11–51 11–52 11–52–1 11–52–2 11–52–3 11–52–4 11–52–5 11–52–6 11–53 11–54 11–54–1 11–54–2 11–54–3 11–54–4 11–54–5 11–54–6 11–55 11–55–1 11–55–2 11–55–3 11–55–4 11–55–5 11–55–6 11–55–7 11–55–8 11–55–9 11–55–10 RP & RP–S Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBC Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Chassis Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD Drive Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD Drive Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI High Speed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–121 11–123 11–124 11–124 11–124 11–124 11–124 11–124 11–124 11–128 11–129 11–129 11–129 11–129 11–129 11–129 11–129 11–131 11–131 11–131 11–132 11–132 11–132 11–132 11–132 11–132 11–133 11–133

CHAPTER 12 – Replacement Procedures
12–1 12–2 12–3 12–4 12–5 12–6 12–7 12–8 12–9 Computer 46–282067P54 1/2 Mag Tape Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–269601P1 Computer Active Scsi Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282067P37 Computer 16 MB Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307090P1 Computer 1600 Watt PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282067P38 Computer 32 MB Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282067P54 9 Track Mag Tape Controller (Optional) . . . . . . . . 46–307090P24 Computer Backplane Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307090P29 Computer I/O Cable, SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307090P29 GAI Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1 12–2 12–2 12–3 12–4 12–5 12–6 12–6 12–6

0–18

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
12–10 12–11 12–12 12–13 12–14 12–15 12–16 12–17 12–18 12–19 12–20 12–21 12–22 12–23 12–24 12–25 12–26 12–27 12–28 12–29 12–30 12–31 12–32 12–33 12–34 12–35 12–36 12–37 12–38 12–39 12–40 12–41 12–42 12–43 12–44 12–45 12–46 12–47 46–301975P1 CIPRICO Controller Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282067P31 CPU Circuit Bd, Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282067P34 GAI Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321280G1 GBM Circuit Bd (New Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282067P35 GFB Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282067P36 GIP Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296604P1 Computer Second Ethernet Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . 46–306519P1 DAT Tape Drive (5.25 inch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–306519P2 DAT Tape Drive (3.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–306519P2 DAT Drive (3.5 inch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307090P12 Computer DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307090P23 Computer Fan in Rack Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–515270 LMO–2 (3–D Renderer) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–320144G1 Motorola MVME166GE Board (OC CPU) . . . . . . . 46–269587P1 Mounting ST1980N Dual Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307575P1 Pioneer DD–U7001 Rewritable, MOD . . . . . . . . . . 46–307575P4 Pioneer DE–UH7101 Rewritable, MOD . . . . . . . . . 46–282067P34 GAI Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307090P17 GBM Circuit Bd (Old Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282067P35 GFB Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282067P36 GIP Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CG29–515270 LMO2 Bd (Mother & Daughter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307090P31 Power Indicator and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307636G1 Cable, SCSI Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–328012P1 Cable, SCSI Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2101566 Cable, SCSI Ribbon (NEW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307681P1 SCSI Tray Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–269587P1 Seagate ST1980N Magnetic Disk Drive . . . . . . . . 46–282067P53 Second Ethernet Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307090P30 Serial I/0 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296604P1 VME Ethernet 3207 Hawk Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–301975P1 VME, SCSI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–301976P1 Wren V Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console 46–287766P1 18 Button Rubber Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–287394P1 8 Button Rubber Keypad, IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282921P1 8 Button Rubber Keypad, OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–287429P1 8 Ohm, 6 Watt Speaker, OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282885P1 A/N Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–7 12–7 12–8 12–9 12–10 12–11 12–11 12–12 12–14 12–16 12–18 12–18 12–19 12–20 12–21 12–21 12–23 12–26 12–27 12–28 12–29 12–29 12–30 12–30 12–30 12–30 12–31 12–32 12–33 12–33 12–34 12–35 12–35 12–37 12–37 12–38 12–38 12–39

0–19

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
12–48 12–49 12–50 12–51 12–52 12–53 12–54 12–55 12–56 12–57 12–58 12–59 12–60 12–61 12–62 12–63 12–64 12–65 12–66 12–67 12–68 12–69 12–70 12–71 12–72 12–73 12–74 12–75 12–76 12–77 12–78 12–79 12–80 12–81 12–82 12–83 12–84 12–85 12–86 12–87 12–88 46–264756G5 Autovoice Bd, OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–271382P6 Circuit Breaker (1 Pole, 15A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–271382P15 Circuit Breaker (1 Pole, 20A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–271382P3 Circuit Breaker (2 Pole, 20A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–271382P26 Circuit Breaker (4 Pole, 30A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–301520P1 Console PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–307619P1 Emergency Stop Button, OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–287759P1 Emergency Stop “Label” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–301046P1 Encoder Assm, Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282986P1 Encoder Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264380G7 Console GCP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282884P1 Image Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–317878G1 Intercom Pot Assm, OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–320682G1 Microphone OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264508G1 IP Keypad Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–301195G2 Security Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264510G1 System Keypad Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2119588 Touch Screen Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282936P1 Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288872G1 Video Relay Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–282884P3 Remote Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry (w/EDAS) Gantry Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–198495P1 Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296058G1 Drive Belt Idler Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–136334P23 F/C interlock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–220234P3 Fan, OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321246G1 RPSCOM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–220234P3 Fan, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P120 Filter Bd, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P128 Filter Bd, Reduced Gain EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297335P2 Filter, Pwr L, OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297335P2 Filter, Pwr L, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–241601G2 Flex Circuit Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296868G1 G1 Front Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327207G1 Front Cover Assm (G3 Gantry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296870G1 Top Lens Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296869G1 Side Lens Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288938G1 Front Cover Mic Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297488P1 Front Cover Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P79 Fuse (30A, 700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45435967 Gate Drive /Filter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–39 12–40 12–40 12–41 12–41 12–41 12–42 12–42 12–43 12–43 12–44 12–45 12–46 12–46 12–47 12–47 12–47 12–48 12–49 12–49 12–50 12–50 12–50 12–51 12–52 12–52 12–53 12–53 12–53 12–54 12–55 12–55 12–55 12–56 12–56 12–56 12–56 12–56 12–56 12–57 12–57

0–20

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
12–89 12–90 12–91 12–92 12–93 12–94 12–95 12–96 12–97 12–98 12–99 12–100 12–101 12–102 12–103 12–104 12–105 12–106 12–107 12–108 12–109 12–110 12–111 12–112 12–113 12–114 12–115 12–116 12–117 12–118 12–119 12–120 12–121 12–122 12–123 12–124 12–125 12–126 12–127 12–128 12–129 12–130 46–170021P52 Fuse, Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P52 Fuse (DAS) 3A, 250V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P30 Fuse (DAS) 2A, 350V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P15 Fuse, Filament Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P52 Fuse (3A 120V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P52 & 46–170021P74 Fuse, Detector Heater . . . . . . 46–170021P30 & 46–170021P52 Fuse, (DAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P15 & 46–170021P52 Filament Power assm Fuse . . 46–170021P74 Fuse, Tube Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296209P1 Counterbalancing Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264958G1 Gantry Display Daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264896G1 Gantry Display Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–278120P1 Gear Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297428P1 Grounding Strap, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296377P1 Heurikon Bd, OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296377P1 Heurikon Bd, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–195120G16 HV Anode Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–195120G16 HV Cathode Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288512G1 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296516G1 Indexer Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288766G1 Intercom Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54358P25 Inverter Fuse (120VAC), Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54358P25 Inverter Fuse (120VAC), Cathode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54367P50 Inverter Fuse (550VDC), Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54367P50 Inverter Fuse (550VDC), Cathode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54358P18 Inverter Fuse (600V), Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54358P18 Inverter Fuse (600V), Cathode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321064G1 kV Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321198G1 kV Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–196464P1 Lead Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296938G1 G1 Left Side Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327202G1 Left Side Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288886G1 mA Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296263P1 Micro Stepper Drive (Aperture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296080G1 OBC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264660G1 OBC Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297603G1 OBC Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296317P1 OBC–STC PS, OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296317P1 OBC–STC PS, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264832P1 SCA–LAN Board, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297837G1 Power Brush Block Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P95 Power Filter Assy, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–57 12–57 12–57 12–58 12–58 12–59 12–59 12–59 12–60 12–60 12–62 12–63 12–63 12–64 12–64 12–64 12–65 12–66 12–67 12–68 12–68 12–68 12–68 12–69 12–69 12–69 12–69 12–69 12–70 12–70 12–70 12–70 12–70 12–71 12–71 12–71 12–72 12–73 12–73 12–74 12–74 12–75

0–21

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
12–131 12–132 12–133 12–134 12–135 12–136 12–137 12–138 12–139 12–140 12–141 12–142 12–143 12–144 12–145 12–146 12–147 12–148 12–149 12–150 12–151 12–152 12–153 12–154 12–155 12–156 12–157 12–158 12–159 12–160 12–161 12–162 12–163 12–164 12–165 12–166 12–167 12–168 12–169 12–170 12–171 12–172 46–183027P91 Processor Bd, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288308G1 Printed wire assembly, Laser Control . . . . . . . . . . 46–321058G1 Rotating Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288776G1 Rotating Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321054G1 Rotating Terminator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264702G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321056G1 Stationary Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288762G1 Stationary Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321052G1 Stationary Terminator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264700G1 RCOM Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296898G1 G1 Rear Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327212G1 Rear Cover Assm (G3 Gantry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–229342P1 Rear Cover Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288938G1 Rear Cover Mic Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297488P1 Rear Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297445P1 Ribbon Cable, OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296937G1 G1 Right Side Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327201G1 Right Side Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297291G1 Rotating Harness, Gantry (For 12V Laser) . . . . . . 2100664 Rotating Harness, Gantry – (For 5V Laser) . . . . . . . . . . 46–327086G1 RPSCOM to Gantry Bulkhead, 75 Ohms . . . . . . . 46–296993G1 Scan Switch Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2101967 Scan Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297475G1 SCOM Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297839G1 Signal Brush Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297840G1 Slip Ring Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–313423G1 Solid State (SS) Detector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–241600G806 SS Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–241600G6 SS Detector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297092G1 Stationary AC Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296748G1 Stationary Harness, Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296664P1 Stepper Motor Drive (Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–136343P12 Switch, STC Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–221880P24 Terminal Strip, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–287264P1 Terminator, STC Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296145P1 Tilt Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296363P1 Tilt Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P90 Timing Bd, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–220247P2 Top Cover Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297738P1 Top Cover Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297797G1 Top Cover Thermostat Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296936G1 Top Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–75 12–75 12–76 12–76 12–76 12–77 12–77 12–78 12–78 12–78 12–79 12–79 12–79 12–79 12–79 12–80 12–80 12–80 12–80 12–80 12–81 12–81 12–81 12–82 12–82 12–83 12–85 12–86 12–87 12–88 12–88 12–88 12–89 12–89 12–89 12–89 12–89 12–90 12–90 12–91 12–93 12–93

0–22

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
12–173 12–174 12–175 12–176 12–177 12–178 12–179 12–180 12–181 12–182 12–183 12–184 12–185 12–186 12–187 12–188 12–189 12–190 12–191 12–192 12–193 12–194 12–195 12–196 12–197 12–198 12–199 12–200 12–201 12–202 12–203 12–204 12–205 12–206 12–207 12–208 12–209 12–210 12–211 12–212 12–213 12–214 46–297396P1 Tube Cooling Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–309500G1 X–Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297460P1 Tube Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296701P1 38V Filament Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P111 ADC Bd, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P129 ADC Bd, Reduced Gain EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45561210 Anode (Transformer Tank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45435960 Anode Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297703P1 Anode Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45554264 & 2100553 Anode Xfmr Tank Meas. Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297875P1 Axial Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264806G1 Axial Control Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296158P1 Axial Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296320G1 Axial Motor Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296854P1 Axial Motor Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296157P1 Axial Motor Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–186462G1 Azimuth Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264802G1 Backplane, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P112 Backplane–Left, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P94 Backplane–Right, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296564G1 Base Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296948G1 Cable, AC/Pwr, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P104 Cable, Analog, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296943G1 Cable, Anode AC Pwr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296947G1 Cable, Axial Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296942G1 Cable, Cathode AC Pwr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296949G1 Cable, DC/Pwr, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P103 Cable, Digital, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–266838G1 Cable, Ribbon, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P89 Cal/Aux Bd, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53214P40 Capacitor, Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45561211 Cathode (Transformer Tank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45435962 Cathode Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297703P2 Cathode Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45554264 & 2100553 Cathode Xfrmr Tank Meas Bd . . . . . . . . . . 46–296300G1 Collimator Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288856G1 Collimator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321276G1 Collimator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321276G1 Collimator II Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–251198P37 Collimator PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296885P1 Communication PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288858G1 CTVRC Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–93 12–94 12–101 12–101 12–102 12–102 12–102 12–103 12–104 12–105 12–105 12–106 12–106 12–108 12–109 12–110 12–110 12–111 12–111 12–111 12–112 12–112 12–112 12–112 12–112 12–113 12–113 12–113 12–113 12–114 12–114 12–114 12–115 12–116 12–117 12–117 12–119 12–119 12–119 12–120 12–120 12–121

0–23

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
12–215 12–216 12–217 12–218 12–219 12–220 12–221 12–222 12–223 12–224 12–225 12–226 12–227 12–228 12–229 12–230 12–231 12–232 12–233 12–234 12–235 12–236 12–237 12–238 12–239 12–240 12–241 12–242 12–243 12–244 12–245 12–246 12–247 12–248 12–249 12–250 12–251 12–252 12–253 12–254 12–255 45435961 CTVRC Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–136343P12 DAS Pwr Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–251198P30 DC PS (EDAS), 15V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–251198P26 DC PS (EDAS), 5V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297104P1 Detector Heater PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–188067P1 Detector Heater Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297301G3 Diode Laser, Bottom – (12V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327058G3 Diode Laser, Bottom – (5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297301G2 Diode Laser, LS – (12V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327058G2 Diode Laser, LS – (5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297301G1 Diode Laser, RS – (12V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327058G1 Diode Laser, RS – (5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296341G1 Gantry Display Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Distribution Unit (PDU) 46–170026P14 32kVA Xfmr, CR1–CR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170026P17 32kVA Xfmr, CR4–CR6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296221P15 32kVA Xfmr, F10–F12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P85 32kVA Xfmr, F13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–313346P1 32kVA Xfmr, F14–F16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P44 32kVA Xfmr, F17–F19 (Top Board) . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P96 32kVA Xfmr, F20, F21 (Top Board) . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P86 32kVA Xfmr, F4–F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P84 32kVA Xfmr, F7–F9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45433453 AC Inductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296136P1 Westamp Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297910P1 Allen Bradley Servo Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288748G1 Axial Drive Filter Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54261P92 Backup Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–229598P3 Blue Switch, PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53214P33 Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296409P1 Capacitor 6100 mF 350V electrolytic . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296206G1 Ckt Bkr Assm (West AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296206G1 Circuit Breaker Assm (West AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327109G1 Ckt Bkr Assm (Allen Bradley) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P29 Ckt Bkr Assm, F1–F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297069P1 Ckt Bkr Assm, F4–F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–221905P2 Ckt Breaker: 15A 1P CB16, 18, 20, 21, 22 . . . . . . 46–221905P21 Ckt Breaker: 15 Amp 2P, CB14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–221905P3 Ckt Breaker: 20 Amp 1P CB19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–221905P32 Ckt Breaker: 25 Amp 3P CB1,6,11 . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–221905P32 Ckt Breaker: 25 Amp 3P CB1,6,11,23 . . . . . . . . . 46–221905P35 Ckt Breaker: 40 Amp 3P CB23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–121 12–122 12–122 12–123 12–124 12–125 12–125 12–126 12–126 12–127 12–127 12–128 12–128 12–129 12–129 12–129 12–129 12–129 12–130 12–130 12–130 12–130 12–130 12–130 12–131 12–131 12–131 12–132 12–132 12–132 12–132 12–132 12–132 12–133 12–133 12–133 12–133 12–133 12–134 12–134 12–134

0–24

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
12–256 12–257 12–258 12–259 12–260 12–261 12–262 12–263 12–264 12–265 12–266 12–267 12–268 12–269 12–270 12–271 12–272 12–273 12–274 12–275 12–276 12–277 12–278 12–279 12–280 12–281 12–282 12–283 12–284 12–285 12–286 12–287 12–288 12–289 12–290 12–291 12–292 12–293 12–294 12–295 12–296 46–296138P1 Contactor, PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297456P1 FRU 1 PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45433455 DC Inductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45433770 DCRGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45433754 DCRGS Control Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296407G1 Display Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297803P1 Fan Assm, PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–203134P5 Filter, PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54367P40 Fuse, DCRGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–229598P1 Green Switch, PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297479G1 Guard Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297039G1 Harness, Ckt Breaker Assm, External . . . . . . . . . . 46–297041G1 Harness, Ckt Breaker Assm, Internal . . . . . . . . . . 46–296127P1 Indicator, Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327154P1 Inductor, Servo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–229342P2 Lamp Assm, 125V, Green, DS1–DS6 . . . . . . . . . . 46–229342P2 Lamp Panel Assm, DS1–DS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297594G1 Loopback Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–222200P1 O/L Relay Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45433456 Output Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264888G1 PWA Relay Ctrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–278446P1 Receptacle, 15A, 125VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–186852P2 Relay Contactor, Axial Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327087P1 Relay, Axial Drive Current Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–194361P17 Rem Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53396P01 Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–221454P77 Resistor, 25 Ohm, 50W, 1%, Wirewound . . . . . . 46–296415P2 Resistor, 3 Ohm, 300W, 10%, Ribwound . . . . . . . 45433454 SCR Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297574G1 Servo Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P74 Servo Assm, 10A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P94 Servo Assm, 3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170021P14 Filter PWB F1–F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Reconstruction Unit (SRU) 46–313053G1 24V Resistor Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–241971P72 5V PS (ST–CTC AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–241971P26 5V PS (ST–CT AP), 150A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–241971P68 AP Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296817P1 BNC 50–Ohm Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296816P2 BNC T–Connector, SRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297711G1 Cable, 3/60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296451G3 Cable, 3/60 SCSI to Wren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–134 12–134 12–135 12–135 12–136 12–136 12–136 12–136 12–136 12–136 12–137 12–137 12–137 12–137 12–137 12–137 12–138 12–138 12–138 12–138 12–138 12–139 12–139 12–139 12–139 12–140 12–140 12–140 12–140 12–141 12–141 12–141 12–141 12–141 12–141 12–141 12–142 12–142 12–142 12–142 12–143

0–25

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–237328P62 ST–CT/ST–CTC BP . . . . . . . . 46–313030G1 High Speed Disk Drive . . 60’ Coaxial BNC . . . . . . . SBC . 46–297098G1 Sabre Interconnect to 096 and 097 harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60–pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–237328P55 ST–CT/ST–CTC IOC . . . . . . . . 46–296840G1 PS to Backplane . . . . . . . . . 46–264832P1 SCA–LAN Bd. . . . . . . 46–296528G1 Maxi Bd Assm w/ 3/60 plus LAN Bd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296186P1 Scan Chassis –5V PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–278330P9 ST–CT/ST–CTC HCHIOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296532P1 Front Panel Maxi . . . 46–241971P21 ST–CT Chassis with boards . . . 12–143 12–143 12–143 12–143 12–144 12–144 12–144 12–159 12–160 12–161 12–162 12–162 12–162 12–162 12–162 12–163 12–163 12–163 12–163 12–164 12–165 12–165 12–165 12–165 12–166 12–167 12–167 12–168 12–168 12–168 12–168 12–168 12–168 12–169 12–169 12–169 12–169 12–169 12–170 12–170 12–170 12–170 0–26 . . . . 46–237328P57 ST–CT/ST–CTC ACP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–237328P67 ST–CT 4MB Main Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–pin . . . . . . . . . . 46–241971P12 ST–CT BPC . . . . . . . . DASIOP to Gantry . . . . . . . . . . 46–241971P14 ST–CT MMC . . . . . . . . . 46–297097G1 Sabre Interconnect to 098 Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264834P1 Maxi–HIB . . . . . . . . . PS to 098 Harness . . . . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF CONTENTS 12–297 12–298 12–299 12–300 12–301 12–302 12–303 12–304 12–305 12–306 12–307 12–308 12–309 12–310 12–311 12–312 12–313 12–314 12–315 12–316 12–317 12–318 12–319 12–320 12–321 12–322 12–323 12–324 12–325 12–326 12–327 12–328 12–329 12–330 12–331 12–332 12–333 12–334 12–335 12–336 12–337 12–338 46–296454G5 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–237328P69 ST–CT 512kB Public Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297043G1 Sabre to Xylogics Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–278722G1 Power Cable–SRU Cabinet . 46–296183P1 Scan Chassis +5. . . . . . . . . . . . 46–237328P54 ST–CT Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane to PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–241971P11 ST–CT SMP MUX . . 46–264830G1 Scan Chassis Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297857G1 ST 1480 Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264890G1 Maxi–HIB Adapter Bd . . . . 46–297244G1 Scan Chassis Assm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–237328P53 ST–CT Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–237686G2 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–229909P1 Scan Chassis Boxer Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±12. . 46–296799G1 Scan Chassis Assm . . . . . 46–297096G1 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . 46–313027G1 Fan Assm for Scan Chassis . . . . . . complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297673G4 MaxiHIB to HCHIOP Cable . 46–221328P13 Scan Chassis Pwr Switch/Ckt Bkr . . . . . 46–296862G1 Cable. . 46–296841G1 Power Distribution Cable–Scan Chassis . . . . +24V PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–241971P10 ST–CT Cache . . . 46–278330P11 ST–CT/ST–CTC DASIOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297043G2 Sabre to Xylogics Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–237328P58 ST–CT/ST–CTC ACU . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297721P1 Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 46–208718P1 1 1/4” dia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–278330P6 ST–CTC Scache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297332P1 BNC. . . . . . . Small. . . . . 46–170047P7 Belt. . . . 46–297350P1 Bumper Disk. . . . . . . . Lower Pin Actuator . . . . 46–296561P10 Actuator Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . 2103043 Actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . . . . 46–297253P1 Cable Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296561P11 Actuator Magnet Rod . . . Clamp . . . . . . 46–297420G1 Cradle Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–208718P5 1/2” dia. . . . . . . . . . . Clamp . T–Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Large u–shape . . . . 46–296592P1 Actuator Cover . . . . Clamp . . . . . . . 46–221597P2 Bumper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . Male . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Elevation . . . . . . . . . 46–266700P3 Wren IV Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–208718P11 7/8” dia. . . . . . . . . . . . . Small u–shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cradle Drive . . . . . . . . . . 46–297694G1 Xylogics Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Large. . . . 46–208718P9 3/4” dia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264370G1 Cradle Drive Amp . . . . . . Female . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296232G1 Carriage Assm. . . . . . 46–220277P11 E–Ring. . . . . . . . . 46–296235G1 Cradle Drive Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296594P1 Cradle Drive Cover . . . . . . . . . . 46–297093P1 AC/DC Power Switch . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF CONTENTS 12–339 12–340 12–341 12–342 12–343 12–344 12–345 12–346 12–347 12–348 12–349 12–350 12–351 12–352 12–353 12–354 12–355 12–356 12–357 12–358 12–359 12–360 12–361 12–362 12–363 12–364 12–365 12–366 12–367 12–368 12–369 12–370 12–371 12–372 12–373 12–374 12–375 12–376 12–377 12–378 12–379 46–278330P4 ST–CTC 4MB Main Memory . . . . . . . . 46–297123G1 STCT to 3/60 . . . . . . . . Clamp . . 46–208580P19 Cam Follower. . . . . 46–208718P2 5/16” dia. . . . . . 46–221532P18 Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape Switch. . . . . Elevation Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamp . . . . . . 46–288226G1 Cradle Release Switch . . . . 50 Ohm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297338P1 Clamp. . . . . . . Upper Pin Actuator . . . . . . 46–208580P18 Cam Follower. . . . 46–297722P1 Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–208718P12 1” dia. . . . . . . . . . . ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–170 12–171 12–171 12–171 12–171 12–171 12–172 12–173 12–173 12–173 12–173 12–173 12–174 12–174 12–174 12–174 12–175 12–175 12–176 12–176 12–177 12–178 12–178 12–178 12–179 12–179 12–179 12–179 12–179 12–179 12–179 12–179 12–179 12–180 12–180 12–180 12–180 12–180 12–181 12–181 12–181 0–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–278330P2 ST–CTC MSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297576P1 Cal Pin. . . . . . . . 2100671 Actuator Magnet Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamp . . . . . Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296561P1 Actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297648P1 Clamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–208718P8 11/16” dia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–278330P7 ST–CTC BPCIM . .

. . Limit Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . . . Cradle Drive . . . 46–136334P57 Int. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297155G2 Ground Strap. 46–296377P1 Heurikon Bd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296909G1 Left Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264368G1 ETC Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297687P1 Intercom Speaker. 46–297431G1 Jumper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . Cradle . 46–296827P1 Left Filler Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296234G1 Long Encoder Assm. . . 46–296891P1 Gas Spring. 46–136334P23 Home Int. . Table . . . 46–297448P1 Handle Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170012P81 Locknut. 46–296854P1 Encoder. . . . . . . . . 46–170021P15 Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short . . . . . . . . Table . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF CONTENTS 12–380 12–381 12–382 12–383 12–384 12–385 12–386 12–387 12–388 12–389 12–390 12–391 12–392 12–393 12–394 12–395 12–396 12–397 12–398 12–399 12–400 12–401 12–402 12–403 12–404 12–405 12–406 12–407 12–408 12–409 12–410 12–411 12–412 12–413 12–414 12–415 12–416 12–417 12–418 12–419 12–420 12–421 46–220277P11 E–Ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–278575P1 Motor. . 46–296991G1 Main Harness. . . . . . 46–297155G1 Ground Strap. Table ETC . . . . . . . . . 46–288410G1 E–Stop Switch. . . Table . . 46–297432P1 E–Stop Button. . . . . . . . . Table Elevation . . Long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297698P1 Leg Tape Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . Table . . . 46–296633G1 Elevation Encoder Assm . . . . . . . . . 12–181 12–181 12–181 12–182 12–182 12–182 12–183 12–183 12–184 12–184 12–184 12–184 12–184 12–184 12–184 12–184 12–185 12–185 12–185 12–185 12–186 12–186 12–186 12–186 12–186 12–187 12–187 12–188 12–188 12–188 12–188 12–188 12–189 12–189 12–189 12–189 12–189 12–189 12–191 12–191 12–191 12–191 0–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296821P1 Front End Cover. . . Upper Pin Actuator . . . . . . . . 46–297896G1 Fixed Dzus Fastener Kit . Table Gas Spring Pin . 46–297895G1 Floating Dzus Fastener Kit . . 46–296233G1 Home Latch Assm. . Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . Table . . . . . . . . . 46–296788G1 ETC Chassis Assm . . Table . Tape Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327096G2 Left Base Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . Actuator Cover . . . . . . . 46–229455P1 Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper Pin Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–278310P1 Lower Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297678P1 Hinge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Assm. . . . . . . . . . ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Rear Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–278446P1 Electrical Outlet. . . . . . . . . . . Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amp. . . . . . . . 46–221914P3 Lamp Assm. 46–218193P1 Guide Wheel. . . . . . . 46–136334P23 Long. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170012P67 Locknut. . . . . . . . . . 46–297664P1 Filler Cover Spring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . . . . Switch. . . . . 46–297805G1 Jumper Plug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296129G1 Footswitch Assm . . . . 46–297088G1 Harness. . . . Matrix Switch. . . . . . . . . . Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . Table Side Cover . 46–296433G1 Power Harness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cradle Drive . . . . . . Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170024P4 Shoulder Screw. . 46–264832P1 SCA–LAN Bd. . . Elevation & Cradle Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actuator Cover . . . 46–297118G1 Signal Harness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296909G2 Right Control Panel . . Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327096G1 Right Base Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170053P13 Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actuator cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–183027P92 . Cradle Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . Home Latch Assm. . . . . . 46–170053P11 Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296770P1 Upper Pin. . 46–297907P16 RP VME Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296583P1 Side Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296946P1 Spacer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297117G1 Power Harness. . . . . . . . . 46–297907P13 HSDC Board . 46–297907P19 SBC Board . . Tape Switches . . . . . . . 12–192 12–192 12–192 12–192 12–192 12–192 12–193 12–193 12–193 12–193 12–193 12–193 12–194 12–194 12–194 12–194 12–194 12–195 12–195 12–195 12–196 12–196 12–196 12–196 12–196 12–196 12–196 12–197 12–197 12–197 12–198 12–198 12–198 12–198 12–200 12–201 12–202 12–203 12–204 12–205 12–205 0–29 . . . . . . RF. . . . . . . Cable . . . 46–296584P1 Side Panel. Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long. Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297907P12 AP–120 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–170490P54 Spring. . 46–296972G1 Solenoid Assm. . Table . . . 46–296317P1 Quad Output PS. . . . . . 46–327036G1 FEP Board . . . . 46–297552P1 Pivot Tube. . . . . . . . . . . . . LR. . . . ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LF. . . . . . . . 46–170490P20 Spring. . . . . . Upper Pin Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327097G2 Table Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296771P1 Spacer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . 46–297430G1 Rear Cover Assm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Gas Spring . . . 46–297907P11 BPP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encdr. . . . . . . . Table Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF CONTENTS 12–422 12–423 12–424 12–425 12–426 12–427 12–428 12–429 12–430 12–431 12–432 12–433 12–434 12–435 12–436 12–437 12–438 12–439 12–440 12–441 12–442 12–443 12–444 12–445 12–446 12–447 12–448 12–449 12–450 12–451 12–452 12–453 12–454 12–455 12–456 12–457 12–458 12–459 12–460 12–461 12–462 46–297436P1 Pin. . . . . . . . . 46–296316P1 Table Drive PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297698P2 Tape Switch. 46–296827P2 Right Filler Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296791G1 Power Assm . . . 46–297036G2 Pot Assm. . . Table . . . . . . 46–296578P1 Side Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297894G1 Roller Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296577P1 Side Panel. . . . . . . . . Table . . . 46–297059G1 Servo Amp Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Encoder Cable . . . . . Left Side . Table . . . . . . . 46–327097G1 Table Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RR. . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–269587P1 Local System Disk (LSD) Drive . . . . Scan Control Unit (SCU) 46–297907P14 High Speed Disk . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSI cable CPU to LSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297907P24 LSD Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–251198P42 5v/±15v Power Supply . . . . . . 12–213 2107544–2 Digital Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297907P17 Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–213 2107544–6 Inter–chassis Cable . . . . . 46–296861G11 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPJ5 to XCVR#2 . . . 12–213 2107544–5 Right Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–206 12–207 12–207 12–207 12–208 12–208 12–208 12–208 12–208 12–209 12–209 12–209 12–209 12–209 12–210 12–210 12–210 12–210 12–210 12–211 12–211 12–194 12–213 12–213 2102234 Converter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VME . . 46–297907P18 Scan Chassis Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–214 2107544–8 Dog House Cable #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297907P10 Empty Scan Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–313020P1 50 Ohm Terminator With Ground Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–213 2107544–4 Left Backplane . . . . . . . . . Exposure Interlock RP to PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296454G10 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . Xylogics to HSD . . . . 46–296861G9 Cable. . . . . . . . . . 12–214 12–214 12–214 12–214 12–214 12–214 12–214 12–214 0–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSD Power Cable . . . . . . . . 46–297907P29 RP Chassis Backplane . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF CONTENTS 12–463 12–464 12–465 12–466 12–467 12–468 12–469 12–470 12–471 12–472 12–473 12–474 12–475 12–476 12–477 12–478 12–479 12–480 12–481 12–482 12–483 12–484 12–485 12–486 12–487 12–488 12–489 12–490 12–491 12–492 12–493 12–494 12–495 12–496 12–497 12–498 12–499 12–500 12–501 12–502 46–327135P1 CLA Board . . . . . . RP to ETC . Gantry Bulkhead to RP Bulkhead . . . . 46–296817P1 50 Ohm Terminator With Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296861G8 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297907P23 Cable. . . . 46–297907P26 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPJ6 to XCVR#1 . . 46–297907P2 Ethernet Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–251198P41 6v Power Supply . . . . . . 46–297907P25 Cable. . . . 46–327070G1 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–213 2107544–3 Analog Controller Board . . . . . . 12–214 2107544–9 Dog House Cable #2 . . . . . HP–DAS & Power Supplies 2119740 & 2107544 HP–DAS assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–297748G4 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–327100G1 Cable. . 2119747 DC Power Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2108473 Left Cover . . . . OC to XCVR#2 . . Ethernet Board to Bulkhead . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296454G12 Cable. . . . . . . . . 46–297907P30 Cable. . . . . . . . . . 46–297907P27 Cable. . . 2107544–10 Center Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP Chassis Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–214 2107544–7 Filter Box . . . XCVR#2 to XCVR#3 . . . . . . . . . . . Serial RP J3 to OC GAI . . . . . . . . 46–327071G1 Cable. . . . . . . . . . 2126738 AC Power Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2108472 Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Anchor Hole Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Gantry Mounted Table Controls . . . . . . Install Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Cable Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drill the First Gantry Anchor Hole . . . . . Verify DCRGS Jumper Location on CTVRC board . . . . . . Position the Power Distribution Unit (2113764) . . . . . . . . Level the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Phantom Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemble and Install Gantry Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX: Installation A1–1 A1–1–1 A1–2 A1–2–1 A1–2–2 A1–2–3 A1–2–4 A1–3 A1–3–1 A1–3–2 A1–3–3 A1–3–4 A1–3–5 A1–3–6 A1–3–7 A1–3–8 A1–3–9 A1–3–10 A1–4 A1–5 A1–6 A1–7 A1–7–1 A1–7–2 A1–8 A1–9 A1–10 A1–10–1 A1–11 A1–12 A1–13 A1–14 A1–15 A1–16 A1–17 A1–18 A1–19 A1–20 A1–20–1 A1–21 A1–22 A1–23 A1–24 A1–25 A1–25–1 A1–25–2 A1–26 Position Subsystems Position and Mount Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position the CT Compact HVDC Power Distribution Unit (2133533) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OC Computer Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mount and Level Phantom Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Table Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Color Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tighten the Lock Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Base Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table and A7 Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power. . . . . . . . . Pre–Installation Template . . . . SCU Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Common Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Strip Down For Restricted Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establish the Room Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . 0–31 A–1 A–1 A–1 A–1 A–2 A–2 A–2 A–3 A–3 A–3 A–3 A–4 A–5 A–6 A–6 A–7 A–7 A–8 A–14 A–14 A–15 A–16 A–16 A–16 A–17 A–18 A–19 A–19 A–21 A–21 A–24 A–25 A–26 A–27 A–28 A–30 A–32 A–33 A–34 A–35 A–36 A–48 A–50 A–56 A–56 A–56 A–57 . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level the Gantry . . Detailed Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OC Console I/O Panel and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OC Console and Computer Power and Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install the Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnect Cable Installation Cable Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OC Computer Panel and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position the Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table/Gantry Installation Without Floor Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . Recommended Torque Wrench Practices . .0 Section 2. . . . . . . . . . . . General Torque Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Wrench Accuracy . . .0 Section 3. . . . . . . . .0 . . . Torque Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B-2 B-4 B-6 0-31A . . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13 HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100 TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX B: Torque Section 1. . . . . . . . .0 Section 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13 HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100 This Page Intentionally Blank 0-31B .

. . . EzLog Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296317P1/P2 – OBC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run a Rotating X–Ray On Scan . . CT Tools Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – Top View . . X–Ray Functional Test Menu #2 . . . . . . . . . Functional Test Menu (Backup Timer Test) . . . .S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Angle for Stationary X–Ray On (1 Sec. . . . . . . . X–Ray Interlock Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service NotePad Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Menu . . . Generate X–Ray Functional Test Menu . X–Ray Functional Review Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X–Ray Functional Review Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Failure Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OBC. . . . . . Diagnostic Data Collection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0–32 2–1 2–2 2–3 2–4 2–5 3–1 3–2 3–3 3–4 3–5 3–6 3–7 3–8 3–8 3–9 3–10 3–11 3–12 3–13 3–14 3–15 3–16 3–17 3–17 3–18 3–19 3–20 3–21 3–22 3–24 3–25 3–26 3–27 3–28 4–2 4–3 4–3 4–4 . . Gantry Position for Rotating X–Ray On (X–Ray On Position 05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STC & Bottom Table P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unix Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Selections Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulated Gantry Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Test Results Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run a Stationary X–Ray On Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X–Ray Interlock. . . Utilities Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Notepad Softkey . . . . . . . . . . Backup Timer Diagnostic Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STC & Bottom Table P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Variation vs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Selections Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Soak & Seasoning Menu . . . System Tools Menu . . . . . . Generate X–Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS Illustration 2–1 Illustration 2–2 Illustration 2–3 Illustration 2–4 Illustration 2–5 Illustration 3–1 Illustration 3–2 Illustration 3–3 Illustration 3–4 Illustration 3–5 Illustration 3–6 Illustration 3–7 Illustration 3–8 Illustration 3–9 Illustration 3–10 Illustration 3–11 Illustration 3–12 Illustration 3–13 Illustration 3–14 Illustration 3–15 Illustration 3–16 Illustration 3–17 Illustration 3–18 Illustration 3–19 Illustration 3–20 Illustration 3–21 Illustration 3–22 Illustration 3–23 Illustration 3–24 Illustration 3–25 Illustration 3–26 Illustration 3–27 Illustration 3–28 Illustration 3–29 Illustration 4–1 Illustration 4–2 Illustration 4–3 Illustration 4–4 Top Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S. . . . . . . . X–Ray Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Variations vs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296317P3– OBC. . . . . . . . 1 Sec. . . . . . . Utilities Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STC and Table Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . mA Variation vs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X–Ray Functional Test Menu #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diags Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Angle for Rotating X–Ray On (X–Ray On Position 455) . Shell Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Tools Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Values Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS Illustration 4–5 Illustration 4–6 Illustration 4–7 Illustration 4–8 Illustration 4–9 Illustration 4–10 Illustration 4–11 Illustration 4–12 Illustration 4–13 Illustration 4–14 Illustration 4–15 Illustration 4–16 Illustration 4–17 Illustration 4–18 Illustration 4–19 Illustration 4–20 Illustration 5–1 Illustration 5–2 Illustration 5–3 Illustration 5–4 Illustration 5–5 Illustration 5–6 Illustration 5–7 Illustration 5–8 Illustration 5–9 Illustration 5–10 Illustration 6–1 Illustration 6–2 Illustration 8–1 Illustration 8–2 Illustration 8–3 Illustration 8–4 Illustration 8–5 Illustration 8–6 Illustration 8–7 Illustration 8–8 Illustration 8–9 CT Tools Softkey . . . . . . . Install Rotational Alignment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Drive Status and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Mechanical Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Meter Screen . . . . . . Table Elevation Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Distance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Manual Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generator Characterization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Isocenter Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beam On Window Film Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Characterization Menu . . . . . . . . Cradle Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting/Adjustment Hardware (Detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anode Tank Measurement Board & OBC Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Characterization Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11 4–12 4–13 4–14 4–15 4–16 4–17 4–19 4–19 4–20 4–21 4–22 4–23 4–23 4–24 4–24 5–1 5–2 5–3 5–4 5–5 5–6 5–8 5–14 5–16 5–17 6–2 6–3 8–3 8–6 8–11 8–13 8–14 8–18 8–18 8–19 8–19 0–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotational Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characterization Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generator Characterization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Reset Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Isocenter Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rise and Fall Time Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Characterization Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU 2133533 Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Log Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Generator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . Characterization Limits Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . POR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . HV Divider Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Tilt Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Tube Alignment . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . RP 2. . . . . . . . . . IG Subsystem 5–slot VME Backpanel Layout (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Configuration With Active Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Formats and Defaults Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Configuration Screen . 46–288856G1 Collimator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Parameters Reconfiguration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IG (GEMS Image Generator) Jumpers . . SBC (MVME166–9u 68040 “Stealth” CPU LEDs and Connectors . . . . . . IG Subsystem Chassis Rear View (cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board (MVME376–9U Hawk Ethernet) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Protocol . . . 46–264806G1 Axial Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP 46–327036G2 (GEMS Front End Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA (MVME376–9U Hawk Ethernet) LEDs and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .X IG Subsystem HSSD (High Speed SCSI Disk) Jumpers . . . . .X IG Subsystem LSD (Local SCSI Disk) Jumpers . . . . . . . . IG (GEMS Image Generator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288512G1 Gentry I/O Board . 46–321198G1 kV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296377G1 Heurikon CPU STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321276G1 Collimator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296377G1 Heurikon CPU ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP 2. . . . . . . . IG Subsystem 5–slot VME Backpanel (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288886G1 mA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .X IG Subsystem LSD (Local Fujitsu MI603S–512 SCSI Disk) Jumpers RP 2. . . . . . . Hardware Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Configuration – No Active Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–9 9–10 9–10 9–11 9–23 9–25 9–27 9–29 9–29 10–4 11–1 11–2 11–3 11–4 11–5 11–6 11–7 11–8 11–9 11–10 11–11 11–12 11–13 11–14 11–15 11–19 11–21 11–23 11–24 11–25 11–27 11–29 11–31 11–33 11–35 11–39 11–42 11–43 11–46 0–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP (G2) 46–327036G2 & (G1) 46–327036G1 Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS Illustration 9–1 Illustration 9–2 Illustration 9–3 Illustration 9–4 Illustration 9–5 Illustration 9–6 Illustration 9–7 Illustration 9–8 Illustration 9–9 Illustration 10–1 Illustration 11–1 Illustration 11–2 Illustration 11–3 Illustration 11–4 Illustration 11–5 Illustration 11–6 Illustration 11–7 Illustration 11–8 Illustration 11–9 Illustration 11–10 Illustration 11–11 Illustration 11–12 Illustration 11–13 Illustration 11–14 Illustration 11–15 Illustration 11–16 Illustration 11–17 Illustration 11–18 Illustration 11–19 Illustration 11–20 Illustration 11–21 Illustration 11–22 Illustration 11–23 Illustration 11–24 Illustration 11–25 Illustration 11–26 Illustration 11–27 Illustration 11–28 Illustration 11–29 System Parameters Screen . . . . . . . . . . 46–321064G1 kV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Formats And Defaults Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IG Subsystem Chassis Front View (cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBC Board (MVME166–9u 68040 CPU) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2138293 CTVRC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264370G1 Cradle Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board (GEMS Front End Processor) Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–296377G1 Heurikon CPU OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP Scan Chassis Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST5660N Local SCSI Disk Jumpers and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Westamp Servo Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0–35 11–51 11–56 11–57 11–59 11–61 11–62 11–64 11–66 11–68 11–70 11–71 11–74 11–76 11–78 11–80 11–82 11–88 11–89 11–91 11–92 11–94 11–96 11–98 11–101 11–103 11–105 11–114 11–116 11–117 11–119 11–120 11–121 11–122 11–123 11–126 11–127 11–128 11–130 11–131 11–134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Interface Board–AB . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME166 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSD (3390) Drive Switches and Jumpers . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264756G1 Console Autovoice Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/60 SBC Jumper Locations and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP–S Scan Chassis Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321054G1 Rot. . 46–321058G1 Rot. . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288776G1 Rot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS Illustration 11–30 Illustration 11–31 Illustration 11–32 Illustration 11–33 Illustration 11–34 Illustration 11–35 Illustration 11–36 Illustration 11–37 Illustration 11–38 Illustration 11–39 Illustration 11–40 Illustration 11–41 Illustration 11–42 Illustration 11–43 Illustration 11–44 Illustration 11–45 Illustration 11–46 Illustration 11–47 Illustration 11–48 Illustration 11–49 Illustration 11–50 Illustration 11–51 Illustration 11–52 Illustration 11–53 Illustration 11–54 Illustration 11–55 Illustration 11–56 Illustration 11–57 Illustration 11–58 Illustration 11–59 Illustration 11–60 Illustration 11–61 Illustration 11–62 Illustration 11–63 Illustration 11–64 Illustration 11–65 Illustration 11–66 Illustration 11–67 Illustration 11–68 Illustration 11–69 46–297475G1 SCOM Board . . . . . . . . . 46–288778G1 Rot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 Mag Tape Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288854G1 RCOM Board . 46–321056G1 Stationary Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Measurement Board . . . . . . . SCR Firing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264884G1 DCRGS Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–288774G1 Stat. . . . . . . . . Zeus Remote Intercom X Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Chassis Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–321052G1 Stationary Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46–264888G1 Relay Control Board . LM02 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board . 46–288772G1 Stationary Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSI Disk Drive Assembly in RP-S Subsystem . . 46–264368G1 ETC Board . . IPI High Speed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Xylogics Disk Controller Switch and Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gantry and Table Anchor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OC Power & Ground . 2113764 PDU A1 Servo Amp Assy Connections . . . . . . . . . . . SCU Front and Rear Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Front Cover Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchor Bolt. . . . . . . . . . Gantry Rear Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI-2 High Speed Disk Control Board Jumpers (UYDX-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Cover Hinge Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCU Chassis Rear InterConnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2113764 PDU Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Cable Connections (Detail A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS Illustration 11–70 Illustration 11–71 Illustration 11–72 Illustration 11–73 Illustration 11–74 Illustration 11–75 Illustration 11–76 Illustration A–1 Illustration A–2 Illustration A–3 Illustration A–4 Illustration A–5 Illustration A–6 Illustration A–7 Illustration A–8 Illustration A–9 Illustration A–10 Illustration A–11 Illustration A–12 Illustration A–13 Illustration A–14 Illustration A–15 Illustration A–16 Illustration A–17 Illustration A–18 Illustration A–19 Illustration A–20 Illustration A–21 Illustration A–22 Illustration A–23 Illustration A–24 Illustration A–25 Illustration A–26 Illustration A–27 Illustration A–28 Illustration A–29 IPI High Speed Disk Control Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install and Level Table and Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console I/O Panel Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Cable Connections (Detail B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENESIS Computer Board Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–135 11–136 11–136 11–137 11–137 11–138 11–138 A–9 A–10 A–11 A–12 A–13 A–13 A–15 A–15 A–17 A–18 A–19 A–20 A–21 A–22 A–22 A–23 A–26 A–27 A–28 A–29 A–30 A–31 A–32 A–33 A–34 A–35 A–36 A–37 A–38 0–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Connections A2A7 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-3) . . . . . . Gantry and Table Level Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console I/O Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI–2 High Speed Drive Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Power Connections . . . . . . . 2113764 PDU A2 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leveling Pad Starting Position . Shipping Brackets . . . . . . . . . . Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Support Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI–2 Control Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . Leveling Pad and Anchoring Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENESIS Computer Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Mounted Controls Installation . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Inch Console Risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Footswitch Assembly and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phantom Holder . . . . . .

. A-55 A-57 B-4 B-4 B-5 0-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 Input Power Panel Connections . . . . . Formula to adjust for Straight Line Accessory . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 PDU Area Locations . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 A3 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HiSpeed Advantage Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Connector Bulkhead (Bottom V iew) . . . . . . . . . . . Formula for 90 Degree Accessory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . 2113764 PDU Power Input Connections . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13 HSA±RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100 TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS Illustration A-30 Illustration A-31 Illustration A-32 Illustration A-33 Illustration A-34 Illustration A-35 Illustration A-36 Illustration A-37 Illustration A-38 Illustration A-39 Illustration A-40 Illustration A-41 Illustration A-42 Illustration A-43 Figure B-1 Figure B-2 Figure B-3 2113764 PDU I/O A4 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 A4 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formula when not at 90 Degree to Axis of Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 A-40 A-41 A-42 A-43 A-44 A-45 A-46 A-47 A-49 Typical Customer Supplied Scan Room Warning Light and Connection to PM A-52 Typical Customer Supplied Scan Room Door Interlock and Connection to PM A-52 CT1 (Table) Raceway Ground Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 X-Ray Warning Light and Door Interlock Circuit System Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 HVDC Supply Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube Type Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Torque Values as Specified by GEMS CT for LS Plus and Forward . . Default Torque Values as Specified by GEMS CT for LS QXI and Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Masked Self-T est Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Tap Connection Table for PDU 2113764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13 HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100 LIST OF TABLES Table 5-1 Table 5-2 Table 5-3 Table 6-1 Table 6-2 Table 7-1 Table 11-1 Table 11-2 Table 11-3 Table 12-1 Table 12-2 Table 12-3 Table A-1 Table B-1 Table B-2 Table B-3 Table B-4 Tube Type Table . . Cable Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Conversion Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 5-12 5-13 6-5 6-6 7-2 11-109 11-112 11-113 12-3 12-99 12-117 A-25 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-6 0-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Rise and Fall Time Record Table . . . . . . . . NIOT Settings . . . . . . . MVME167 (SBC Board) EEPROM Setup Values . HSA Collimator History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Method Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Tap Connection Table for PDU 46-327106G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Values for DAS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–2 Customer Documentation (Class A) Class A documentation part list: · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Note: 2129692 Operator’s Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 2126732 Preinstallation Manual (preinstallation kit. & Schem. 1–1 . Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 2106358 System Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 46–018308 Safety Video Tape (HiSpeed Advantage) 2106797 Applications Tips 46–018326 27 Upgrade Manual (kit) 2106798 Service Alerts Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 46–018316 FRU Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 46–002021 Image Monitor Service Manual 46–002016 Sun Field Service Manual 46–015323 Genesis Console/Computer Schematics 46–021650 Network Service Documentation The documents ship with the catalog items listed in parentheses. only) 46–018302 Safety Guidelines Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 46–018303 Dwgs.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 1 – CUSTOMER OPERATING AND SERVICE MATERIALS 1–1 Introduction This section lists the “Customer Operating and Service Material” which is shipped with the various CT HiSpeed Advantage catalogs.

X Release: · HLFC software tape: 2144738 · · Blank DAT Tape: 46–317751P1 HNS is now part of HLFC RP2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 1–3 Customer Software (Class B) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Class B operating and basic service software required for the operation. calibration.X Release: · HLFC software tape: 2157940 · · Blank DAT Tape: 46–317751P1 HNS is now part of HLFC 1–2 . service and maintenance of the CT HiSpeed Advantage system: RP1.

as shown in Illustration 2–1. Run the diagnostics and tools from the top level of the Utilities Main menu. Chapter 3 describes the diagnostics and tools procedures.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 2 – CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2–1 Menu Function Descriptions This chapter briefly describes the basic service diagnostics and tools menus. You may access and operate these diagnostics and tools from the Plasma Touch screen. The system displays the |Utilities| softkey along the top of the plasma screen. 2–2 Top Level Menu Load CT HiSpeed Advantage diagnostics and tools from tape to the system disk. or you may open a shell and type/enter a Unix command line. ILLUSTRATION 2–1 TOP LEVEL MENU Operator Console Scan Image Space Archive Recon date – time Messages Utilities Network Diag Status Filming 2–1 .

ILLUSTRATION 2–2 UTILITIES MAIN MENU Messages UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools System Access Diags CT Tools Shell System Tools Service Notepad Shutdown Cancel 2–2 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 2–3 Utilities Main Menu HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 2–2) accesses the following diagnostics and tools categories: · · · · · Installation and Calibration (use to set up and align the system) System Performance (provides system troubleshooting and performance measurement software) Scanning (provides a set of scan options for the user) List/Select (lists various files and supports all the tools) Utilities (provides Unix access) Touch |Cancel| to exit Utilities.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 2–4 Diagnostics Menu HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the Utilities Main Menu |Diags| prompt (See Illustration 2–2) to display the Diagnostics Menu. Illustration 2–3 depicts the Advantage RP system Diagnostic menu. Use this menu to access the following diagnostics: · · · · · · Backup Timer – activates the exposure backup timer X–Ray Interlock – tests the exposure interlocks Generate X–Ray – tests the scanning hardware KV Fiber Optics – tests the fiber optics on the kV bd Cancel Diags – terminates the diagnostic session Reset Select – executes selected power–up diagnostics ILLUSTRATION 2–3 DIAGNOSTICS MENU – ADVANTAGE RP SYSTEMS DIAGNOSTICS Backup Timer X–Ray Interlock Generate X–Ray KV Fiber Optics Cancel Diags Reset Select Init Diags 2–3 .

Use this menu to access the following diagnostics: · · · · · · · · Mechanical Characterization – builds characterization files which define the basic system datum for the system setup. and detector to x–ray alignment specs. Generator Characterization – calibrates the x–ray generator for accurate kV and mA.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 2–5 CT Tools Menu HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the Utilities Main Menu |CT Tools| softkey to display the Tool Selections Menu. Illustration 2–4 shows the Tool Selections Menu for Advantage RP Systems. analyze scan data. List Select – used to examine scan and diagnostic data Scanning Diagnostics – used to identify failures in Data Collection. review DD files. Heat Soak & Season – Prepares new or existing x–ray tube for extended field life. Tube Align – used to position tube. System Perform – Used to identify system level failures. collimator. and plot cals Utilities – manage DD and scan files ILLUSTRATION 2–4 TOOL SELECTIONS MENU – ADVANTAGE RP SYSTEMS TOOL SELECTIONS Install Calibrate Mechncal Charact Genrator Charact Tube Align Heat Soak & Season System Perform Detector Slope List Select Images Patient Scans Diag Scans DD Files CALS Scanning Diagnostics DAS Tools DDC Scan Analysis DD File Analysis Cal Plot Utility Functions File Manager Scan File Manager Cancel Utility 2–4 .

(Illustration 2–2) ILLUSTRATION 2–5 SYSTEM TOOLS MENU SYSTEM TOOLS UNIX Tools Shell Calculator File Editor Touch Log Utilities Storage On Storage Off Insite Disp Off Cancel Utility 2–5 . Touch the |Cancel| softkey to exit Utilities. Use this menu to access the following tools: · · · Shell – opens a tty window on the plasma to execute UNIX commands. 2–7 System Tools Menu Touch the Utilities Main Menu |System Tools| softkey to display the System Tools Menu (Illustration 2–5). File Editor – opens a tty window to edit ASCII files. Calculator – opens a tty window to operate a basic calculator for math operations. Touch |Utility| to return to the Utility Main Menu.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 2–6 Shell Function HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Use the shell to execute unix commands in a tty window.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Notes: 2–6 .

turn off the power switches in this order: · · · · SCU power switch. Touch |Shutdown| to perform an orderly and systematic shutdown of all Genesis application processes. When complete. Touch |Cancel| to exit Utilities. To completely shut down the system. the boot prompt “>” appears on the boot terminal. OC power switch. The software shutdown stops all processes running on the OC and SBC. tools. Console power switch. ILLUSTRATION 3–1 UTILITIES MAIN MENU MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools System Access Diags CT Tools Shell System Tools Service Notepad Shutdown Cancel 3–1 . and system tools.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 3 – CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS PROCEDURES 3–1 System Shutdown The Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 3–1) accesses diagnostics. a shell in the unix operating system.

to display the Diagnostics menu. shown in Illustration 3–2. Proceed to page 3–3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 3–2 Access the Diagnostic Programs HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the Utilities Main Menu |Diags| softkey. ILLUSTRATION 3–2 DIAGS BUTTON MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools System Access Diags CT Tools Shell System Tools Service Notepad Shutdown Cancel 3–2 .

The following subsections describe individual diagnostic selection and execution. The Gentry I/O Board contains the backup timer.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 3–3 Run Diagnostics HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch |Diags| (See page 3–2) to display the Diagnostics Menu. See Illustration 3–3. 3–4 Exposure Backup Timer Functional Test Download the diagnostic firmware and touch the Diagnostics Menu (Illustration 3–3) |Backup Timer|to access the Exposure Backup Timer Functional Test.. timer activates. Touch |Reset Select| to reset the subsystem. ILLUSTRATION 3–3 BACKUP TIMER DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN DIAGNOSTICS Backup Timer X–Ray Interlock Generate X–Ray KV Fiber Optics Cancel Diags Reset Select Init Diags 3–3 . to allow the backup contactor to energize. it sends a level 1 interrupt to the CPU and disables backup contactor. The software loads the scan time + 5% into the backup counter before the start of exposure. Use this test to verify the backup timer operation (i.28 Hz and 1953 Hz clocks. and verifies that the circuit generates a backup timer interrupt. This diagnostic tests both the 488.e. If either of these conditions persist after the timer counts down to zero. The diagnostic simulates an exposure. timer counts down to zero and backup contactor de–energizes). The read and write verification requires the operation of the clock and clock select circuits. The backup timer begins counting down when the system detects the HVON or Exposure Command.

The default value provides sufficient time to verify operation of the backup timer. Touch |Accept|. and proceed to the next page. The Backup Timer Timeout parameter defaults to three seconds.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustration 3–4 shows the Backup Timer functional test screen. ILLUSTRATION 3–4 FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU HIGH VOLTAGE CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST Functional Test Selection: Backup Timer Test X–RAY Interlock Backup Timer Timeout (sec): 3 Home Results Screen Accept 3–4 .

Touch |Backup| to return the previous screen. 90 deg. ILLUSTRATION 3–5 FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU (BACKUP TIMER TEST) FUNCTIONAL TEST REVIEW SCREEN Test: Backup Timer Test Maximum Errors: 15 Touch the desired value for each parameter. The default values provide sufficient time to verify operation of the backup timer. Gantry Enable: [Disable] Enabled Gantry Speed 1 sec. 180 deg. 20 sec. Max Error Processing: [Log] Do Not Log Stop Test Output Device: [Console and File] Console Only Tube Position [0 deg. Illustration 3–5 shows the default parameter values. 2 sec. 270 deg Minimum Results Update Update Rate: 3 OBC Service Input: [Disabled] Enabled Backup Run 3–5 . 4 sec. Go to the next page.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch |Accept| on the Functional Test Menu (Illustration 3–4) to display the Functional Test Review Screen. Touch |Run| to start the Backup Timer test.

if any. the system posts an inverted video error message indicating the test has aborted after the step which has failed. ILLUSTRATION 3–6 FUNCTIONAL TEST RESULTS SCREEN 3–6 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Refer to Illustration 3–6. The test screen indicates the progress of the test and not the state of the hardware. In addition the number of errors detected. is posted at the bottom of the screen. The screen information updates one line at a time as each step completes. IF a failure occurs. Detailed information of errors detected are recorded in the error log.

(See Illustration 3–7).GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 3–5 X–Ray Interlock Test HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the Diagnostics Menu |X–Ray Interlock| softkey (Illustration 3–7) to access the X–Ray Functional Test. The system disables the softkey after you download the diagnostic firmware. Touch |Run| to initiate the test (Illustration 3–9). (Softkey turns into dashed box) ILLUSTRATION 3–7 X–RAY INTERLOCK DIAGNOSTICS Backup Timer X–Ray Interlock Generate X–Ray KV Fiber Optics Cancel Diags Reset Select Init Diags Touch |X–Ray Interlock| (Illustration ). 3–7 . Touch |Accept| to view the X–Ray Interlock Test Screen (Illustration 3–8). Note: Touch |Init Diags| to download the diagnostic firmware before attempting to run the X–Ray Test.

Max Error Processing: [Log] Do Not Log Stop Test Output Device: [Console and File] Console Only Tube Position [0 deg. X–RAY FUNCTIONAL REVIEW TEST MENU FUNCTIONAL TEST REVIEW SCREEN Test: X–Ray Interlock Maximum Errors: 15 Touch the desired value for each parameter. 4 sec. Gantry Enable: [Disable] Enabled Gantry Speed 1 sec.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 ILLUSTRATION 3–8 X–RAY INTERLOCK FUNCTIONAL TEST HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 HIGH VOLTAGE CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST Functional Test Selection: Backup Timer Test X–RAY Interlock Iterations: 1 Home Results Screen Accept ILLUSTRATION 3–9 X–RAY INTERLOCK. 90 deg. 180 deg. 20 sec. 270 deg other Minimum Results Update Update Rate: 3 OBC Service Input: [Disabled] Enabled Backup Run 3–8 . 2 sec.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 3–6 Generate X–Ray Test HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the |Generate X–Ray| softkey (Illustration 3–10). ILLUSTRATION 3–10 GENERATE X–RAY DIAGNOSTICS Backup Timer X–Ray Interlock Generate X–Ray KV Fiber Optics Cancel Diags Reset Select Init Diags 3–9 .

ILLUSTRATION 3–11 GENERATE X–RAY FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU X–Ray Test Type: Kv Selection: Manual Auto 80 mA Selection: 40 Minimum ISD (sec): 1 Rotor Speed: High Medium Low Number of Exposures: 1 Exposure Duration (sec): 1 mA Loop: Closed Open Filter Type: Closed Air Body Enhanced Focal Spot: Large Small Aperture: Closed 1mm 3mm 5mm 7mm 10mm Home Results Screen Accept 3–10 . Input ranges consist of the following: · · · · · KV: mA: Duration: Iterations: ISD: 60 to 140KV in 1KV steps 40 to 400mA in 1mA steps 0. Go to the next page. Press the Scan Start button.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustration 3–11 shows the X–Ray Functional Test screen.1 second steps 1 to 100 1 to 60 Seconds in 1 second steps Touch |Accept| (Illustration 3–11) and wait for the Scan Start button on the console keypad to illuminate. when lit.1 to 10 Seconds in 0. to initiate the scan.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 ILLUSTRATION 3–12 X–RAY FUNCTIONAL REVIEW SCREEN FUNCTIONAL TEST REVIEW SCREEN Test: Generate X–Ray Maximum Errors: 15 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the desired value for each parameter. 90 deg. Press Start Scan Button to initiate the scan. 4 sec. 3–11 . 20 sec. Gantry Enable: [Disable] Enabled Gantry Speed 1 sec. 2 sec. 270 deg other Minimum Results Update Update Rate: 3 OBC Service Input: [Disabled] Enabled Backup Run Touch |Run| and wait for the Start Scan button on the Console Keypad to Illuminate. Max Error Processing: [Log] Do Not Log Stop Test Output Device: [Console and File] Console Only Tube Position [0 deg. 180 deg.

This data was taken 77 ms into the exposure and was posted to the screen immediately after the (”__” indicates an unknown value)” · · · Average is the average value taken over the duration of the exposure.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The X–Ray Functional Test Results screen output (Illustration 3–13) is a collection of HV statistics. Data displayed in the present column shows the last sample of HV statistics taken on or before 77mSeconds after the start of the exposure. ILLUSTRATION 3–13 X–RAY FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU #1 DATA IN “PRESENT” COLUMN SHOWS LAST SAMPLE OF HV STATISTICS READ ON OR BEFORE 77 MS AFTER START OF EXPOSURE BEFORE SCREEN WAS DISPLAYED. Present is the last value read before the screen was updated. Expected is the value prescribed by the user. The time is in milliseconds since the exposure began. 3–12 . The present exposure duration indicates the time the data was collected.

the last exposure could have occurred later than indicated. ILLUSTRATION 3–14 X–RAY FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU #2 COMPARE 3–13 . Note: The backup timer determines the exposure duration. values displayed in the present column should be ignored. This is indicated in Illustration 3–14 by the “Present” exposure duration being greater than or equal to the “Expected” exposure duration value. therefore. This timer stops counting after the Exposure Command and HV ON status are removed. For this situation.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The screen of Illustration 3–14 was taken at the end of the exposure (as compared to the screen of Illustration 3–13 which was taken at the beginning of the exposure).

Touch the Utilities Main Menu |Shell| softkey to open a Unix shell.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 3–7 Access the Unix Shell HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Refer to Illustration 3–15. ILLUSTRATION 3–15 SHELL BUTTON MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools System Access Diags CT Tools Shell System Tools Service Notepad Shutdown Cancel 3–14 .

and takes control when other commands finish. checks the syntax. The shell also provides an interpreted command language for creating complex “scripts” that carry out system maintenance actions. type in the filename as if it were a command. The shell accepts your command lines. ILLUSTRATION 3–16 UNIX SHELL Shell (to exit. you can tell the shell to read and perform commands in the file.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 3–7–1 Shell HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The shell (Illustration 3–16) is a program that reads and interprets what is typed in or read at the command line. calls the appropriate unix commands. It is interactive because it responds to your instruction and reports errors. and provides the interface between the user and the unix operating system.e. Note: A description of the unix commands that you need to maintain the system resides in Direction 46–015523.. This direction is inside of the Network Service Documentation Set (46–021650) that is shipped with every CT HiSpeed Advantage and Upgrade Kit. status and results.i. control D) genesis @ <suite ID>_OC0 1: 3–15 . A “script” is a file containing a sequence of commands. SunOST / Genesis Quick Reference Guide. By using the source filename command.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 3–7–2 EzLog Tool HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Open a shell (Illustration 3–17). Tube Usage 8. control D) 3–16 . 2. Run Time Stats 7. and saves time. Type a number. to access the menu–driven EzLog Tool. If you press the wrong key. OC System Error Log /usr/g/service/log/gesyslog (viewLog) 4. You may run EzLog with applications up or down. . 5. SBC Syslog /usr/spool/log/syslog 6. . If the SBC is not running. because you no longer have to log into the sbc to display the system error log files. The EzLog Tool provides a convenient alternative to plasma tools during system applications failures. 3.X & 2.X Systems 1. OC Messages /usr/adm/messages 2. Press <Cntrl> c to abort the corresponding EzLog function. the software responds with “Gimme a break. · · Press q to return to the HiSpeed Advantage 1.X & 2. or a tty screen. This tool improves error message viewing. Type ezlog [Return] to display the following menu: HiSpeed Advantage 1. Login as genesis. 1. Look for Core files on system q Quit and return to UNIX Enter a number to view the error log: 4. OC Syslog /usr/spool/log/syslog 3. and/or remote logins. the software displays the following report: HSA1_SBC0 HSA1_SBC0 is down HAS1_SBC0: COnnection timed out /usr/adm/messages not found in HSA1_SBC0. ILLUSTRATION 3–17 EZLOG TOOL Shell ezlog (to exit. Open a shell or tty window. SBC Messages /usr/adm/messages 5. and press [Return] to display the corresponding log file.” 6. Tube Display 9.X Systems menu.

ILLUSTRATION 3–19 SERVICE NOTEPAD SHELL SERVICE NOTEPAD Please enter messages to Log: (to update/exit type <CR>) 3–17 . and exits the shell. · Remember to let multiple lines of text automatically wrap around to the next available line. Use the Service Notepad to enter text information directly into the System Message Log. ILLUSTRATION 3–18 SERVICE NOTEPAD SOFTKEY MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools System Access Diags CT Tools Shell System Tools Service Notepad Shutdown Cancel 3. the software posts the current (incomplete) message. 2. Press [Return] to send the text currently displayed in the shell to the System Message Log. If you press [Return] at the end of a line.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 3–8 Access Service Notepad HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 4. similar to the one in Illustration 3–19. Display the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 3–18). Touch |Service Notepad| to open a Service Notepad shell.

touch |CT Tools|.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 3–9 Access CT Tools HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Display the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 3–20). and proceed to the next page. ILLUSTRATION 3–20 CT TOOLS SOFTKEY MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools System Access Diags CT Tools Shell System Tools Service Notepad Shutdown Cancel 3–18 .

Detector Slope – for procedure. in this chapter. DDC – for procedure. Heat Soak & Season – for procedure. refer to chapter 8 (System Alignment). Generator Characterization – for procedure. see section 3–9–4–1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 3–9–1 Main Tool Selections HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Display the Tool Selections Menu (Illustration 3–21). For SmartScan DDC information. refer to page 3–21. Tube Alignment – for procedure. to access the tools you need during installation and. Analysis – for procedure. refer to chapter 5 (HV Subsystem Maintenance). refer to chapter 8 (System Alignment). calibration: · · · · · · · Mechanical Characterization – for procedure refer to chapter 4 (Table/Gantry Maintenance). refer to the Tube Change section in chapter 12 (Replacement Procedures). ILLUSTRATION 3–21 TOOLS SELECTIONS MENU – ADVANTAGE RP SYSTEMS TOOL SELECTIONS Install Calibrate Mechncal Charact Genrator Charact Tube Align Heat Soak & Season System Perform Detector Slope List Select Images Patient Scans Diag Scans DD Files CALS Scanning Diagnostics DAS Tools DDC Scan Analysis DD File Analysis Cal Plot Utility Functions File Manager ScanFile Manager Cancel Utility 3–19 . refer to chapter 8 (System Alignment).

Use the |Season| tool when you encounter tube spits. or other tube related scan aborts on a currently installed tube. You may also use the |Season| tool during planned maintenance. image streaks.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 3–9–2 Heat Soak and Seasoning Tool HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 After you replace an x–ray tube. Note: Refer to Section of the Tube Replacement procedure for additional |Heat Soak & Season| information. ILLUSTRATION 3–22 HEAT SOAK & SEASONING MENU Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning Heat Soak /Season Season Cancel Utility Tools 3–20 . select the |Heat Soak & Season| tool to ensure extended tube life.

When prompted. To manually access the Detector Slope Test: 1. the failure message screen instructs the customer to contact GE for service. The UTILITIES menu also displays a |Detector Slope| softkey. Refer to the Illustration on page 3–19. 4. Eventually a detector failure will be recorded if it exceeds 19. Select |Detector Slope|. periodically check all system alignments. A GE service representative will preform recommended field procedures (FMI. The system displays a PASS/FAIL message after it runs the test. Display the UTILITIES menu. similar to the following. 6. when the detector gain response falls outside the specified range of values. When a failure occurs. 2. As the detector degrades. For optimal clinical image performance. A typical healthy detector should have a status number lower than 19. The software displays a message. 3. etc) for system troubleshooting and/or detector replacement. press (Start Scan) to execute the test. ILLUSTRATION 3–23 FAILURE MESSAGE Detector Slope Test The Detector Slope Test has detected a condition that may result in an image with unacceptable image quality. Please call GE Service and request a more thorough evaluation of your detector’s condition. 5. review the Error Message Log for additional information. this number is likely to increase. Confirm 3–21 . Select |Confirm| to exit the Detector Slope Test. The software automatically runs the Detector Slope Test on a monthly basis. and make sure they fall within spec. Remove any obstructions from the Gantry opening. Refer to Illustration 3–23 for an example of the failure message. Note: If the Detector Slope Test fails. Select |CT Tools|. CAUTION This test fails when the software detects incorrect Collimator Characterization values or insufficient DD File space. The test adds about 4 minutes to the FastCal program. immediately after a FastCal. which provides manual access to the tool. · · Refer to the Illustration on page 3–18.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 3–9–3 Detector Slope Test HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Use this System Performance tool to test the detector for signs of gain response degradation.

to allow the field engineer to enter variable mA–specific fields when prescribing a view–compressed Rotating X–Ray On or Stationary X–Ray On scan. The field engineer can also reconstruct Rotating X–Ray On scans.3 introduced enhanced Diagnostic Data Collection (DDC). depending on the patient attenuation profiles. For detailed information. 3–22 . ILLUSTRATION 3–24 DIAGNOSTIC DATA COLLECTION MENU DIAGNOSTIC DATA COLLECTION Data Mode RealTime Stat Raw/View Compressed Scan Type Static Xray Off Rotating Xray Off Static Xray On Rotating Xray On Static TXXT Rotating TXXT Offset Collect DAS Elec Cal Misc Position Tube Delete Protocol Load Protocol Cancel Utility Tools 3–9–4–1 Run SmartScan DDC SmartScan is a feature that varies the mA during tube rotation.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 3–9–4 Access DDC HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 At the Tools Selection Menu (Illustration 3–21). RP 1. touch |DDC| to display the Diagnostic Data Collection Menu (Illustration 3–24). As part of SmartScan. see the operator’s manuals.

even though 100% mA modulation is possible otherwise. phase. if the phase is 1. 3–9–4–2 Definitions % modulation – The percentage of reduction in maximum mA. Scan data will now contain additional parameters that define the modifications for SmartScan. For Rotating X–Ray On scanning. the prescribed mA is 300. You can use Recon Rx to list/select and reconstruct certain rotating view–compressed X–Ray On DDC scans. (See Illustration 3–25. These fields appear on the plasma display when you use the List/Select header option. 3–23 . For example. As part of SmartScan. In addition. For Stationary X–Ray On scanning. then the mA at 0 degrees on the gantry will be 150. Phase of waveform – The phase or waveform orientation represents the mA waveform’s relationship to the gantry position. you must manually select the modulation percentage.) This value indicates whether the mA is at minimum (1) or maximum (0) when the gantry is at 0 degrees for a scan. The new scan image header information introduced by SmartScan is: · · · · · SmartScan: on or off Smart mA: computed effective mA (equivalent to technic mA) mA phase: min @ 0 degrees or max @ 0 degrees mA modulation: % of max reduction (See Definitions 4–3–1–1) mA clip: the minimum mA value for the image Tools Scanning supports two modes with SmartScan. Clipping level – The maximum modulation allowed for the RP hardware is 50%. simulated start angle. stationary and rotating. but will be clipped at the clipping level imposed by the hardware. You can view these fields in the Scan Data header from the List/Select header option. and the modulation is 50%. you must select only the modulation percentage and phase. DDC has been enhanced to let you enter variable mA–specific fields when you prescribe view–compressed Rotating X–Ray On and Stationary X–Ray On scans. and simulated gantry rotation speed. An mA modulation of more than 50% is acceptable. and the minimum patient scanning current allowed is 40 mA. you can reconstruct Rotating X–Ray On scans that have the appropriate number of views.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Scan and image headers include fields for SmartScan parameters.

Touch |SmartScan| to enable the function. touch |Rotating X–Ray On| to display the Rotating X–Ray On Screen. Choose a % modulation. the software displays a phase softkey and a modulation data field. Choose the phase between the maximum mA or minimum mA at 0 degrees on the gantry. When you select SmartScan. If it’s higher than 50%.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 3–9–4–3 Rotating X–Ray On Scan HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 At the DDC screen. GANTRY POSITION FOR ROTATING X–RAY ON (X–RAY ON POSITION 0°) Phase: max @ 0 Technic mA Lowest computed mA Phase: min @ 0 Gantry angle: 05 1805 3605 Top of gantry Bottom of gantry Full rotation 3–24 . ILLUSTRATION 3–25 MA VARIATION VS. These fields are otherwise invisible. the mA modulation will be clipped at 50%.

the mA. When it‘s done. plots of channel data from scan analysis). Note that you should not use the default value. 3–25 . scan speed. Enter the % of modulation and the phase that you want. (40 mA is the lowest threshold value for SmartScan). and aperture. the number of scans. Enter the protocol name. spot size. Then accept the Rx. examine the database headers and verify that the SmartScan parameters are properly set. because no modulation is available at that current. the X–Ray On position (see Illustrations 3–27 and 3–29.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 3–26 MA VARIATION VS: GANTRY ANGLE FOR ROTATING X–RAY ON (X–RAY ON POSITION 45°) Phase: max @ 0 Technic mA Lowest computed mA Phase: min @ 0 Gantry angle: 455 2255 4055 Enter the run description and compression factor. the ISD. 40 mA. Choose the cal vector. Enter the scan time. filter. for SmartScan. and the kV. FOV.

0 degrees 40 80 Medium Large Modulation: Phase Min @ 0 50% FOV Small Large Air Bowtie Large Bowtie Spot Size Small Large Aperture 0 1 3 5 7 10 Save Protocol Protocol Name: Cancel Utility Tools Data Collect Alpha Correct Offset Correct Accept Rx 3–26 . X–RAY ON.0 sec.3–60.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 ILLUSTRATION 3–27 RUN A ROTATING X–RAY ON SCAN HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ROTATING.0 sec. VIEW COMPRESSED Run Description: Compression Factor Smart Scan 2:1 3:1 4:1 Auto Scan Reserve Scan 1:1 Scan Time [0. 2 sec.0]: Scan Speed [1/2/3/4]: Number of Scans: Inter Scan Delay: X–Ray On Position: mA [10–400]: kV [80/100/120/140]: Cal Vector Filter Air Small 2. per revolution 1 2.

filter. Note that you should not use the default value. See Illustration 3–28 to select the frequency at which you want to display the waveform at. scan time.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 3–9–4–4 Stationary X–Ray On Scan HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 When you select SmartScan. These fields are otherwise invisible. for SmartScan. and phase. For a Stationary X–Ray On scan. aperture. 1 SEC. SIMULATED GANTRY SPEED) Technic mA Lowest computed mA Gantry angle: 05 Top of gantry 1805 Bottom of gantry 3605 Full rotation When it’s done. Enter the cal filter. and protocol name. simulated gantry speed. Choose a phase between 0 and 180 degrees. simulated gantry speed. SCAN TIME.) Enter the kV. ISD. 3–27 . and phase appear. number of scans. GANTRY ANGLE FOR STATIONARY X–RAY ON (1 SEC. ILLUSTRATION 3–28 MA VARIATIONS VS. (40 mA is the lowest threshold value for SmartScan. 40 mA. spot size. fields for the modulation. examine the database headers and verify that the SmartScan parameters are properly set. compress factor. modulation. independent of the tube position in the gantry. the phase refers to the starting angle in the mA waveform. because no modulation is available at that current. Enter the description. and mA. Then accept the Rx. FOV.

3–60. 0 degrees 40 80 Modulation: Sim Gan Speed: Phase 100% 1 sec 0 deg Cal Vector Filter Air Small Medium Large FOV Small Large Air Bowtie Large Bowtie Spot Size Small Large Aperture 0 1 3 5 7 10 Save Protocol Protocol Name: Cancel Utility Tools Data Collect Alpha Correct Offset Correct Accept Rx 3–28 .0 sec. X–RAY ON. VIEW COMPRESSED Run Description: Compression Factor Smart Scan 2:1 3:1 4:1 Auto Scan Reserve Scan 1:1 Scan Time [0. 1 100 sec.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 ILLUSTRATION 3–29 RUN A STATIONARY X–RAY ON SCAN HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 STATIONARY.0]: Number of Scans: Inter Scan Delay: X–Ray On Position: mA [10–400]: kV [80/100/120/140]: 1.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 3–9–4–5 Reconstruct DDC images HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Use ReconRx screens to list/select the DDC–acquired SmartScan data. however noise will be increased because insufficient mA is applied to the tube in one of the orthogonal directions (vertical or horizontal). Full rotation scans having 984 views.g. Scans that have a cal file. since the phantoms used are circular and SmartScan leaves the mA unmodulated. you can verify that with SmartScan on. Other SmartScan Notes: · SmartScan may be forced on round phantoms. · · · 3–29 . which can be found in the header information for the image produced after scanning. the system chooses the appropriate modulation. DDC scans are available in Recon Rx List/Select only if they are: · · · 3–9–4–6 Rotating X–Ray On scans. after complete orthogonal Scouts are taken. Use applications scanning: with SmartScan defaulted on. CTDI measurements are the same for SmartScan on or off. Noise measurements may be performed both on images acquired in DDC (Rotating X–Ray On) or in SmartScan patient scanning. flat phantoms placed on the table). Use ReconRx to prescribe the reconstruction of the DDC–acquired data into images. mA is modulated. For non–round objects (e. after the images are reconstructed.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Notes: 3–30 .

Perform the following functions: · · · · Turn OFF all three switches on the gantry status display box. BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46–018302. PLACE THE HAND KNOB. DISABLE the PDU HVDC (550) enable key. generates unregulated high voltage direct current that ranges between 450 and 750VDC. The CT Compact PDU. INTO THE HOLE ON TOP OF THE GANTRY HOIST BOOM WHERE IT ATTACHES TO THE GANTRY. WARNING WARNING 4–1 Input (PDU) Power CAUTION Verify all personnel have cleared the system before you turn on the wall power. TUBE. OR DETECTOR. TO PREVENT THE HOIST FROM ROLLING OFF THE BACK END OF THE HOIST BOOM WHEN INSTALLING THE DAS. 4–1 . Turn OFF all three power switches in the table. USED TO HOLD THE FRONT GANTRY SHROUD. Turn ON main wall power. THEREFORE. part number 2133533. This document refers to this PDU voltage as HVDC. CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46–08308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO PRIOR TO SERVICING THESE SUBSYSTEMS.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 4 – TABLE/GANTRY MAINTENANCE THERE ARE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS IN SERVICING THE TABLE AND GANTRY.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 4–2 Gantry Display Test HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Perform the following functions: · · Turn ON the gantry 120 VAC enable switch on the gantry status display box. Emerg Stop) +24 Detector Heater +26 Filament Supply +30 Tilt/Elevation +170 Adjustable Supplies ETC. +/–15 volt supplies for ETC bd Non–adjustable 24 volt supply for gantry display and table emergency stop relay coil and tape switches. STC AND TABLE POWER SUPPLIES Non–Adjustable Supplies STC. +/–15 Collimator +38. TURN ON ‘X–RAY DRIVES’ power by pressing the RESET button on the gantry mounted table control. Verify that the gantry display goes through power–up self–test. +5. Relays) +24 Data Communication +12 Das +5. PS2 – Bottom Table Power Supply Table Power Supplies – Left View +24 volt output +24 volt reference –15 volt output +/–15 volt reference +15 volt output (not used) (not used) +5 volt adjust +5 volt reference +5 volt output +/–15 volt adjust 120VAC INPUT OBC. OBC +24 Table (Display. +/–15 Table (Cradle Drive. STC and Bottom Table Power Supplies – Top View 4–2 .5 Table/Gantry Power Supplies PS1 – Top Table Power Supply Adjustable 24 volt supply for cradle drive and elevation/tilt drive Adjustable +5. OBC. STC. · ILLUSTRATION 4–1 OBC. Display will continue to cycle through its self–test until a hardware reset and download has been completed.

STC AND BOTTOM TABLE POWER SUPPLIES – TOP VIEW –15 volt adjust +24 volt output +24 volt reference –15 volt output +15 volt reference +15 volt output +15 volt adjust 24 volt adjust Power Fail +5 volt reference +5 volt output +5 volt adjust 120VAC INPUT 4–3 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 4–2 46–296317P1/P2 – OBC. STC AND BOTTOM TABLE POWER SUPPLIES – TOP VIEW +5 volt adjust +24 volt output +24 volt reference –15 volt output +15 volt reference +15 volt output +15 volt adjust –15 volt adjust 24 volt adjust Power Fail +5 volt reference +5 volt output 120VAC INPUT ILLUSTRATION 4–3 46–296317P3– OBC.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 4–4 GANTRY POWER SUPPLIES HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 STC POWER SUPPLIES RIGHT ANALOG Non–emc only: DATA COMMUNICATION POWER SUPPLY (On back of gantry) LEFT ANALOG STC E–DAS KEY BOARD STATIONARY CONTROLLER CATHODE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY COLLIMATOR POWER SUPPLY ANODE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY ( Behind detector heater power supply) DAS POWER SUPPLIES OBC ON BOARD CONTROLLER FILAMENT POWER SUPPLY CT VARIABLE ROTOR CONTROLLER CTVRC DETECTOR HEATER POWER SUPPLY (In front of collimator power supply) +/–15 Volt Analog +5 Volt Analog +5 Volt Digital TUBE –5 Volt Analog Regulator Bd. UNIT HP–DAS POWER SUPPLIES ÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊ ËËË ÊÊÊÊ ËËË ÊÊÊÊ ËËË ÊÊÊÊ OBC POWER SUPPLIES –15 Volt Das Supply +15 Volt Das Supply + 5 Volt Das Supply E–DAS POWER SWITCH E–DAS POWER SUPPLIES 4–4 .

Use a DVM to verify the OBC power supply voltages at the following test points on the I/O bd: Axial Board Test Points 6 WRT 5 7 WRT 5 11 WRT 17 3 WRT 4 Specifications +15vdc (± 0. d.25V) 4–5 .25V) –15vdc (± 0.25V) –15vdc (± 0.25V) +24vdc (± 0.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4–3 Power Supply Checks D HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ETC Power Supplies Use DVM to verify the table power supply voltages at the following test points on the ETC bd: ETC Board Test Points 21 WRT 18 11 WRT 18 25 WRT 24 1 WRT 2 D Note: D Specifications +15vdc (± 0.25V) OBC Power Supplies a. c. Turn ON gantry 120vac enable switch on the status display box.2V) +5vdc (± 0. Use a DVM to verify the STC power supply voltages at the following test points on the axial bd: Axial Board Test Points 36 WRT 40 38 WRT 40 37 WRT 42 39 WRT 41 D Specifications +15vdc (± 0.2V) +5vdc (± 0. Turn ON STC power switch on the STC.2V) +5vdc (± 0.25V) +24vdc (± 0.25V) +24vdc (± 0.25V) Tilt/Elevation Power Supplies +170vdc (No adjustment required) WRT means “With Respect To” STC Power Supplies a.25V) –15vdc (± 0. Turn ON OBC power switch on the OBC. b. b. Verify axial drive enable and 550 enable switches on gantry status display box are OFF.

25V) analog +5vdc (± 0. D Detector Heater Power Supply Use a DVM to verify the detector heater power supply voltage at the following location: Test Points Across cap on detector heater Specifications +25vdc to +30vdc power supply 4–6 .25V) –15vdc (± 0. Use a DVM to verify the data communications power supply voltage at the following location: Test Points Communications power supply CN2 connector Red wire WRT to black wire Note: Specifications +11. CAUTION 120vac is exposed on the rotor controller and the following power supplies.25V) analog +5vdc (± 0.25V) digital –5vdc (± 0. Use a DVM to verify the DAS power supply voltages at the following test points on the DAS CAL/AUX bd: Test Points +15 WRT GND –15 WRT GND +5 WRT GND D Specifications +15vdc (± 0. Turn on gantry 120vac enable switch. – Remove rotor controller cover.25V) analog D Data Communication Power Supply Push back rear gantry shroud.75vdc to +12.25V) HP–DAS Power Supplies Test Points ±15 WRT GND +5 WRT GND +5 WRT GND –5 WRT GND Specifications ±15vdc (± 0.25V) +5vdc (± 0.25vdc Before checking the following three power supplies: – Turn off gantry 120vac enable switch.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 E–DAS Power Supplies Turn on DAS power switch on DAS power supply assembly.

the switch pilot light is off and the brake is released.0vdc Turn off gantry 120vac enable switch. (Gantry can be easily rotated by hand. If the brake isn’t toggling. then on. turn gantry 120vac power off. DS320(CHC) toggles on and off once while DS321(home flag) is high. the switch pilot light is on and the brake is energized. Verify the following: · · When the axial drive enable switch is off. using the 120vac enable switch on the gantry status display box. The brake should be heard as it energizes and de–energizes. Turn on gantry 120vac enable switch. Install rotor controller cover. Then toggle the axial drive enable switch on the status display box. 4–5 Axial Brake Check Toggle the axial drive enable switch on the status display box. Turn on all three switches on the gantry status display box.) When the axial drive enable switch is on.0vdc to 39.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Filament Power Supply Using a DVM. Verify that: · · DS270(CHA) and DS271(CHB) AX bd LEDs toggle. verify the filament power supply voltage at the following location: Test Points Across cap on filament power supply D Specifications +28vdc to +37vdc Collimator Power Supply Using a DVM. 4–7 . verify the collimator power supply voltage at the following location: Test Points Collimator power supply +out WRT –out Note: Specifications +38. Note: The brake may not be toggled if a hardware reset has been done since the last time gantry AC power was turned on. 4–4 Encoder Check Turn the Gantry by hand and go through the home flag. The brake should be heard as it energizes and de–energizes.

b. Verify that the talk and listen functions of the intercom work. Gantry will rotate to 180 degrees. or if the intercom works but does not seem loud enough. a. Note: The gantry control assembly is located near the collimator. 3. Press the alignment light button on the gantry–mounted table controls again to turn the lights off. Verify that the axial drive enable and 550 enable switches on the gantry status display box are in the OFF position. d. You can reach the switch through the opening in the center of the gantry between the front and back shrouds. e. d. make the following adjustments: 1. c. Close the clamshells. Make the following adjustments on the Remote Intercom X board (46–288766G1–C) and Console Autovoice board (46–264756G1) Note: When you work alone. Hold down the talk button and turn the autovoice board pot R147 CW until you hear feedback at the table speaker. move JP5 to the MANUAL position before you adjust R178 and R147. 2. Manually turn on the alignment lights using the switch on the gantry control assembly. 4–7 Alignment Light Position Check CAUTION Verify all personnel are clear. 4. move jumper JP5 to the MANUAL position on the intercom board. If working alone. Turn R178 counterclockwise (CCW) until the feedback stops. DO NOT AT ANY TIME STARE DIRECTLY INTO THE LASER BEAMS. Press the alignment light button on the gantry–mounted table controls to position the gantry. Return the TP5 jumper to the AUTO position. STARING INTO THE BEAMS CAN CAUSE PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE. b. Set the console intercom controls to maximum. If you hear feedback.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 4–6 Intercom Check HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Verify the intercom’s talk and listen functions work. Two or more people present: One person adjusts the pot while the other person stands in the room with the gantry and talks. 4–8 . Follow these steps: a. or makes some kind of noise. Turn autovoice board pot R178 clockwise(CW) until you hear feedback at the console speaker. c. WHEN OPERATING ALIGNMENT LIGHTS. f. even with the console intercom controls set to maximum. Turn R147 CCW until the feedback stops.

using a level.0 mm ±1. Raise the table to its highest position. Verify that the two coronal lines coincide with each other. as above.76=lux. Verify this distance is 310. lower table to the lowest elevation possible. advance the cradle into the gantry. Note: The internal axial lasers on the high speed advantage system are not designed to shine ‘down’ on the collimator. 4–9 . If the external or internal axial lights cannot be visualized under the above conditions. Note: Footcandles x 10. b. and turn on the alignment lights. Turn on the scan room lights to their brightest normal level. Leaving cradle extended enough so that both internal and external laser lines are visible on it. 4–7–4 Alignment Light Visualization HHS requirements state that if a light is used to define the tomographic plane. Repeat using the back of your hand to visualize the internal axial lights. Verify the 310.0mm distance between the internal and external lights on both edges of the cradle.0 mm ±1. It is only necessary to see the axial lights. do not adjust them to do so. The tomographic plane tests using the QA phantom in Section 11 will verify that the internal axial lasers are correctly aligned with the collimator. Place the paper in the center of the Gantry opening and verify that the coronal lines are horizontal. Use the back of your hand centered over the cradle and held normal to the alignment light as a viewing surface to visualize the external axial alignment lights. Therefore. Extend the cradle enough so that both the internal and external laser lights are visible on the cradle. obtain a DIGAPHOT model #3300 or 3303 light meter and measure the ambient light intensity at the cradle surface for the external and internal alignment light locations. Place the rule on the left edge of the cradle and measure again. Proceed as follows: a.0mm. 4–7–3 Coronal Lights Place a sheet of plain white paper at the left side of the patient opening in front of the coronal laser light. 4–7–2 External Axial to Internal Axial Distance Raise the table to its highest elevation.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4–7–1 Internal Axial Lights HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Place a sheet of plain white paper over the output port of each light and verify that the two lines line up on each other. c. Do not add localized spot lights to increase the brightness level. it must be visible under ambient light conditions up to 500 lux. Check the right side in the same way. d. not the sagittal or coronal lights. Place a metric rule on the right edge of the cradle and measure the distance from the internal axial laser line to the external axial line generated by each laser.

h. Repeat all of the above with the console emergency stop switch. Press one of the emergency stop switches on the Gantry. Verify that the cradle clutch is released by manually moving the cradle to the home position. e. 4–8 Emergency Stop Check Using the gantry–mounted (or table–mounted) control pushbuttons. f. Verify that tilt. Verify that table elevation is disabled. 4–10 . i. Depress one of the tilt buttons. d. Verify that cradle is latched securely in the home position. advance the cradle about 2 feet from the home position. elevation. c. g. Proceed as follows: a. j. If the light meter readings are 500 lux or less. replace the laser light(s) and/or their power supplies. Depress one of the table elevation buttons. and cradle drive now work. Verify that cradle drive is disabled.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 If the light reading(s) are greater than 500 lux reduce the room lighting to that level and repeat steps 3 and 4. Depress one of the cradle drive buttons. Repeat all of the above with the four table tape switches. Repeat all of the above with the other Gantry emergency stop switch. while Reset Light on Gantry mounted controls flashes slowly. b. Verify that tilt is disabled. Verify there is no Gantry/Table movement. Turn on X–RAY DRIVES POWER by pressing the reset switch on the gantry–mounted table controls.

ILLUSTRATION 4–5 CT TOOLS SOFTKEY Messages UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools Diags CT Tools System Access Shell System Tools Service Notepad Shutdown Cancel 4–11 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 4–9 Access CT Tools HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the |CT Tools| on the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 4–5) and go to the next page.

This tool is needed to set up the characterization tables for the system firmware. The tool directs the operator to what needs to be set up. The characterization data is stored in a series of characterization and configuration files.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 4–10 Mechanical Characterization Procedure HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustration 4–6 shows the Tool Selection Menu where we can access the Mechanical Characterization Program. the tool reads the appropriate feedback device and stores the value in the appropriate characterization file. When the user responds. The system firmware must be told how the values of these feedback devices relate to the actual machine characteristics. The tool also provides a mechanism to download the files to the firmware and to view the files. This section describes the user interface to the characterization tool. The characterization tool leads the user through the process of building the characterization files in a step by step fashion. The Characterization tool allows a service person to define a reference value to each of these feedback devices. The system firmware tracks various mechanical characteristics of the machine by reading feedback devices. ILLUSTRATION 4–6 SELECT MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION TOOL SELECTIONS Install Calibrate Mechncal Charact Genrator Charact Tube Align Heat Soak & Season System Perform Detector Slope List Select Images Patient Scans Diag Scans DD Files CALS Scanning Diagnostics DAS Tools DDC Scan Analysis DD File Analysis Cal Plot Utility Functions File Manager Scan File Manager Cancel Utility 4–12 .

Use this tool to characterize the following: · · · · Gantry Tilt Position Table Elevation Table Cradle Collimator ILLUSTRATION 4–7 MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION MENU MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All Actions: Characterize Hardware Reset Data View Collima– tor Data Charact Limits View Values View Log Cancel Utility Tools 4–13 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the |Mechncal Charact| softkey (Illustration 4–6) to display the screen shown in Illustration 4–7.

then follow the Tilt Characterization instructions displayed on the plasma screen. (See Illustration 4–8.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4–10–1 Gantry Tilt Position HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch |Tilt| and |Characterize| in sequence.) ILLUSTRATION 4–8 GANTRY TILT CHARACTERIZATION MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All Actions: Characterize Hardware Reset Data View Collima– tor Data Charact Limits View Values View Log Cancel Utility Tools 4–14 .

(See Illustration 4–9) ILLUSTRATION 4–9 TABLE ELEVATION CHARACTERIZATION MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All Actions: Characterize Hardware Reset Data View Collima– tor Data Charact Limits View Values View Log Cancel Utility Tools 4–15 . Note: Do not use elevation heights or measurement positions depicted on the plasma display. 3. use elevation heights and measurement positions described below. Move measurement plate on right side of table to ‘out’ position. Remove upper right and lower right table covers. Move measurement plate at right rear of table to ‘out’ position. Procedure: 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4–10–2 Table Elevation Characterization HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 To accurately position the elevation. Touch |Table Elevation| and |Characterize| in sequence. then follow the Characterization instructions displayed on the plasma screen. 2. Tighten mounting screws for both plates. Instead. the user needs to measure the distance from the top of the weldment plate to the rear leg upper pivot pin on the table.

ILLUSTRATION 4–10 ELEVATION DISTANCE MEASUREMENT Rear leg upper pivot pin Gantry Measure This Distance Measurement from bottom of plate for lower position measurement Rear leg upper pivot pin Measure This Distance Measurement from bottom of plate for upper position measurement ÀÀÀÀÀ À ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀ etc board Weldment Plate Top of Weldment Plate LOWER POSITION DISTANCE = 14.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 Note: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 When measuring elevation distance. measure as vertically as possible. per Illustration 4–10.44 INCHES(925. Measure between the bottom surface of the appropriate measurement block (same plane as the top of the weldment plate) and the center of the rear leg upper pivot pin.6MM) CT38886A 4–16 .7 INCHES(373.4MM) CT38885A Gantry ÀÀÀÀÀ À ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀ etc board Weldment Plate Top of Weldment Plate UPPER POSITION DISTANCE = 36. This measurement is critical. Elevation characterization will fail if this measurement is incorrect.

(See Illustration 4–11. then follow the Characterization instructions displayed on the plasma screen.) ILLUSTRATION 4–11 CRADLE CHARACTERIZATION MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All Actions: Characterize Hardware Reset Data View Collima– tor Data Charact Limits View Values View Log Cancel Utility Tools 4–17 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4–10–3 Cradle Characterization HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch |Cradle| and |Characterize| in sequence.

17.7. 14.) Hold down L1 and B keys simultaneously again to get back to the characterization menu. Note: The system requires approximately 2 minutes to download diagnostics. Proceed as follows: 1. Touch |Update Table| to display a message on the plasma which says that the CRC value is incorrect. 15. Touch |Collimator| softkey. 10. Touch |180 Degree| to set Tube Position. Enter the CRC value on the characterization screen. Note the CRC value displayed on the screen. Touch |Scanning Hardware| softkey. 2. Touch |Air| softkey. 13. 6. Enter the characterization values that are listed on the collimator characterization label. Touch |Update Table| to display a message that characterization completed successfully. 8. Touch |Run|. 4. 3. 11. hold down L1 and B keys simultaneously. not the hexa–decimal value. To get the correct CRC value. 10mm and closed positions. Touch |1mm| softkey. 16. Touch |Utility|. Touch |Gantry| softkey. 12. 4–18 . 3. Verify plasma messages: ‘Current mode = at position‘ ‘All power supplies are OK‘ Visually verify that 1mm aperture is visible and centered by looking into the collimator. 2. 9. Touch |Backup| softkey. Touch |Diags| softkey. 4. 7. 4–10–4–1 Collimator Exercises 1. 5. Touch the |3mm| softkey. Touch |Download Diags|. (The decimal value. Touch the |Collimator Data| softkey shown in Illustration 4–12. Touch |Accept| softkey. Repeat above procedure for 5. Touch |1mm| to deselect the 1mm aperture setting. Touch |Run| Verify plasma messages: ‘Current mode = at position‘ ‘All power supplies are OK‘ Visually verify that 3mm aperture is visible and centered by looking into the collimator. Press return key on keyboard.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4–10–4 Collimator Characterization HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The characterization tool provides a means for the user to view and update the current collimator characterization data. Touch the |Accept| softkey.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 4–12 COLLIMATOR CHARACTERIZATION MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 All Actions: Characterize Hardware Reset Charact Limits View Values View Log Data View Collimator Data Cancel Utility Tools ILLUSTRATION 4–13 COLLIMATOR DATA Collimator CHARACTERIZATION Closed: 1mm: 3mm: 5mm: 7mm: 10mm: CRC: 49017: 0 286 Update Table Cancel Utility Tools Backup 4–19 .

ILLUSTRATION 4–14 HARDWARE RESET SOFTKEY MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All Actions: Characterize Hardware Reset Data View Collima– tor Data Charact Limits View Values View Log Cancel Utility Tools 4–20 . including a download of the firmware to the controllers and a download of the characterization/configuration files.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4–10–5 Hardware Reset HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the |Hardware Reset| softkey (Illustration 4–14) to reset the firmware.

3 inches (171 cm.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4–10–6 Characterization Limits HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the |Charact Limits| softkey (Illustration 4–15) to display the limit values for for each of the characterized functions in storage in a disk resident configuration file.0 inch (2. The limit values: · · · GANTRY TILT: Minimum = –30_ / Maximum= 30_ TABLE CRADLE: Minimum = 0 inches / Maximum= 67.66 cm.) TABLE ELEVATION: Minimum = 1.) / Maximum = 22.7 inches (57.54 cm.) Note: Measure table elevation limit distances from iso center. ILLUSTRATION 4–15 CHARACTERIZATION LIMITS SOFTKEY MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All Actions: Characterize Hardware Reset Data View Collima– tor Data Charact Limits View Values View Log Cancel Utility Tools 4–21 .

0 22.3 in 1.0 0. etc. table elevation and table cradle position. shown in Illustration 4–17. table elevation. In addition to the characterization values for gantry tilt. to display the current disk resident table containing the characterization values for each of the functions (e.g.). Touch the |View Values| softkey.0 in (Distance from ISO–Center) Cancel Utility Tools Mach Charact 4–10–7 View Values The system stores all characterization values in disk files.0 Degrees 67.7 MAX 30. the table displays the max/min limits for encoder counts (elevation and cradle) and the limits for the cradle and tilt pot outputs (in counts). The data shows the last change for the respective function.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 ILLUSTRATION 4–16 CHARACTERIZATION LIMITS MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION LIMITS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 MIN Tilt: Cradle: Elevation: –30. 4–22 .. gantry tilt.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 4–17 VIEW VALUES SOFTKEY MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 All Actions: Characterize Hardware Reset Data View Collima– tor Data Charact Limits View Values View Log Cancel Utility Tools ILLUSTRATION 4–18 MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION VALUES MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION VALUES TILT POSITION TABLE ELEVATION POS MIN MAX Distance from ISO center: CRADLE POS MIN MAX Alignment Lights Cancel Backup Actual Distance Cradle Pot Actual Limits Cradle Encoder Actual Limits Low High Actual Limits Elevation Encoder Values Actual Limits Low High First Prior Next Last Dump To IP 4–23 .

The following events result in a log entry: · · · Characterization program entry and exit Characterization file modified Characterization file downloaded The View Log feature displays the event messages and the time associated with the respective event. The characterization tool builds a log as it executes to provide a characterization program history.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4–10–8 View Log HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the |View Log| softkey (Illustration 4–19) to display the characterization log. ILLUSTRATION 4–19 VIEW LOG SOFTKEY MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Hardware Reset Charact Limits View Values View Log Cradle All Actions: Characterize Data View Collima– tor Data Cancel Utility Tools ILLUSTRATION 4–20 MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION LOG MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION LOG >>> 1 >>> 09/29/94 12:30 PM >>> MECH CHAR Begin Mechanical Characterization >>> 2 >>> 09/29/94 12:36 PM >>> MECH CHAR Hardware reset has failed >>> 3 >>> 09/29/94 12:39 PM >>> MECH CHAR End Mechanical Characterization >>> 4>>> 09/29/94 02:25 PM >>> MECH CHAR Begin Mechanical Characterization >>> 5 >>> 09/29/94 02:26 PM >>> MECH CHAR End Mechanical Characterization >>>6 >>> 09/29/94 02:27 PM >>> MECH CHAR Begin Mechanical Characterization Cancel Backup First Prior Next Last Dump To IP 4–24 .

and go to the next page. 5–1 . This is an iterative process which takes several scans at a different KV/MA/spot size. ILLUSTRATION 5–1 CT TOOLS SOFTKEY MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools Diags CT Tools System Access Shell System Tools Service Notepad Shutdown Cancel 5–2 Generator Characterization Illustration 5–2 shows the Tool Selections Menu containing the Generator Characterization Program used to set up and calibrate the generator hardware to accurately generate x–rays at the given kV/mA.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 5 – HV SUBSYSTEM MAINTENANCE 5–1 Access CT Tools Touch the |CT Tools| softkey at the Utilities Main Men. repeats the scan until the results are within tolerance and then updates the characterization file. calculates corrections. Illustration 5–1. Use the Generator Characterization Program to update the “small spot” and “large spot” characterization files to provide a starting point for the closed loop mode of the generator.

The dashed boxes indicate the |Manual HVPS| and |Auto HVPS Cal| softkeys are inactive.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 ILLUSTRATION 5–2 SELECT GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TOOL SELECTIONS Install Calibrate Mechncal Charact Genrator Charact Tube Align Heat Soak & Season System Perform Detector Slope List Select Images Patient Scans Diag Scans DD Files CALS Scanning Diagnostics DAS Tools DDC Scan Analysis DD File Analysis Cal Plot Utility Functions File Manager Scan File Manager Cancel Utility Touch the |Genrator Charact| softkey. to display the Generator Characterization Menu (Illustration 5–3). shown in Illustration 5–2. 5–2 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 ILLUSTRATION 5–3 GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION MENU HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION Calibration Install New Tube Read Metering Manual HVPS Cal Manual mA Cal Auto HVPS Cal Auto mA Cal Data Viewing View Cal Data View Cal Log INACTIVE Cancel Utility Tools Monitor Enable 5–3 .

Illustration 5–5 shows the displayed Anode kV. the firmware reads the metering circuits in the OFF state. ILLUSTRATION 5–4 GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION MENU GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION Calibration Install New Tube Read Metering Manual HVPS Cal Manual mA Cal Auto HVPS Cal Auto mA Cal Data Viewing View Cal Data View Cal Log Cancel Utility Tools Monitor Enable Touch the |Run| softkey (Illustration 5–5) to start the test. During the test. Compare the data in the “Delta” column on the Read Meter screen (Illustration 5–5) to the data in the “Limit” column. 5–4 . This section describes the calibration check of the systems internal kV metering circuits. Note: “Delta” = DVM – A/D. then reads the metering circuits in the ON state and finally reports the readings to the plasma display. Cathode kV and Total kV values for “Circuit OFF” and “Circuit ON”.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 5–2–1 kV Meter Verification HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the |Read Metering| softkey (Illustration 5–4).

x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x Run Enter Time Delay in Seconds: 5 Cancel Utility Tools Gen Cal 5–5 .5 Cathode kV = 50 ±7.x Current Readings Anode KV Off: xxx.x xxx.x Anode mA Cathode mA xxx.x OFF Delta xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.5 Total kV = 0 ±0.x xxx.x Cathode KV xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x Limi xxx.x xxx.5 Total kV = 100 ± 15.x xxx.x xxx.5 Cathode kV = 0 ±0.x Total KV xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x On: xxx.x DVM _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ON A/D xxx.x Delta xxx.x xxx.x xxx.0 ILLUSTRATION 5–5 READ METER SCREEN READ METERING DVM Anode KV: _____ Cathode KV: _____ Total KV: _____ Anode MA: _____ Cathode MA: _____ A/D xxx.5 Circuit ON Anode kV = 50 ±7.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Generator Characterization test specifications: Circuit OFF Anode kV = 0 ±0.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x Limit xxx.

5–6) MUST BE OUT. HARM TO OTHERS OR DEATH. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL HARM.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 5–2–2 mA Meter Verification HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 This section describes the calibration check of the systems internal mA metering circuits. DANGER NEVER PUT ANY BODY PART INTO THE GANTRY WITHOUT DISABLING THE AXIAL DRIVE AND VERIFYING THAT IT IS DISABLED. BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46–018302. CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINE MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46–018308 SAFETY VIDEO TAPE PRIOR TO SERVICING THE GANTRY ILLUSTRATION 5–6 AXIAL DRIVE STATUS AND CONTROL AXIAL DRIVE STATUS LEDS AXIAL LOOP CONTACTOR CLOSED 550 BACKUP CONTACTOR CLOSED GANTRY 120VAC CONTACTOR CLOSED GANTRY STATUS DISPLAY PANEL AXIAL DRIVE ENABLE SWITCH AXIAL DRIVE ENABLE ON 550VDC ENABLE ON GANTRY 120VAC ENABLE ON OFF OFF OFF CAUTION: DISABLES TUBE COOLING CT3529A 5–6 . DO NOT SERVICE THE GANTRY IF EITHER LED IS ON. BOTH OF THE AXIAL DRIVE STATUS LEDS (ILL.

If no wire is present. When you exit Utilities. Note: If your system has the test wire to TP5 included in the harness. On the Plasma. · Note: Disconnect the test equipment from the Anode side if used. Use a DVM as an mA meter. Connect its red lead to TP11 (ACAL2) on the mA board. connect it to the hardware on the anode side: · · Connect its black lead to TP8 (ACAL1) on the mA board.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 Inside the Gantry: · · · · HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Switch OFF the 550v (HVDC) enable (Illustration 5–6) Switch OFF the axial drive. If a wire from the harness is present on TP5. Pin the Gantry. touch the |Run| softkey. (Illustration 5–3) Note: On the plasma enter a time delay in seconds. The test will not begin until this time delay has expired. this test generates “Kv board tube spit counter = x” error messages. Touch the |Read Metering| softkey on the Generator Characterization Menu. install a test lead as follows: · · · Use a jumper with a 68 ohm 5 watt resistor in series. the Cathode side should read approximately 19mA during “Circuit On”. Locate the Anode HV Tank Measurement board (Illustration 5–7 ). Rotate the Anode tank to the 2 o’clock position. Record the displayed and measured Anode mA values in for “Circuit OFF” and “Circuit ON”. this delay is the time required for you to walk from the console to the DVM and record the reading. Once the test begins the meter circuit will be enabled for only 4 seconds. the following test lead is not required. 5–7 . Connect one end to TP11 (ACAL 2) on the mA board. Connect the other end to TP5 on the Anode Tank Measurement board (Illustration 5–7).

Record the displayed and measured Anode mA values for “Circuit OFF” and “Circuit ON”. the Anode side should read approximately 20mA during “Circuit On”. If a wire from the harness is present on TP5. Connect one end to TP14 (CCAL 2) on the mA board. the following test lead is not required. Note: If your system has the test wire to TP5 included in the harness. 5–8 . If no wire is present. · Note: Disconnect the test equipment from the Cathode side if used. this test generates “Kv board tube spit counter = x” error messages. Use a DVM as an mA meter: · · Connect its black lead to TP9 (CCAL1) on the mA board. Locate the Cathode HV Tank Measurement board (Illustration 5–7). When you exit Utilities. install a test lead as follows: · · · Use a jumper with a 68 ohm 5 watt resistor in series. Connect the other end to TP5 on the Cathode Tank Measurement board (Illustration 5–7). On the Plasma. touch the |Run| softkey. Connect its red lead to TP14 (CCAL2) on the mA board.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 ILLUSTRATION 5–7 ANODE TANK MEASUREMENT BOARD & OBC CARD CAGE HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Measurement Board J5 J1 OBC Board Slot Assignments Collimator CTVRC J 6 MA Control KV Control Gentry I/O RCOM Heurikon (CPU) J 2 TP5 C14 Repeat for the Cathode side.

Connect channel two to the cathode output of the divider.) · · · · · Connect channel one to the anode output of the divider. Invert Channel two. Names of components on the 46–321198G1 kV board are shown in [brackets]. (If possible. At the Generator Characterization Menu. Use this procedure to set the calseed values on a new system. Plugging the scope into this outlet reduces noise seen on the waveforms. trigger mode normal. Verify the number corresponds to your tube type. 5–2–4 Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors Install HV Divider (reference Section 5–2–9). Scope ground to bleeder ground. The system prompts you to verify the tube type. 10v/div. 5–9 . Channel one and two. Perform the following. DC couple. Names of components on the 46–321064G1 kV board are shown without brackets. answer y (yes) or n (no): TABLE 5–1 TUBE TYPE TABLE SOFTWARE TOKEN 1–RSN_2001 2–RSN_2000 5–MX_135CT 6–MX_165CT 7–MX_165CT_I HOUSING # ST2000 ST2000 46–274800G1 46–309500G2 46–309500G2 INSERT # RS2001 RS2000 46–274600G1 46–309300G1 46–309300G2 Press Start Scan when it illuminates. Display the Generator Characterization menu (Illustration 5–3) and toggle the MONITOR ENABLE softkey to ON to display the kV and mA readings in the message log. The system automatically resets the CalSeed values during the Tube Warmup program. positive. time base 200ms. plug the scope into the 120 VAC outlet on the PDU. Trigger channel one. touch the |Install New Tube| softkey. The system automatically runs the program and updates the display: – seed filament current shift scans – Note: Note: ABORT the program after the seed filament current shift scans and before the ductility warm–up. Scope ground to bleeder ground. 5–2–4–1 Anode and Cathode Calibration Note: Verify which type of kV board is installed in the OBC.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 5–2–3 Set CalSeed Values HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Use the following sequence to run a partial Install New Tube. steps using an oscilloscope with 10X probes. Use an extension cord if necessary.

static. Compare the scope reading for the average Anode kV and the displayed Anode kV in the message log. exposure at 100kV/50mA. 0mm.5kV of each other. Position the Left Vertical Cursor to the Right of the Rising Edge of the waveform and position the Right Vertical Cursor to the Left of the Falling Edge of the Waveform. Use the large focal spot.5 kV. Record the scope reading for the Cathode kV and the displayed reading for the Cathode kV (message log). Adjust the Cathode pot on the kV Board until the scope reading for the Cathode kV and the displayed reading for the Cathode kV in the message log are within ±0. Note: Use the scope cursors to window the trace. Position the Left Vertical Cursor to the Right of the Rising Edge of the waveform and position the Right Vertical Cursor to the Left of the Falling Edge of the Waveform. Note: The pot labeled CA [CAKV. CW increases the scope kV. 1/2 turn equals approximately 0. CW increases the scope kV. R316] on the kV board adjusts the scope reading: CCW decreases the scope kV.5 kV. F Anode Calibration In DDC take a 1 second. Compare the scope reading for the average Cathode kV and the displayed Cathode kV in the message log.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 F Cathode Calibration HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 In DDC take a 1 second. Adjust the Anode pot on the kV board until the scope reading for the Anode kV and the displayed reading for the Anode kV in the message log are within ±0.5kV of each other. Use the large focal spot. 5–10 . Note: The computer displayed reading spec for the Cathode kV and Anode kV is 50 ±0. Note: The pot labeled AN [ANKV. exposure at 100kV/50mA. static. 0mm. Note: Use the scope cursors to window the trace. 1/2 turn equals approximately 0. Record the scope reading for the Anode kV and the displayed reading for the Anode kV (message log). R318] on the kV board adjusts the scope reading: CCW decreases the scope kV.5 kV.

time base 200ms.2 (to read total kV from the HV divider) and set channel one and two for 20v/div. Remove the external HV Divider (Section 5–2–10). 0mm. to no longer display the kV and mA readings in the message log. Display the Generator Characterization menu and toggle the Monitor Enable softkey OFF.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 5–2–4–2 Total kV Measurement HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 To measure the total kV. then touch |Run| (illustration 5–5) · Record the displayed Anode kV. exposure at 100kV/50mA using large focal spot. one. static. first change the oscilloscope to add ch.1 and ch. and Total kV values. 5–11 . trigger ch. Failure to turn the Monitor Enable OFF results in the system message log filling with exposure information. positive Then proceed as follows: · · · In DDC take a 1 second. Cathode kV. 5–2–4–3 kV Meter Verification Display the Generator Characterization menu (illustration 5–4) and touch |Read Metering|. kV as displayed in the message log. Record the scope reading and Avg.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 5–2–5 Install New Tube Program HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Use this program to complete Auto mA Cal on a new tube. The system prompts you with the tube type. 5–2–6 Auto mA Calibration Run this program for replacement tubes or if there is need to recalibrate. The system automatically runs the program and updates the display: – seed filament current shift scans– – Ductility warm–up – – Auto mA Cal – The system will record the final filament currents on the plasma. the program will now run automatically. Run this program only on a new tube. touch the |Auto mA Cal| softkey. Note: A tube warm–up is performed automatically. TABLE 5–2 TUBE TYPE TABLE SOFTWARE TOKEN 1–RSN_2001 2–RSN_2000 5–MX_135CT 6–MX_165CT 7–MX_165CT_I HOUSING # ST2000 ST2000 46–274800G1 46–309500G2 46–309500G2 INSERT # RS2001 RS2000 46–274600G1 46–309300G1 46–309300G2 Press Start Scan when it illuminates. At the Generator Characterization Menu. Display the Generator Characterization Menu and touch the |Install New Tube| softkey. – Ductility warm–up – – Auto mA Cal – The system will record the final filament currents on the plasma. Note: The system automatically warms up the tube. answer y or n. Press Start Scan when illuminated. 5–12 . Verify the number corresponds to your tube type.

1. Exposure Command (EXCM. TP22). Record the delay between rise / fall of the EXCM signal and the 75% threshold crossing of the selected kV.9ms 0 +1.5ms –0 +2ms –0 +0. Total kV (KVTB. TP30) [TP11].5ms –0 +2ms –0 +0.9ms Fall Record Delay ms Limit –0 +2ms –0 +0. In the OBC connect a scope to the KV board as follows: · · · Channel 1. 0mm aperture.5ms See Illustration 5–8 for clarification of measurement.9ms 0 +1. 5–13 .9ms 0 +1. Scope ground to (LGND.9ms 0 +1. TP12].9ms 0 +1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 5–2–7 kV Rise and Fall Times Note: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Names of components on the 46–321198G1 kV board are shown on this page in [brackets].9ms 0 +1. 2v/div Channel 2. Large Focal Spot scan at the techniques listed in Table 5–3.9ms 0 +1. 1v/div Set the Scope Time base to 200usec. Positive or Negative trigger as required. TP39) [SIG.5ms –0 +2ms –0 +0. Do not include overshoot of the waveform. TP6) [TP3]. Use DDC to acquire a Stationary. Scope ground to (AGND.0 sec scan. Note: The 75% point for: 80kV is 60kV 100kV is 75kV 120kV is 90kV 140kV is 105kV TABLE 5–3 KV RISE AND FALL TIME RECORD TABLE Technic kV 80 100 120 140 mA 40 400 40 400 40 400 40 340 Note: Rise Record Delay ms Limit 0 +1.

1 TP 22 EXCM [TP5] Names of components on the 46–321198G1 kV board are shown on this page in [brackets]. FALL TIME 100% XRAY 75% OF SELECTED TECHNIC Ch.1 TP 22 EXCM [TP5] Names of components on the 46–321198G1 kV board are shown on this page in [brackets].2 TP 30 KVTB [TP11] 0% XRAY FALL TIME EXAMPLE 80kV/40mA Ch.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 5–8 RISE AND FALL TIME MEASUREMENT HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 RISE TIME EXAMPLE 80kV/40mA Ch. RISE TIME 75% OF SELECTED TECHNIC Ch.2 TP 30 KVTB [TP11] 5–14 .

Add ground wire (minimum size of AWG 12) from Tube ground to Bleeder ground (Illustration 5–9). TP39) [SIG. Displayed Exposure Duration = 0. Rotate the Tube to the 3 o’clock position Pin the Gantry. 1v/div Set the Scope Time base to 200msec. Switch OFF the axial drive enable. positive trigger. · Record the measured scan time from the oscilloscope and the displayed scan time from the message log. TP22). Exposure Command (EXCM. TP30) [TP11]. Toggle the softkey |Monitor Enable| to ON. Use DDC to take a stationary. to display the scan time in the message log. 5–2–9 Install HV Divider Inside the Gantry: · · · · · · · Switch OFF the 550v (HVDC) enable. Scope ground to (AGND.02 s. TP6) [TP3]. In the OBC connect a scope to the KV board as follows: · · · Channel 1. TP12]. 100kV. Disconnect the scope from the kV board and replace the OBC cover. Scope ground to (LGND. WARNING: CLEAN UP ANY SPILLED INSULATING OIL FROM THE FLOOR OR EQUIPMENT! 5–15 . Switch off the 120 vac Gantry power. Failure to turn the Monitor Enable OFF results in the system message log filling with exposure information. Spec limits are as follows: Note: Note: Scope Exposure Duration = 0. to no longer display the kV and mA readings in the message log. 0mm.99 to 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 5–2–8 Verify Internal Scan Timer HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Display the Generator Characterization menu (illustration 5–3).0 sec. Total kV (KVTB. Large Focal Spot scan. Install HV Divider between Tube and Tanks (Illustration 5–9).04 s. 1. 2v/div Channel 2. Display the Generator Characterization menu (illustration 5–3) and toggle the Monitor Enable softkey OFF. 40mA.96 to 1.

Re–apply paper toweling around tube locking ring to absorb excess oil.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 Note: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 A table or a tube hoist for the HV Divider will be necessary to make the cables reach. Inside the gantry (refer to illustration 5–6): · · · · · · · Switch OFF the 550v (HVDC) enable. Switch on the 550v (HVDC) enable. · · Switch on the 120vac Gantry power. ILLUSTRATION 5–9 HV DIVIDER INSTALLATION GROUND WIRE GRN CATHODE CABLE TO GANTRY CATHODE C 10” H. Reconnect the HV cables for normal operation. Switch OFF the 120vac gantry power. Switch on the 120vac gantry power. CABLES ANODE C1515A DIVIDER ANODE CABLE TO GANTRY A C G A C A Oscilloscope Connection TUBE WARNING: 5–2–10 Clean up any spilled insulating oil from the floor or equipment! Remove the external HV Divider: · Switch off “X–Ray and Drives” power by pressing the “Emergency OFF button on the Gantry Mounted Table controls or by pressing the “X–Ray and Drives OFF” on the REM box. 5–16 .V. Remove the HV Divider between the Tube and Tanks (Illustration 5–9). Un–pin the gantry.

ILLUSTRATION 5–10 SHELL SOFTKEY MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools System Access Diags CT Tools Shell System Tools Service Notepad Shutdown Cancel The shell window displays a tube list. 5–17 . Reset the hardware from the plasma. Switch on “X–Ray and Drives” power by pressing the “Reset” button on the Gantry Mounted Table controls or by pressing the “X–Ray and Drives ON” on the REM box. Open a shell to use this tool. displays a list of currently viewable tube usage files. Type tubeUsage in the shell.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 · · · HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Switch ON the the 550v (HVDC) enable. with the corresponding installation dates. · 5–3 Tube Usage Statistics The display tool. The system stores these files when you save the mechanical characterization. tubeUsage. Touch the |Shell| softkey at the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 5–10) to open and display a unix shell. Switch ON the Axial Drive enable.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 root @ RPXX2_OC0 2: tubeUsage Tube Date Installed Tube Date Installed –––– –––––––––––––– 1 Wed Oct 5 20:06:11 1994 2 Fri Jul 29 22:00:55 1994 3 Tue Jun 28 20:42:02 1994 c Cumulative Statistics q Quit Choose the tube to display the following: tube to view:1 Hospital: Name Address Suite: RPXX2 Installed: Wed Oct 5 20:06:11 CDT 1994 Removed: Last Scan: Thu Jan 5 08:29:17 CST 1995 Housing Model #: 46–309500G2 Housing Serial #: 89851EC0 Insert Model #: 46–309300G2 Insert Serial #: 316778TU0 Failure Code: Mode: Patient Scans Number Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with X–ray on) Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW. 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 45.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 11302. 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 495.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1) Mode: Non–Patient Scans Number Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with X–ray on) Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW.74 (total number of seconds of scanning) After the first tube change with an RP1. the tube usage screen displays the following information: Mode: Patient Scans Number Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with X–ray on) Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1) Mode: Non–Patient Scans Number Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with X–ray on) Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW.4 software (or later release).23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning) 5–18 . 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 45. 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 495.66 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 69785.66 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 69785.

From OC0 root prompt.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 11302.g. Control D.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 12 HSA±RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Mode: Patient Scans – Smart mA Number Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with X-ray on) Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW. 5-4 Change Tube Program Run this program when you change the tube.74 (total number of seconds of scanning) The Smart mA information duplicates the non Smart mA information. except the kW Hours indicates any reduction in power due to SmartScan use. Enter tube casing serial number. e. 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 45. Also represents a function key e. genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: su <ENTER> password: #bigguy <ENTER> root @ <suiteID>_OC0: changeTube <ENTER> Proceed as follows: ´ ´ ´ ´ Enter failure code for removed tube. From the menu on the screen enter the number which corresponds to your tube type. 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 400. <angles> – This type indicates that a value is DIFFERENT THAN INDICATED IN THIS DOCUMENT. Note: Words in bold type followed by <ENTER> means to type that word and then press the ENTER key. Bring up applications as follows: root @ <suiteID>_OC0: st <ENTER> 5–19 . Open a shell and enter the following unix commands: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: sd -i <ENTER> (Shuts down to unix level).19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1) Mode: Non-Patient Scans – Smart mA Number Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with X-ray on) Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW. means to type the word su and then press the ENTER key.54 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 69785. su <ENTER>.g. <ENTER> means you must press the ENTER key. to exit back to genesis. Enter tube insert serial number. BUT WITHIN THE CONTEXT OF THE PROMPT.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Notes: 5–20 .

CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED THE CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO. CAUTION 6–1 .) Verify all personnel have cleared the system before you turn on the wall power. CONSIDER ALL POINTS WITHIN THE PDU TO BE ELECTRICALLY HAZARDOUS. generates unregulated high voltage direct current that ranges between 450 and 750VDC. DO NOT WORK ON THE PDU UNTIL YOU HAVE EITHER READ DIRECTION 46–018302. (FOR 1. This document refers to this PDU voltage as HVDC. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. 480 VAC AND OTHER LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT AT VARIOUS POINTS WITHIN THE PDU AT ALL TIMES.X SYSTEMS ONLY. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. part number 2133533. THEREFORE.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 6 – PDU MAINTENANCE 6–1 PDU Safety Warning DANGER EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHEN SERVICING THE PDU. The CT Compact PDU. DANGER IN ADDITION. DO NOT PERFORM ANY WORK IN THE PDU UNLESS IT IS DE–ENERGIZED.

we refer to the Circuit Breaker Panel as the “A3” panel. This manual uses the component designators as abbreviations for the various components. Detail B A1 Panel Fuses A5 Panel Control Bd Power Distribution Power Input Detail D A3 Panel A4 Panel Detail C I/O DCRGS= Direct Current ReGulated Supply. ILLUSTRATION 6–1 PDU AREA DESIGNATORS PDU DCRGS Detail A A2 Panel A6 Panel Servo Amplifier Assy. 6–2 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 6–2 PDU Major Component Locations HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustration 6–1 shows the PDU component area designators. For example.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 6–2–1 PDU 2133533 Area Designators HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 6–2 PDU 2133533 AREA DESIGNATORS SERVO AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY A1 PANEL PDU CONTROL BOARD A6 PANEL TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY (in back) A5 PANEL AC POWER DISTRIBUTION A3 PANEL HVDC SUPPLY A2 PANEL INPUT POWER A3 PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTORS BULKHEAD A4 PANEL 6–3 .

if the lowest voltage is 474.02 = 483. Determine the nearest nominal line and verify the correct tap connections. Verify less than 1 ohm of resistance between the following ground connections: D D D D D Wall ground connection and PDU cabinet PDU A2 chassis to the PDU cabinet PDU A3–TS5 busbar to the PDU cabinet PDU A4–TS3 busbar to the PDU cabinet PDU A5–TS1 busbar to the PDU cabinet d. FAILURE TO DISCONNECT POWER AT MAIN INPUT MAY RESULT IN ELECTROCUTION. c. 6–4 . PT5. Direction 46–018307 describes the installation and setup of the isolation transformer. Remove ribbon cable connector from DCRGS.02 times the lowest voltage. Verify that the No Load Line to Line Voltage never exceeds the corresponding maximum or minimum values listed in the Table. Note: If input power is not 480v ±38 volts. perform a ground continuity check as follows: a. 6–4 Line Transformer Settings Use this section to verify or to change transformer settings. Verify that the highest line–to–line voltage does not exceed 1.5 volts. using a 0–750 AC voltmeter of #@4% accuracy. Measure line–to–line voltages at A5–PT4. Remove front cover from PDU A3 (circuit breaker) panel (Ill. CAUTION Do not touch meter or leads when wall power is on. 6–1) b. Leave PDU A3 cover (circuit breaker) panel off for now. the highest voltage allowed would be 474 x 1. WARNING TURN OFF.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 6–3 Ground Bus Continuity HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 If problems arise which point to a possible system grounding problem. Refer to Table 6–1. Reconnect DCRGS ribbon cable connector e. install a B7997T System Isolation Transformer in line with the 480 volt input power to the DCRGS. TAG AND LOCK MAIN WALL POWER BEFORE CHANGING TAPS. and PT6. For example.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 TABLE 6–1 LINE TAP CONNECTION TABLE FOR PDU 46–327106G1 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 NO LOAD LINE TO LINE VOLTAGES PREFERRED RANGE (+/– 5%) MAXIMUM RANGE (+/– 8%) TAP CONNECTIONS (All 3 phases must be same configuration) PHASE A CONNECTION 1–6 1–5 2–6 2–5 3–6 3–5 4–6 4–5 PHASE B CONNECTION 1–6 1–5 2–6 2–5 3–6 3–5 4–6 4–5 PHASE C CONNECTION 1–6 1–5 2–6 2–5 3–6 3–5 4–6 4–5 NOMINAL 500V 480V 460V 440V 420V 400V 380V 360V 475 to 525 456 to 504 437 to 483 418 to 462 399 to 441 380 to 420 361 to 399 342 to 378 460 to 540 442 to 518 424 to 496 405 to 475 387 to 453 368 to 432 350 to 410 332 to 388 6–5 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 TABLE 6–2 LINE TAP CONNECTION TABLE FOR PDU 2113764 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 NO LOAD LINE TO LINE VOLTAGES NOMINAL 480V 460V 440V 420V 400V 380V 360V MAXIMUM RANGE (+/– 8%) 442 to 518 423 to 497 405 to 475 386 to 454 368 to 432 350 to 410 331 to 389 TAP CONNECTIONS PHASE A CONNECTION 4–6 3–5 3–6 2–6 3–7 2–7 2–8 6–6 .

System configuration should be: D D D Flex cables ON All covers ON Nothing in detector FOV 7–2 DDC Scanning Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu: a. the plasma displays the DD filename. d. Press the the Start Scan key to initiate the scan. Touch the |Tools| softkey to return to the Tools Selection Menu. j. lows and shorts using X–Ray. Use default technique values of 40 mA and 80 kV. Touch the |DDC| softkey (Diagnostic Data Collection) on the plasma display. Touch the |Small| Spot Size softkey. m. i. k. Touch the |Backup| softkey. f. c. Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey and wait for the Start Scan LED on the keyboard to illuminate. e.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 7 – DAS MAINTENANCE 7–1 X–Ray Verification This section tests for opens. Press the [RETURN] key on the keyboard until you highlight the Scan Time field. Record the filename. l. g. Type/enter a Run Description name (arbitrary). 7–1 . b. Type/enter 4 second scan time. Touch the |Static X–Ray On| softkey. Touch the |5|(mm) Aperture softkey. After the scan. h. Touch the |Real Time Stats| softkey.

000–81.500 25. h.000–65. TABLE 7–1 VALUES FOR DAS CHANNELS Touch the |Plot| softkey. g.000 35. e.000 66.000–112. Touch the |Continue| softkey. Touch the |Plot| softkey for the output device. f. Touch the |DD File Analysis| softkey.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 7–3 Data Plot HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu: a.000 7–2 .000–81. The |Type/Print or Plot| softkey is already highlighted.000–112. Touch the |DD| softkey to select the most recent scan. c.000 HP DAS 25. i. d. b. Touch the |Line| softkey. Touch the |Means| softkey. Note: Verify that the first channel is 1 and the total channels equal 764.500 10. EDAS Channels 6–64 Channels 689–747 Channels 65–688 66. Touch the |Continue| softkey.000–44.

which uses both Large and Small spots. Tube Output and Detector Channel Check – A limit check. except ISO. Beam on Window – Adjust detector into or out of the gantry (Z–axis). collimator. Note: Use the Large focal spot for all alignments. 8–1 . Adjust collimator rotation. and the detector.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 8 – SYSTEM ALIGNMENTS 8–1 Overview This section describes the procedures for attaining the x–ray alignment specifications. Center Body Filter and System Sag – Adjust collimator and filter up/down (Y–axis). no adjustments. Isocenter Alignment – Adjust tube up/down (Y–axis). The critical components for alignment are the tube unit. Radial Alignment – Adjust detector CW or CCW. · · · · · · Plane of Rotation – Adjust tube into or out of the gantry (Z–axis). Calculate Sag parameters. (no adjustments). Follow these procedures to align the X–Ray system.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 8–2 Plane Of Rotation (POR) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the x–ray fan beam to make it perpendicular to the axis of gantry rotation within 0. 2. When exposed and developed.g. This procedure offsets the fan beam to account for the slight shift that occurs with heating of the x–ray tube. 4. so that the film projects into the gantry as shown in Illustration 8–1. 5. Remove and develop the film. to initiate the scan. Press the (Start Scan) key on the console. you must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure. Touch |Accept Rx| softkey. Position the side of the film marked “This side toward lens” toward isocenter. Touch the |View Compressed| softkey. advance the cradle and position the film for an exposure near the image center mark on the film pack. CAUTION Verify that the tube unit is cold. 3. you must wait at least 90 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool. the film shows the alignment of the two beams. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC. as viewed with the X–Ray tube at the 3 o’clock position. Place the phantom holder and 48cm phantom on the cradle. when it illuminates. Type/enter 4 (seconds) for Scan Time.. Type/enter 40 in the mA data field. Turn on the alignment lights. Touch the |Axial X–Ray On| softkey. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate POR alignment POR Procedure: 1.25mm) across the largest reconstruction circle (48cm). if the tube unit has had greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min. Tape a type 52 film at the 3 o’clock position on the outside edge of the 48cm phantom. Touch |Large| Spot Size softkey. Mark a “T” on the film to identify the table side as in Illustration 8–1. If you have executed any low technique scans prior to beginning plane of rotation (POR). Prepare to scan with DDC: · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Touch the |DDC| softkey. Type/enter 0 (degrees) for X–Ray ON Position.010” (0. If you have previously executed image scanning and would like to re–check POR. Type/enter 80 in the kV data field. Verify that the narrow exposure lies within the wider x–ray exposure. Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. with the table at the left. Type/enter POR in the Run Description field. Touch the |10|(mm) Aperture softkey. Touch the |Bowtie| Filter softkey. 8–2 . e.

XF must be slightly less than XR.23” XR 0. Both edges of each beam should be equally well defined with the edges of the narrow beam much sharper than the wide beam. the tube shift should be 0. shift the Z position of the x–ray tube toward the wider of the two beams.26 [XF–XR + 0. [XF–XR]/2 must fall in the range of 0. Both edges of the beam should be defined only by the exit slit of the collimator. Use a Pocket Comparator with reticle or vernier caliper to measure the two widths of the wide beam not covered by the narrow beam.02”). If there is a difference in edge definition.26 [XF–XR + 0.5mm] ILLUSTRATION 8–1 POR SETUP XF 0. these dimensions are designated as XF(front) and XR(rear). the x–ray tube needs to be shifted by the formula: Tube Shift = 0.15” 48Ccm PE PHANTOM GANTRY TAPE FILM HERE T NARROW BEAM TUBE AT 270_ THEA TABLE DIRECTION WIDE BEAM TUBE AT 90_THEA T GANTRY DIRECTION CT2721A TABLE 8–3 .0 to –0.25mm). In other words. If the 10mm beam XF and XR measurements do not meet the specification in step 6. check for gross Z misalignment where the slit in the tube collimator adapter is defining the fuzzy edge. Therefore.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 Note: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Examine the edges of the two exposures in the Z direction. As shown in Illustration 8–1. 6.14” XF 0.26 times the difference between XF and (XR –0.07” XR 0.0 to –0. 7.010” (0. To meet the “cold” tube conditions and maintain the perpendicularity specification of the fan beam. the difference in center lines of the two beams is [XF–XR]/2. Measure the 10 mm exposure to determine the plane of rotation.02”] = 0. By gantry geometry.

Examine the 1. Repeat the previous steps for the 1.0mm aperture. (360 ±36 inch–lbs.02)= 0. Attach the exposed film to your site log.23–0. 8–4 . 3.0 mm exposure and check that the edges of the wide beam can be seen on either side of the narrow beam.07 + 0. Note: Hand tighten the circular knurled nut to prevent the Z adjust lever from rattling loose.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 Note: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 A positive tube shift moves the tube toward the table.).047 inches. Wait 5 minutes and perform the following for the 1. the x–ray tube should be moved toward the table to shift the wide beam to be better centered over the narrow beam. When the Plane of Rotation is within specification.0mm aperture: 1. In the example of Illustration 8–1.0 ft–lbs. a negative shift towards the gantry.0mm aperture plane of rotation.26(0. 2. The x–ray tube should be shifted 0. tighten the four tube mounting bolts to a torque of 30 ±3. Remove and develop the film pack. Since it is difficult to measure beam centering on the 1. 4. only perform a visual inspection and note the observed findings.

If you have executed any low technique scans prior to beginning beam on window (BOW). Enter 0” in the tube position entry field and press carriage return. Orient the film with the side marked “This side toward lens” toward the detector. If you have previously executed image scanning and would like to re–check BOW. Display the Tools Selection Menu and use the DDC function to move the tube to 0”azimuth position: · · · · Touch the |DDC| softkey on the plasma. 3. ALSO. CAUTION Verify that the tube unit is cold. WARNING THERE ARE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS IN ACCESSING THE GANTRY. (0”tube position). select “yes”. If gantry is clear. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate BOW alignment. Turn OFF the gantry loop contactor switch and the Gantry 550v (HVDC) enable switch. e. BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46–018302. Touch the |POSITION TUBE| softkey.. place three pieces of Polaroid film on the detector as shown in Illustration 8–2. you must wait at least 30 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool. 8–5 . BOW Procedure: 1. CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46–018308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO PRIOR TO SERVICING THESE SUBSYSTEMS. With the detector at the six o’clock position. you must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure. Message appears saying “Is gantry clear?”. This procedure offsets the beam to account for the fan beam shift toward the table that occurs with heating of the x–ray tube.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 8–3 Beam On Window (BOW) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 This procedure checks and adjusts the position of the detector window so that it intercepts the entire width of the x–ray fan beam under worst case conditions. BE SURE THAT BOTH THE LOOP CONTACTOR AND GANTRY 550 ENABLE SWITCH ARE OFF PRIOR TO ACCESSING THE GANTRY.g. if the tube unit has had greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min. 2. The X–Ray tube should remain in the gantry 12 o’clock position.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 8–2 BEAM ON WINDOW FILM POSITIONING HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8–6 .

another line exactly 1. Refer to Illustration 8–2. 8.12 to 0. Type/enter 2 in Scan Time data field. Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu.24” (31. 12. as shown in Illustration 8–2. The x–ray beam center (CL EXPOSURE) must be within 0. Butt the metal strip on the film tightly against the rotating base of the gantry. Be sure to mark them to remember their relative positions. Touch the |1| (mm) Aperture softkey. Use a vernier caliper or pocket comparator with mm or inch scale reticle to measure the difference between these center lines. Secure with masking tape. Touch the |Start Scan| softkey when prompted. Touch the |Data Collection| softkey.88 mm) of the detector window center but displaced toward the Gantry. 10. Type/enter the 40 in mA data field. 5. If gantry is clear. If these dimensions are XF(front) and XR(rear) the center line difference equals: XF – XR 2 8–7 . select “yes”. Touch the |Static X–Ray On| softkey. place both the loop contactor switch and the Gantry 550v (HVDC) enable switch in the gantry to the ON position. Measure the two edges between the exposure and the window. Make a small pencil mark on both sides of the film at the edge of the detector window closest to the table. Touch the |Real Time Stat| softkey.5mm) from the second line. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. 7. This line must show on the film after it is developed. Place the films back in their positions on the detector. Press heavily on the film and draw a line on the film between the marks you made previously. 6. remove and develop the films. Verify that the pencil marks of step 6 align with the detector window. With the film properly positioned on the detector. Type/enter BOW in the Run Description data field. 9. Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. The center of the X–Ray beam must be toward the gantry on the detector window. Touch the |Position Tube| softkey.00472 inches to 0. Prepare for a stationary scan with DDC: · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Touch the |DDC| softkey. 11.03465 inches (0. Type/enter 80 in kV data field. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC.6mm) from the first line toward the gantry. Type/enter 0 (degrees) in the X–Ray On Position data field. Make two lines on the exposed films: One line exactly 1/16 inch (1. Message appears: “Is gantry clear?”. After the scan completes. Note the position of each film and remove all three pieces of film.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 4.

Turn the mounting studs the specified number of flats to bring the detector into alignment. d.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 To meet specification. c.015 inches or XF – XR = 1. use the following formula: XF – XR = 0. Note: Adjust the detector hardware CW to move the detector toward the gantry. 8–8 . Hold the adjustment stud with a wrench while you tighten the adjustment locking nut. Loosen only the adjustment locking nuts on the mounts which require adjustment.04  0. Tighten the detector mounting nuts.4 mm If adjustment is required.0  0. proceed as follows: a. even if only one or two need adjustment. Loosen all three of the detector mounting nuts. Use the locking nut as a reference for the number of flats. e. b.

0. Specifications: a. Perform 4 axial scan slices of the 20 cm section (water) of the QA phantom against the small cal at a technique of: ––– 20 cm/S/120 kV/170 mA/10 mm/2 s ––– b.00 to 3. Replace the tube if the test results exceeds the specifications depicted above. If tube has more than 5000 scans. 255 for each of the 4 slices. Record the mean CT number and the standard deviation for each slice. Calculate the 4 slice average of the mean CT number and the standard deviation. This check applies to EDAS and HP–DAS. 8–9 .60.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 8–4 Image Noise Check HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 This check is used to verify the integrity of the tube output as well as normal channel output. standard deviation of the ROI). The procedure involves scanning the water section of the Quality Assurance and Performance (QA) Phantom (46–241709G1) and measuring the image noise (i. Place a 51 x 51 pixel ROI box at coordinates 255.0  3. c. If tube has less than 5000 scans..00 to 3. Four slice average for the mean CT number should be 0. 4 slice average for the standard deviation range should be 3.80. c. d. 4 slice average for the standard deviation range should be 3.e. Image Noise Check procedure: a. b.

if the tube unit has had greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min. Don’t bother trying to tweak it in perfectly at this point. BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46–018302. WARNING THERE ARE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS IN ACCESSING THE GANTRY. CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46–018308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO PRIOR TO SERVICING THESE SUBSYSTEMS.. If you have executed any low technique scans prior to beginning radial alignment.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 8–5 Radial Alignment HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Radial alignment is performed only if you have installed a new detector. Otherwise. e. When ISO is roughly set. Use the Isocenter Alignment procedure (section 8–6) and move the tube so that it is within . start with step 1 below. you must wait at least 90 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool. If you have previously executed image scanning and would like to re–check radial alignment. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate radial alignment. Requirement:The initial starting position of the cam must be in the center of its range of motion.g. Radial alignment need only be done for detector installations or if the detector has been removed from the gantry for any reason. ALSO. Note: A rough ISO center adjustment must be made prior to radial alignment. 8–10 .10 channels) of the correct position. CAUTION Verify that the tube unit is cold. you must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure.005”( 0. BE SURE THAT BOTH THE LOOP CONTACTOR AND GANTRY 550 ENABLE SWITCH ARE OFF PRIOR TO ACCESSING THE GANTRY. skip this section and go directly to Isocenter Alignment (section 6).

First. Touch the |Position Tube| softkey. 2. Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection screen. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. If you rotate the gantry more then 5” during these procedures. on the detector. 8–11 . Type/enter |180| (degrees) in the tube position entry field. Removal is the reverse of installation. and finger tighten the holding screws. this will cause a software error. Tube moves to the bottom of the gantry. With the detector at the 12 o’clock position. Do not move the detector from the 12 o’clock position while installing alignment tools on the detector or making the radial adjustment. 3. (180”tube position). Turn ON both the loop contactor switch and 550v (HVDC) enable switch in the gantry. Turn OFF the gantry loop contactor switch and the Gantry 550v (HVDC) enable switch. the field engineer will then have to cycle power to the gantry and reboot the software. switch the legs of the tool. Use the DDC function to move the tube to the 0”azimuth position: · · · · · Touch the |DDC| softkey on the plasma. To restore system function. The pin must project into the X–Ray beam (Illustration 8–3). install the rotational alignment tools on the detector. ILLUSTRATION 8–3 INSTALL ROTATIONAL ALIGNMENT TOOL NOTE: Some detectors may be slightly warped as evidenced by space between the adjoining legs of the rotational alignment tool. If this occurs. Then locate the other tool over the pin and in the locating holes. place the tool which contains the pin on the detector but do not tighten the holding screw. 4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 Radial Alignment procedure: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. The gantry is now oriented with the x–ray tube unit positioned to the 6 o’clock position.

calculate the motion required to reach the channel you are aiming for. Static. Touch the |Analysis| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard. series. edit the Centroid menu to reflect the following: a. d. Touch the |Centroid| softkey and type/enter the suite ID. Touch |Info| to see the centroid information. Type/enter 2 (seconds) in the Scan Time data field. Now. Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey. Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. Continue with isocenter center alignment (section 6). 8–12 . If your system is within the limit. Touch the |Scan| softkey. Type/enter RAD ALIGN in Run Description field. and scan information recorded in step 5. e. At this point. Type/enter 80 in the kV data field. 7.4 +2 channels. Touch the |Continue| softkey. Pin for first channel to search for. the detector will have to be rotated. Prepare for a stationary scan with DDC: · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Touch the |DDC| softkey. b. Type/enter 40 in the mA data field. h. Number of channels on either side to include 10. Note: Rotate the detector CW to move the pin to a lower channel number. Touch the |10| (mm) Aperture softkey. Touch |Tools| (or |CT Tools|) to display the Tools Selection Menu. Touch |Tools| to exit DDC. c. Type/enter 0 (degrees) in the X–Ray ON Position data field. Touch |Stat X–Ray On| softkey. The radial adjustment limits equals 376. g. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. When all information is correct on the Plot Parameters screen.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. Touch |Continue| when all information is entered correctly. Rotate the detector CCW to move the pin to a higher channel. Pin for the body file. Touch the |View Compressed| softkey. exam. Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. f. Calfile name is the same as the Isocal file used above. 6. to initiate the scan. If outside of the limits. touch |Plot|. when it illuminates. no adjustment is necessary.

Set it to . See Illustration 8–4: 1. Do not move the detector from the 12 o’clock position while installing alignment tools on the detector or making the radial adjustment. 2.0226 = . tighten the nuts until finger tight. 6. If you don’t have a torque wrench.038” To move the pin projection to a higher channel. 5.) Install a dial indicator on the side of the detector with the rotational adjustment hardware. ILLUSTRATION 8–4 ROTATIONAL HARDWARE ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT LOCKING SCREW DETECTOR MOUNTING NUT ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT HEX DIAL INDICATOR ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT LOCKING SCREW ct 2830 8–13 .4 – 374. Loosen all three sets of the large detector mounting nuts slightly. (End of example. you will cause a software error.700| X .038 ” CCW. Loosen the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws. If you rotate the gantry more then 5 degrees during these procedures. then tighten ”@” flat with a wrench. Tighten the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws. See Illustration 8–5. To restore system function. you have to cycle power to the gantry and reboot the software.000”.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Example: Assume that the average centroid of the pin scan equals 374. 3. While holding the inside nut to keep it from turning. torque the outside nuts to 25 ft–lbs. so that they are finger tight. To determine the amount of detector rotation to properly position the detector: Motion = |376. Repeat the Radial Alignment procedure to verify the adjustment. See Illustration 8–4. Move the detector by the calculated amount.700. move the detector adjustment cam so the detector moves 0. 7. 4. Torque the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ft–lbs.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 8–5 MOUNTING/ADJUSTMENT HARDWARE (DETAIL) BOW ADJUSTMENT LOCK NUT HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 BOW ADJUSTMENT DETECTOR MOUNTING NUTS ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT CAM ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT SCREW ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL LOCKING SCREW ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT CAM ÍÍÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ ÍÍÈ ÍÈ Í ÍÍÈÈÍÍÈÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÍÈÈ ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT SCREW ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL LOCKING SCREW DETECTOR MOUNTING NUTS ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL LOCKING SCREW ct2775 8–14 .

Touch |Normal| (Normalize) softkey for data mode. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate ISO alignment 8–7 Isocenter Calculation 1. Scan Time = 4 s Scan Speed = 4 s Number of Scans = 1 Interscan Delay = 2 s X–ray On Position = 0 mA= 40 kV = 80 Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. you must wait at least 90 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 8–6 Isocenter Alignment HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 This procedure aligns the tube focal spot with the detector center.g. Type/enter AIR LARGE in the Run Description data field. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC 8–15 . Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey.. when it lights. Touch the |5| (mm) Aperture softkey. Record the DD file name. e. acquire an air scan using the Large focal spot: · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. If you have executed any low technique scans prior to beginning isocenter alignment (ISO). With nothing in the gantry scan plane. CAUTION Verify that the tube unit is cold. if the tube unit has had greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min. Touch the |Real Time Stat| softkey. If you have previously executed image scanning and would like to re–check ISO. Touch the |Axial X–Ray On| softkey. you must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure. Touch the |DDC| softkey. to initiate the scan. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard.

Position the pin in the scan plane. Scan Time = 4 s Scan Speed = 4 s Number of Scans = 1 8–16 . Record the DD file name. attach a small metal pin (i. to initiate the scan.. Touch the |Reserve Scan| softkey. Touch |Normal| (Normalize) softkey for data mode. Touch the |5| (mm) Aperture softkey. Never position the metal pin at isocenter. The metal pin should remain level with the untilted gantry (0 degrees tilt). 3. Touch the |View Compressed| softkey. Touch the |Axial X–Ray On| softkey. Touch the |Real Time Stat| softkey. Touch the |Small| Spot Size softkey. Touch the |Axial X–Ray On| softkey. and acquire a pin scan with the Large focal spot: · · · · · · · · Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 2. when it lights. Move the table forward to position the metal pin 1. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Position the gantry to 0 degrees tilt. Next. Touch the |DDC| softkey. Type/enter PIN LARGE in the Run Description data field.125 inch) diameter metal shaft. as determined by the laser alignment lights. Touch the |DDC| softkey. acquire an air scan using the Small focal spot: · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard. Type/enter AIR SMALL in the Run Description data field. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC After you acquire the two air files (one Large focal spot and one Small focal spot).4” up and 1. The detector alignment program is sensitive to a larger shade caused by a larger diameter screwdriver.4” right of isocenter. Craftsman #0 Phillips screwdriver) to the end of the table nearest the gantry or phantom holder. Secure the screwdriver with masking tape so that it remains perpendicular to the scan plane.e. Note: Always use a 1/8” (0. Scan Time = 4 s Scan Speed = 4 s Number of Scans = 1 Interscan Delay = 2 s X–ray On Position = 0 mA= 40 kV = 80 Touch the |Air| Filter softkey.

Touch the |Axial X–Ray On| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard. Record the exam/series/scan# file name. Acquire a pin scan with the small focal spot: 8–17 . when it lights. Touch the |5| (mm) Aperture softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard. Touch the |4:1| softkey (Compression Factor) Cal Vector = None (No selections) Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Touch the |4:1| softkey (Compression Factor) Cal Vector = None (No selections) Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. Touch the |View Compressed| softkey. Type/enter PIN SMALL in the Run Description data field. Touch the |5| (mm) Aperture softkey.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Interscan Delay = 2 s X–ray On Position = 0 mA= 40 kV = 80 Touch the |Large| FOV softkey. Scan Time = 4 s Scan Speed = 4 s Number of Scans = 1 Interscan Delay = 2 s X–ray On Position = 0 mA= 40 kV = 80 Touch the |Small| FOV softkey. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Touch the |Reserve Scan| softkey. to initiate the scan. Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey. to initiate the scan. when it lights. Record the exam/series/scan# file name. Touch the |DDC| softkey. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC 4. Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu.

Touch the |Manual Calc| softkey shown in Illustration 8–7. ILLUSTRATION 8–7 SELECT MANUAL CALCULATIONS TUBE ALIGNMENT Manual Calc Cancel Utility Tools 8–18 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. ILLUSTRATION 8–6 SELECT TUBE ALIGNMENT TOOL SELECTIONS Install Calibrate System Perform List Select Images Patient Scans Mechncal Charact Genrator Charact Tube Align Detector Slope Diag Scans DD Files CALS Heat Soak & Season Scanning Diagnostics DAS Tools DDC Scan Analysis DD File Analysis Cal Plot Utility Functions File Manager Scan File Manager Cancel Utility 6. Touch the |Tube Align| softkey shown in Illustration 8–6.

Touch the |Iso Align| softkey shown in Illustration 8–8. ILLUSTRATION 8–8 SELECT ISOCENTER PROGRAM MANUAL CALCULATIONS Iso Align CBF and SAG Cancel Utility Tools Tube Align ILLUSTRATION 8–9 SELECT ISOCENTER ALIGN MANUAL CALCULATIONS – SELECT ONE: Iso Align List/Sel DD files CBF and SAG Air Scanfile: List/Sel DiagScan Exam: Series: Suite ID: Scan Store DD file in database NO YES Cancel Utility Tools Tube Align Accept 8–19 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 7.

Calculate distance to move tube in millimeters or inches: – Tube shift_in_mm = (mean – 373. 14. Touch the |Accept| softkey. Touch the |Tube Align| softkey (see Illustration 8–9) to return to the Manual Calculations screen shown in Illustration 8–8. Touch the |Iso Align| softkey. Enter the DD file created in step 2 (the small iso air scan). 11. Large spot isocenter will be calculated and recommendation for tube movement displayed if isocenter is outside its limits. calculate the average isocenter value by averaging the isovalue for the small spot with the isovalue for the large spot: Mean = (isoSmall + isoLarge) / 2. Record the displayed data. 8–20 . Enter exam #.053728”. then do not shift the tube. as described in section 8–8. the average of the 2 iso values in step 16). Illustration 8–9 shows the Manual Calculations screen.. 16.36468 OR –Tube shift_in_inches = “(mean – 373. If the isovalue is in spec. then the tube should be moved up. Enter suite ID. Enter exam #. Note: The specification for proper isocenter alignment equals 373.75) * 0. then touch the |Tools| softkey to exit the alignment program.75 ±0. 17. Adjust the tube. Enter the DD file (air scan)created in step 1 (large iso air scan). If the isovalue is out of spec.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8.e. move the tube down. 13. and repeat steps 1 through 16 to verify whether isocenter is in spec.02 channels (i. Small spot isocenter will be calculated and recommendation for tube movement displayed if isocenter is outside its limits. First. 15. series # and scan # for the scan file created in step 3 (large iso pin scan). Proceed as follows: 9. Note: If the resulting tube shift value is a negative number. 10. Record the displayed data.75) * 1. series # and scan # for the scan file created in step 4 (the small iso pin scan). If the value is positive. 12. calculate the required tube shift during the next step. Continue iteration until the system meets spec. Touch the |Accept| softkey. then touch the |Tools| softkey to exit the alignment program.

02 and ±0.750 inch nut on the vertical adjustment screw. If after the second check the plane of rotation appears to have changed. A counter clockwise adjustment will move the tube down.. Bolt down the tube mounting bolts to a torque of 30 +3.75 ±0. the final ISO shouldn’t affect the radial adversely.75 ±0.02 channels). wait 5 minutes then repeat scan to verify that the results remain within spec.250 inch) attached to the nonmagnetic holding fixture and bolt the gauge and its holding fixture to the special tube mounting bracket. adjust the tube unit by the amount as displayed on the CRT with the following procedure: Select the Starrett #25–141 gauge (0..02 channels. Note: If the ISO projects outside 373. wait 30 minutes and repeat the plane of rotation check again.1 channels. lbs. make the necessary tube positioning adjustments in order to be in specification and redo X–Ray beam to Detector Window and ISO Center Alignments to ensure that they have not changed. CAUTION Recheck POR at 10mm aperture to verify that plane on rotation has not changed. DO NOT RECHECK RADIAL ALIGNMENT.001 inch to 0. Move the tube in the direction and prescribed amount called out on the previous CRT display as measured on the ISOCENTER gauge. If the ISO projects between ±0.e. Repeat ISO Scans until the ISOCENTER specification is satisfied (i.75 ±0. 8–21 . DO NOT make any adjustments in tube positioning. then wait 5 minutes after tube adjustment before scanning.0 ft.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 8–8 Isocenter Adjustment HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 If the calculated ISOCENTER value falls outside the specification. If a rough ISO was done per procedure before the radial alignment. If the plane of rotation appears to have changed. Remember to wait 5 minutes after last ISO Scan before executing the plane of rotation recheck scan. Zero out gauge before you loosen the mounting bolts. 373.1 Channels. ISO must be the last tube adjustment. you do not have to wait between tube adjustment and the test scan. Loosen the four mounting bolts (9/16”) holding the tube unit to the gantry mounting plate and the top 0. If the ISO projects to be within 373. Note: A clockwise turn on the vertical adjustment screw will move the tube up.

<suiteID> means to type in the actual suite ID. CAUTION This section presumes that the user knows how to use the “vi text editor”. edit the same 2 variables in the ScanHardware. 8–9–1 Update ScanHardware. root <ENTER>. The text and symbols used to denote unix commands.cfg <ENTER> Edit the values for the variables isoSmallSpot and isoLargeSpot as you did for the OC 8–22 . It is echoed at the bottom line on the screen.cfg file and the INFO file as described below. For example.cfg text file on the OC. BUT WITHIN THE CONTEXT OF THE PROMPT. called isoLargeSpot is just below the isoSmallSpot variable. are defined as follows: bold print – Words in bold type followed by <ENTER> means to type that word and then press the ENTER key. The large spot variable.cfg file on both the OC and SBC must be updated with the new iso values using the vi text editor. edit the ScanHardware.: · · · · · Type the character /. Use the “/” command to search and find the variable with the iso value that must be changed . e. Edit the small spot isocenter with the new value displayed by the system back in step 15 of section 6–1.cfg <ENTER> You are now in the ScanHardware. Commands for using vi are found in direction 46–015523. <angles> – This type indicates that a value is DIFFERENT THAN INDICATED IN THIS DOCUMENT. Edit the large spot isocenter with the new value displayed by the system back in step 11 of section 6–1.cfg The ScanHardware.cfg file on the SBC. vi places the cursor at the text string isoSmallSpot. SunOS” / Genesis Quick Reference Guide. Next. means to type the word “root” and then press the ENTER key.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 8–9 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Update Configuration Files With New Isovalues Once the tube isocenter alignment is in spec. Proceed as follows: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : cd /w/config <ENTER> genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : vi ScanHardware.g.g. Misuse of vi can seriously corrupt configuration files which causes severe system problems. Type isoSmallSpot behind the / character followed by a carriage return. Proceed as follows: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : rlogin <suiteID>_SBC0 <ENTER> genesis @ <suiteID>_SBC0 : cd /w/config <ENTER> genesis @ <suiteID>_SBC0 : vi ScanHardware. function keys. etc. It also represents a function key e.

Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey. Record the exam/series/scan# file name displayed on the plasma. Proceed as follows: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : cd /usr/local/bin <ENTER> genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : vi INFO <ENTER> Search on the same two variable names as described in the previous section (8–9–1).g. Touch the |Bowtie| Filter softkey. to initiate the scan. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. e. you must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 8–9–2 Update INFO File HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The INFO file on the OC must be updated with the new iso value.. Edit the small and large spot isovalues. Acquire a CBF scan: · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. when it lights. if the tube unit has had greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min. If you have previously executed image scanning and would like to re–check CBF and SAG. Touch the |Rotating X–Ray On| softkey. If you have executed any low technique scans prior to beginning CBF alignment. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard. 8–10 CBF and SAG This procedure aligns the center of the body filter coincidence with isocenter alignment and measures the change in alignment during a rotating scan. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate CBF and SAG alignment 8–11 CBF Calculation 1. It reports the peak amplitude difference in channel numbers as well as the hysteresis or difference in channel numbers between first and last views of a scan. Touch the |4:1| softkey (Compression Factor) Scan Time = 4 s mA= 40 kV = 80 Touch the |5| (mm) Aperture softkey. 8–23 . Touch the |DDC| softkey. Type/enter CBF in the Run Description data field. you must wait at least 90 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC and return to the Tool Selection (CT Tools) screen. CAUTION Verify that the tube unit is cold. Touch the |View Compressed| softkey.

series # and scan # for the scan file created in step 3. g. b. Plasma displays CBF adjustments in up and down direction.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 2. 5. 8.2).). Step 1. 8–24 . series# and scan# for the CBF scan file created in step 1. c. d. and DOWN=collimator movement to the left. e. Enter the DD file (air scan) from section 6–1. Enter the suite ID. Enter the isocenter value for the large spot recorded back in section 8–7 step 11. 3. Adjust the 3/4 inch bolt (located at the end of the collimator) to move the collimator right or left the required amount. and the difference between first and last views in channels. Touch the |Accept| softkey. h. Touch the CBF and SAG softkey. Mount the gauge and its nonmagnetic holding fixture to the special mounting bracket of the collimator. 9. the collimator will have to be adjusted by the amount displayed on the CRT via the following steps: a. UP=Collimator movement to the right. (120 +12 in. The program calculates and displays the maximum channel difference. f. Enter suite ID. Zero out the gauge and loosen the four mounting bolts of the collimator which are located at the four slotted holes of the collimator. Touch the |Manual Calc| softkey. Repeat CBF scans and this adjustment until the CBF specification is satisfied. The program will calculate CBF and display it along with recommendations for moving the collimator if CBF is outside specifications. 7. Record the information and then touch |Tools| to exit the Tube Alignment program. 6. Enter the exam#. touch the |Tube Alignment| softkey. Bolt down the collimator. If the calculated CBF value is not in specification (373.0 ft. The torque requirement on the four lock bolts is 10 +1. Record the CBF and SAG values. Remove gauge and holding fixture from Gantry. Enter exam #. 4. In CT Tools. Wait 5 minutes between exposures. lbs.75 +. of section 8–7 (large iso pin scan). the azimuthal location of the channel difference.(large spot iso air scan). lbs.

Follow this document sequence to install the operating system. Note: A Load From Cold is not necessary if the system is shipped with software loaded. 9–1 . then each system’s flashing “algorithm” should continue to ensure that the proper version exists (MR looks for 1.5 version firmware. Supplement this procedure with the more detailed Installation User’s Manual Genesis Release 4. 2. To determine the type of firmware on your system. display the Healthpage and check the OC FW REV and SBC FW REV. This procedure uses the YP Master as its example.5. See the OC/SBC System Reconfiguration document for configuration instructions.x) 3. Section 9–24 and 9–25 contain stand–alone scripts.1 document. The OC/SBC System Reconfiguration contains the procedures which require the reconfig program. used to Change system time and Image Transfer hosts. Text output by the system is shown in system font.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 9 – SOFTWARE LOAD FROM COLD 9–1 Introduction Use this document to load the Unix operating system and new application software on the HiSpeed Advantage System.2 and CT/i looks for 3. The OC/SBC System Reconfiguration procedure begins on page 9–21. You can change most of the parameters you entered during a software Load From Cold. because the YP Master is always the first machine installed in a Suite. 9–1–1 OC/SBC System Reconfiguration Introduction Reconfigure systems with existing software: Sections 9–17 through 9–23 describe the procedure to reconfigure the existing software of a HiSpeed Advantage system. Text to be typed by the installer is shown in bold. You will cause problems if you skip steps or perform them out of sequence. Note: MVME 166 Autoflash Routines of the SBC Boot Firmware: 1. CT RP looks for 2. The flashing code in Genesis/Stealth based systems check for a version equal to or greater than the required version of firmware. If all boards continue to ship from DBR/Motorola with 1. The following procedure describes the CT OC and SBC software installation procedure. without returning to the LFC procedure.

on page 9–25 Time Format. on page 9–28 Tube information: Section 9–22–5. on page 9–24 Time Zone: Section 9–21–1. on page 9–24 Patient Exam number: Section 9–20–4. on page 9–32 · Add or Remove Image Transfer Hosts: Section 9–25. on page 9–27 IP Refresh Rate: Section 9–22–2. on page 9–30 Add/Remove 2nd Ethernet board on OC: Section 9–23–5. on page 9–28 E–DAS Type: Section 9–22–6. on page 9–28 Internet Address: Section 9–23–1. on page 9–30 Suite Configuration: Section 9–23–2. on page 9–26 Camera Configuration: Section 9–22–1. on page 9–26 Doctor’s Title: Section 9–21–3. on page 9–30 ACRNEMA Address: Section 9–23–3. on page 9–32 9–2 . on page 9–23 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Hospital Name: Section 9–20–2 on page 9–23 Reset the Database: Section 9–20–3. Date Format and Date Separator: Section 9–21–2. on page 9–31 Additional stand–alone procedures: · Change the System Time: Section 9–24. on page 9–28 Add/Remove Printer: Section 9–22–4. on page 9–26 Optical Disk or Reel Tape number: Section 9–21–5. on page 9–31 Add/Remove 2nd Ethernet board on IC: Section 9–23–6. on page 9–26 Patient Weight unit: Section 9–21–4. on page 9–24 Replace HSD on SBC: Section 9–20–5. on page 9–30 Primary Archive Node (PAN): Section 9–23–4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 OC/SBC System Reconfiguration Introduction –continued– Use rconfig software to change the following parameters: · SuiteID: Section 9–20–1. on page 9–27 Video Tape Interface: Section 9–22–3.

or Date Separator Change the Doctor’s Title Change the Units for Patient Weight Change the Patient Exam number Change the Optical Disk or Reel Tape number Change the Camera Configuration Change the IP Refresh Rate Change the Video Tape Interface Add/Remove a Printer Change the ACRNEMA Address Change the Primary Archive Node (PAN) Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on the OC Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on an IC in the Suite Run reconfig on OC and SBC. Date Format. to: · Change the Hospital Name · · · · · · · · · · · · · Change the Time Format.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 OC/SBC System Reconfiguration Introduction –continued– Run reconfig on OC only. to: · Change the Suite ID · · · · · · Change the Timezone Change the Daylight Savings Time value Add New Tube Information Change the E–DAS type Change the Internet Addresses Change the Suite Configuration 9–3 .

Remove the tape. If the system is stand–alone (not connected to any network) the default internet numbers may be used. If the SBC was replaced. Ethernet number of SBC – get the number from the inside of the SCU door. scan protocols. get the number by entering “ypcat ethers grep <suiteID>”. They contain the OS and applications: a. select |CT Tools|. and INFO file. 9–4–1 Save System State From the Utilities menu on a CT OC plasma. you will have to Characterize and Calibrate the system. select |File Manager| followed by |Save / Restore|. At this time. Internet (IP) addresses – If the system is to be connected to a network contact your system administrator to obtain the IP addresses for all the computers in the suite. characterization. If you forget to save the information. CT OC. Next.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Software Load From Cold 9–2 Tape Set Use the following tapes are needed to install the system. b. When the save to tape is complete. It will be used during the installation and later to restore this data after installation is complete. select |All|. 9–4 . select |Save| and wait until the save to tape is done (about 5–20 minutes depending on the number of cals and scan protocols). HNS) 9–3 Initial Installations If this is the first time software has been installed on the system. After the appropriate selections have been made. Then proceed to step 9–5. & SBC Applications. a message that files have successfully been saved to tape appears at the bottom of the screen and the |Quit| softkey on the screen disappears. An IP address is also needed for each gateway (second) ethernet board in any OC or IC. This will save system cals. CSE Applications. HLFC (SunOS. you need the following information: a. place the tape in the drive. 9–4 Save System Parameters Save existing system information before you reload or upgrade the application software.

Touch the |Archive|softkey to display the Archive Main Menu. 9–5 .” Record the Disk # displayed in the upper left quadrant of the screen:______.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 9–4–2 Save Suite Internet Numbers HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 To find the internet numbers of the OC and SBC. Touch the |Reel Tape| softkey.” Record the Tape # displayed in the upper left quadrant of the screen:______. increment the current disk number by one and enter that value in the Optical Disk # field. Touch the |Optical Disk| softkey. Touch the |Media Contents| softkey. During the load from cold. display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |Shell| to open a shell tool on the plasma Then type the following command at the prompt. genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: ypcat hosts | grep <suiteID> Write down the appropriate IP (Internet) addresses. increment the current tape number by one and enter the corresponding value in the Reel Tape # field. Find the <suiteID> by inspecting the system prompt.______ <suiteID>_SBC0 _________.______.________.______. The system attaches the disk and displays the screen called “List/Select Exams by Patient – Media Content. During the load from cold. <suiteID>_OC0 ______. Touch the |Archive| softkey to display the Archive Main Menu. 9–4–4 Save Magnetic Reel Tape Number (If the system has a magnetic tape drive Insert the current reel tape into the mag tape drive and place the drive on line._________ 9–4–3 Save Optical Disk Number Place the current optical disk platter into the drive.________. The system attaches the tape and displays the screen called “List/Select Exams by Patient – Media Content. Touch the |Media Contents| softkey.

9–6 . Manual Transmit. Put a scratch tape into the drive. Network. so you do not have to save the “Batch Film Protocols” tape. Remove the tape and label it “Batch Film Protocols” with the date of the load. For re–loads of software. this step may be skipped ONLY if the system state (at least the INFO file) has been saved to tape via |File Manager| under |Utilities| while running software. Open a unix shell and type the following: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0:cd /usr/g/film/protocols <enter> genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0:tar cvf /dev/nrst8 Prot* Lots of output will occur on the screen as the protocols are dumped to tape.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 9–4–5 Save Window Width/Level Data HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Touch the |Display Modes| softkey. this step must be performed if the site wants to keep it’s existing Batch Film Protocols.3. Use the File Management software to store the system state to tape. Write down the list to verify after completing the load from cold. Touch the |Prog W/L Keys| softkey. The system state INFO file contains the filming protocols. Note: When you complete the Load from Cold. display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |File Manager|.2 to HSA 1. Record the window width/level information for reentry into the system upon completion of the software load: Head Media‘s Spine Abdomen Lung Vertebra Window Level Network Configuration Check network configuration to see what systems are supposed to be there. 9–4–6 Save Batch Film Protocols: When upgrading from HSA 1.

. type sd from the boot terminal to shutdown the system. Check the network config to see which systems should be there: · · Network Manual transmit Make a list of these systems for verification after the Load From Cold. 2) Make sure the NEW LINE softkey is OFF. 3) Make sure the WRAP AROUND softkey is ON.0. 9–6 Boot the Host Load From Cold (HLFC) Tape Once you have the monitor prompt ‘ > ’ insert the HLFC I tape into the local cartridge/DAT tape drive and load the bootstrap: > b st( ) <enter> Boot: st(0. .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 9–4–7 Shutdown the system HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch the |Shutdown| softkey or. . 9–5 Pre–Installation Before starting. 4) Touch the |backup| softkey to return to boot terminal Clean the tape drive heads with a DAT tape cleaning cartridge.0) Boot: Much output . 9–7 . make sure the following setup is done on the Plasma: 1) Press L1–C to get the plasma configuration screen.

. Remove the HLFC tape and insert the system state tape saved prior to the re–installation. . answer ‘n’ to the above question. Load OS and Applications (OC) The program to format. Configure an OC as a YP Master [ . or partition the disk starts automatically: Beginning System Installation probing system for disks . 9–8 . . . . 2 – label ’sd0’ only – Then continue loading the system. 3 – Do not relabel the disk. . . much output . .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 9–7 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Partition and Label the Disk. When the disk is ready the program starts loading software.. ] Do you want to restore the INFO file from the previous installation (yY|nN) ? Answer ‘y’ if this is a re–installation. label. If this is a new installation. boot messages>. just continue loading the system 3– Exit to single user shell Enter choice: 1 (label sd0) Labeling ‘sd0’ with partition table ‘CT/OC sd0 single 94181–15’ If you have dual disks installed the following menu displays: Choose your option for Auto partition and label 1 – label ‘sd0 and sd2’ – Then continue loading the system. Choose your option for Auto Partition and label 1– Label sd0 – Then continue loading the system 2– Do not relabel the disk.. just continue loading the system 4 – Exit to single user shell Enter choice: 1 (label sd0 and sd2) The system automatically labels and partitions the hard disk.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–7–1 HiSpeed Advantage Configuration HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The HiSpeed Advantage configuration program automatically starts on the plasma. Your screens will appear similar but not necessarily identical to the examples. When you complete a screen. touch the |Continue| softkey to proceed to the next screen. Touch the help window to close it. of Defense site? Yes No Stands for Unique System Number Reset Database Continue 9–9 . To configure the HiSpeed Advantage system. 9–7–2 On Line Help Touch the parameter title to display the corresponding help window. After you type/enter all the parameters. touch the |Accept| softkey on the Network screen to initiate the configuration. 9–7–3 The Config Screens Illustrations 9–1 through 9–4 contain examples of each type of Configuration screen. ILLUSTRATION 9–1 SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN System Parameters Suite ID Hospital name Host Type OC IC USN Host name OC0 Service ID YP type Master Slave Is this installation for a Dept. enter the required parameters on each screen.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 ILLUSTRATION 9–2 SYSTEM FORMATS AND DEFAULTS SCREEN HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 System Formats & Defaults Time Format MIL_HH_MM_SS MIL_HH_MM HH_MM_SS_XM HH_MM_XM Date Separator / . G2.New US/Alaska US/East Indiana Backup Central time zone USA Mountain time zone USA Pacific time zone USA Pacific time zone USA Alaska time zone USA Eastern time zone USA Doctor's Title Radiologist lb kg Units for Patient Weight Smart Scan Off On Continue ILLUSTRATION 9–3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION SCREEN Hardware Configuration IP refresh rate 60 Hz 50 Hz Camera Configuration 3M camera MI10 camera Video Tape rs170 ccir Printer in Suite Yes No CT Tube Type Housing # 46-309500G2 Insert # 46-309300G2 DAS Type 2119740 HP-DAS 46-266845 G4 E-DAS Reduced Gain G4 Collimator Tube Housing Serial # Tube Insert Serial # Tube Failure Code Backup Collimator Type G1. or G3 Collimator Continue 9–10 . DD_MM_YY - Starting Patient Exam # Starting Diagnostic Exam # 50001 1 Date Format Timezone MM_DD_YY YY_MM_DD Starting Optical Disk # US/Central US/Mountain US/Pacific US/Pacific .

then touch |Accept| on the Network Configuration screen to automatically start the configuration of the OC. you may garble the output. then use the following keystrokes: <enter>~. Note: If you type too fast while in tip. 9–8 Tip Into the SBC (command review only) Default passwords The system currently contains the with default password. Use the following passwords to access the system and finish the software load: root – #bigguy genesis – 4$apps 9–8–2 Tip command notes Use the tip command to communicate with the SBC over a serial line. Tip into the SBC. When the system displays the <suiteID> console login. the system responds with the same “>” prompt it displays when you press [L1] [A] on the OC keyboard. If this happens. proceed to the next step. insite – 2getin service – 4rhelp 9–8–1 9–11 . delete the bad characters and start over. Start tip.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 ILLUSTRATION 9–4 NETWORK CONFIGURATION HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Network Configuration Hosts in Suite OC0 SBC0 IC0 IC1 IC2 Active Gateway: Yes No OC0 Internet address: SBC0 Internet address: ACRNEMA address: Suite ID of PAN host: Hostname of PAN: Subnet network Backup OC0 SBC0 Ethernet number: Accept Finish the configuration parameters selection. to exit tip <enter>~# to send a break When you send a break to the SBC. Configuration takes about 10 minutes.

. Exit to single user shell Enter choice: 1 (label sd0) If the system contains a SCSI HSD. Tip into the SBC. Label ‘sd0 and sd2’ – Then continue loading the system. Choose your option for Auto partition and label: 1. halt the system. Exit to single user shell Enter choice: 1 (label sd0 and sd2) Note: If the system asks you to insert the HLFC tape and the HLFC tape is in the tape drive. Do not relabel the disk. you may need to perform the RP Boot Link Troubleshooting procedure. Label ‘sd0’ only – Then continue loading the system. Enter ~# to try to get to the MC68040> prompt. cycle power and return to step 9. 9–9 Network boot the SBC At the 167 bug prompt: 167–>bug> rb <enter> You need to be at the MC68040> prompt to boot the SBC. ] 9–12 . . it displays the following menu.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 9–8–3 Login as genesis on OC: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 <suiteID>_OC0 @ login: genesis password: <default root password> genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 3: tip sbc <enter> connected <enter> Note: If you don’t receive a response during the TIP to SBC within a reasonable period of time. 3. 4. lots of output . . the system may try to boot off the local disk. 2. just continue loading the system. Do not relabel the disk. Label sd0 – Then continue loading the system. If software is already loaded on the SBC disk. 2. At the mc68040 prompt: mc68040>b ei() <enter> 9–10 9–10–1 Load SunOS and Applications on SBC Login as root on SBC <suiteID>_SBC0 @ login: root 9–10–2 Load SunOS and CT Applications: Place the HLFC tape into the disk drive on the OC. . # rploadSBC <enter> (30 minutes including configuration) Choose your option for Auto partition and label: 1. 3. just continue loading the system. [ . return to the OC.

Any other time. 9–12 Start up the HiSpeed Advantage RP System Log in as genesis: <suiteID> @ login: genesis <enter> password: <default genesis password> Start Genesis Processes: genesis @ <suiteID> : st <enter> To toggle the plasma between the boot terminal and the application screens. press [L1] [B]. When it completes the configuration. consult the HLFC addendum and instructions provided with this HLFC documentation to determine when to load the patch tape or workarounds. Recommended: Change the labels on the window softkeys to match the positions of the hardkeys on the console.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 9–10–3 Exit tip: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 After it completes loading. You have finished installation of application software. the SBC reboots once more. 9–11 Load Patch Tape or Perform Workarounds If the software includes a patch tape. 9–13–2 Restore Batch Film Protocols Use this step any time you need to restore filming protocols. the SBC automatically reboots and begins configuration. .” along the bottom of the Application Screen disappears. 9–13 . “Processes are initializing . 9–13 9–13–1 Restore System Configuration Data Restore Window Width/Level Data Touch the |Display Modes| softkey Touch the |Prog W/L Keys| softkey Enter the window width/level information you recorded during step 9–4–5. use the System State tape with the INFO file to restore filming protocols. Now use <enter>~ to exit tip. . Immediately after a Load From Cold. use the tape you created during step 9–4–6. After the system comes up. the message.

. touch |All| to restore the previously saved system parameters.. The system removes the abort tape restore softkey and displays a message along the bottom of the screen that files have successfully been restored from tape.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Insert the tape with the saved batch film protocols into the OC drive. . .THE SYSTEM IS READY TO USE * If you need to load diagnostics. several lines of output . 9–14 . You can remove the tape at this point.** .. ] genesis @ <SuiteID>:su Password: <root password> root @ <SuiteID>:convertfilmproto [ . Scan Protocols. ] Remember to remove the tape from the tape drive. . Touch the |No| softkey. touch |Restore| and wait until the tape load finishes. Calibration Data. . The system displays a message that firmware characterization files have been restored and asks if the hardware should be reset. . ** If you need to adopt other suites or hosts you may perform step 9–14–4 before bringing the system back up. etc) Display the |Utilities| Main Menu on a CT OC plasma. . At this time. Next. Bring the system down* and restart it. Touch |CT Tools|. Time varies with the number of cals and scan protocols. . Press <control – D> twice after you load the tape to exit from this shell tool. After these selections have been made. 9–13–3 Restore System Data (Characterization Data. Open a unix shell and type the following: genesis @ <SuiteID>:cd /usr/g/film/protocols genesis @ <SuiteID>:tar xvf /dev/nrst8 [ . several lines of output . including the tube usage information. place the tape on which you have previously saved System Parameters (see page 9–4) in the drive. you may perform step 9–14 before you shutdown the system. touch |File Manager| followed by |Save/Restore|. Note: The system requires 5 – 10 minutes to restore system cals.

Before discussing the procedure for adoption. you may adopt non–Genesis or ID/NET II hosts. you may adopt non–Genesis suites.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 9–14 9–14–1 Load Diagnostics – (Optional) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Load OC Non–Proprietary Diagnostics (HNS) (non – GE Service sites only) To load HLFC diagnostic utilities from the Utilities menu on a CT OC plasma. Advantage Windows are also adopted as PCs. 9–14–4 Adoption of non–Genesis suites and hosts: If the host on which you are running setAdoption is both the YP Master and the Suite Master. Depending upon the host. If the host on which you are running setAdoption is the YP Master but not the Suite Master. Touch inside the open shell tool which appears on the left side of the plasma. you may adopt non–Genesis suites and hosts. Adopted DG Signas (which are non–Genesis host/s) ‘TRANSMIT’ only. When an Advantage Windows workstation is adopted the ‘RECEIVE’ option is selected even though AW can both send and receive Genesis images. At the time a host is adopted this is one of the attributes which must be defined. Make sure the HLFC tape is inserted in the tape drive. This is because it utilizes a non–genesis database and it’s lists (exam/series/image) cannot be displayed on the genesis host. 9–15 . Transmitting or both Receiving and Transmitting Genesis Images. Follow the commands below: genesis @ <SuiteID>: su <enter> Password: <root password> root @ <SuiteID>: installDiags hns <enter> root @ <SuiteID>: rehash <enter> Enter <control – D> twice after the tape is loaded to exit from this shell tool. it may be capable of Receiving.) You should see an arrow where you pressed. 9–14–3 Types of Network Transfer There are three types of network transfer: RECEIVE TRANSMIT BOTH – Any host which can receive Genesis Images – Any host which can send Genesis images – Any host which can both receive and transmit Genesis Images. then run setAdoption. 9–14–2 Network Configuration Information – OPTIONAL If there is a gateway card installed in the OC or IC and there are non–genesis hosts on the backbone network with which the OC should receive and/or transmit images. it is important to introduce the concept of network transfer types. (This allows you to enter input into the shell. select |Shell|. Be sure to remove the HLFC tape from the tape drive. If the host on which you are running setAdoption is the Suite Master but not the YP Master.

if you have already adopted hosts or suites. PCx. For selection 2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 All applications must be down before running setAdoption. otherwise. 3). r=RECEIVE. t=TRANSMIT): The following question will be asked if the host is the suiteMaster (gateway): Do you want to adopt a suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is ‘y’. you will be asked by setAdoption if you first wish to un–adopt any previously adopted hosts or suites. 2. for each non–Genesis suite. <SuiteID> @ login: genesis <enter> Password: <default genesis password> genesis @ <SuiteID>: sdservice setAdoption must be run as root. For selection 3. Valid names are SGx. you will see the following questions. Use sdservice. PC(s) 2 = ID/NET II host(s) 3 = Genesis host(s) in other networks {separated by routers} Enter selection (1. see section 1–14–6. Follow the instructions shown at run time and then setAdoption will proceed with the following: Which non–Genesis Host(s)/Suite(s) do you wish to adopt? 1 = MR Signa(s). see section 1–14–5. the following set of questions will be asked: 9–16 . see section 1–14–4. PC The following question is asked: Do you want to adopt a non–Genesis host in your suite (yY|nN)[n] ? If answer is ‘y’: Enter hostName for non–Genesis host or press <enter> when done. where x = 0–9 : Enter Unix hostname ( used by Yellow Pages ) for non–Genesis host : Enter the Internet address ( IP ) of non–Genesis host : Enter type of network transfer for non–Genesis host (b=BOTH. 9–14–6 Adopt MR Signa. or press <enter> when done adopting: For selection 1. genesis @ <SuiteID>: su <enter> Password: <root password> root @ <SuiteID>: setAdoption 9–14–5 Run setAdoption If this is the first time setAdoption has been run on this host.

for example Host Name. t=TRANSMIT): 9–14–7 Adopt ID/NET II Hosts The following question will be asked: Do you want to adopt (add) a non–Genesis ID/NET suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is ‘y’: Enter the suiteID of the ID/NET suite or press <enter> when done. abbreviation of your hospital name. PCx. The suggested format is <area>_<sub–area>_<local>. r=RECEIVE. Valid names are ICx or OC0. Valid Genesis suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits: The following set of questions will be asked for each host name: Enter hostName for host in adopted suite. <local> is a 4 chars/digits string. where x = 0–9 : Enter Unix hostname ( used by Yellow Pages ) for non–Genesis host : Enter the Internet address ( IP ) of non–Genesis host : Enter type of network transfer for non–Genesis host (b=BOTH. Valid name are SGx. Enter your selection: Enter ID/NET host’s IP (Internet address) address : 9–14–8 Adopt Genesis Hosts in Other Networks The following question will be asked: Do you want to adopt a suite (yY|nN)[n] ? If answer is ‘y’: Enter the suiteID of the adopted suite or press <enter> when done. for example suiteID. Valid Genesis suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits: Enter hostName for host in adopted suite. where x = 0–2 : Enter the Internet(IP) address of Genesis host: 9–17 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Enter the suiteID of the adopted suite or press <enter> when done. <area> is a 6 chars/digits string. <sub–area> is a 4 chars/digits string. Valid host names are 4 chars and/or digits: Enter ACRNEMA address ( 1–16 chars/digits ) for ID/NET host. Valid IDnet suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits: The following set of questions will be asked for each hostName within the suite: Enter hostName for ID/NET host or press <enter> when done.

111. 9–15 Adoption Installation Procedure Type of network transfer Before discussing the procedure for adoption. There are 3 options for the type of network transfer: · · · RECEIVE – Any host which can receive Genesis Images TRANSMIT – Any host which can send Genesis images BOTH – Any host which can both receive and transmit Genesis Images. it may be capable of Receiving.111. To do this you will have to know the internet address of the ROUTER that connects <suiteID> to this host’s network. The adoption if an ID/NET suite is further restricted to adoption from the suiteMaster. The adoption of a host can occur only on the ypmaster or the suiteMaster. Depending upon the host. or press <return> when done: 9–18 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 And the following message will be posted: Although application config files have been updated for <suiteID>.111. At the time a host is adopted this is one of the attributes which must be defined.local that looks like this: route add <Internet(IP) address> 111. Transmitting or both Receiving and Transmitting Genesis Images.111. it may require more HOPs. PLEASE consult with the network administrator. it is important to introduce the concept of network transfer types. For the purpose of example assume your routers address is 111. Then you would probably have to add a route command to the file /etc/rc. in the event this host communicates with multiple hosts. you MAY have to add routing information to this host before network communications can be established. Also. (that means it’s 1 HOP away). ONLY if the host is a ypmaster.111 1 Note: <Internet(IP) address> might need to be replaced with something less specific (like the SUBNET address)...111 and that <suiteID> is on the network cable JUST ON THE OTHER SIDE OF the router . or the suiteMaster: Which non–Genesis Host(s)/Suites do you wish to adopt: 1 = MR signa(s) PC(s) 2 = ID/NET II host(s) Enter selection [1–2]. Adopted DG Signas (which are non–Genesis host/s) ‘TRANSMIT’ only and there are no known products which have been defined as ‘RECEIVE’ only (although this may not always be the case).

Valid name are SGx. the operator can continue and add/delete suites from the adoption list. or press <enter> when done.. ONLY if adopted non–Genesis host(s) exist: Do you want to remove an adopted non–Genesis host from your suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is ‘yes’ The current list of adopted non–Genesis hosts is : <some name.. REGARDLESS of whether adopted non–Genesis host(s) exist: Do you want to adopt a non–Genesis host in your suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is ‘yes’. .> Enter the suiteID of the non–Genesis suite or press <enter> when done. the following set of questions will be asked: Enter hostName for host or press <enter> when done. ONLY if the host is the suiteMaster (gateway).> Enter the non–Genesis hostName of the host to be removed. where x = 0–9 : Enter UNIX hostName (used by Yellow Pages) for non–Genesis host : Enter the Internet address (IP) of non–Genesis host : Enter type of transfer (BOTH/RECEIVE/TRANSMIT) for non–Genesis host : ONLY if the host is the suiteMaster (gateway) and adopted non–Genesis suite(s) exist: Do you want to remove an adopted non–Genesis suite from your suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is ‘yes’ The current list of adopted non–Genesis suites is : <some name. Once this is complete. Upon completion. one is returned to the main adoption menu.. for each non–Genesis suite.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Upon Selection 1. but REGARDLESS of whether adopted non–Genesis suite(s) exist: Do you want to adopt a non–Genesis suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is ‘yes’.. the following set of questions will be asked: 9–19 . the opportunity is given to select/remove non–Genesis hosts/suites from the adoption list. for each non–Genesis host. The operator is first requested to add/delete all non–Genesis hosts from the adoption list.. PCx.

<sub–area> is a 4 chars/digits string. . Valid Genesis suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits: Enter hostName for host in adopted suite. <local> is a 4 chars/digits string.. where x = 0–9 : Enter UNIX hostName ( used by Yellow Pages ) for non–Genesis host : Enter the Internet address ( IP ) of non–Genesis host : Enter type of transfer (BOTH/RECEIVE/TRANSMIT) for non–Genesis host : ONLY if adopted ID/NET suite(s) exist: Do you want to remove an adopted ID/NET suite from your Genesis suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is ‘yes’ The current list of adopted ID/NET Suites is : <some name. Valid host names are 4 chars and/or digits: Enter ACRNEMA address ( 1–16 chars/digits ) for ID/NET host. abbreviation of your hospital name. for example suiteID. <area> is a 6 chars/digits string. REGARDLESS of whether adopted ID/NET suite(s) exist: Do you want to adopt (add) a non–Genesis ID/NET suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is ‘yes’ Enter the suiteID of the ID/NET suite or press <enter> when done. for example Host Name. Valid IDnet suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits: The following set of questions will be asked for each hostName within the suite: Enter hostName for ID/NET host or press <enter> when done. PCx. The suggested format is <area>_<sub–area>_<local>. Valid name are SGx. Enter your selection: Enter ID/NET host’s IP (Internet address) address : 9–20 .> Enter the suiteID of ID/NET suite or press <enter> when done..GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Enter the suiteID of the adopted suite or press <enter> when done.

next to the title of the corresponding reconfig procedure.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 OC/SBC System Reconfiguration 9–16 Introduction Sections 9–17 through 9–23 describe the procedure to change the software configuration of a HiSpeed Advantage system. root @ <suite>_OC0: reconfig <enter> 5. Note: Type the text shown in boldface. Illustration 9–5 shown on page 9–23. correct the parameters. (Detailed parameter descriptions start on page 9–24. and/or touch |Continue| to display subsequent screens. then return to reconfig. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. The software displays the first configuration screen. Shutdown all system applications to unix level by typing sdservice at the genesis prompt on the system console: genesis @ <suite>_OC0: sdservice <enter> 3.) · · Change the parameters on the first screen. Touch |Exit without Changes| to exit reconfiguration without implementing changes. (Type/enter bold = Type bold <enter>. 6. Use |Continue| and |Backup| to move between screens. Wait for the reconfiguration to finish. and two stand–alone procedures Execute a reconfig on the OC. With the HiSpeed Advantage reconfiguration software. Some sections require reconfiguration on both the OC and SBC. Note: Do NOT try to stop the reconfig software after you |Accept| the new parameters. and |Accept| the new parameters. –or– 7. without returning to the LFC procedure. Change to root user: genesis @ <suite>_OC0: su <enter> password: xxxxxx <enter> 4. · Page 9–1 contains a list of the procedures that require the reconfig program. 9–21 .) System Text output is shown in system font: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: 9–17 Shutdown System Applications and Start Reconfiguration 1. If necessary. to change configuration screen parameters. and display the genesis prompt: login: genesis <enter> password: xxxxxxx <enter> genesis @ <suite>_OC0: 2. Start reconfiguration software. press |L1| and |B| to toggle between the boot terminal and the plasma applications screen. Display the Network Configuration screen. you can change most of the parameters you entered during a software Load From Cold. The OC and/or SBC requirements appear in parenthesis. and press the <enter> key on the keyboard.

. 1. . 9–19 Select Configuration Parameters Illustrations 9–5 through 9–9 contain examples of each type of Configuration screen. ] genesis @ <suite>_SBC0: su <enter> password: xxxxx <enter> root @ <suite>_SBC0: –or– genesis @ <suite>_OC0: tip sbc <enter> <suite>_SBC0 login: root <enter> [ . some info . . the system prompts you to type/enter the new number(s) Enter internet number for SBC0: <internet number of SBC> Enter internet number for OC0: <internet number of OC0> Note: The SBC reconfiguration software uses information entered during the most recent OC reconfiguration. ] root @ <suite>_SBC0: 3. . 9–22 . genesis @ <suite>_OC0: rsh <suite>_SBC0 <enter> [ . 2. all other configuration screens are identical to the ones encountered during LFC. After you reconfigure the OC. reboot it. 9–19–1 On Line Help Touch any of the parameter lines to display the corresponding “HELP” window. If the OC or SBC configuration changes the OC internet number. With the exception of the System Parameters screen. some info . and use rsh or tip to login to the SBC. Your screens will appear similar but not necessarily identical to the examples. the system automatically resets the Scan Database when you reconfigure the SBC. . . If you selected |Yes| to Reset the Database during the OC reconfiguration. Use rsh or tip to login to the SBC.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–18 Run reconfig on the SBC HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Page 9–2 contains a list of parameter changes that require you to reconfigure both the OC and SBC. . . Reboot the OC. Execute reconfig: root @ <suite>_SBC0: reconfig 4. Touch the “Help” window to close it.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–20 System Parameters HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 9–5 SYSTEM PARAMETERS RECONFIGURATION SCREEN System Parameters Suite ID Hospital name OC Host Type IC Unique System Number (USN) Host name OC0 Master YP type Slave GECARES System ID Yes Regen Database No Exit without Changes Continue 9–20–1 Change the Suite ID (OC and SBC) 1. (Procedure described on page 9–21. 5. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the next screen.) 2. Start reconfig on OC. Change the hospital name field on the System Parameters screen 3. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 5. Highlight the suite ID data field. and type/enter a new name 4. Display the Network Configuration screen. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the next screen. Display the Network Configuration screen. (Procedure described on page 9–21. Start reconfig on OC. Run reconfig on the SBC. 4. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. (Procedure described on page 9–18.) 2.) 9–20–2 Change the Hospital Name (OC only) Change the hospital name which appears on the images. 9–23 . Highlight the hospital name data field. 1. and type/enter new ID 3.

4. Make sure you archive all images before you reset the image database. above. · The Regen Database parameter automatically defaults to |No| when the software first displays the System Parameter screen. Start reconfig on OC. The following procedures require a database reset: · Change Patient Exam number. 9–20–5 Replace the High Speed Disk on the SBC (OC and SBC) Note: This procedure requires a Regen Database function. 1. shows the default mode. which destroys all the images residing on the system disk. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the System Formats & Defaults screen.) 7. Select Regen Database |Yes| to reset the Database. 5. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. (Procedure described on page 9–21.) 3. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the next screen. Select Regen Database |Yes| to reset the Database. Type/enter a new number in the Starting Patient Exam # field 5. Run reconfig on the SBC. Use this procedure to type/enter the exam number scanRx uses during the next exam prescription. 4. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. which destroys all the images residing on the system disk. 6. 1. Use this procedure when you replace the High Speed disk on the SBC. then touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. Display the Network Configuration screen. Bring the system up and restore calibration data via Utilities/File Manager.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–20–3 Reset the Database HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 You can use reconfig to reset the system’s image and scan databases. (Illustration 9–5. Save system state via Utilities/File Manager (if possible) · Save system state description. Start reconfig on OC. 2. section 9–4–1. section 9–20–4 · Replace High Speed Disk on the SBC. 3. section 9–20–5 9–20–4 Change the Patient Exam number (OC only) Note: This procedure requires a Regen Database function. The Regen Database function destroys all the images residing on the system disk. (Procedure described on page 9–21. (Procedure described on page 9–18. shown in illustration 9–6. Make sure you archive all images before you reset the image database. · Description begins on page 9–13. Make sure you archive all images before you reset the image database. begins on page 9–4.) · Note: Touch Regen Database |Yes| to reset the image database.) 2. 9–24 .

) 2. 1. 4. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen. Run reconfig on the SBC. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen.) 9–25 . 3. (Procedure described on page 9–18. Start reconfig on OC. Highlight the new Timezone parameter.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–21 System Formats & Defaults HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 9–6 SYSTEM FORMATS AND DEFAULTS SCREEN System Formats & Defaults MIL_HH_MM_SS MIL_HH_MM HH_MM_SS_XM HH_MM_XM Time Format / Date Separator . (Procedure described on page 9–21. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 6. DD_MM_YY – Starting Patient Exam # Starting Diagnostic Exam # 50001 1 MM_DD_YY YY_MM_DD Date Format Timezone US/Central US/Mountain US/Pacific US/Pacific – New US/Alaska US/East Indiana Backup Central time zone USA Mountain time zone USA Pacific time zone USA Pacific time zone USA Alaska time zone USA Eastern time zone USA Starting Optical Disk # Doctor’s Title Radiologist lb kg Units for Patient Weight Continue 9–21–1 Change the Timezone (OC and SBC) Use this procedure to change the system timezone. Note: The unix ‘date’ command does NOT change the timezone.

Start reconfig on OC. for use by scanRx and display. Display the Network Configuration screen. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. Start reconfig on OC. Date Format. (Procedure described on page 9–21. 9–26 . 1. and press <enter>. Type/enter the string for Doctor’s Title in the corresponding data field. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. The data entry field labels Option availability determines actual data entry field label(s). (Procedure described on page 9–21. 3. Highlight and change the Starting Optical Disk # and/or Starting Reel Tape # data field.) 2. Note: Check the help window for additional values. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. and/or Date Separator. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 9–21–5 Change the Optical Disk or Reel Tape number (OC only) Use this procedure to type/enter the value the system uses to number the next Optical Disk or Reel Tape.) 2. or Date Separator (OC only) These values determine the time and date format on the Messages box. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 3.) 2. 1. Display the Network Configuration screen. 9–21–4 Change the Units for Patient Weight (OC only) Change unit value for the patient weight data field on the Patient Data screen. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen. (Procedure described on page 9–21. ‘R’ for Radiologist. 5. 4. Start reconfig on OC. You may type/enter ‘D’ for Diagnostician. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen. (Procedure described on page 9–21. Start reconfig on OC. 5. 5. 5. 1. and press <enter>. 4. 9–21–3 Change the Doctor’s Title (OC only) Change the label of the Doctor’s Title data field on the Patient Data screen. 3. Display the Network Configuration screen. Display the Network Configuration screen. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. for use by scanRx and display 1. Touch the corresponding softkey to elect to enter patient weight in pounds or kilograms. Touch the softkey to select the corresponding Time Format.) 2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–21–2 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Change the Time Format. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen. 3. or you may type any other appropriate title. Date Format. 4.

9–27 . Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. This only requires a reconfig on the OC. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. 3. 5. Start reconfig on OC.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–22 Hardware Configuration Parameters HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 9–7 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION SCREEN Hardware Configuration 60 Hz IP refresh rate 3M camera rs170 Video Tape ccir MI10 camera 50 Hz Camera Configuration Yes Printer in Suite No CT Tube Type Housing # 46–309500G2 Insert # 46–309300G2 E–DAS Type 46–266845 G4 Reduced Gain 46–266845 G3 Full Gain Tube Housing Serial # Tube Failure Code Backup Tube Insert Serial # Continue 9–22–1 Change the Camera Configuration (OC only) This procedure allows changes to the parameters available under Camera Configuration. 9–22–2 Change the IP Refresh Rate (OC only) 1. (Procedure described on page 9–21. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. Display the Network Configuration screen. Start reconfig on OC. Display the Network Configuration screen. 3. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 1.) 2. 4. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.) 2. 5. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the IP refresh rate. 4. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the Camera Configuration. (Procedure described on page 9–21. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.

9–22–5 Add New Tube Information (OC and SBC) Use this procedure after installing a new X–Ray tube. 6. Display the Network Configuration screen. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the Video Tape Interface. 1. 5. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen.) 2. (Procedure described on page 9–21. (Procedure described on page 9–21. 4.) 9–22–6 Change the E–DAS type (OC and SBC) 1.) 9–28 . 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–22–3 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Change the Video Tape Interface (OC only) This procedure only requires a reconfig on the OC 1. 6. Display the Network Configuration screen. Start reconfig on OC. Type/enter the new Tube Housing Serial #. 3. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. (Procedure described on page 9–21. 4. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. (Procedure described on page 9–21.) 2. 9–22–4 Add/Remove a Printer (OC only) This procedure only requires a reconfig on the OC 1. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. Run reconfig on the SBC. (Procedure described on page 9–18. 5. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. Display the Network Configuration screen.) 2. Display the Network Configuration screen. 5. 5. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the correct type of E–DAS. Run reconfig on the SBC. 4. Touch the corresponding softkey add or remove the Printer from the Suite.) 2. 3. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 4. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. Start reconfig on OC. and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. and Tube Failure Code information. Start reconfig on OC. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. Tube Insert Serial #. Start reconfig on OC. 3. (Procedure described on page 9–18.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–23 Network Configuration HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 9–8 NETWORK CONFIGURATION – NO ACTIVE GATEWAY Network Configuration OC0 Hosts in Suite SBC0 IC0 IC1 IC2 Yes Active Gateway: No OC0 Internet address: SBC0 Internet address: SBC0 Ethernet number: ACRNEMA address: Suite ID of PAN host: Hostname of PAN: Subnet network OC0 Backup Accept ILLUSTRATION 9–9 NETWORK CONFIGURATION WITH ACTIVE GATEWAY Network Configuration OC0 Hosts in Suite SBC0 IC0 IC1 IC2 Yes Active Gateway: No OC0 Internet address: Gateway IP address ACRNEMA address Suite ID of PAN host Hostname of PAN Subnet network Gateway netmask Backup OC0 SBC0 Internet address: SBC0 Ethernet number: Accept 9–29 .

Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen.) 7. 4. 1. Run reconfig on any IC in the Suite. Run reconfig on the SBC. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens. 9–30 . (Procedure described on page 9–21.) 2. Start reconfig on OC. If adding an IC. 4. (Procedure described on page 9–18. 5. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. Select/deselect the hosts in the suite. 5. 4. Run reconfig on the OC. Start reconfig on OC. the SBC. Run ctload on any IC in the suite. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. 4. or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. (Procedure described on page 9–18. or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 3. Run reconfig on the OC and the SBC. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens. 6.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–23–1 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Change the Internet Addresses (OC and SBC) Use this procedure to change the internet numbers of hosts in the Suite. Start reconfig on OC. 3.) · Type/enter the new internet numbers for OC and SC when prompted. type/enter its internet number.) 2. Change the corresponding internet numbers.) 2. if adding an IC to the system. (Procedure described on page 9–21. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens. Run ctload on any IC in the suite. or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 3. 6. (Procedure described on page 9–21. 1. (Procedure described on page 9–21. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. Run reconfig on the SBC. 3. Change the Suite ID of PAN Host and Hostname of the PAN Host fields. 9–23–3 Change the ACRNEMA Address (OC only) 1. and the IC. Start reconfig on OC. or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.) 2. 9–23–2 Change the Suite Configuration (OC and SBC) Use this procedure to add or remove an IC from the suite. Change the ACRNEMA Address in the data field. 9–23–4 Change the Primary Archive Node (PAN) (OC only) 1.

Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens. 1. Start reconfig on OC. b. To remove an ethernet board: a. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. (Procedure described on page 9–21. c.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9–23–5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on the OC (OC only) Use this procedure when you add or remove the second ethernet board to or from the scanner. 1. To remove an ethernet board: a. b. Refer to Illustration 9–8: Select |No| for the Active Gateway. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. Run reconfig on the OC and run ctload on the IC. To add an ethernet board: a. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens. (Procedure described on page 9–21.) 2. Refer to Illustration 9–8: Select |No| for the Active Gateway. 3. Refer to Illustration 9–8: Select |Yes| for the Active Gateway. or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. To add an ethernet board: a. or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens.) 2. c. Refer to Illustration 9–8: Select |Yes| for the Active Gateway. 9–31 . Refer to illustration 9–9: Type/enter the gateway internet address into the Gateway IP address field. 9–23–6 Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on an IC in the Suite (OC only) Use this procedure when you add or remove the second ethernet board to or from an IC in the Suite. Refer to illustration 9–9: Type/enter the gateway internet address into the Gateway IP address field. b. b. Run ctload on the IC. Start reconfig on OC. or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9 9–24 Change the System Time Note: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 This procedure does NOT change the timezone of the system. 1. This procedure changes the actual time reported by the system. Type date YYMMDDhhmm <enter> YY = year. Use sdservice to shutdown application on the OC 2. Use sdservice to shutdown applications on the OC 2. Type su <enter> 3. Type setAdoption <enter> Note: Refer the Product Software Load Procedure for setAdoption instructions. Type su <enter> 3. 1. DD=day hh=hour. 9–26 Load the 8K rpm rotor patch tape. mm=minutes example: date 9701061436 sets the date to January 6. MM=month. 1997 2:36pm 9–25 Add/Remove Hosts for Image Transfer Use this procedure to inform the OC of hosts available for image transfer over the Network. 9–32 .

All phantom CALs. |2|. All phantoms must be centered axially to ±0. Touch |Shell| softkey. Please note the following requirements: a. In the opened shell.5 degrees in both the x and y axis.00mm for phantom scans. used to create a CAL file must be completed within a 75 hour period of time.12mm for phantom calibrations. Scout scans. All functional checks and service adjustments must be performed on the system prior to image performance verification. |3|. Verify that the following messages are displayed at the bottom of the plasma screen: resource manager: calculating cal vectors – xx% complete writing vectors to the SBC installing cal vectors on the SBC · · Touch |View Vector| softkey. must be used to measure phantom position. except Q–Cal. Verify that the vertical surface of the phantom is parallel to the gantry plane of rotation within ±0. f. Verify that the graph results do not exceed the upper graph limits. Enter 4–digit detector number. Touch |OK|. g. Verify that nothing is in the scan field–of–view. Make sure the tube is warm by using the Tube Warm Up soft key available from top level plasma. d. both 0 and 90 degrees. Note: You must execute the GENCAL scans that come after the warm up scans for the tube to be sufficiently warm. the system must be warmed up prior to scanning (minimum 2 hours) c. Touch |1|. b. 10–1 . Touch |Graph| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key for each of two scans that will be taken. enter av–cal. All phantoms must be centered axially to ±1. · · · · · · · · · Touch |Utilities| softkey. Touch |AutoCal| softkey. e. DO NOT cancel after warm-up scans. 10–2 Alpha Vector Cal Generation A valid Q–Cal and Crosstalk calibration are required.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 10 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE 10–1 Calibration This section describes the procedure for evaluating image performance on the HiSpeed Advantage System.

CAUTION Performing a Q–Cal destroys all old phantom CALS. beginning from the top level plasma: · · · Touch the |Cal| softkey. the DAS should have power turned ON for at least 2 hours before calibrating. If an abort occurs during the “COLD” portion of the Q–Cal data collection phase: · · · Stop. ZCHK calculation and comparison to applicable spec limits will occur automatically. A very cold tube is required. In addition. There should be no exposures for at least one and one half hours before Q–Cal is started (this also means no tube warm–up). Wait for at least one and one half hours before attempting a new Q–Cal series. That is why it is important that the Q–Cal procedure is run with a cold and hot tube to calculate beam movement. Touch the |Q–Cal| softkey.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 10–3 Q–CAL HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The Q–Cal procedure must be run before phantom calibration and scanning can begin. To initialize tube cooling. To examine the results of ZCHK initiate the following sequence of soft keys from the top level plasma. Touch |Cal Tools|. one of the metal bands of the mylar window assembly could be shading the detector. Touch |Q–Cal Status|. If an abort occurs during the “HOT” portion of the Q–Cal data collection phase: · · Exit the program and fix the problem. Verify that all Q–Cal vectors are valid. Tests that do not interfere with tube cooling will be completed during this wait. If the mylar window is not properly centered . Verify that the mylar window is centered on the patient alignment lights. Re–enter the program Continue with new series Upon completion of Q–Cal. A correction factor is calculated when the X–Ray beam moves across the detector in the Z–axis as the tube temperature changes. Touch the |Accept| softkey. 10–2 . causing Q–Cal to fail. · · · · Touch |Cal Functions|. Touch |Sort By kV|.

When scanning is complete check the results of crosstalk calibration using the following sequence of soft keys from top level plasma. Note: It is very important that the table is raised the full 180mm from the centered position. Verify that crosstalk passes all applicable specifications. · · · · · Touch |View XTalk|.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 10–4 Crosstalk Calibration HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 To begin crosstalk calibration execute the following sequence of soft keys beginning from the top level plasma. as described in the Phantom Calibration procedure: ––– Small 80kV ––– Small 100kv 120kV and 140kV ––– Medium and large 120kV ––– Medium and large 140kV Touch |Accept|. Edit the updated ROI values. · Touch |Accept|. 10–5 Phantom Calibration CT# Adjustment ALWAYS RUN THIS ADJUST CT# PROCEDURE AFTER YOU CALIBRATE THE SYSTEM. Touch |Cal Status|. Touch |View Xtalk|. Touch |Crosstalk|. If not. center the crosstalk phantom using the alignment lights. to continue (Push Scan Enable when lit) This will initiate the remaining scans required for crosstalk calibration. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF MISDIAGNOSIS. · · · · · Touch |Cal|. Touch |Xtalk Status|. DUE TO INACCURATE CT NUMBERS. Push Scan Enable when lit to initiate and complete four air scans When prompted. Touch |Accept|. Then raise the table 180mm from the centered position. Touch |Cal|. Touch |Phantom Edit|. Initiate the following sequence from the Top Level Plasma: · · · Touch |Cal|. problems must be addressed and crosstalk rerun. WARNING · 10–3 .

Accept Lower right of display Accept Phantom Centering Required No Accept Yes Center Phantom Exit When Cal or Cals are complete continue with additional Cals by touching Cal Select. describes the axial and scout scanning procedures. Direction 2102337. CT HiSpeed Advantage Operator’s Manual.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 10–6 Calibration Procedure HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustration 10–1 contains a block diagram that shows the applicable sequence of softkeys and keyboard inputs required during calibrations. The sequence from this point is a repeat of the process above beginning with touch User Select. User Select Edit Scans Choose Cals The Cal Scan selection list will be displayed on the right side of display Next More than one calibration can be selected. 10–4 . This will create a list of calibrations to be executed. Create the cal files that correspond to the scanning techniques that the customer uses. ILLUSTRATION 10–1 CALIBRATION PROTOCOL Start Cal Function Calibrate or Calcheck If desired.

11–2 RP 2. LEDs.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 11 – SWITCHES. ILLUSTRATION 11–1 IG SUBSYSTEM CHASSIS FRONT VIEW (COVER REMOVED) Filler Panel (slot 4) IG (slot 5) Blank Panel CLA (slot 2) SBC (slot 1) DC Power Supply FEP (slot 3) HSSD LSD AC Power Switch Cooling Fan Module 11–1 . AND JUMPER SETTINGS 11–1 SCU switches. LEDs and jumper settings Jumper and switch configurations for various SCU resident hardware is described in this section.X IG Subsystem Chassis Layout And Component Locations Illustration 11–1 shows the slot assignments for the SCU scan chassis and the location of the disk drives and power supply.

9–5.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–2 IG SUBSYSTEM CHASSIS REAR VIEW (COVER REMOVED) HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 +5VDC adjustment behind grating near +5V GND stud on DC Power Supply. Use insulated. DC Power Supply VME Backpanel – + Disk Drive Tray Fan VME +5V backpanel studs – + Bulkhead Connector Plate J5 J2 J6 J3 P1 Ethernet Connector Ethernet Connector Serial Port Connector DAS DATA System Ground Lug AC Input (120VAC only) Abort Connector Fiber–Optic Cable Access Port 11–2 .1VDC if necessary (measure voltage at VME +5V backpanel studs). potentiometer adjustment tool to set to +4.

D B SBC (MVME166–9U Stealth CPU) CONNECTOR Descriptions: Serial A 25–pin RS232C serial port A (to OC GAI panel. GREEN LED indicating the onboard ETHERNET is active (transferring data). GREEN LED indicating processor is in a RUN condition (firmware or software). GREEN LED indicating processor is is in a HALT condition. GREEN LED indicating the onboard SCSI is active (transferring data). Momentary pushbutton which RESETS the SBC and causes a power–up reset and boot cycle. GREEN LED indicating VME data transfers active to/from the SBC. GREEN LED indicating REMOTE POWER (+12VDC) present to the onboard Ethernet 15–pin connector (fused thru F1 on the SBC) for external transceivers. the “tip” line) Serial B 25–pin RS232C serial port B (not used) Serial C 25–pin RS232C serial port C (not used) Serial D 25–pin RS232C serial port D (not used) Ethernet 15–pin IEEE 802. GREEN LED indicating SCSI TERMINATOR power is present to the external SCSI ribbon cable (fused thru F2 on the SBC). GREEN LED indicating SBC is the VME SYSTEM CONTROLLER. ABORT RESET SBC (MVME166–9U Stealth CPU) Front Panel SWITCH Descriptions: ABORT RESET C A Momentary pushbutton which HALTS the SBC and enters the onboard firmware monitor (166–Bug>).3 Ethernet (to external transceiver to OC network) Keyboard SUN3 compatible keyboard port (not used) Printer Centronics parallel printer port (not used) SCSI 50–pin SCSI bus connector (to subsystem LSD and HSD disk drives) ETH KYB PRI SCSI 11–3 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–3 SBC (MVME166–9U 68040 “STEALTH” CPU LEDs AND CONNECTORS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 FAIL STAT RUN SCON LAN RPWR SCSI VME TPWR SBC (MVME166–9U Stealth CPU) LED Descriptions: FAIL STAT RUN SCON LAN RPWR SCSI VME TPWR GREEN LED indicating board RESET in progress (or board failure if it stays on).

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–4 SBC BOARD (MVME166–9U 68040 CPU) JUMPERS Foreplane HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 J6 J15 3 1 J14 J13 J12 Transition Module Memory Mezzanine Module F1 J2 F 2 Processor Module (IN) (1–2 OUT. 4–6 IN) (Don’t Care) J2 = SCSI Termination Power J3 = General Purpose IO J6 = VME System Controller J7 = SRAM Power Control J10 = VSBchip2 Arbitration Select F1 = +12 Volt Power Fuse F2 = SCSI Termination Power F3 = –12 Volt Power Fuse F4 = +5 Volt Power Fuse J6 = Keyboard/Mouse select J12 = Serial J13 = Port J14 = Mode J15= Select 6 4 2 J7 5 3 1 Processor Module 16 15 Transition Module (IN) (2–3 IN) (2–3 IN) (2–3 IN) (2–3 IN) J6 8 7 2 J3 1 J10 F4 F3 P2 P1 11–4 . all others IN) (IN) (3–5.

3 Ethernet (to external transceiver to STC/ETC network) 11–5 . Indicates Ethernet data packets are being transmitted. Ethernet CLA (MVME376–9U HAWK) Front Panel SWITCH Descriptions: (none) CLA (MVME376–9U HAWK) CONNECTOR Descriptions: Ethernet 15–pin IEEE 802.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–5 CLA (MVME376–9U HAWK ETHERNET) LEDs AND CONNECTORS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 VME RX TX INT STAT CLA (MVME376–9U HAWK) LED Descriptions: (LEDs not visible on the front 9U panel edge but 5 LEDs do exist on the 6U board edge) VME RX TX INT STAT Indicates board is being accessed over the VME. RED if board not initialized by software. Indicates a VME interrupt is being generated. Indicates Ethernet data packets are being received. GREEN if board initialized OK.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–6 CLA BOARD (MVME376–9U HAWK ETHERNET) JUMPERS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 NOTE: The 6U HAWK Ethernet is mounted on a 9U adaptor. LED‘s not visible from 9U front panel. JA11 6U circuit board 9U adaptor board JA4 JA16 JA8 JA9 JA10 P1 VME RX TX INT STATUS JA12 ON SW1 OFF ON TX2 TX1 SW2 OFF ON SW3 OFF ribbon cable to 9U panel connector J1 JA7 P2 JA13 JA1 11–6 .

Fiber–Optic receiver detects a valid light source (fiber connection). causing the self–test to run.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–7 FEP 46–327036G2 (GEMS FRONT END PROCESSOR) HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 RESET FEP (GEMS Front End Processor) LED Descriptions: D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 EDDF FDDF EIDF FIDF EODF FODF ACC0 ACC1 ABT LINK J4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 EDDF FDDF EIDF FIDF EODF FODF ACC0 ACC1 ABT LINK D0 thru D3 indicates the self–test being run on DSP0 during power–up or reset and then generates an up/down chasing pattern when DSP0 has successfully completed self–test. DAS FEP (GEMS Front End Processor) TEST POINT Descriptions: VCC Onboard test point for +5VDC on the FEP. Indicates DSP0 local memory ACCESS. –12V Onboard test point for –12VDC on the FEP. Indicates an EMPTY DAS DATA FIFO condition during operation. Indicates a FULL OUTPUT DATA FIFO condition during operation. Fiber–Optic connector for DAS DATA fiber–optic cable from Gantry/SCOM. Connector for scan abort daisy chain cable from PDU to STC. VEE Onboard test point for –5VDC (generated on the FEP). Indicates an EMPTY OUTPUT DATA FIFO condition during operation. LGND Onboard test point for LOGIC GROUND on the FEP. FEP (GEMS Front End Processor) Front Panel SWITCH Descriptions: VCC VEE +12V –12V LGND RESET Momentary pushbutton immediately resets the FEP. Indicates DSP1 local memory ACCESS Indicates ABORT relay status is OPEN (scanning is NOT enabled). D4 thru D7 indicates the self–test being run on DSP1 during power–up or reset and then generates an up/down chasing pattern when DSP1 has successfully completed self–test. AB FEP (GEMS Front End Processor) CONNECTOR Descriptions: J4 DAS AB Connector for DSP emulator (factory use only). 11–7 . Indicates a FULL DAS DATA FIFO condition during operation. Indicates an EMPTY INPUT DATA FIFO condition during operation. +12V Onboard test point for +12VDC on the FEP. Indicates a FULL INPUT DATA FIFO condition during operation.

J3 JP2 J5 JP2 IN OUT DAS Data Source Fiber–Optic input from front panel only (ALL IG SYSTEMS) Coaxial input from backpanel only (default) 11–8 . JP1 NOTE 2: All IG based systems are fiber–optic only and JP2 must be installed (IN) as shown.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–8 FEP BOARD (GEMS FRONT END PROCESSOR) JUMPER HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 JP1 IN OUT Test Bus Select factory use only normal use (default) TOP J1 S1 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 DS8 DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14 DS15 DS16 DS17 J2 J4 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 DS18 Fiber In NOTE 1: “Self store” jumper by installing on 1 pin only if jumper removed (OUT) as shown on JP1.

IG (GEMS Image Generator) TEST POINT Descriptions: VCC LGND RESET Onboard test point for +5VDC on the IG board. IG (GEMS Image Generator) Front Panel SWITCH Descriptions: RESET Momentary pushbutton that immediately resets the IG. Onboard test point for LOGIC GROUND on the IG board. causing the self–test to run. VCC LGND 11–9 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–9 IG (GEMS IMAGE GENERATOR) HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 IG (GEMS Image Generator) LED Descriptions: D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D0 thru D4 indicate the self–test being run on the IG board during power–on or reset and then generates an up/down chasing pattern when the IG is running normally. IG (GEMS Image Generator) CONNECTOR Descriptions: EMU EMU Connector for DSP emulator (factory use only).

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–10 IG (GEMS IMAGE GENERATOR) JUMPERS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 RESET DIAG 3 DIAG 2 DIAG 1 DIAG 0 B S1 B A JP1 JP2 A A JP3 B Ø TP1 +5V Ø TP2 LGND JP1 Emulator Enable A position normal use (default) B position factory use only JP2. JP3 A position B position VME Base Address normal use (default) factory use only 11–10 .

5 4 3 2 1 J2A5 J2A4 J2A3 J2A2 J2A1 IG VME Backpanel part number label J13 J3A5 J3A4 J3A3 J3A2 J3A1 J12 IG VME Backpanel barcode label 5 4 3 2 1 11–11 . All others removed. Note that.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–11 IG SUBSYSTEM 5–SLOT VME BACKPANEL (FRONT) HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 Front View J1A5 J1A4 J1A3 J1A2 J1A1 Backpanel slot jumpers installed between slots 4 and 5 ONLY (slot 4 is not used). on the IG VME backpanel. slot 1 is on the far right and that slot 5 is on the left (front view).

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–12 IG SUBSYSTEM 5–SLOT VME BACKPANEL LAYOUT (REAR) HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 Rear View J1A1 J1A2 J1A3 J1A4 J1A5 VME J1 Termination DIPS (12) 12VDC INPUT TO BACKPANEL 6 5 4 3 2 1 J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 not used +12V RTN –12V RTN not used +12VDC –12VDC J7 Not Used J7 J2A1 J2A2 J2A3 J2A4 J2A5 VME J2 Termination DIPS (4) J5 Not Used J5 J15 Not Used J15 DC OUTPUT TO DISK DRIVES J6 4 3 2 1 J16 J3A1 J3A2 J3A3 J3A4 J3A5 J13 1 2 3 4 +12VDC +12V RTN +5V RTN +5VDC J16 Not Used J12 5VDC INPUT TO BACKPANEL J13 +5V RTN J12 +5VDC 1 2 3 4 5 11–12 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–3 SCU Disk Drives HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 11–13 RP 2X IG SUBSYSTEM HSSD (HIGH SPEED SCSI DISK) JUMPERS J2 Jumper Block (left side of drive) 2 1 target ID = 1 parity enabled termination disabled ST32550N Reserved Reserved front Parity Disable J1 Jumper Block (bottom of drive) 5 6 1 2 J4 Jumper Block (front of drive) 2 1 1 HSSD Terminator Power Select Terminator Enable SCSI Bus Cable From SBC NO TERM 1 2 4 SCSI ID 0 LSD TERM 11–13 .

11–14 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 ILLUSTRATION 11–14 RP 2.X IG Subsystem LSD (Local SCSI Disk) Jumpers Pin 7 8 Jumper Installed No Jumper No Jumper front Pin 1 Terminating Resistor installed 2 No Jumper target ID = 0 parity enabled termination enabled term power from drive ST5660N SCSI Bus Cable From SBC 1 0 HSSD NO TERM TERM LSD 11–3–1 Fujitsu Disk Drive Self–Diagnostics When you turn ON power. IF the LED flashes continuously after you turn on power: D D Note: Check the incoming power Replace the drive The Fujitsu Intelligent Disk Drive (IDD) MI603S–512 replaces the Seagate STN5660N in forward production and as FRU. it steadily flashes the green LED on the front of the drive. the MI603S–512 initiates a series of basic hardware and operation self–tests. IF the diagnostic detects a hard error. Do NOT confuse the steady flashing of a hard error with the intermittent blinking that occurs during normal Disk I/O activity. IG SUBSYSTEM LSD (LOCAL FUJITSU MI603S–512 SCSI DISK) JUMPERS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 RP 2. The Fujitsu IDD retains the ST5560N disk partitioning and label.X.

mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 27 and controlled by DSP0 Diagnostic/status LED #4. mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 29 and controlled by DSP1 Diagnostic/status LED #6. mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 30 and controlled by DSP1 11–15 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 ILLUSTRATION 11–15 RP 2. mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 25 and controlled by DSP0 Diagnostic/status LED #2. mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 28 and controlled by DSP1 Diagnostic/status LED #5. mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 26 and controlled by DSP0 Diagnostic/status LED #3.X IG SUBSYSTEM LSD (LOCAL SCSI DISK) JUMPERS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 target ID = 0 parity enabled termination enabled term power from drive ST5660N J5 Jumper Block (rear of drive) 1 2 5 6 front J8 Jumper Block (front of drive) 2 1 34 33 4 2 1 SCSI ID Parity Enable Terminator Spare Jumpers Power (pins not used) Select SCSI Bus Cable From SBC 1 HSSD NO TERM Terminator Disable 0 LSD TERM 11–4 FEP Board (G2) 46–327036G2 (G1) 46–327036G1 11–4–1 LEDs The front of the FEP board contains the following 18 LEDs: Reference Designator DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 Color Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Name D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Meaning Diagnostic/status LED #0. mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 24 and controlled by DSP0 Diagnostic/status LED #1.

two 4–LED “cylon” (or Knight Rider) patterns will be present. one of the following 4–LED failure codes will rapidly flash to indicate the failing test: Flashing LED Pattern D3 D2 D1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF D0 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Description Not Used DSP1 Diagnostic Initialization Failure DSP1 EPROM Checksum Failure DSP1 Loaded Image Checksum Failure DSP1 to DSP1 Interprocessor Communication (semafore) Failure DSP1 Stack Space Failure Not Used Not Used Not Used DSP1 CPU Functionality Failure DSP1 Register Access Failure DSP1 Dual Port RAM Access Failure DSP1 Global Bus Error Detection Failure DSP1 Scan Control (SDV / ODV) Failure DSP1 View Loop Failure 11–16 . one for DSP0 and one for DSP1. If either DSP fails its PUD. indicate current board status. and their meaning never changes. which takes about 2 seconds) LEDs D0 thru D7 flash a count down sequence from FFh (all on) to 00h (all off) indicating the test in progress. mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 31 and controlled by DSP1 DAS Data FIFO is empty DAS Data FIFO is full VME Input Data FIFO is empty VME Input Data FIFO is full VME Output Data FIFO is empty VME Output Data FIFO is full DSP #0 is accessing local SRAM DSP #1 is accessing local SRAM Abort line is open (scanning is not enabled) Fiber optic receiver detects a valid light source. 11–4–2 Power–up Mode During power–up diagnostics (PUD. DSP0 controls D0 thru D3 and DSP1 controls D4 thru D7. LEDs DS9 thru DS18 are set by hardware. In all cases. LEDs DS1 thru DS8 are set by the DSPs during board operation. “THIS DOES NOT INDICATE THAT A VALID RPSCOM–FEP TAXI LINK IS PRESENT OR THAT DAS DATA IS VALID”.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 Reference Designator DS8 DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14 DS15 DS16 DS17 DS18 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 Color Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Name D7 EDDF FDDF EIDF FIDF EOD FODF ACC0 ACC1 ABT Link Present Meaning Diagnostic / status LED #7. There are three modes of operation for the FEP: (1) Power–up. If the PUD passes. However. (2) Diagnostics. and (3) Applications and the meaning of the DSP settable LEDs changes depending on the FEP mode.

ON indicates software loaded diagnostics into DSP1 and awaits next command. ON indicates that DSP1 has received a scan mode and is actively processing a scan DSP1 Mode Type. DSP1 FEP Mode Active. ON indicates software loaded diagnostics into DSP0 and awaits next command DSP0 Diag Exec Processing. On indicates FEP control processing in DSP1 is processing a control command Applications Mode During application mode scanning. DSP1 Diag Exec Processing. DSP1 Diagnostic Mode Enabled. Indicates which of the following modes DSP1 is processing: D6 OFF ON OFF ON MODE NOT USED SCOUT AXIAL OTHER (RTS. Flashes once per second if DSP1 is alive. NON–PROPRIETARY DIAGS.. NON–PROPRIETARY DIAGS. DSP0 FEP Mode Active. On indicates that FEP control processing in DSP0 is processing a control command DSP1 Heartbeat. Indicates DSP1 alive when it flashes once per second. Flashes once per second if DSP0 is alive DSP0 Diagnostic Mode Enabled. ON indicates the diagnostic executive in DSP0 is processing a diagnostic command DSP0 FEPCtl Processing. ON indicates the diagnostic executive in DSP1 is processing a diagnostic command DSP1 FEPCtl Processing. NDC) DSP1 Heartbeat. NDC) 11–17 . Indicates DSP0 alive when it flashes once per second.. LEDs D0 thru D7 are defined as follows: Indicator D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 11–4–4 Description DSP0 Heartbeat.D2 D3 OFF OFF ON ON D4 D5 D7. ON indicates that DSP0 received a scan mode and is actively processing a scan DSP0 Mode Type.D6 D7 OFF OFF ON ON Description DSP0 Heartbeat. LEDs D0 thru D7 are defined as follows: Indicator D0 D1 D3. Indicates which of the following modes DSP0 is processing: D2 OFF ON OFF ON MODE NOT USED SCOUT AXIAL OTHER (RTS.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–4–3 Diagnostics Mode HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 During diagnostic mode scanning.

Selects whether the DAS data coming from the RPSCOM is received from a BNC on the RP chassis backplane or from a fiber optic receiver on the FEP front face. BNC is DAS data source (DEFAULT) Fiber optic is DAS data source NAME VCC –5V +12V –12V LGND MEANING +5V LOGIC SUPPLY –5V ECL LOGIC SUPPLY +12V BACKPLANE VOLTAGE –12V BACKPLANE VOLTAGE LOGIC GROUND Removed: Installed: JP2 DDS Store position: Installed: 11–18 . located near the J3 VME connector: Jumper JP1 Name TBS Meaning Test Bus select. 74ACT8990 is test bus source (DEFAULT) XDS510 is test bus source (ENG TEST ONLY) DAS Data Source select.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–4–5 Test Points HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 The front of the FEP contains the following 5 test points: TEST POINT TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 11–4–6 Jumpers The 46–327036G2 version of the FEP contains 2 jumpers. The 46–327036G1 version of the FEP contains one jumper. Selects whether the JTAG test test bus source is the 74ACT8990 test bus controller or the XDS510 test bus interface. JP1.

ILLUSTRATION 11–16 FEP G2) 46–327036G2 & (G1) 46–327036G1 BOARD LAYOUT J1 S1 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 DS8 DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14 DS15 DS16 DS17 J2 J4 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 JP1 DS18 Fiber In JP2 J3 J5 11–19 . Use switch S1 to power–up reset the FEP.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–4–7 Switches HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 The FEP contains 1 switch.

TP5 ISO1: High side of the isolation supply for the flowing gate drive of FET Q55. TP13 ISO2: Positive side of the isolation supply for Q130 FET drive. TP10 HV: Positive side of the amplifier bridge. D DS67: On when the lower FET is commanded off. This LED indicates the presence of logic drive to the isolated FET drive circuitry. TP8 RTN1: Low side of the isolation supply for Q55 FET drive. This is nominally +24V. This LED indicates the presence of logic drive to the isolated FET drive circuitry. If +24V is not present. not the state of the Q14’s gate direction. measured with respect to TP8. LEDs. filtered and buffered cradle motor voltage. The following LEDs receive pulses at various duty cycles (with the exception of DS PS) so they vary in intensity from a fully on LED. TP11 RTN2: Low side of the isolation supply for Q130 FET drive. Jumpers and switches 11–5 11–5–1 46–264370G1 Cradle Amplifier Cradle Amplifier Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D 11–5–2 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP1 ISO3: High side of isolation supply for the lower FETs. DS68: On when +24V is present on the amplifier board. D D D 11–5–3 Cradle Amplifier Board Switch Settings None 11–20 . not the state of the Q155’s gate directly. These pulses are needed for the DC–DC converter to operate. the DC– DC converter will not work. High power return. Cradle Amplifier Board LEDs LEDs are provided to give a “feel” of the state the circuitry on the amplifier board.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 Test Points. (Above 14V) TP2 GND: Low side of the amplifier bridge. Measured with respect to TP8. TP4 +24V: Supplied from the ETC board. TP3 AGND: Analog ground. DS124: On when DCCLK pulses are present at the amplifier. DS98: On when the lower FET is commanded off. TP6 CRADLE PULSE–IL*1: Goes low when the amplifier bridge current is at or above 6A nominal TP7: Output of the push–pull driver of the isolation transformer for the DC–DC converters. TP12 VMTR: The scaled. the relay cannot operate and there isn’t any drive voltage present at the bridge. TP9 PGND: 24V return.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–17 46–264370G1 CRADLE AMPLIFIER HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–21 .

H = Halt: The MPU has halted. 11–22 . U = User: The MPU is in the user state. S = Super: The MPU is in the supervisor state. D = DMAC: The DMAC has control of the local bus. Additional information is available in the Heurikon CPU self test section. 11–6–4 Configuration DIP Switch Used to configure the CPU board to a specific node. 11–6–2 Status LEDs D D D D D 11–6–3 B = Bus: Another VMEBus master has control of the bus. The correct setting of this DIP switch can be found by selecting the Board Layout button below. 11–6–1 Heurikon CPU Board LEDs Indicator LEDs D D D S = Slave M = Master F = Fail HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 User LEDs D D D D 1 = User LED1 – MSB 2 = User LED2 3 = User LED3 4 = User LED4 – LSB Additional node specific troubleshooting information on the User LEDs is available in the Heurikon CPU self test section.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–6 Heurikon CPU Board Test Points No serviceable test points. Heurikon CPU Board Switch Settings Reset Switch – Resets the CPU board and initiates the self test.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–18 46–296377G1 HEURIKON CPU ETC HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–23 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–19 46–296377G1 HEURIKON CPU STC HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–24 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–20 46–296377G1 HEURIKON CPU OBC HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–25 .

These pulses are needed for the DC–DC converter to operate. measured with respect to TP9. TP2 GND: Low side of the amplifier bridge. filtered and buffered E/T motor voltage. This is at about +170V. Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board LEDs LEDs exist to give a “feel” for the state of the circuitry on the amplifier board. This goes low when the bridge current above 12A. This is the high voltage supply return. DS75: On when the lower FET is commanded off. TP13 ISO2: Positive side of the isolation supply for Q130 FET drive. This LED indicates the presence of logic drive to the isolated FET drive circuitry. TP3 AGND: Analog ground. D D D 11–7–3 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Switch Settings None 11–26 . If +24V is not present. TP10 PGND: This is the +24V return. TP4 +24v: 24 volts for the relays and the DC–DC converter. D DS74: On when the lower FET is commanded off. TP12 RTN2: Low side of the isolation supply for Q130 FET drive. TP7 SCKT: Short Circuit signal. TP11 HV: This is the high side of the amplifier bridge. DS77: ON when DCCLK pulses are present at the amplifier.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–7 11–7–1 46–288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 11–7–2 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP1 ISO3: Positive side of the isolation supply for the lower FETs of the “H–Bridge” Q20 and Q150. the DC– DC converter will not work. measured with respect to TP12. TP6 P–IL: Elev/Tilt Pulse–IL*1– Goes low when the amplifier bridge is at or above 6A nominal. All of the following LEDs are pulsed at various duty cycles (with the exception of DS PS) so they vary in intensity from a fully on LED. TP9 RTN1: Low side of the isolation supply for Q55 FET drive. not the state of the Q150’s gate direction. This LED indicates the presence of logic drive to the isolated FET drive circuitry. DS76: On when +24V is present on the amplifier board. It also acts as ISO3 RTN. TP14 VMTR: The scaled. not the state of the Q20’s gate direction. TP8: This test point is the output of the push–pull driver of the DC–DC converters’ isolation transformer primaries. the relay cannot operate and there isn’t any drive voltage present of the bridge. TP5 ISO1: Positive side of the isolation supply for Q61 FET drive.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–21 46–288170G1 ELEVATION/TILT AMPLIFIER HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–27 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–8 11–8–1 46–288856G1 Collimator Board Collimator Board Test Points (46–288856G1) D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 11–8–2 Collimator Board LEDs D D D 11–8–3 DS1 FIL_Z: Filter Z–pulse active TP1 APDIR: Aperture direction TP2 AP_A: Aperture A–pulse HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP3 APSTEP: Aperture stepper motor drive signal TP4 FIL_B: Filter B–pulse TP5 FIL_A: Filter A–pulse TP6 AP_DIS: Aperture disable TP7 DIAG_FILDIR: Diagnostic filter direction TP8 DIAG_FIL EN: Diagnostic filter enable TP9 DIAG_FILSTP: Diagnostic filter stepper drive signal TP10: Power signal for 38V high/low interrupt circuit TP11 FIL ENCPWR: Power signal for filter encoder high/low interrupt circuit TP12: LGND TP13 AP_B: Aperture B–pulse TP14: VCC TP15: +15V TP16: –15V TP17: AGND TP18: 10V_REF TP19 AP_ENCPWR: Power signal for aperture encoder high/low interrupt TP20: +24V TP21: PGND TP22: Spare TP23: Spare TP24 AP_ENCPWR: Power signal for aperture encoder high/low interrupt TP25 FIL ENCPWR: Power signal for filter encoder high/low interrupt circuit TP26: Power signal for 38 V high/low interrupt circuit DS2 FIL_HM_SW: Indicates filter home DS3 AP_Z: Aperture Z–pulse active Collimator Board Switch Settings None 11–28 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–22 46–288856G1 COLLIMATOR BOARD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–29 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–9 11–9–1 46–321276G1 Collimator Board Collimator Board Test Points (46–321276G1) D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D TP1 APDIR: Aperture direction TP2 AP_A: Aperture A–pulse HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP3 APSTEP: Aperture stepper motor drive signal TP4 FIL_B: Filter B–pulse TP5 FIL_A: Filter A–pulse TP6 AP_DIS: Aperture disable TP7 DIAG_FILDIR: Diagnostic filter direction TP8 DIAG_FIL EN: Diagnostic filter enable TP9 DIAG_FILSTP: Diagnostic filter stepper drive signal TP10: Power signal for 38V high/low interrupt circuit TP11 FIL ENCPWR: Power signal for filter encoder high/low interrupt circuit TP12: LGND TP13 AP_B: Aperture B–pulse TP14: VCC TP15: +15V TP16: –15V TP17: AGND TP18: 10V_REF TP19 AP_ENCPWR: Power signal for aperture encoder high/low interrupt TP20: +24V TP21: PGND TP22: Spare TP23: Spare TP24 AP_ENCPWR: Power signal for aperture encoder high/low interrupt circuit TP25 FIL ENCPWR: Power signal for filter encoder high/low interrupt circuit TP26: Power signal for 38 V high/low interrupt circuit Collimator Board LEDs D D D 11–9–2 DS1 FIL_Z: Filter Z–pulse active DS2 FIL_HM_SW: Indicates filter home DS3 AP_Z: Aperture Z–pulse active Collimator Board Switch Settings None 11–30 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–23 46–321276G1 COLLIMATOR BOARD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–31 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 11–10 11–10–1 2138293 CTVRC Board CTVRC Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D 11–10–2 CTVRC Board LEDs D D D D D D D D D D D D 11–10–3 DS1: TEST DS2: REV DS3: ON DS4: LOI DS5: LOV DS6: HIV DS7: HUV DS8: LSTU DS9: LSHT DS10: RSTU DS11: RSHT DS12: OVRT TP1: +5V TP2: FA TP3: LPW TP4: FB TP5: RPW TP6: LGND TP9: CUR TP10: PWR TP11: +10V TP12: DVC TP13: DCH1 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP14: DCL0 TP15: LAC TP16: LCUR TP17: RAC TP18: RCUR TP19: WCUR TP22: +15V TP23: SGND TP24: –15V TP500: MUX TP501: SGND CTVRC Board Jumper and Switch Settings D D D D D D JP1: A=DCRGS B= No DCRGS S1 BOOST: manual mode parameters: run power level 40%. boost power level 60% S2: FORWARD/REVERSE S3: AUTO/MANUAL S4: ASCII code for board version (Insite Switch) S5: Reset 11–32 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 ILLUSTRATION 11–24 2138293 CTVRC BOARD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 JP1 A DCRGS B NO DCRGS Note: Jumper plug JP1 has two positions: A=DCRGS (regulated 550VDC PDU) B=No DCRGS (CT Compact HVDC PDU 2133533) 11–33 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–11 11–11–1 46–288886G1 mA Board mA Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D TP1: +5 REF TP2: SGND TP3: FERR TP4: CAMA TP5: FSIG TP6: LGND TP7: –10REF TP8: ACAL1 TP9: CCAL1 TP10: ANMA TP11: ACAL2 TP12: FSHG TP13: MAFB TP14: CCAL2 TP15: MADMD TP16: +24V TP17: OFIL TP18: IFL1 TP19: EILOC TP20: FILSH TP21: +30V HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP22: FCMD TP23: FCUR TP24: +15V TP25: FIL UC TP26: +30F TP27: FIL CT TP28: PD TP29: FIL2 TP30: PS TP31: FGND TP32: FIL1 TP33: FSH TP34: IPUL TP35: +5LED TP36: CLOOP TP37: –15V TP38: +15AV TP39: FD TP40: FDMD TP41: MAMUX TP42: FGND mA Board LEDs D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DS1: CLOOP DS2: INVEN DS3: ANC DS4: MA BAL DS5: CAO DS6: FIL FLT DS7: INV FLT DS8: FIL UC DS9: OFIL DS10: SH FIL DS11: FIL OC DS12: SMS DS13: 1FIL DS14: INV ON 11–34 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–11–2 mA Board Switch Settings D D ILLUSTRATION 11–25 46–288886G1 MA BOARD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 S1 S2 Reset Board Rev in ASCII (Insite Switch) 11–35 .

This signal is the pulse width modulation for the anode. TP12 VDRV: (Analog) This signal is input voltage for the voltage controlled oscillator. measure for 39KHz to 66KHz during a scan. TP7 VPHA: (Analog) This signal is the voltage for an approximate pre–scan kV value for the phase control of the anode.32 VDC 100kV = – 4. TP4 AGND: (Analog 0 Volts). i. The pre–scan values are: 80kV = – 5.20 VDC 140kV = 0. Analog ground.97 VDC 11–36 . measure for 400uS duration (LOW = Spit). TP10 KVCM: (Analog 0 Volts to 10 Volts).81 VDC 100kV = 1. This signal is the kV command voltage from the CPU. This is the voltage reference for the board. TP5 PWMA: (TTL 39KHz to 66KHz during scan).99 VDC 140kV = – 9.25 VDC D D D TP13 VREF: (Analog 10 Volts). TP15 VCNT: (Analog) This voltage control signal is sent to the Voltage Controlled Oscillator with the approximate pre–scan value.65 VDC 120kV = – 7. TP6 LGND: (TTL 0 Volts). Analog ground. This signal indicates a tube spit.32 VDC D D TP11 PWMC: (TTL 39KHz to 66KHz) This signal is the pulse width modulation for the cathode. measure for 39KHz to 66KHz during a scan.50 VDC 100kV = 2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–12 11–12–1 46–321064G1 kV Control Board kV Control Board 46–321064G1 Test Points D D D D D TP1 LGND HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP2 SPIT: (TTL 400uS duration). Logic ground. Analog ground. The approximate pre–scan values for kV are: 80kV = 3.e. TP9 VCAN: (Analog) This signal is the anode voltage control error signal.03 VDC 140kV = – 1.00 VDC 140kV = 1.16 VDC 120kV = – 3.32 VDC 100kV = – 6. TP3 AGND: (Analog 0 Volts). rapid decay of the kV.521 VDC D D D D D TP8 AGND: (Analog 0 Volts). The approximate pre–scan values for kV are: 80kV = 2. The approximate values for kV are: 80kV = – 5. TP14 VCO: (TTL) This signal is the voltage controlled oscillator.76 VDC 120kV = 2.97 VDC 120kV = 1.

380 VDC D D D D D D D D D D D D TP17: N/A TP18 SAW: (Analog 39KHz to 66KHz during scan) This signal is the sawtooth and is 39KHz to 66KHz during a scan. TP23. TP19 VER: (Analog) This signal is the cathode kV voltage error. Use the Anode Right Lower test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP–21. a large signal will pass thru the cap. a large signal will pass thru the cap. TP29 LEFT: (Left IBGTs – TTL) This is the control signal for the left IGBTs on the inverter. D D D D 11–37 . make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. TP21 LU: (TTL) Use the Left Upper test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP–21. TP23 LL: (TTL) Use the Left Lower test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP–21. TP36. TP34 and TP–28: One at a time. TP42. TP24 ASPIT: (Anode Spit – Analog) When the fall time of the anode kV is fast enough. TP30 KVTB: (kV Total – Analog) This is the signal of the anode and cathode total kV. TP36. TP20 INVEN: (TTL) This signal is the inverter enable signal from the CPU to enable the inverter. TP36. TP42.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP16 VPHC: (Analog). TP31 TRIG: (Trigger – TTL) Use this signal as a convenient way to trigger a scope to the start of a scan. TP28 ARL: (TTL).65 VDC 120kV = 1. TP42. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board.80 VDC 100kV = 2.Cathode current Total kV +10V Reference VDrive (TP 12) D D TP27 EXEN: (Exposure Enable – TTL) This is a signal from the rotor to indicate that the rotor is up to speed. TP34. TP25 CSPIT: (Cathode Spit – Analog) When the fall time of the cathode is fast enough. TP32 HVON (High Voltage ON – TTL) This signal indicates when the anode or cathode kV exceeds 75% of requested kV. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. TP23. TP26 kVMUX: (Analog) This is a MUX’ed signal for: Anode. The approximate pre–scan values for kV are: 80kV = 3. This signal is the cathode phase control voltage. TP22 EXCM: (TTL) Exposure Command from the Gentry I/O board. Cathode kV Anode. TP–28: One at a time. TP23. Performing this action is the same as inverter on.51 VDC 140kV = 0. TP34 and TP–28 one at a time.

TP42. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. TP47 ANST: (Analog) Anode Shoot–Thru. TP48 FLT: (TTL Faults) The following errors are OR’ed at this node: Anode.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP33 CART: (Cathode Right IGBT – TTL) This signal controls the right IGBT of the cathode inverter. TP37 CAKV: (Analog1 Volt = 10kV Cathode kV) Use this test point to measure the specified cathode kV signal to the cathode inverter. TP38 LGND: Logic ground. TP39 AGND: (Analog 0 Volts). Cathode Overcurrent Anode. TP44 CAOC: (Analog 1 Volt = 10A Cathode Overcurrent) Use this test point to measure the specified current thru the cathode tank. TP36. TP36 CRL: (TTL) Use the Cathode Right Lower test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP–21. TP43 LGND: Logic ground. TP41 ANKV: (Analog 1 Volt = 10kV Anode kV) Use this test point to measure the specified anode kV signal to the anode inverter. TP36. TP23. Analog ground. TP40 VERR: Analog Voltage Error. Cathode Shoot–Thru Anode. Cathode Overcurrent Anode. TP34 and TP–28 one at a time. TP46 CAST: (Analog) Cathode Shoot–Thru. TP34 and TP–28 one at a time. TP34 ARU: (TTL) Use the Anode Right Upper test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP–21. TP42. TP42. TP42 CRU: (TTL) Use the Cathode Right Upper test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP–21. TP23. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. Cathode Shoot–Thru Anode. TP23. TP45 ANOC: (Analog 1 Volt = 10A Anode Overcurrent) Use this test point to measure the specified current thru the anode tank. Cathode Overvoltage Inverter wiring interlock Fault reset Spit (TP2) Spit 32 D D TP51: +5V TP52: –15–A 11–38 . TP35 ANRT: (Anode Right IGBT – TTL) This signal controls the right IGBTs of the anode inverter. TP34 and TP–28 one at a time. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. TP36. Cathode Overvoltage D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D TP49: +15–A TP50 FLTS: (TTL Faults) The following errors are OR’ed at the node: Anode.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–12–2 kV Control Board 46–321064G1 Switch Settings D 11–12–3 S1: Reset HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 kV Control Board 46–321064G1 LEDs D D D D D D D D D D DS364: SPIT DS365: INVON DS366: HVON DS367: CAOV DS368: PNOV DS421: CAOC DS422: CAST DS423: ANOC DS424: ANST DS425: INTLK ILLUSTRATION 11–26 46–321064G1 KV CONTROL BOARD 11–39 .

I/O or mA boards. Scale: 25 A/V TP22 APH: Anode inverter duty cycle.2kHz/V TP25 LGND: Logic ground TP26 SAW: Sawtooth (5 to 10V) at double the inverter frequency. Scale: 20% /V – 100% TP23 CPH: Cathode inverter duty cycle. TP28 APLSA: “1” indicates an “ON” pulse of the anode inverter TP2 CPLSA: “1” indicates an “ON” pulse of the cathode inverter 11–40 . nominally 39 to 61 kHz TP27 FREQ: 5V squarewave at double the inverter frequency. Scale: 15kV/V TP9 ANKV: Anode kV feedback. TP2 +5v: +5V (VCC) logic power TP3 LGND: Logic ground TP4 TRIG: A “1” indicates the selected inverter(s) is (are) turned on. TP8 KVCM: kV command.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–13 11–13–1 46–321198G1 kV Control Board kV Control Board 46–321198G1 Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP1 HVON: A “1” indicates the kV feedback equals or exceeds 75% of command. Scale: 19. Scale: 12%/V – 10% TP19 SGND: Signal ground TP20 ANOC: Anode inverter current. Scale: 25 A/V TP21 CAOC: Cathode inverter current.5 kHz + 2. Scale: 10 kV/V TP10 CAKV: Cathode kV feedback. Scale 20 kV/V TP12 SGND: Signal ground TP13 MUX: Analog MUX output as selected by firmware TP14 +10V: +10V reference TP15 –15V: –15V supply voltage TP16 +15V: +15V supply voltage TP17 KVERR: Integrated kV error signal TP18 PCNT: Average inverter duty cycle. TP7 SPIT: A “1” indicates a spit has been detected and recovery is in process. Scale: 200% – 20%/V TP24 VCNT: Frequency control voltage. Scale 10kV/V TP11 KVTB: Total kV feedback. TP6 EXEN: A “1” indicates exposures are not disabled by the CTVRC. TP5 EXCM: A “1” indicates an exposure command is being received from the RCOMM board.

DS10 CINT: Indicates the cathode inverter interlock is open.0 kHz ±1.0 kHz at TP27 (FREQ) with TP24 (VCNT) set to 0V. 11–13–4 kV Control Board 46–321198G1 Adjustments D R316 CAKV: Adjusts the gain of the cathode kV feedback. DS13 INON: Indicates the selected inverter(s) is (are) turned on. D D 11–41 . R318 ANKV: Adjusts the gain of the anode kV feedback. Range: approximately ±20%. DS5 ANOC: Indicates an anode overcurrent has occurred. DS3 ANST: Indicates an anode shoot–through has occurred. DS9 AINT: Indicates the anode inverter interlock is open. Factory adjusted for unity gain. Should not require field adjustment. DS7 ANOV: Indicates an anode overvoltage has occurred. R323 (FREQ): Factory adjusted for minimum frequency of 39. DS11 OVRV: Indicates the kV feedback has exceeded the upper limit of the load regulator. DS8 CAOV: Indicates a cathode overvoltage has occurred. DS2 GFLT: Indicates a “GO” fault has occurred. Field adjusted during HV PS cal procedure.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–13–2 kV Control Board 46–321198G1 LEDs D D D D D D D D D D D D D 11–13–3 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 DS1 SPRT: Indicates the maximum spit rate has been exceeded. May be ignored if on after power up or hardware reset. DS4 CAST: Indicates a cathode shoot–through has occurred. Factory adjusted for unity gain. Field adjusted during HV PS cal procedure. kV Control Board 46–321198G1 Switch Settings D S1: Insite System readable 8P dip switch set for the ASCII equivalent of the board assembly version letter. DS6 CAOC: Indicates a cathode overcurrent has occurred. DS12 HVND: Indicates anode and/or cathode kV feedback signals exceed 10 kV. Range: approximately ±20%.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–27 46–321198G1 KV CONTROL BOARD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–14 11–14–1 46–288512G1 Gentry I/O Board Gentry I/O Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D TP3: +5V TP4: LGND TP5: SGND TP6: +15V TP7: –15V TP8: +12V TP9: –12V TP10: +10V TP11: +24V TP12: A/DIN TP13: SOUT TP14: –SIN TP15: SRTN TP16: +SIN TP17: PGND 11–42 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–14–2 Gentry I/O Board LEDs D D D D D D D D D 11–14–3 DS45: ECMD INTR DS46: BCTR INTR DS47: DTHTR INTR DS48: BCTR CLS DS75: AXLTS ON DS76: ADC CMPLT DS77: BTMR EXP DS110: TPRLY ON DS111: INTR CLS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 Gentry I/O Board Switch Settings D S1: Reset ILLUSTRATION 11–28 46–288512G1 GENTRY I/O BOARD 11–43 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–15 11–15–1 46–264806G1 Axial Control Board Axial Control Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D TP1 RD*: Read Strobe HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP2 6MHZ: 6 megahertz board clock TP3 DTACK*: Data Transfer Acknowledgement TP4 AXBE*: Axial board enable TP5 WR*: Write strobe TP6 HOME: Home flag TP7 CHC: Axial encoder channel C TP8 CHB: Axial encoder channel B TP9 CHA: Axial encoder channel A TP10 DEMO: From U127 TP11: VCOSIGIN TP12: VCOCOMIN TP13 PCP: From U127 TP14: VCO–CLK TP15 RSTSTB: 250 ms Reset strobe TP16 DOGEN: Watchdog enable status TP17: DELAYINT TP18: TRIGON TP19: STARTINT TP20 ZEROTRIG: Zero trigger (end of scan) TP21 XRAYCOMM: X–Ray exposure command TP22 DAS–TRIG: DAS triggers TP23 CLOCKON: DAS trigger control TP24: 10VRF TP25: +2VRF TP26 AXCMD: Axial drive current command TP27: SPARE TP28: –10RF TP29 AMUX: Analog mux output TP30: +24V for XRLE LED TP31: +24V for BUPC LED TP32: +24V for LOPC LED TP33: AX AMP ENABLE RTN TP34: AX AMP RESET RTN TP35: AX BRAKE for BRAKE LED TP36: +15V voltage supply TP37: +24V voltage supply 11–44 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 D D D D D D D D D D D D 11–15–2 TP38 –15V: –15V voltage supply TP39 +5V: +5V voltage supply HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP40 AGND: Analog power supply ground TP41 LGND: Logic power supply ground TP42 PGND: Unregulated +24V power ground TP43 QDIR: Quadrature direction TP44 AOUT: Xilinx internal channel A TP45 SCLK: Xilinx internal sync clock (2MHz) TP46 BOUT: Xilinx internal channel B TP47 HOMEOUT: Xilinx internal channel C TP48 HOMEINT*: Xilinx home interrupt TP49 OF: Xilinx 32 bit counter overflow bit Axial Control Board LEDs D D D D D D D D D D D D D DS270: CHA DS271: CHB DS320: CHC DS321: HOME DS322: LPC DS323: VAC DS324: 550V DS390: XRLE DS391: BUPC DS392: LOPC DS393: AMEN DS394: BRAK DS395: AMST 11–15–3 Axial Control Board Switch Settings D S55: RESET SWITCH 11–45 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–29 46–264806G1 AXIAL CONTROL BOARD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–46 .

D D 11–16–2 SCOM Board Switch Settings A four position toggle DIP switch is located just under the LEDs and is labeled SW3. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS6 BC3: (Board Command bit 3) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. It has no purpose for scanner applications. the CPU will read a logic “0”. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. either the board power is off or the board is being held in reset. DS2 BC7: (Board Command bit 7) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. TP6 ECLK: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. 11–16–3 SCOM Board LEDs D DS1 ALV: (Alive Mode LED) This is the only green LED on SCOM and is labeled ALV for “alive. TP3 LGND: (TTL 0 Volts) Use TP3 as logic ground for TP1 and TP2 when you measure the power supply voltages. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. It has no purpose for scanner applications. In either case. DS4 BC5: (Board Command bit 5) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register..” If this green LED is not lit. When a switch is in the OFF position. SCOM will not operate if the green LED is not lit. This is a general purpose DIP switch and can be accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Status Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. TP5 ECEN: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock Enable test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. switch bit 0”.. TP4 GND: (TTL Ground) N/A GE manufacturing uses this test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly.SW0 for “switch bit 3 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–16 11–16–1 46–297475G1 SCOM Board SCOM Board Test Points D D D D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP1 + 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the+ 5 VDC power supply voltage. D D D D D D 11–47 . These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS3 BC6: (Board Command bit 6) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. DS7 BC2: (Board Command bit 2) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. DS5 BC4: (Board Command bit 4) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. It has no purpose for scanner applications. TP2 – 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the – 5 VDC power supply voltage.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 DS8 BC1: (Board Command bit 1) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. DS11 RX: (Receive Status) This amber LED will flicker as data is received into SCOM. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. The intensity of the LED increases as the data rate increases. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.D0). the parity bit (labeled PA).. If the LED is not lit.. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). DS16 SY: (Synchronization Control Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). as they are presented to the AP. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). as they are presented to the AP.D0). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. DS14 PA: (Parity Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. the parity bit (labeled PA). D D D D D D D D D 11–48 . that it has been received on the rotating gantry). If the LED is on or flickering. then either the transmitter in the OBC has been turned off or a problem exists somewhere in the slip ring communication channel. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). DS17 D15: (DAS Data Bit 15) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. DS12 VLT: (Link Violation Status) This amber LED extinguishes when the TAXI Receiver is properly locked onto the incoming serial data stream. DS10 TX: (Transmit Status) This amber LED flickers as data is transmitted out of SCOM. The intensity of the LED increases as the data transmit rate increases..D0). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.. DS15 CK: (Synchronous Clock Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. the parity bit (labeled PA). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. then the command to reset Exposure Command on RCOM was transmitted or the SCOM board was reset.D0).. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA).. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). This LED is an excellent and quick indication of the overall health of the subsystem.. as they are presented to the AP. DS13 EC: (Exposure Command) This amber LED lights when the command to set Exposure Command on RCOM has been transmitted across the slip ring (there is no guarantee. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). DS9 BC0: (Board Command bit 0) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. however.

D0). DS19 D13: (DAS Data Bit 13) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK).D0)... the parity bit (labeled PA).. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.D0).. as they are presented to the AP. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). as they are presented to the AP. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). DS22 D10: (DAS Data Bit 10) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. as they are presented to the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA). the parity bit (labeled PA). the parity bit (labeled PA). D D D D D D 11–49 . to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. as they are presented to the AP. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK).. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. as they are presented to the AP. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 DS18 D14: (DAS Data Bit 14) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. DS21 D11: (DAS Data Bit 11) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).D0). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables..D0). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. as they are presented to the AP. as they are presented to the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA). DS23 D9: (DAS Data Bit 9) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15.D0)... the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.. the parity bit (labeled PA).. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY)..D0). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA).. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS20 D12: (DAS Data Bit 12) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). DS24 D8: (DAS Data Bit 8) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15.

the parity bit (labeled PA).. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. as they are presented to the AP.. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). the parity bit (labeled PA).D0). as they are presented to the AP.D0).. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).D0). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK).D0). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). the parity bit (labeled PA).. the parity bit (labeled PA). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. D D D D D 11–50 .. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.D0). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. DS27 D5: (DAS Data Bit 5) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. DS26 D6: (DAS Data Bit 6) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). as they are presented to the AP. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). the parity bit (labeled PA). the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA). as they are presented to the AP..D0). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). as they are presented to the AP. DS30 D2: (DAS Data Bit 2) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15.. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables..GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 DS25 D7: (DAS Data Bit 7) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15.. as they are presented to the AP. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). DS28 D4: (DAS Data Bit 4) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.. DS29 D3: (DAS Data Bit 3) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK).

the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).D0). as they are presented to the AP.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 DS31 D1: (DAS Data Bit 1) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. DS32 D0: (DAS Data Bit 0) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.D0). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.. as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. D ILLUSTRATION 11–30 46–297475G1 SCOM BOARD 11–51 . the parity bit (labeled PA).. the parity bit (labeled PA)...

These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications.. It has no purpose for scanner applications. This is a general purpose DIP switch and can be accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Status Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. TP2 + 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the + 5 VDC power supply voltage. DS3 BC6: (Board Command bit 6) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. DS2 BC7: (Board Command bit 7) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. SCOM will not operate if the green LED is not lit. DS7 BC2: (Board Command bit 2) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. It has no purpose for scanner applications. DS6 BC3: (Board Command bit 3) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. It has no purpose for scanner applications.SW0 for “switch bit 3 . the CPU will read a logic “0”.” If this green LED is not lit.. DS4 BC5: (Board Command bit 5) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. TP5 GND: (TTL Ground) N/A GE manufacturing uses this test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–17 11–17–1 46–288854G1 RCOM Board RCOM Board Test Points D D D D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP1 – 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the – 5 VDC power supply voltage. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. 11–17–3 RCOM Board LEDs D DS1 ALV: (Alive Mode LED) This is the only green LED on SCOM and is labeled ALV for “alive. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. When a switch is in the OFF position. TP4 ECLK: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. switch bit 0”. either the board power is off or the board is being held in reset. DS5 BC4: (Board Command bit 4) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. TP3 LGND: (TTL 0 Volts) Use TP3 as logic ground for TP1 and TP2 when you measure the power supply voltages. D D D D D D 11–52 . TP6 ECEN: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock Enable test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. D D 11–17–2 RCOM Board Switch Settings D D S1: Reset S2: A four position toggle DIP switch is located beneath the LEDs and is labeled SW3. In either case.

DS13 EC: (Exposure Command) This amber LED lights when the command to set Exposure Command on RCOM has been transmitted across the slip ring (there is no guarantee. DS10 TX: (Transmit Status) This amber LED flickers as data is transmitted out of RCOM. then either the transmitter in the OBC has been turned off or a problem exists somewhere in the slip ring communication channel. as they are presented to the AP. as they are presented to the AP. DS14 PA: (Parity Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. as they are presented to the AP. however. DS11 RX: (Receive Status) This amber LED will flicker as data is received into RCOM. D D D D D D D D D 11–53 .. as they are presented to the AP. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). The intensity of the LED increases as the data rate increases. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. This LED is an excellent and quick indication of the overall health of the subsystem. DS9 BC0: (Board Command bit 0) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.. that it has been received on the rotating gantry).. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. If the LED is on or flickering.D0). The intensity of the LED increases as the data transmit rate increases.D0). DS17 D15: (DAS Data Bit 15) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.... These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK).. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). the parity bit (labeled PA). DS15 CK: (Synchronous Clock Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. the parity bit (labeled PA).D0).D0). These LEDs have no use for scanner applications.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 DS8 BC1: (Board Command bit 1) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. DS12 VLT: (Link Violation Status) This amber LED extinguishes when the TAXI Receiver is properly locked onto the incoming serial data stream. DS16 SY: (Synchronization Control Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. then the command to reset Exposure Command on RCOM was transmitted or the SCOM board was reset. the parity bit (labeled PA).. the parity bit (labeled PA). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. If the LED is not lit.

D0).D0). as they are presented to the AP. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).. the parity bit (labeled PA). DS20 D12: (DAS Data Bit 12) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). as they are presented to the AP.D0).. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK).GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 DS18 D14: (DAS Data Bit 14) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. the parity bit (labeled PA). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS24 D8: (DAS Data Bit 8) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15.. the parity bit (labeled PA). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.D0). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.. the parity bit (labeled PA). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.. DS21 D11: (DAS Data Bit 11) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. as they are presented to the AP.. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK).D0). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK).D0). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.. the parity bit (labeled PA). as they are presented to the AP.. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). the parity bit (labeled PA).D0).. as they are presented to the AP.. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). DS23 D9: (DAS Data Bit 9) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15.. DS22 D10: (DAS Data Bit 10) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. DS19 D13: (DAS Data Bit 13) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. as they are presented to the AP. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.. D D D D D D 11–54 . the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).

DS30 D2: (DAS Data Bit 2) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS26 D6: (DAS Data Bit 6) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).D0). D D D D D 11–55 .. as they are presented to the AP. as they are presented to the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). DS28 D4: (DAS Data Bit 4) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). DS27 D5: (DAS Data Bit 5) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA). the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).D0). the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.D0).. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA).D0). the parity bit (labeled PA). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK).D0). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK)...D0).. as they are presented to the AP.. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. as they are presented to the AP. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. as they are presented to the AP..GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 DS25 D7: (DAS Data Bit 7) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. as they are presented to the AP. DS29 D3: (DAS Data Bit 3) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. the parity bit (labeled PA)....

. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP. the parity bit (labeled PA). to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS32 D0: (DAS Data Bit 0) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.D0). as they are presented to the AP. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY).. the parity bit (labeled PA). These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP.D0).. the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY). and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK).. and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK). as they are presented to the AP.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 DS31 D1: (DAS Data Bit 1) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15. D ILLUSTRATION 11–31 46–288854G1 RCOM BOARD 11–56 .

high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board J4: Power input to board +10.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–18 11–18–1 46–288778G1 Rot. 11–18–2 Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Connectors D D D D D D 11–18–3 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 J6: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer board J5: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels. TERMINATOR BD ROTATING TERMINATOR BOARD 46–288778G1–A J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 CHASSIS GROUND 11–57 .6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board J3: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board J2: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels. high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board J1: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 LEDs There are no LEDs on this board. 11–18–4 Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Switch Settings None ILLUSTRATION 11–32 46–288778G1 ROT. Terminator Bd Rotating Terminator Board 46–288778G1 Test Points This board does not have any Test Points.

11–19–2 Rotating Terminator Board Connectors D D D D D D 11–19–3 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 J6: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer bd. high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board J1: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board Rotating Terminator Board LEDs There are no LEDs on this board. high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board J4: Power input to board +10. J5: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–19 11–19–1 46–321054G1 Rot.6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board J3: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board J2: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels. 11–19–4 Rotating Terminator Board Switch Settings None 11–58 . Terminator Bd Rotating Terminator Board Test Points This board does not have any Test Points.

TERMINATOR BD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–59 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–33 46–321054G1 ROT.

11–20–2 Rotating Buffer Board Connectors D D D D D D D D 11–20–3 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 J1: Center Conductor LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels. Buffer Bd Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. AC coupled) RX_OUTPUT to the OBC. J2: Center Conductor LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels.6V_OUTBOUND to Stationary Buffer board J6: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board J7: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels. high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL to Stationary Buffer board J5: Power input to board +10. Shield Ground RX_OUT_GND to the OBC. AC coupled) TX_INPUT from the STC. 11–20–4 Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 Switch Settings None 11–60 . high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board J8: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board Rotating Buffer Board 46–288776G1 LEDs There are no LEDs on this board. J3: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND to Stationary Buffer board J4: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels. Shield Ground TX_IN_GND from the STC.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–20 11–20–1 46–288776G1 Rot.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–34 46–288776G1 ROT. BUFFER BD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–61 .

TERMINATOR BD J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 CHASSIS GROUND STATIONARY TERMINATOR 46–288774G1–A 11–62 . high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board J6: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board J4: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board J5: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels. 11–21–2 Stationary Terminator Board (Old) Connectors D D D D D D 11–21–3 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 J1: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer board J2: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels. high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board J3: Power input to board +10.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–21 11–21–1 46–288774G1 Stat. Terminator Bd Stationary Terminator Board 46–288774G1 Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11–21–4 Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) Switch Settings None ILLUSTRATION 11–35 46–288774G1 STAT.

LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels. LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels. INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board J7: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels. 11–22–4 Rotating Buffer Board Switch Settings None 11–63 . J3: Power ground to board. high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL to Stationary Buffer board J5: Power input to board. Shield. Buffer Bd Rotating Buffer Board Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. Shield. OUTBOUND_GND to Stationary Buffer board J4: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels. +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board Rotating Buffer Board LEDs There are no LEDs on this board. +10. 11–22–2 Rotating Buffer Board Connectors D D D D D D D D 11–22–3 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 J1: Center Conductor. Ground TX_IN_GND from the STC. Ground RX_OUT_GND to the OBC. high current). INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board J8: Power input to board.6V_OUTBOUND to Stationary Buffer board J6: Power ground to board. AC coupled) RX_OUTPUT to the OBC. J2: Center Conductor. AC coupled) TX_INPUT from the STC.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–22 11–22–1 46–321058G1 Rot.

BUFFER BD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–64 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–36 46–321058G1 ROT.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–23 11–23–1 46–321052G1 Stat. Terminator Bd Stationary Terminator Board Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11–23–2 Stationary Terminator Board Connectors D D D D D D 11–23–3

HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100

J1: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer board J2: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels, high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board J3: Power input to board +10.6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board J4: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board J5: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels, high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board J6: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board

Stationary Terminator Board LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.

11–23–4

Stationary Terminator Board Switch Settings None

11–65

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4
ILLUSTRATION 11–37 46–321052G1 STAT. TERMINATOR BD

HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100

11–66

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–24 11–24–1 46–288772G1 Stat. Buffer Bd Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11–24–2 Stationary Buffer Board Connectors D D D D D D D D D D D 11–24–3

HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100

J1: Center Conductor, LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) RX_OUTPUT to the OBC. Shield Ground RX_OUT_GND to the OBC. J2: Center Conductor, LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) TX_INPUT from the STC. Shield Ground TX_IN_GND from the STC. J3 Pin 1: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from +12V Power Supply J3 Pin 2: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from +12V Power Supply J3 Pin 3: Shield connection CHASSIS GND from +12V Power Supply J4: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer board J5: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels, high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board J6: Power input to board +10.6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board J7: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND to Rotating Buffer board J8: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels, high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL to Rotating Buffer board J9: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND to Rotating Buffer board

Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.

11–24–4

Stationary Buffer Board 46–288772G1 Switch Settings None

11–67

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5
ILLUSTRATION 11–38 46–288772G1 STAT. BUFFER BD

HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100

CHASSIS GROUND

J1

J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9

CHASSIS GROUND

J2

J3
STATIONARY BUFFER BOARD 46–288772G1–A

11–68

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–25 11–25–1 46–321056G1 Stationary Buffer Bd Stationary Buffer Board Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11–25–2 Stationary Buffer Board Connectors D D D D D D D D D D D 11–25–3

HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100

J1: Center Conductor, LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) RX_OUTPUT to the OBC. Shield Ground RX_OUT_GND to the OBC. J2: Center Conductor, LOGIC C–AC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) TX_INPUT from the STC. Shield Ground TX_IN_GND from the STC. J3 Pin 1: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from +12V Power Supply J3 Pin 2: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from +12V Power Supply J3 Pin 3: Shield connection CHASSIS GND from +12V Power Supply J4: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer board J5: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels, high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board J6: Power input to board +10.6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board J7: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND to Rotating Buffer board J8: LOGIC C–H (CMOS levels, high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL to Rotating Buffer board J9: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND to Rotating Buffer board

Stationary Buffer Board LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.

11–25–4

Stationary Buffer Board Switch Settings None

11–69

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4
ILLUSTRATION 11–39 46–321056G1 STATIONARY BUFFER BD

HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100

11–70

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–26 11–26–1 46–264756G1 Console Autovoice Bd Console Autovoice Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D 11–26–2

HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100

TP1: Console speaker signal prior to volume reduction TP2: Remote intercom microphone signal TP3: Signal ground TP4: Remote speaker signal prior to volume reduction TP5: Console microphone signal TP6: Record input signal TP7: Play output signal TP8: +6V TP9: Logic ground

Console Autovoice Board LEDs D DS86 RUN: Autovoice microcontroller active

11–26–3

Console Autovoice Board Switch Settings D S253: Reset

ILLUSTRATION 11–40 46–264756G1 CONSOLE AUTOVOICE BD

11–71

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–27 11–27–1 46–264888G1 Relay Control Board Relay Control Board Test Points D

HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100

TP1 Analog 120/110 VAC Will be 120/110 VAC when the axial is enabled. Will be at 0 VAC if the servo over current relay opens to disable the servo. TP2 Analog 120/110 VAC Coil Power at 120/110 VAC for the servo enable contactor K2. At 120/110VAC for the servo to be able to drive gantry axial rotation. TP3 Analog 120/110 VAC 120/110 VAC coil power for circuit breaker K1 (Table vertical drive and Gantry tilt) and K2 (Table horizontal drive). Present when drives are ’ON’ at the REM box. TP4 Analog 120/110 VAC Power to turn on the SRU and the Operator console contactors. 120/110 VAC when ’Data Processing power’ is on at the REM box. TP5 Analog 120/110 VAC Power for DCRGS contactor K1. Should be at 120/110 VAC if Gantry I/O, 550 enable switch in gantry and REM box drives are ’ON’. TP6 Analog 120/110 VAC Power for DCRGS contactor K1. Requires power at TP5, key switch closure and activation of circuit breaker assembly contactors K2, K1, and K4. TP7 Analog 120/110 VAC Same function as TP6 if relay control board K33 is functioning properly. TP8 Analog 120/110 VAC from 32KVA transformer. TP9 Analog 120/110 VAC 60 Hz. and 110 VAC for 50Hz. Input for 120/110 contactor coil power Coil Power at the RCB. 120 VAC for

D

D

D

D

D

D D D D

TP10 Analog 208 VAC 208 VAC line to line on these points when circuit breaker contactor K1 is on to produce 160 VDC power for table vertical drive and gantry tilt. ’0’ VAC when drives are OFF. TP11 Analog 208 VAC 208 VAC line to line on these points when circuit breaker contactor K1 is on to produce 160 VDC power for table vertical drive and gantry tilt. ’0’ VAC when drives are OFF. TP12 Analog 208 VAC 208 VAC line to line on these points when circuit breaker contactor K1 is on to produce 160 VDC power for table vertical drive and gantry tilt. ’0’ VAC when drives are OFF. TP13 Analog +24VDC +/– 4 +24 VDC (18 – 28 DVC). Loop On status, +24 when the servo is TP14 Analog +24VDC enabled.

D

D

D D D D D D

TP15 Analog +24VDC OK to turn on Gantry Servo Output. Should be at +24 VDC for Gantry Axial Rotation to be enabled. TP16 Analog +24VDC Hospital ’X–Ray ON’ control power. At +24 VDC when the external hospital light should be ON. TP17 Analog +24VDC Drives On, should be at +24 when the REM box ’X–Ray/Drives On’ is activated. TP18 Analog +24VDC At +24 VDC when ’X–Ray Drives On’ is activated at the REM box. At 0 VDC when drives are Off. This is the pilot function for Drives On.

11–72

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D

HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP19 Analog +24VDC At +24 VDC when Data Processing Power is activated at the REM box. At 0 VDC when Off. This is the pilot function for PDU On. TP20 Analog +24VDC Read back for 550 enabled. At +24 VDC when DCRGS contactor K1 is on and 550 VDC is enabled. TP21 Analog +24VDC Table and Console E–Stop operates properly at +24 VDC except when table or console E–Stop is engaged. TP22 Analog +24VDC VDC at all times. TP23 TP24 TP25 TP26 Analog +160 VDC Analog Neutral Analog Neutral Analog Neutral +24 VDC power supply output. At +24 At 160 when drives are on. Ground Ground Ground

D D D D D D D D D D 11–27–2

TP27 Analog +24VDC Part of X–Ray Interlock circuit. At +24 nominally unless the axial control board detects a fault. TP28 TP29 Analog Neutral Analog Neutral Ground Ground

Relay Control Board LEDS and Lamps D DS29 NEON LAMP120 VAC neon lamp is on when the power from the 32KVA transformer is present on the relay control board to supply 120/110 VAC. DS79 NEON LAMPExternal 120 VAC at J12 is on when relay K59 is energized. This neon lamp indicates that the 120/110 VAC is present for the hospital light.

D

11–27–3

Relay Control Board Switch Settings D S65 MANUAL 550 VDC

11–73

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4
ILLUSTRATION 11–41 46–264888G1 RELAY CONTROL BOARD

HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100

11–74

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–28 11–28–1 46–264884G1 DCRGS Control Board DCRGS Control Board Test Points D D D D D D D

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TP1 CBV: CAPACITOR BALANCE VOLTAGE 50V/V TP2 DUTV: OUTPUT VOLTAGE 200V/V TP3 OUTCUR: OUTPUT CURRENT 10 AMPS/VOLT TP4: GND TP5 UVRST: UNDER VOLTAGE RESET TP6: PH–LOSS TP7 I2*: A low signal on this line prevents gating of the SCRs. When this signal is taken from a low to a high state the gate firing board limits the rate of delay angle change. The actual firing angle changes from 120 degrees to the final value over a specified period of time. VIL = 1.0V, Max VIH 10.0V min. TP8 DLYCMD: DELAY ANODE COMMAND, 33 DEG/V 120 DEG = 5.0V TP9: VR2.5 TP10: VR7.5 TP11 INPV: PEAK RECT. LINE VOLTAGE 200V/V TP12: 12R TP13: AGND TP14: AGND TP15: AGND TP16 +30V: +30V ±2V TP17 +12V: +12V ±0.5V TP18 +5V: +5V ±0.05V TP19 +22V: +22.2V ±1V with respect to TP13

D D D D D D D D D D D D 11–28–2

DCRGS Control Board LEDs Condition/state of LEDs with backup contactor OFF when 120 VAC power is initially applied to SCR Regulator board. D D D D D D D DS190 LINE VOLTAGE LOW: DS191 22V POWER ON: DS192 INTLK OPEN: DS193 CAP UNBALANCE: DS194 OVER CURRENT: DS195 UNDER VOLT: DS196 PHASE LOSS: yellow green yellow yellow yellow yellow yellow off on off off (on most units) on (on most units) on (on most units) on

11–28–3

DCRGS Control Board Switch Settings D S96 550V/HVTEST: Normal switch position 550V

11–75

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4
ILLUSTRATION 11–42 46–264884G1 DCRGS CONTROL BOARD

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

11–76

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–29 11–29–1 SCR Firing Board SCR Firing Board Test Points None 11–29–2 SCR Firing Board LEDs

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

Condition/state of LEDs with backup contactor OFF when 120 VAC power is initially applied to SCR Regulator board. D D D 11–29–3 PD1 PHASE LOSS: PD2 INHIBIT: PD3 12V POWER OK: yellow yellow green on on on

SCR Firing Board Switch Settings D J10: 50/60Hz Jumper

Conditions: 1. Turn on 550 VDC supply back up contactor. Yellow, PHASE LOSS LED on SCR Firing Board to be “OFF” (If ON then input fuse may be open or phase sensing leads at J 7B on the SCR Firing Board may be faulty). A large number of 2M ohm resistors in phase sensing leads to J7B on the SCR Firing Board have failed open. All yellow LEDs must now be off. Once back up contactor de–energized, all yellow LEDs on the regulator board must be OFF except for the PHASE LOSS LED. Note: The CAP UNBALANCE (DS 193), OVER CURRENT (DS 194), and UNDER VOLT (DS 195) are latched faults that are reset by back up contactor energizing. Refer to figure 11–43 TP2 and TP3 DCRGS Control Board for the time to reach 435 volts after Phase Loss lamp turned off. 2. At TP3 during the no load condition there shall be no missing pulses and peak to peak voltages to be 1000 ±200mV, refer to No load current at TP3. There are sets of six pulses per full cycle and each may have two pulses that are higher or lower than the other two. This trace will detect SCRs that may have opened.

Note:

11–77

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4
ILLUSTRATION 11–43 SCR FIRING BOARD

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

11–78

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–30 11–30–1 46–264368G1 ETC Board ETC Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TP1 +5V: (Digital +5 volts) Power Supply Test Point TP2 LGND: (Digital LGND) Power Supply Test Point TP3: (Digital ±12 volts) RS232 Table XMIT TP4: (Digital ±12 volts) RS232 Table REC TP5: (Digital +5 volts) Spare TP6: (Digital 0 – 5 volts) Long Encoder CH C TP7 AGND: (Analog) AGND Power Supply Test Point TP8: (Analog ±15 volts) Cradle Tach (relatively noisy signal) Gain = 75 mm/sec = 6.3 volts at TP TP9: (Digital 0 – 5 volts) Long Encoder CH B TP10: (Digital 0 – 5 volts) Long Encoder CH A TP11 –15v: (Analog –15 volts) Power Supply Test Point TP12: (Analog 0 – 10 volts) Elev/Tilt Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Control (controls AR689 pulse width) Gain =5 uSec pulse Width / volt command TP13: (Analog +10 volts) +10 Reference TP14: (Analog 0 – 15 volts) Cradle Current Integrator (averages out pulses from AR653) Wider pulses = more amp current = higher signal TP15 –15V: (Analog 0 – 15 volts) Elev/Tilt Current Integrator (averages out pulses from AR563) Wider pulses = more amp current = higher signal. TP16: (Analog 0 – 10 volts) Cradle Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Control (controls AR669 pulse width) Gain = 5 uSec pulse Width / volt command Analog Signal TP17: (Digital 0 – 15 volts) Cradle Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) sets output (v) of power amp. Volts out = Pulse width (uSec) * 24 / 56 TP18 AGND: (Analog Ground) Power Supply Test Point TP19: (Analog ±15 volts) Elev/Tilt Motor Voltage Feedback (Filtered map pulse width modulation signal, fc = 39 cps, gain TP19/amp voltage =.05v/v TP20: (Digital 0 – 15 volts) Trigger SYNCH Signal PWM trigger for power amps (17.72 KHz) TP21 +15V: (Analog +15 volts) Power Supply Test Point TP22: (Digital 0 – 5 volts) Elev/Tilt Command Direction (+5V = Up/Forward) TP23: (Digital 0 – 15 volts) Elev/Tilt PWM (sets output (v) of power amp. volts out = pw (uSec) * 160 /56 TP24 PGND: (Analog Physical Ground) Power Supply Test Point TP25 +24V: (Analog +24 volts) Power Supply Test Point TP26: (Analog ±15 volts) Cradle motor voltage Feedback (filtered amp pwm signal), FC = 64 CPS Gain (TP26/amp voltage) = .41v/v

D D D

D

D D D D D D D D D D

11–79

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–30–2 ETC Board LEDs D D D D D D D 11–30–3

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

DS263 CR–A: Cradle Encoder A–pulse active DS264 CR–B: Cradle Encoder B–pulse active DS265 CR–C: Cradle Encoder C–pulse active DS266 EL–C: Elevation Encoder C–pulse active DS310 CSTALL: Cradle stalled when on DS311 ETFAULT: Elevation/Tilt Amp fault elevation or tilt drive shorted when on DS312 ETSTALL: Elevation/Tilt Amp stall or tilt drive stalled when on

ETC Board Switch Settings D S162: Reset

ILLUSTRATION 11–44 46–264368G1 ETC BOARD

11–80

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–31 11–32 Westamp Servo Amp

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

Westamp Servo Amp Internal Test Points (Non–Accessible) D D D D D D TP1: Tachometer input TP2: Signal input TP3: Output of velocity control amplifier TP4: Output of current error amplifier TP5: Base drive oscillator TP6: Base drive oscillator

11–33

Westamp Servo Amp LEDs D D CR35: NO FAULT CR36 REM LIM: J1–8, remote enable/disable (non–latching) J1–6, A limit switch (non–latching) J1–7, B limit switch (non–latching). CR37 TEMP: Indicates excessive ambient temperature. CR38 OV VOLT: Bus over–voltage. CR39 RMS: Indicates excessive current draw. CR40 LOGIC: Indicates ±12 VDC logic supply. CR41 GND FAULT: Indicates output short to ground. CR42 SURGE: Indicates excessive transistor current or shorted outputs. CR43: PWR ON CR44 BUS: Indicates DC bus power, even with logic power off.

D D D D D D D D 11–34

Westamp Servo Amp Switch Settings None

11–81

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–45 WESTAMP SERVO AMP HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–82 .

c. Power has not been applied to the servo.11 is incorrectly wired. e. The system has not enabled the servo. 11–83 . causing excessive peak currents. caused by load inductance being below minimum. etc. The servo circuit breaker (CB1) is tripped. 6. The output current is exceeding its time–current rating. The red current foldback LED illuminates when the current foldback circuitry is operating. but servo does not enable 1. 2. b. The logic supply (±12 VDC. +5V) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown. a. The acceleration/deceleration command to the servo is requiring peak current for an excessive amount of time.10. 4.) or the AC input at A3TB 1–9.10. ENABLE (EN) The application of an Enable signal by the system will cause the Green enable LED to illuminate. The enable wiring to the servo is open. 2.) or the AC input at A3TB1–9. The machine friction. The logic supply (±12 VDC. The system has detected a system malfunction that will not allow the servo to be enabled. The intensity of the LED varies in proportion to the amount of overload. The current ripple is excessive. +5 VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown.11 is incorrectly wired. A short circuit exists across the servo output terminals. etc. 3. Current Foldback LED is illuminated 1. d. Check the status of the fault contact output. The gain pot is set too high. 3. inertial load and/or viscous loading is excessive. 5. 2. current overload rating of the power transistors has been exceeded. A servo malfunction has occurred but is not annunciated by the LED indicators. A component malfunction exists in the enable circuit.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–35 11–35–1 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Axial Servo Amp Control Board – Allen Bradley Servo Amp Axial Servo Amp Control Board LEDs–Allen Bradley Servo Amp D CURRENT FOLDBACK. Enable LED is NOT illuminated 1. The axial interface board enable relay has malfunctioned. Indicates that the time vs. Enable LED is illuminated.

Motor Overload LED is illuminated 1. The logic supply (±12 VDC. IMPORTANT: This overload indication may take several minutes to reset. MOTOR OVERLOAD (MOD) The red motor overload LED illuminates when the motor overload detection circuit trip point has been exceeded. 11–84 . One or more of the following may have occurred (if the surface temperature of the exposed heat sink adjacent to the ground stud measures greater than 90 degrees Celsius)”. The continuous rating of the servomotor is being exceeded. etc) or the AC input at A3TB1–9. A mechanical limit or stop on the machine is causing the motor to develop excessive torque. The heat sink thermal overload has tripped. The motor is partially demagnetized causing excessive current draw. The cabinet ambient temperature is too high. etc) or the AC input at A3TB1–9.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 4.11 is incorrectly wired. If cycling the power does not cause a reset. a. The line/DB contactor has malfunctioned inside the servo. remove power from the controller for about 3 minutes. Logic supply AC voltage is missing 7. The servo peak current pot is set higher than the motor rating. Over temperature LED is illuminated 1. The logic supply (±12 VDC. Verify that the fan is operational with power applied. e. a. b. Enable signal is present prior to power being applied to the power transformer (wait at least 1 second after the 120 VAC. Also wait at least 1 second after a servo reset cycle before enabling the servo.10. 2. The programmed duty cycle requires an RMS torque exceeding the motor rating. d. The logic supply fuses are blown. +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown. then retry. 6. UV LED is illuminated. 2. 5.10. The servo logic supplies are not operational a. the red LED indicates that the heat sink over temperature device inside the servo has tripped. OVER TEMPERATURE (OT) When illuminated. Servo fan/contactor fuse has blown. c. b. +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown. a. three–phase power is applied before enabling the servo).11 is incorrectly wired. The machine frictional force or alignment is improperly set.

4. c. +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown. Shunt regulator board or transistor has malfunctioned. 4. The input line voltage exceeds the maximum controller input voltage. A power transistor module has malfunctioned. The peak rating of the power transistors has been exceeded. +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown. b. The airflow access to the servo is limited or blocked. The logic supply (±12VDC. TRANSISTOR OVERCURRENT (TOC) This red LED illuminates when the peak current rating of the power transistor(s) has been exceeded. c. a. Transistor overcurrent LED is illuminated 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 b. The logic supply (±12 VDC. The integral fan is not functioning. Motor armature is shorted to ground. Servo output or servomotor has been short circuited or grounded. The logic or shunt regulator board is malfunctioning and incorrectly sensing the bus voltage. The logic control board common is not properly grounded.10.10.11 is incorrectly wired. The machine duty cycle requires an RMS current exceeding the continuous rating of the servo. The power bus voltage has exceeded 265VDC a. 3. The logic control board has malfunctioned.11 is incorrectly wired. The transistor base driver board is inoperative. d. b. e. 11–85 . The input line voltage exceeds the maximum controller input voltage. etc) or the AC input at A3TB1–9. Check shunt regulator resistors fuse on the servo panel. Overvoltage LED is illuminated 1. etc) or the AC input at A3TB1–9. OVERVOLTAGE (OV) The DC power bus is continuously monitored. 3. If it exceeds 265VDC a fault is sensed and the red LED is illuminated. 2. 2. 5.

c. The line/DB contactor has not energized or has dropped out (inside the servo). g.) or the AC input at A3TB1–9. The transformer auxiliary logic supply winding is open. c. e. The power bus voltage has dropped below 75 VDC. +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown. 3. i. three–phase power is applied before enabling the controller). b. Undervoltage LED is illuminated 1. The enable LED is also illuminated. The input line voltage is low. The logic supplies have dropped 10% below their nominal value. The transformer is providing the incorrect line voltage or has malfunctioned.11 is incorrectly wired. The three–phase input line is open. 2. The power bus capacitor has malfunctioned. a. The enable signal is present prior to the power being applied to the transformer (wait at least 1 second after the 120 VAC. b. The line/DB contactor fuse is blown. a. The servo circuit breaker (CB1) has tripped. this red LED is illuminated. d. h.10. 11–35–2 Test Points None 11–35–3 Switches Axial Servo Amp Control Board–AB None 11–86 . f. The controller circuit breaker is open. etc. Also wait at least 1 second after a servo reset cycle before enabling the servo. The logic supply (±12 VDC.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 UNDERVOLTAGE (UV) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 If the DC power bus drops below 75 VDC (+/– 20%) and the servo is enabled or the logic supplies have dropped 10% below their nominal value. The input line voltage is low.

the voltage at the +12 volt (not reset) should be greater than supply test point (TP1) minus 50 millivolts. D D D D D 11–36–2 Axial Interface Board–AB LEDs None 11–36–3 Axial Interface Board–AB Switch Settings None 11–87 . When the opto–isolator is on (reset). When the opto–isolator is off. the voltage at this test point should be less than the voltage at the +12 volt supply test point (TP1) minus 7 volts. the voltage at this test point should be less than the voltage at the +12 volt supply test point (TP1) minus 7 volts.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–36 11–36–1 Axial Interface Board–AB Axial Interface Board–AB Test Points D D D D HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP1 AGND: Analog Ground and Neutral of transformer input TP2: +12VOutput of +12 volt regulator TP3: –12VOutput of –12 volt regulator TP4 ENABLE: Collector of Enable Opto–Isolator. When the opto–isolator is on (enabled). TP5 I_RTN: Amplifier current output readback return TP6 I_OUT: Amplifier current output readback TP7 +15V: Output of +15 volt regulator TP8 –15V: Output of –15 volt regulator TP9 RESET: Collector of Reset Opto–Isolator. the voltage at the +12 volt (not enabled) should be greater than supply test point (TP1) minus 50 millivolts. When the opto–isolator is off.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–46 AXIAL INTERFACE BOARD–AB HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–88 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–37 11–37–1 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Test Points D D D D D D TP1: Noise Cancel circuit output TP2: Level Control amp output TP3: Line Driver circuit input TP4: Line Driver circuit output TP5: Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for Level Control amp TP6: Regulator circuit output 11–37–2 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board LEDs None 11–37–3 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Switch Settings None ILLUSTRATION 11–47 ZEUS REMOTE INTERCOM X BOARD 11–89 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–38 11–38–1 Interface Measurement Board Interface Measurement Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 11–38–2 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TP1 KV: Sensed kV signal – Scale 10 kV / V TP2 KV: kV signal to OBC TP3 KV GND: kV return signal to OBC TP4 TP5 MA: Sensed kV signal – Scale 100 kV / V TP6 MA GND: mA return signal to OBC TP7 PS1: Pressure Switch 1 TP8 PS2: Pressure Switch 2 TP9 TH1: Thermistor 1 (not used) TP10 TH2: Thermistor 2 (not used) TP11 XS2: Small Filament 2 TP12 XSC: Small Filament Common TP13 XS1: Small Filament 1 TP14 XL2: Large Filament 2 TP15 XLC: Large Filament Common TP16 XL1: Large Filament 1 TP17 MAout: mA signal to OBC TP18 GND: Tank ground TP19 kV: Sensed kV signal – Scale 10 kV / V TP20 GND: Tank ground Interface Measurement Board LEDs None 11–38–3 Interface Measurement Board Switch Settings None 11–90 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–48 INTERFACE MEASUREMENT BOARD HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–91 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–39 1/2 Mag Tape Controller Board HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 11–49 1/2 MAG TAPE CONTROLLER BOARD 11–92 .

D D D D X1: X2: X3: X3: 1 Jumper IN All Jumpers Out 3 Jumpers In – HSA 4 Jumpers Out 2 Jumpers IN – HSA–RP 4 Jumpers OUT 11–93 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–40 11–40–1 LM02 Board LMO2 Test Points None 11–40–2 LEDS None 11–40–3 Switches None 11–40–4 Jumper Settings HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 These jumpers should have been previously installed at the factory. however make certain to verify the correct jumpers have been set prior to inserting the board into the card cage.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–50 LM02 BOARD HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–94 .

mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs DAS Data FIFO is empty DAS Data FIFO is full VME Input Data FIFO is empty VME Input Data FIFO is full VME Output Data FIFO is empty VME Output Data FIFO is full DSP #0 is accessing local SRAM DSP #1 is accessing local SRAM Abort line is open (scanning is not enabled) Command Register and set by DSPs D DS2 Green D1 D DS3 Green D2 D DS4 Green D3 D DS5 Green D4 D DS6 Green D5 D DS7 Green D6 D DS8 Green D7 D D D D D D D D D DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12 DS1 DS14 DS15 DS16 DS17 Green EDDF Green FDDF Green EIDF Green FIDF Green EODF Green FODF Green ACC0 Green ACC1 Green ABT 11–95 . mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs Diagnostic / status LED #5. Diagnostic / status LED #2. mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs Diagnostic / status LED #3. to the Internal Command Register Bit 25 and controlled by DSP0. mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs Diagnostic / status LED #7. Diagnostic / status LED #1. mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs Diagnostic / status LED #4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–41 11–41–1 FEP Board 46–327036G1 FEP Board Test Points D D D D D 11–41–2 FEP Board LEDs D DS1 Green D0 TP2 VCC: +5V Logic Supply TP3 –5V: –5V ECL Logic Supply TP4 +12V: +12V Backplane Voltage TP5 –12V: –12V Backplane Voltage TP6 LGND: Logic Ground HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 Diagnostic / status LED #0. mapped to the Internal Command Register Bit 24 and controlled by DSP0. mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs Diagnostic / status LED #6.

Jumper removed (Normal Operation Position): 74ACT8990 is the test bus source Jumper installed (Engineering Test Only Position): XDS510 is the test bus source ILLUSTRATION 11–51 FEP BOARD 11–96 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–41–3 FEP Board Switch Settings HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 There is one switch on the FEP. Use switch S1 to power–up reset the FEP. 11–41–4 FEP Board Jumpers D JP1 TBS: Test bus select. Selects whether the JTAG test bus source is the 74ACT8990 test bus controller or the XDS510 test bus interface.

transmit LED OFF. E. No Lanview LEDs ON. 11–42–2 Ethernet Transceiver LEDs D D D D D Lanview LEDs Power Light Transmit Light Receive Light Collision Light HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Troubleshooting Ethernet Light Problems: A. D. collision LED ON steady. 1. receive LED ON steady. collision LEDs flashing simultaneously 1. 1. Check proper connection via transceiver cable 3. 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–42 11–42–1 Ethernet Transceiver Ethernet Transceiver Test Points None. Transmit LED flashing. C. 2. collision LED ON. Check power ON at host 2. Transceiver tap shorted. 1. receive LED ON or OFF. Power LED ON. Power LED ON. transmit LED OFF. Power LED ON. transmit. receive. Power LED ON. Open in coax. receive LED OFF. Transceiver tap not making contact with center conductor on coax. TDR 5000 on network with E–button depressed. Check power pair of transceiver cable B. collision LED OFF. 11–97 . Coax cable shorted.

ILLUSTRATION 11–52 ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER 11–98 . Set the jumper inside the ethernet to jumper between slots 4 and 5. If the jumper is in the wrong position the SQE LED on the transceiver will be illuminated. There is a chance that if the heartbeat test is enabled the system ethernet circuitry may not function correctly. slide the SQE switch to the left to enable the heartbeat (SQE) test and to the right to disable the heartbeat (SQE) test. This is the SQE OFF setting.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–42–3 Ethernet Transceiver Switch Settings D SQE Switch HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 To configure the heartbeat (SQE) switch. switched to the right. What this is indicating is that the heartbeat test is enabled. D SQE OFF Jumper When the transceiver is received from stock the jumper will more than likely be set up incorrectly. This switch should be set in the disabled position.

The J3_1 jumper and rotary switches are on the component side of the board. The LED intensity is proportional to the duty cycle of the active to non–active state. These switches are preset at the factory to address 0xD0000000 and then sealed with plugs in the front panel. When the board first powers–up. the indicator is off. this is not implemented and has no function as a diagnostic tool. 11–43–5 AP120 Board Configuration D Setting Up the VMEbus Address The front panel provides access to four rotary hexidecimal switches for programming the VMEbus address of the board. 11–43–4 Internal Cable Connections The AP120 board has a front panel connector for the diagnostic processor. This switch is useful in returning the board to a known state after a system problem. 11–99 . The AP120 always responds as an A32 slave. and green upon completion. The board maps to a 4–Mbyte contiguous region of the VME address space selected by the rotary switches. If the indicator remains off after power on. The APp120 responds as an A24 slave if the A24 Decode Enable jumper is installed at location J3_1. If it remains yellow. however. The LED turns yellow when all four onboard DSPs have successfully begun diagnostic tests. 11–43–3 AP120 Board Switch Settings D Reset The AP120 has a manual reset switch on the front panel. If the jumper is removed. D Setting Up High Speed Bus Jumpers The HSB has nine header strips to configure the bus and clock connections. Each indicator is illuminated when its bus is actively transmitting or receiving data. The headers are all located together in an area represented by the shaded box near P2 on the board layout diagram.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–43 11–43–1 AP120 Board AP120 Board Test Points None 11–43–2 AP120 Board LEDs D Status HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 A bi–color status indicator LED is just below the reset button. The top indicator reflects activity on the HSB and the lower indicator reflects activity on the VME bus. The service technician has no access to these switches. use the reset switch to reset the AP120 and start self tests. see board layout. the AP120Ap120 does not respond as an A24 slave. D Bus Activity The AP120 front panel has two green LED indicators just below the status indicator. During troubleshooting. this indicates that at least one of the DSPs on the board has a major failure and is unable to complete its initialization routine. this indicates a diagnostic routine error.

J50_4) The four large headers (J50_1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–43–6 AP120 Board Jumper Settings D AP120 MCS Header (J39_1.) Since the AP120 uses the high speed bus and receives clock 0. D Use HSB/No HSB (J41_3) The J41_3 header. use a 16–row shorting block installed over the center 16 rows. These headers have two rows of three pins. so place all four jumpers as shown in the board layout diagram. 11–100 . three rows of three pins. J51_2. J39_2) HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 The AP120 MCS jumpers (J39_1 and J39_2) are installed if the AP120 being configured is the MCS for the system. J41_2) The Clock/Sync Headers (J41_1 and J41_2) isolate the onboard clock circuitry from the connector P2 row C. J50_3. place jumpers in the pin 3 position. (Pin 1 is the topmost pin on the right of the header. D Bus Isolation Header (J51_1. and J50_4) isolate the onboard HSB circuitry from the connector P2 rows A & C. J50_2. These headers have two rows of three pins. (Pin 1 is the topmost pin on the right of the header. D Clock/Sync Receive Header (J41_1. uses 1x2 jumpers. The AP120 in the RPp uses the HSB. which are placed in one of the positions shown in the board layout diagram. place the jumpers for the clock/sync headers in the position shown in the board layout diagram. When a jumper must be installed. Since the AP120 being configured is not the MCS for the system. Each header has 18 rows. J50_3. remove the jumpers from the J39_1 and J39_2 headers. Since the AP120 in the RPRp subsystem uses the HSB.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–53 AP120 BOARD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–101 .

The LED intensity is proportional to the duty cycle of the active to non–active state. the indicator is off. During troubleshooting.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–44 11–44–1 BPP Board BPP Board Test Points None 11–44–2 BPP Board LEDs D Status HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 A bi–color status indicator LED is just below the reset button. The board maps to an 8–Mbyte Contiguous region of the VME address space selected by the rotary switches. The LED turns yellow when all four onboard DSPs have successfully begun diagnostic tests. Each indicator is illuminated when its bus is actively transmitting or receiving data. When the board first powers–up. This switch is useful in returning the board to a known state after a system problem. 11–102 . D Bus Activity The BPP front panel has two green LED indicators just below the status indicator. use the reset switch to reset the BPP and start self tests. If it remains yellow. 11–44–3 BPP Board Switch Settings Reset The BPP has a manual reset switch on the front panel. The BPP responds as an A32 slave. These switches are preset at the factory to address 0xE0000000 and then sealed with plugs in the front panel. The rotary switches are on the component side of the board. this indicates a diagnostic routine error. this indicates that at least one of the DSPs on the board has a major failure and is unable to complete its initialization routine. The service technician has no access to these switches. The top indicator reflects activity on the HSB and the lower indicator reflects activity on the VME bus. If the indicator remains off after power on. 11–44–4 BPP Board Configuration The front panel provides access to three rotary hexidecimal switches for programming the VMEbus address of the board. and green upon completion.

ILLUSTRATION 11–54 BPP BOARD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–103 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–44–5 BPP Board Jumper Settings None.

TX: Transmit Packets – Pulses when active. 3. then turns green. 5. 8 1. 7. 3. 2. 7 1. 6 7. 8 On Off On Off On Off HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 SYSFAIL: Red until UNIX boots and successfully attaches to device.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–45 11–45–1 CLA Board CLA Board Test Points –– NONE –– 11–45–2 CLA Board LEDs D D D D D 11–45–3 CLA Board Switches D D D (H7) (H11) (H12) 4. 6. 8 4. 2. INT: VME Interrupt – Pulses when active. 6. 5 1. VME: VME Access – Pulses when active RX: Receive Packets – Pulses when active. 11–104 .

LED‘s not visible from 9U front panel.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 ILLUSTRATION 11–55 CLA BOARD HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 NOTE: The 6U HAWK Ethernet is mounted on a 9U adaptor. 9U adaptor board 6U circuit board JA11 JA4 JA16 VME RX TX INT JA8 JA9 JA10 P1 JA12 STATU S ON SW1 OFF ON TX2 TX1 SW2 OFF ON ribbon cable to 9U panel connector SW3 J1 JA13 JA1 JA7 OFF P2 11–105 .

stack corrupted. When the VMEchip2 in the MVME167 is the VMEbus system controller. or if the 167Bug environment is ever lost (vector table is destroyed.). The green LAN LED lights when the LAN chip is local bus master. Onboard devices (timer. as if the SBC had just been powered up. D RUN (Local Bus Active) The green RUN LED lights when one of the local bus masters is executing a local bus cycle. are enabled by software.. This LED lights when it receives a halt condition from the MC68040 processor. serial ports. The breakpoint table and offset registers are cleared. etc. By default. D +12V (LAN Power) The SBC supplies +12V power to the Ethernet transceiver interface through a fuse.) are reset.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–46 11–46–1 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) LEDs D HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 FAIL (Board Failure) The red FAIL LED lights when the active BRDFAIL signal line indicates a failure. the SCON LED lights.. 11–46–2 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Switch Settings The SBC has a manual reset switch and an abort switch on the front panel. D Reset Switch Pressing and releasing the front panel reset switch initiates a system reset. The green +12V LED lights when power is available to the transceiver interface. Input and output character queues are cleared. etc.. D STAT (Status) The yellow STAT LED is driven by the decoded MC68040 status lines. 11–106 . D SCON (System Controller) The green SCON LED indicates whether the SBC is the system controller. The reset and abort switches. and the first two serial ports are reconfigured to their default state. The target registers are invalidated. D VME (VMEbus Activity) The green VME LED lights when the SBC is using the VMEbus and when the VMEbus accesses the SBC (VMEchip2 is local bus master). the 167Bug variables and tables are preserved. D LAN and SCSI (Local Bus Master) The green SCSI LED lights when the SCSI chip is local bus master. Reset must be used if the processor ever halts. 167Bug is in cold mode. These switches are used in the following ways. a total system initialization takes place. which are useful in returning the board to a known state after a system problem. Cold and warm reset modes are available. During cold reset. All static variables (including disk device and controller parameters) are restored to their default states. as well as the target state registers and breakpoints. During warm reset..

First 2 bytes are the whole number of MHz. ASCII format store the board’s serial number. help to pinpoint the malfunction. The target PC. Optional Board 1 (PWA): Serial Number12 bytes. etc. the value is system dependent. hexidecimal format. Pressing and releasing the abort switch generates a local board condition. the PWA number is 01–w3826b34a. For example. value=mvme167. Abort should be used to regain control if the program gets caught in a loop. Artwork (PWA) IdentifierThe SBC’s printed wire assembly number (PWA). 1212163. MPU Clock Speed: The board’s speed in MHz. and C and P2 row B are the VMEbus interconnection. For the RPRp subsystem. are displayed on the screen. and Ethernet for the Operator’s Console. reflecting the machine state at the time the abort switch was pressed. and the final character designating the revision level of the board. P2 rows A and C provide connection to the serial ports 1 and 2. Last 2 bytes are not used. execute the cnfg command. To display this information. P1 rows A. Consists of the prefix 01–W followed by a part number. Any breakpoints installed in your code are removed and the breakpoint table remains intact. last 2 bytes are fractions of MHz. abort is most appropriate when terminating a user program that is being debugged. For the RP subsystem. The target registers. Control is returned to the debugger. 11–107 . which may interrupt the processor if enabled. The final character designates the revision level of the board. Ethernet Address: 8 bytes. 11–46–3 Internal Cable Connections The SBC board has no front panel connectors.. For this reason. The following is the board information displayed. the number is 3800b04a. 11–46–4 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Configuration The Motorola MVME167 has a board information block. the value is 07.. Whenever abort is invoked when executing a user program (running target code) a “snapshot” of the processor state is captured and stored in the target registers. For the MVME167.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 D Abort Switch HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Abort is invoked by pressing and releasing the abort switch on the SBC front panel... For example. For the RP subsystem. Board (PWA) Serial Number: The board’s Serial Number.. The SBC has two 96–position DIN connectors (P1 and P2). Board Identifier: For the MVME167. Optional Board 1 Artwork (PWA): The SBC’s PWA number for Identifier of the first option board. which is stored in the Non–Volatile (NVRAM) beginning at address 0xFFFC1EF8. the value is 3300. register contents. SCSI interface. Local SCSI ID: For the RP subsystem . B. 1216794. etc.

execute the following command: D ENV You must execute the ENV command once without error to load the parameters into NVRAM. HSDC. and even label EPROM (such as B02) is installed in XU2. Note: In the unlikely event that these parameters require change. Two 128K x 16 Stealth boot PROMs are installed. 167Bug executes some self–checks and automatically boots UNIX. The U3 EPROM is installed in socket XU3. D ENV . press the tilde and pound sign (~#) keys before the self tests execute. and HSD.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–46–5 EPROM Setup HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Be sure that four EPROMs are installed in the proper sockets on the SBC module and that the physical chip orientation is correct. and the U4 EPROM is installed in XU4. Parameters that differ from the Motorola default values are printed in boldface type. To set up the operational parameters stored in the SBC Battery Back Up RAM (BBRAM) to the default configuration. 11–46–6 View and Change EPROM Parameters When power is applied to the SBC. LSD. After modifying these parameters.D The SBC EPROM Setup table shows the setup of EPROM for a system that includes an SBC. with the flattened corner of each EPROM aligned with the corresponding portion of the EPROM socket. Press the Break key before self tests start to execute. execute the following 167Bug command at the 167–diag prompt. enter the sd command. 11–108 . To display the 167–diag prompt. The odd label EPROM (such as B01) is installed in socket XU1. you must do one of the following: D D D If the UNIX prompt is displayed. If running TIP. If the 167Bug prompt is displayed. be sure to reset the system to activate any changes. Two 128K x 16 167Bug EPROMs are installed.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–46–7 SBC EPROM Setup Table HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE 11–1 MVME167 (SBC BOARD) EEPROM SETUP VALUES PARAMETER Bug or System Environment [B/S] Field Service Menu Enable [Y/N] Remote Start Method Switch [G/M/B/N] Probe System for Supported I/O Controllers [Y/N] Negate VMEbus SYSFAIL* Always [Y/N] Local SCSI Bus Reset on Debugger Startup [Y/N] Local SCSI Bus Negotiations Type [A/S/N] Ignore CFGA Block on a Hard Disk Boot [Y/N] Auto Boot Enable [Y/N] Auto Boot at Power–up Only [Y/N] Auto Boot Controller LUN Auto Boot Device LUN Auto Boot Abort Delay Auto Boot Default String [Y (NULL String)/(String)] ROM Boot Enable [Y/N] ROM Boot at Power–up Only [Y/N] ROM Boot Enable Search of VMEbus [Y/N] ROM Boot Abort Delay ROM Boot Direct Starting Address ROM Boot Direct Ending Address Network Auto Boot Enable [Y/N] Network Auto Boot at POwer–up Only [Y/N] Network Auto Boot Controller LUN Network Auto Boot Device LUN Network Auto Boot Abort Delay Network Auto Boot Configuration Parameters Pointer (NVRAM) Memory Search Starting Address Memory Search Ending Address Memory Search Increment Size Memory Search Delay Enable [Y/N] Memory Search Delay Address Memory Size Enable [Y/N] Memory Size Starting Address Memory Size Ending Address Base Address of Local Memory Size of Local Memory Board #0 Size of Local Memory Board #1 VALUE S N N Y N Y N Y N N 00 00 0 null Y N N 0 FFA00000 FFBFFFFC N N 00 00 0 FFFC0818 FFE00000 FFE10000 00010000 N FFFFCE0F Y 00000000 02000000 00000000 02000000 00000000 11–109 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 PARAMETER Slave Enable #1 [Y/N] Slave Starting Address #1 Slave Ending Address #1 Slave Address Translation Address #1 Slave Address Translation Select #1 Slave Control #1 Slave Enable #2 [Y/N] Slave Starting Address #2 Slave Ending Address #2 Slave Address Translation Address #2 Slave Address Translation Select #2 Slave Control #2 Master Enable #1 [Y/N] Master Starting Address #1 Master Ending Address #1 Master Control #1 Master Enable #2 [Y/N] Master Starting Address #2 Master Ending Address #2 Master Control #2 Master Enable #2 [Y/N] Master Starting Address #2 Master Ending Address #2 Master Control #2 Master Enable #3 [Y/N] Master Starting Address #3 Master Ending Address #3 Master Control #3 Master Enable #4 [Y/N] Master Starting Address #4 Master Ending Address #4 Master Address Translation Address #4 Master Address Translation Select #4 Master Control #4 Short I/O (VMEbus A16) Enable [Y/N] Short I/O (VMEbus A16) Control F–Page (VMEbus A24) Enable [Y/N] F–Page (VMEbus A24) Control ROM Speed Bank A Code ROM Speed Bank B Code HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 VALUE N 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 03FF N 00000000 01FFFFFF 00000000 00000000 03EF N 02000000 EFFFFFFF 0D N 00000000 00000000 00 N 00000000 00000000 00 N 00000000 00000000 00 N 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00 N 01 N 02 04 04 11–110 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 PARAMETER Static RAM Speed Code PCC2 Vector Base VMEC2 Vector Base #1 VMEC2 Vector Base #2 VMEC2 GCSR Group Base Address VMEC2 GCSR Board Base Address VMEbus Global Time Out Code Local Bus Time Out Code VMEbus Access Time Out Code HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 VALUE 00 05 06 07 CC 00 01 00 02 11–111 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–46–8 View and Change the Self Test Mask HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The SBC is already configured with a mask that blocks the execution of certain self tests at power–up. Most of these parameters are already set correctly. These parameters do not require modification at any time other than installation. At the prompt for Client IP Address. The service technician who is installing the system must modify two system–dependent parameters (Client IP Address and Server IP Address) in the descriptor tables at the time of installation. These tables (one for each controller/device LUN combination) are used by . enter the following 167Bug command at the 167–diag prompt: D MASK This mask is stored in the SBC Battery Back Up RAM (BBRAM). The SBC Masked Self Tests table shows the tests that are normally masked. and this information is stored in the SBCs Battery Backed Up RAM (BBRAM). To see which tests are currently masked.) 11–46–9 MVME167 (SBC Board) Masked Self Tests TABLE 11–2 MASKED SELF–TEST NAMES RAM QUIK RAM ALTS RAM CODE RAM REF RAM PATS RAM ADR RAM PERM RAM RNDM RAM BTOG SRAM QUIK SRAM ALTS SRAM CODE 11–46–10 SRAM REF SRAM PATS SRAM ADR SRAM PERM SRAM RNDM SRAM BTOG PCC2 TMR1C PCC2 TMR2C PCC2 ADJ PCC2 PRNTA PCC2 PRNTB PCC2 PRNTC PCC2 PRNTD PCC2 PRNTE MCECC CBIT MCECC SBE MMU INVPAGE MMU WPPAGE VME2 REGB VME2 TMRK ST2401 POLL ST2401 INTR ST2401 DMA ST2401 BAUD View and Change the Network I/O Teach (NIOT) Configurations The SBC debugger has already been set up with controller and device descriptor tables for network configuration. enter the following 167Bug command at the 167–diag prompt: D NIOT 167Bug presents a series of prompts asking for values for the NIOT parameters. The SBC NIOT Settings table lists the correct SBC NIOT settings for the RP subsystem. 11–112 . execute the following command: MASK testname (for each test that you wish to mask. enter the SBC IP address. enter the OC IP address.NETxxx system calls. To modify these parameters. At the prompt for Server IP Address. Note: In the unlikely event that these parameters require change.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–46–11 NIOT Settings TABLE 11–3 NIOT SETTINGS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 PARAMETER Controller LUN Device LUN Node Control Memory Address *Client IP Address *Server IP Address Subnet IP Address Mask Broadcast IP Address Gateway IP Address Boot File Name Argument File Name Boot File Load Address Boot File Execution Address Boot File Execution Delay Boot File Length Boot File Byte Offset BOOT/RARP Request Retry TFTP/ARP Request Retry Trace Character Buffer Address BOOT/RARP Request Control BOOT/RARP Reply Update Control 11–46–12 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Jumper Settings D General Purpose Readable Jumpers (J1) VALUE 00 00 00000000 0.255 0.0. and a 0 when the jumper is on.0* 0.0. The correct configuration is with port4 set to receive both signals. When the SBC is the system controller.0.255. 11–113 . The VMEchip2 is configured as system controller.255.0.0. The bit values are read as a 1 when the jumper is off.0 255.0* 255.0 NULL NULL 10000 10000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00 00 00000000 W Y The SBC can be configured with readable jumpers that can read as a register (at 0xFFF40088) in the VMEchip2 LCSR. D System Controller Jumper (J2) The SBC is the system controller. Headers J6 and J7 configure serial port 4 to drive or receive RTXC4 and TRXC4. the SCON LED is lighted.0.255. D Serial Port 4 Clock Configuration Select (J6 and J7) Serial port 4 can be configured to use clock signals from the RTXC4 and TRXC4 signal lines. MVME167Bug uses these bits. The system controller function is enabled and disabled by jumpers on header J2.255.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–56 MOTOROLA MVME167 BOARD (SBC) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–114 .

else IN) J3= General Purpose IO (IN) (3–5.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–47 11–47–1 Motorola MVME166 Board HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Motorola MVME166 Board Jumper Settings D Processor Module J2= SCSI Termination Power (IN) (1–2 OUT. 4–6 IN) (Don’t Care) J6= VME System Controller J7= SRAM Power Control J10= VSBchip2 Arbitration Select F1= +12 Volt Power Fuse F2= SCSI Termination Power F3= –12 Volt Power Fuse F4= +5 Volt Power Fuse D Transition Module J6= Keyboard/Mouse Select J12= Serial J13= Port J14= Module J15= Select (IN) (2–3 IN) (2–3 IN) (2–3 IN) (2–3 IN) 11–115 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–57 MOTOROLA MVME166 BOARD HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–116 .

The configuration and description for these jumpers are shown in Illustration 11–59. ILLUSTRATION 11–58 SCAN CHASSIS BACKPLANE VME Backplane (front view) SLOT ASSIGNMENTS A1 – SUN 3/60 SBC A2 – CLA A3 – XYLOGICS CONTROLLER SLOT A1 A2 A3 A4 Note: Shaded connectors indicate occupancy by the assigned board. 11–117 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–48 Scan Chassis Backplane Jumpers HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustration 11–58 shows the slot assignments for the SCU scan chassis and the location of the backplane jumpers.

The appropriate settings for the RP subsystem are given in this section for troubleshooting purposes.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–49 11–49–1 RP 1. The board layout diagram shows a partial view of the backplane with the correct jumper settings. and 9. The jumpers are installed at the factory and no additional configuration is necessary. D SCSI Active/Passive Voltage Source The SCSI Active/Passive Voltage Source header determines the type of SCSI termination used between the backplane and the local SCSI drive. 11–118 . 11–49–5 Backplane Jumper Settings D Bus Grant and IACK Jumpers The bus grant and IACK headers are jumpered for slots 4. These jumpers are not installed for any other slots. The board layout diagram shows the correct jumper setting to select active termination.x Scan Chassis Backplane Backplane Test Points None 11–49–2 Backplane LEDs None 11–49–3 Backplane Switches None 11–49–4 Backplane Configuration HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Configuring the backplane consists of jumpering the bus grant and IACK headers and mounting the SCSI active/passive voltage source jumper. 5.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–59 BACKPLANE. 5. RP ORIGINAL SLOTS 4. AND 9 JUMPERS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 BG0 SLOT 9 JUMPERS S8 S9 CBA 1 BG0 CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 SLOT 5 JUMPERS S7 CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 SLOT 4 JUMPERS S3 CBA 1 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 BG1 S6 CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 S5 CBA 1 BG0 BG1 S4 CBA S2 CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 S1 CBA 1 BG2 BG1 BG2 BG3 P1 BG2 BG3 IACK IACK IACK IACK IACK IACK IACK 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 IACK BG3 32 IACK SCSI ACTIVE PASSIVE VOLTAGE SOURCE SCSI ACTIVE/PASSIVE VOLTAGE SOURCE JUMPER VME Backplane Jumper Configuration — Original RP Subsystem 11–119 .

AND 5 JUMPERS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 BG0 SLOT 5 JUMPERS BG1 S10 S9 CBA SLOT 3 SLOT 4 JUMPERS JUMPERS S3 CBA 1 S8 CBA 1 BG0 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 S7 CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 S6 CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 S5 CBA S4 CBA S2 CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 S1 CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 BG2 BG1 BG2 BG3 P1 BG2 BG3 IACK IACK IACK IACK IACK IACK IACK 32 32 32 32 32 IACK BG3 32 IACK SCSI ACTIVE PASSIVE VOLTAGE SOURCE SCSI ACTIVE/PASSIVE VOLTAGE SOURCE JUMPER VME Backplane Jumper Configuration — RP-S Subsystem 11–120 . 4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–60 BACKPLANE SLOTS 3.

ILLUSTRATION 11–61 RP SCAN CHASSIS POWER SUPPLIES 5 VDC OUTPUT TERMINALS GROUND Power Supply Assembly DC and AC Terminals — 1000-Watt Power Supply 11–121 –V4 J1 LINE (LABELED NEUT) 1/0 (ON/OFF SWITCH) REC –V3 LINE TB2 –V2 +V3 +V4 V3 TERMINAL BLOCK 2 +V2 V2 V1 + V1 V1 RTN – TB1 VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT POTENTIOMETERS .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–50 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 RP & RP–S Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings Illustration 11–61. 11–62 shows jumpers and Adjustments for the SCU scan chassis power supply.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–62 RP–S SCAN CHASSIS POWER SUPPLIES HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5 VDC OUTPUT TERMINALS V1 V1 RTN TERMINAL BLOCK 2 GROUND LINE (LABELED NEUT) LINE TB2 + – VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT POTENTIOMETERS 1/0 (ON/OFF SWITCH) Power Supply Assembly DC and AC Terminals — 500-Watt Power Supply 11–122 REC V1 V4 V2 J1 V3 TB1 +V2 –V2 +V3 –V3 +V4 –V4 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–51 SBC Jumper Settings HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustration 11–63 shows jumper and settings for the Sun 3/60 SBC. AND RESOLUTION JUMPERS SUN 3/60 SBC 4MB – Jumper here for 4MB or above memory size 8MB – Jumper here for 8MB or above memory size 12MB – Jumper here for 12MB or above memory size 16MB – Jumper here for 16MB or above memory size 20MB – Jumper here for 20MB or above memory size 24MB – Jumper here for 24MB memory size EXTXUR – Jumper in/out for Ethernet/Thin Ethernet respectively HIGHRES – Jumper here for high resolution 11–123 . ETHERNET. ILLUSTRATION 11–63 3/60 SBC JUMPER LOCATIONS AND SETTINGS Keyboard Diagnostic LEDs Norm/Diag switch Memory Jumpers Ethernet/Thin Ethernet Jumper High Resolution Jumper J800 Ethernet Serial Port B Serial Port A Memory Module Inserts SCSI Mono SUN 3/60 SBC J800 MEMORY.

the Error LED lights for approximately 8 seconds and then goes off for approximately one–half second with every pass of the self test. 11–52–3 HSDC Controller Board Switch Settings The HSDC has no front panel switches or buttons. Self test loop mode is disabled for the RP subsystem as described under the heading Self Test Disable (JST). If an error occurs during the self test. D Error The yellow Error LED lights during power–up. this LED remains constantly amber without flashing. Inserting a jumper makes the HSDC respond to zero on that address line: removing a jumper makes the HSDC respond to a one. and responds to address modifier 0x2D. 11–52–6 HSDC Controller Board Jumper Settings D Base Address Selection (JB2) Jumper block JB2 controls the base address. JB5) 11–124 . D Bus Request and Bus Grant Lines (JB3. The HSDC is an A16 slave. and then goes off. D Board Labels/Revision Control The Xylogics SV–6800 HSDC has a revision control label.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–52 11–52–1 HSDC Controller Board HSDC Controller Board Test Points None 11–52–2 HSDC Controller Board LEDs D Busy HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The green LED lights when the HSDC is active. The revision label is important when discussing configuration issues. this denotes a fatal error. Connect the jumper between similar pin numbers on each block. If the LED remains on. The appropriate settings for the RP subsystem are given in this section. and optionally to 0x29. It also has two 96–position DIN connectors (P1 and P2). These pins carry the VMEbus interface signals. 11–52–5 HSDC Controller Board Configuration Configuring the high speed disk controller consists of circuit board jumper configuration. JB4. 11–52–4 Internal Cable Connections The HSDC board has one 50–pin shielded front panel connector (channel 0). In self test loop mode. or lights during operation. The HSDC uses bits 1 through 3 to determine which register is being accessed.

one Bus Grant In. 11–125 . D Self Test Disable (JST) When jumper JST is installed. Jumper the remaining Bus Grant In/Out lines so that the incoming signal phases through the board (for example. and the Bus Grant Out lines must be isolated from the next slot’s Bus Grant lines. If the ACFail* line is asserted. and one Bus Grant Out line to match the selected request level. The HDSC drives one Bus Request line. Check to ensure that the jumper is in. On power–up. The factory configuration is out. Select a request level by jumpering one bus request (BR0 through BR3). jumper BGxIN to BGxOUT. according to the jumper scheme you choose.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The HDSC used the Bus Request and Bus Grant Lines to become bus master. and reports an 0xF6 error code in the Fatal Error Register. In VMEbus arbitration. the controller executes one pass of the self test diagnostic and then enters normal mode. sets the Fatal Error bit in the CSR. JB5) If you are using the HSDC in parallel arbitration. The RP subsystem does not use parallel arbitration. D Parallel Arbitration (JB4. the HSDC halts disk activity. the HSDC supports the ACFail* line as defined in the VMEbus specification. it passes the grant to the appropriate Bus Grant Out Line (BG0OUT through BG3OUT). If the HSDC receives a Bus Grant on any of the Bus Grant In Lines (BG0IN through BG3IN).e. When the jumper is out. the HSDC operates in normal mode. and is not requesting the bus on that line. BG0IN responds to BR0). remove all jumpers between JB4 and JB5. The arbiter responds by driving the associated Bus Grant In Line (i. where x represents the remaining grant levels). the controller operates in a self test loop mode. there are four Bus Request/Grant levels –– 0 through 3. D AC–Fail Enable (JAC) When jumper JAC is installed.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–64 HSDC CONTROLLER BOARD HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–126 .

JC & JD Bus Request 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bus Grant/Out 1 2 3 4 Bus Grant/In 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 level 0 1 2 3 JB Selects Bus Request level 3 Selects NO Parallel Arbitration JC JD Jumper Block JE 2 1 4 3 Selects unrestricted use of Maintenance Mode Selects to execute 754 self–test on power–up 11–127 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–65 XYLOGICS DISK CONTROLLER SWITCH AND JUMPER SETTINGS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Jumper Block JA F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 Selects base address of EE40 Jumper Blocks JB.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–66 SCSI Disk Drive Assembly in RP-S Subsystem SCSI I/O AND DC POWER CONNECTORS ON BACK OF DRIVES HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 HANG THESE OPENINGS OVER BOLTS FRONT OF SCSI HSD DRIVE FRONT OF LSD DRIVE DISK DRIVE PLATE DISK DRIVE MOUNTING BRACKET THUMB SCREWS SCSI Disk Drive Assembly in RP-S Subsystem 11–53 Scan Chassis Disks 11–128 .

The top bar code label is the serial number of the disk. D Start/Stop Option (J12) When a jumper is installed on pins 3 and 4 of the options jumper block(J12). ST3390 LSD Drive Configuration The Seagate ST3390N LSD has a product label affixed to the bottom of the disk and two bar code labels affixed to the side of the disk. The product label shows the model number Seagate ST3390N. you can install jumpers on either (not both) the SCSI ID jumper block (J5) or the user configuration jumper block (J8) pins 1 through 6. Check to ensure that a jumper is installed here. the drive waits for a start/atop unit command from the host before starting or stopping the spindle motor. These labels are important when discussing configuration issues. which are visible only when the disk mounting plate has been pulled from the RP Subsystem chassis. since the SCSI ID for the LSD is 0.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–54 11–54–1 ST3390 LSD Drive ST3390 LSD Test Points None 11–54–2 ST3390 LSD LEDs None 11–54–3 ST3390 LSD Switch Settings None 11–54–4 Internal Cable Connections HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The Local SCSI disk has two connectors. 11–54–6 ST3390 LSD Drive Jumper Settings D Parity Enable Option (J12) When a jumper is installed on pins 1 and 2 of the options jumper block (J12). neither of these jumper blocks has jumpers installed. for example. 11–129 . However. When selecting the SCSI ID. CV3398745. For the RP subsystem. Check to ensure that this jumper is not installed. Connects disk to SBC. The lower bar code label is the configuration part number for the local SCSI disk. use SCSI ID0 (no jumper installed). D SCSI Address (J5) Each device on the SCSI must have a unique SCSI ID. the parity block is used. Connector D D 11–54–5 J3 J4 Type 4–pin Description DC power connector. Connects LSD to power supply. 50–pin I/O connector. Because the SBC controls only one SCSI drive. this number is 917004–001.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 D HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Terminator Power Source (J6) To select the terminator power source. install jumpers on the terminator power source jumper block. The terminating resistor packs must also be present. Check to ensure that jumpers are installed on pins 1 and 2 and pins 3 and 4 of J6 for this configuration. Check to ensure that both the jumper and the three resistor packs are present. ILLUSTRATION 11–67 LSD (3390) DRIVE SWITCHES AND JUMPERS 11–130 . The RP subsystem provides terminator power to the SCSI connector and the drive terminator packs. D Active/Passive Termination (J9) Installing a jumper on pins 1 and 2 of the active/passive termination jumper block selects active termination.

11–131 . The activity indicator LED is green. then lights when the disk is accessed.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–68 ST5660N Local SCSI Disk Jumpers and Connectors PRODUCT LABEL (ON TOP OF DISK) J8 (SEE FRONT VIEW) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 BAR CODE LABEL (ON SIDE OF DISK) J5 AUXILIARY SELECTION FOR SCSI ID (DO NOT USE) SCSI I/O CONNECTOR (PIN 1) DC POWER CONNECTOR BOTTOM/BACK VIEW BAR CODE LABEL J8 PIN LABEL J8 (PIN 1) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 (JUMPERS ON PINS 28 AND 30 AND PINS 32 AND 34 ARE SPARES) 28 30 32 34 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 FRONT VIEW ST5660N Local SCSI Disk Jumpers and Connectors 11–55 11–55–1 IPI High Speed Disk High Speed Disk Test Points None 11–55–2 High Speed Disk LEDs The high speed disk controller has one activity LED (not visible when the cabinet front panel is in place). It flashes during power–up.

Connector D D D 11–55–7 J15 J31 J32 Type 4–pin Description DC power connector. 11–132 . The activity indicator LED is green. which are visible only when the disk mounting plate has been pulled from the RP Subsystem chassis. High Speed Disk Configuration Configuring the high speed disk consists of circuit board jumper configuration. 50–pin Port B I/O connector. Connects HSD to power supply. The label includes the following information: Serial Number is different for each disk. For example. M–01–9351–6. 11–55–5 High Speed Disk Switch Settings None 11–55–6 Internal Cable Connections The High Speed disk has three connectors. Lot Number. then lights when the disk is accessed. It flashes during power–up. The appropriate settings for the RP subsystem are given in this section. The revision level is important when discussing configuration issues.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11–55–3 High Speed Disk Switch Settings None 11–55–4 High Speed Disk LEDS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The High speed disk controller has one activity LED (not visible when the cabinet front panel is in place). 11–55–8 High Speed Disk Jumper Settings CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE CIRCUIT BOARDS TO SET JUMPERS. Disk Label/Revision Control The Seagate ST41800–K high speed disk has a revision control label affixed to the side of the disk drive. Part Number for the RP subsystem is 990005–001. Download Code Revision Number. Not used. Model Number for the RP subsystem is ST41800–K. Connects disk to HSDC. 50–pin Port A I/O connector.

11–133 . Placing a plug in the jumper establishes the drive as a remote. Removing the plug establishes the drive as a slave. This is a 3–bit binary number representing an integer value of 0 through 7. sweep cycles are disabled and the system must use sweep cycles enabled at the system or subsystem level. D Sweep Cycle Enable Jumper (J4B) Placing a jumper on J4B enables sweep cycles at the drive level.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11–55–9 I/O Board Jumpers D HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Master/Slave Jumper Placing a plug in the master/slave jumper establishes the drive as a master. each sweep segment is part of a controller–driven direct seek. Be sure the unit ID is set to 0 (no jumpers installed). Be sure that the jumper is removed.986 Mbyte drives. D Microcode ID Jumpers The microcode ID jumpers assign a unique device configuration code. This is the factory setting. and Unit Selectors Jumpers (J4A) Normally. D Disable Read/Write Diagnostics Jumper Removing the plug from the disable read/write diagnostics jumper enables the internal diagnostic program to perform read and write operations. Placing a plug in the jumper prevents the internal diagnostic program from doing so. The Disable Port Jumpers are not installed at the factory. The setting shown is for 1. Be sure that this jumper is installed. do not change this setting. Installing a jumper in Disable Port A or Disable Port B disables the port. Installing the jumper prevents writing to the drive. Be sure that this jumper is removed. If the jumper is removed. D Local/Remote Jumper Removing the plug from the local/remote jumper establishes the drive as a local drive and disk spin up starts (after a delay) when power is applied. 11–55–10 Control Board Jumpers D Enable Sweep Only On Seeks Jumpers (J12) When a plug is installed on the Enable Sweep Only on Seeks Jumper. Disable Ports. the Write Protect jumper is removed. D Write Protect. Be sure that this plug is installed. Be sure that this plug is removed. D The Select Unit ID jumpers designate the ID of the system drive. Check to ensure that neither jumper is installed.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–69 IPI HIGH SPEED DISK HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–134 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–70 IPI HIGH SPEED DISK CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11–135 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–71 IPI HIGH SPEED DISK I/O BOARD JUMPERS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 11–72 IPI–2 HIGH SPEED DRIVE SWITCHES 11–136 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–73 IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-2) MASTER/ SLAVE HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 LOCAL/ REMOTE DISABLE R/W DIAGNOSTICS MICROCODE ID 23 22 21 20 IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-2) ILLUSTRATION 11–74 IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-3) MASTER/ SLAVE LOCAL/ REMOTE DISABLE R/W DIAGNOSTICS MICROCODE ID 23 22 21 20 IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-3) 11–137 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION 11–75 IPI–2 CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION 11–76 IPI-2 High Speed Disk Control Board Jumpers (UYDX-2) J12 — ENABLE SWEEP CYCLE DISABLE PORT B DISABLE PORT A WRITE PROTECT ID0 ID1 ID2 J4A IPI-2 High Speed Disk Control Board Jumpers (UYDX-2) UNIT SELECTORS 11–138 .

Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. Connect the four I/O cables (items #3. Static Sensitive Devices 6. Remove backplane jumpers. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray.. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION. 13. Remove four (4) screws to GAI Bus Cover and then remove P1 connector from GAI card. 2. wear properly grounded wrist strap) when handling all boards. 10. #8) between Controller Board and Tape Drive Unit as indicated by cable labelling. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray. 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CHAPTER 12 – REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES Computer THE CIRCUIT BOARDS ARE VERY STATIC SENSITIVE!! Static sensitive components may be damaged if not handled in a static free environment. Static Sensitive Devices 12–1 46–282067P54 1/2 MAG Tape Controller System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i. Disconnect the GAI Serial Interface Cable and Plasma Cable. 1. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a static–free environment. 9. 4. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display.e. Continue setting up the Tape Drive Unit. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 14.g. 8. Remove the Controller Board from the packing material and compare the jumper settings to the Illustration on page 11–92. Install into slot 8 using the instructions from Section 2–2. Starting at the applications level. 12–1 . Take appropriate precautions (e. 7. #6. 12. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. #7. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. 11. 5.

9. Turn on Sun Computer and console. Reinstall computer front cover. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors.e. 7. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. Starting at the applications level. 14.. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. 4. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray. 13. 15. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a static–free environment. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–2 46–269601P1 Computer Active Scsi Terminator HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. 12. 10. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 2. Static Sensitive Devices 5. 12–2 . Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 11. If installing 16MB in slot 5 ensure that jumper setting on front panel is jumpered in a 0 Board position. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. Ensure that the front settings are positioned for board 0. 3. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. 12–3 46–282067P37 Computer 16 MB Circuit Bd System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i. 6. 8. Please use good service practices. If Board goes into slot 4 of Sun Computer ensure that front jumper selection of 16MB Board is jumpered to Board number 1 jumper position. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. If necessary.

5. +12 Analog TB2. Plug in the computer to the console. Reconnect the wires to the power supply. then turn on the console. In approximately 15 seconds the screen will return to the character prompt. 4. 8.95 to 5.1 –11.24 4. Verify that the power supply voltages are within the tolerances listed in Table on the next page. Loosen the screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place. Reconnect the power supply ground strap on the rear of the cabinet.24 Test Point +5V & –5 Studs TB2. 10. Reattach the Power Supply Cover. CAUTION Wait at least five minutes after turning off the system before disconnecting the power supply wires in the next step to let the power supply completely discharge.9 to 5. being careful to not get the power supply wires behind the supply. 11. 7. 2. Reattach the Sun computer front cover. Put back the Serial I/O with cables. Carefully slide the power supply tray into position through the front of the cabinet.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–4 46–307090P1 Computer 1600 Watt PS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Carefully slide the power supply tray out through the front of the cabinet. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. TABLE 12–1 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES Voltage +5 +12 –5 –12 Tolerance 4. –5. Note that the screws are captive to the cover and cannot be removed completely. Then type SYNC again and press Return. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. 15. If not replace the power supply.76 to 12. 16.76 to –12. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. Attach the replacement power supply to the power supply tray with four screws.05 11. remove the panel and set aside. and then turn on the computer. 6. 13. –12 14. 12. Remove the four screws holding the power supply to the power supply tray. 3. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners underneath the front end of the cover. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. Loosen the screws that hold the power supply cover in place and remove the cover.2 TB2. 12–3 . Disconnect the wires from the system power supply. Then type halt and press Return. Password is Genesis. 9.

Static Sensitive Devices 5. 4. If necessary. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord.e. Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 11. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. Turn on Sun Computer and console. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. These are located at the bottom of the front cover.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–5 46–282067P38 Computer 32 MB Circuit Bd System Shutdown: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The system software must be shutdown (i. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 14. 13. Starting at the applications level. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. 12. 10. 7. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. 3. 6. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 9. 12–4 . 2. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Reinstall computer front cover. 8. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a static–free environment.. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray. Ensure that the front settings are positioned for board 0. 1.

Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 11. Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. Cables A to A and B to B. 15. 4. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a static–free environment. 13. 14. Remove four (4) cables from the 9 Track Controller Board. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. If necessary. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 10. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a static–free environment.e. Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. 3. 18. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–6 46–282067P54 9 Track Mag Tape Controller (Optional) System Shutdown: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The system software must be shutdown (i. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. Ensure that the cables coming from the 9 Track Tape Drive Unit are installed correctly. 12. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 8. Starting at the applications level. Turn on console and Sun Computer. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 16.. 2. 17. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). 19. 7. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer. Reconnect 4 cables to Controller Board. 6. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 5. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. 9. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. Static Sensitive Devices 12–5 . 1. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display.

Use good ESD procedures. Shutdown systems applications using the system shutdown button under UTILITIES. 3. Use good ESD procedures. Seat the board fully using caution not to bend the EMC/EMI tabs. 2. 3. SCSI Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. replace the computer cable tray and front cover. 12–6 . Remove the computer cable tray. (If not. Compare jumper and DIP switch settings on the new board with the old one. Use good service practices. 2. Remove the board using the board ejectors and carefully slide it from the slot. This will bring the system to the boot prompt. 3. 10. 12–8 46–307090P29 Computer I/O Cable. Remove the three (3) 1/4 turn screws from the bottom of the computer front cover. 5. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Use good service practices. Turn the computer power OFF. Remove the four (4) screws from the computer cable tray.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–7 46–307090P24 Computer Backplane Circuit Bd HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. If applications are not running and the system is at UNIX level. 7. Turn OFF power to the connected units.) 13. login as genesis and type haltSystem. 12–9 46–307090P29 GAI Serial Cable Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 9. Use ESD Precautions when handling all circuit boards!!! Static Sensitive Devices 8. Remove the computer front cover. 6. Using caution not to switch OFF the computer switch. 11. Install the hex screws in the top and bottom of the board. 4. re–check your work and troubleshoot problem. Turn the computer power ON. Adjust settings to match the old one if necessary. Remove the hex screw at the top and bottom of the board you are going to replace. 12. 4. 4. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 2. Make sure the computer boots with no problems. Install the new board into the slot with the components facing to the right of the board.

Starting at the applications level. 7. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. 9. Ensure Diag/Normal Switch on front of CPU Board is in the normal position. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. Reconnect the ethernet cable. 3. Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 11. 14. If necessary. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray and disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. Please use good service practices. 1. Computer System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–10 46–301975P1 CIPRICO Controller Bd HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. 2. 6. Take the ID Prom from the defective board and insert it into new board at location U1907. 12–11 46–282067P31 CPU Circuit Bd. Be sure to match the pin 1 indicator (usually a small dot or indentation at one end of the chip) with the indentation on the socket. Turn on Sun Computer. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer 12–7 .. 12. 15. 10. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 18. 16. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 8. 13. Remove the ethernet cable. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 5. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord.e. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 17. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a static free environment. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. Secure the board to the chassis with two hex screws using a 2mm hex wrench. Static Sensitive Devices 4. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display.

Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. password is Genesis. If Caution is not taken. i. type b then return. 21. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 1. Log in as root. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down.e. Do you want System to Autoboot ? Type in “NO” and press return. Starting at the applications level. 20... 10. 23. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray. 25. Approximately in a minute you will be prompted.e. Remove four (4) screws to GAI Bus Cover and then remove P1 connector from GAI card. 2. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 8. Static Sensitive Devices 6. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a static–free environment. Note: Have Unix running but not applications at this point.e. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. the optical disk will not operate. Boot UNIX. 4. Depress L1 and A key at the same time i. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. CAUTION 12–12 46–282067P34 GAI Circuit Bd System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. >. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display.. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray. Disconnect the GAI Serial Interface Cable and Plasma Cable. 7. 12–8 . Reinstall Front Cover. Type in Add OD and answer the questions.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 19. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer.. 3. you will see the prom monitor level i. If necessary.e. 22. 24. 5. Enter Q and hit return. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. 9. Press [Spacebar] and it will return you to prom monitor level.

1. Turn on Sun Computer and console. 11. Label and disconnect any video BNC connections on Frame Buffer Board. Disconnect P2 Bus Cable from Frame Buffer. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 13. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. 14. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer. 16. Reattach GAI Bus Cable Cover. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 12–9 . 14. 15. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord.e. 7. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 16. If necessary. Reinstall computer front cover. 13. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. 8. 12–13 46–321280G1 GBM Circuit Bd (New Style) System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. 12. Plasma Cable and GAI Serial Interface Cable. 6.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11. Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 10. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). Reconnect P1 GAI Bus Cable. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a static–free environment. 17. 2. 15. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 5. Disconnect GAI Bus Cover.. Secure the board to the chassis with two hex screws using a 2mm hex wrench. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. 12. 3. Turn on console and Sun Computer. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 9. Starting at the applications level. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 4.

Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. Label and disconnect any video BNC connections on Frame Buffer Board. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer. Install GAI Bus Cover. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. 17. 14.. 2. Starting at the applications level. Turn on console and Sun Computer. 1. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). Reinstall Video BNC Cables to Frame Buffer Board. 12. If necessary. 7. Reconnect P2 Bus Cable to Frame Buffer Board. Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. 8. Disconnect GAI Bus Cover. 16. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a static–free environment. 15. Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 19. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 10.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–14 46–282067P35 GFB Circuit Bd System Shutdown: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The system software must be shutdown (i. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display.e. 18. 5. 12–10 . 6. 13. Disconnect P2 Bus Cable from Frame Buffer. 11. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 4. 9. 3. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis.

Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 12. If necessary. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display.e. Starting at the applications level. Starting at the applications level. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 3. 14. 1.e. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 9. 2. Remove ethernet cable from ethernet board. Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 4.. 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–15 46–282067P36 GIP Circuit Bd System Shutdown: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The system software must be shutdown (i.Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. 11. 12–11 . Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. Remove four (4) screws attached to the Sun Computer’s Cable Tray. 10. 5. 5. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 13. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. 4. 12–16 46–296604P1 Computer Second ETHERNET Circuit Bd System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i. 9.. 7. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 8. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. Slide the board out of the chassis. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Locate the slot of the defective board. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 6. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. Turn on console and Sun Computer.

Static Sensitive Devices 6. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. 3. Reconnect Ethernet Cable to Board. 10.e. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a static–free environment. Turn the console and computer off. A pop–up message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down? Press the YES button to shut down the scanner. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. To remove this tray proceed as follows: 4. 9.e. Turn on Sun Computer and console. 1. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer.Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. 5. 12–12 . 14. 12. Starting at the applications level. 12–17 46–306519P1 DAT Tape Drive (5. Remove the SCSI Tray faceplate by removing the two screws on the bottom of the faceplate. Ensure that the front settings are positioned for board 0. Reinstall Sun Computer front cover. >. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. Wait 15 to 30 seconds and Unix will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. The defective tape drive is located on the SCSI tray inside of the computer. Secure the board to the chassis with two hex screws using a 2mm hex wrench.25 inch) System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 2. 8. 11. 15. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 16. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. i. If necessary. 10.. 7. 6. 13.

Place the SCSI Tray on its side. On rear of drive. 8. Permanent damage to the static–sensitive boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 10.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 7. Ignore other jumpers. 18. Connect the power cable. Assemble replacement DAT drive as shown in adapter kit instructions (packaged with kit). TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR SCSI TRAY DAMAGE. Check rear jumper settings as shown. Set switch settings on bottom center of drive as follows: 1–7: ON. Rotate the serial I/O panel down and out of the way with the cables still attached. Loosen the screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the panel. remove term power jumper bit 1 (disables termination resistors). Place SCSI Tray into Sun Computer. 13. 8: OFF 17. Slide the tape drive back into the SCSI tray. 19. and SCSI Tray Power Connector from the underside of the SCSI Tray and loosen the two captive screws. Keep the screws for use later. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal grounding point on the computer chassis before continuing. Lay the SCSI Tray aside. 21. THE SCSI TRAY IS HEAVY AND ONCE THE SCREWS ARE LOOSENED. SCSI Interface Cable. Slide tape drive forward a couple of inches and remove SCSI Cable and power cables from the DAT Tape Drive. Remove all cables connected to Serial I/O Panel. with the cable marked DAT to the tape drive. THE TRAY IS NOT ATTACHED TO THE COMPUTER IN ANY WAY. 12–13 . DAT Tape Drive Installation: 15. 9. Remove the SCSI tray from the computer by pulling the tray out. 16. Slide the tape drive out from the tray. 12. Secure the tape drive to the SCSI tray with the same 4 mounting screws. THE TRAY DOES NOT HAVE END STOPS. IN ADDITION. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. REMOVE THE TRAY SLOWLY. 22. Static Sensitive Devices WARNING Note: This side up for use with P51 DAT tape faces up. Remove DAT Tape Drive: 11. READJUSTING YOUR GRIP TO BALANCE THE TRAY EVERY FEW INCHES. Disconnect the SCSI Terminator. Connect the SCSI ribbon cable to the DAT tape drive. 20. Reinstall the SCSI tray into the Sun computer. Place the SCSI Tray on its side and unfasten the screws that hold the DAT tape drive to the SCSI tray. 14.

12–14 . i. 25. 12–18 46–306519P2 DAT Tape Drive (3. check LEDs to verify the new DAT drive is operating properly..e. Reconnect SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator. Starting at the applications level. 26. Reattach the Serial I/O Panel. Unix is down) and power down the hardware. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 23. Remove the SCSI Tray faceplate by removing the two screws on the bottom of the faceplate. To remove this tray proceed as follows: 4.5) System Shutdown: Shutdown the system software (i. A pop–up message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down? Press the YES button to shut down the scanner. 24. Turn Sun Computer on. 3. Once power is returned to the system. These are located at the bottom of the front cover.e. 2. Turn the console and computer off. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. Wait 15 to 30 seconds and Unix will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level. 28. 1. 6. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. >. 27. Tighten the 2 screws underneath the SCSI Tray. 5. The defective tape drive is located on the SCSI tray inside of the computer. Connect SCSI Power Cable to SCSI Tray. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer.

and SCSI Tray Power Connector from the underside of the SCSI Tray and loosen the two captive screws. 2. Remove the SCSI tray from the computer by pulling the tray out. READJUSTING YOUR GRIP TO BALANCE THE TRAY EVERY FEW INCHES. Slide the tape drive out from the tray. Static Sensitive Devices WARNING 12–15 . FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Keep the screws for use later. 10. 3. Permanent damage to the static–sensitive boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Lay the SCSI Tray aside. 8. REMOVE THE TRAY SLOWLY. Slide tape drive forward a couple of inches and remove SCSI Cable and power cables from the DAT Tape Drive. Rotate the serial I/O panel down and out of the way with the cables still attached. 4. Loosen the screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the panel. 9. IN ADDITION. Remove DAT Tape Drive: 1. THE TRAY DOES NOT HAVE END STOPS. THE SCSI TRAY IS HEAVY AND ONCE THE SCREWS ARE LOOSENED. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal grounding point on the computer chassis before continuing. Disconnect the SCSI Terminator. SCSI Interface Cable. TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR SCSI TRAY DAMAGE.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove the SCSI Tray: 7. Remove all cables connected to Serial I/O Panel. THE TRAY IS NOT ATTACHED TO THE COMPUTER IN ANY WAY. Place the SCSI Tray on its side and unfasten the screws that hold the DAT tape drive to the SCSI tray.

5. remove term power jumper bit 1 (disables termination resistors). Connect the SCSI ribbon cable to the DAT tape drive. 5. 2. Starting at the applications level. Check rear jumper settings as shown. 11. Ignore other jumpers. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. with the cable marked DAT to the tape drive. 12–16 . Connect the power cable. Wait 15 to 30 seconds and Unix will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level. Reattach the Serial I/O Panel. 9. 12–19 46–306519P2 DAT Drive (3. 14. 4. To remove this tray proceed as follows: 4. 3. Turn the console and computer off. 13. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. 2. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer.. A pop–up message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down ? Press the YES button to shut down the scanner.5 inch) System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i. On rear of drive. Connect SCSI Power Cable to SCSI Tray. Assemble replacement DAT drive as shown in adapter kit instructions (packaged with kit). Slide the tape drive back into the SCSI tray. check LEDs to verify the new DAT drive is operating properly. Once power is returned to the system. i. The defective tape drive is located on the SCSI tray inside of the computer. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. >. 7. 1. Note: This side up for use with P51 DAT tape faces up.e. Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. Tighten the 2 screws underneath the SCSI Tray. 10. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 8: OFF 3. Secure the tape drive to the SCSI tray with the same 4 mounting screws. Place SCSI Tray into Sun Computer. Turn Sun Computer on. The side of the ribbon cable marked.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 DAT Tape Drive Installation: 1. Reinstall the SCSI tray into the Sun computer. 8.e. Reconnect SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator. 12. Set switch settings on bottom center of drive as follows: 1–7: ON. 6.

READJUSTING YOUR GRIP TO BALANCE THE TRAY EVERY FEW INCHES. Remove the SCSI tray from the computer by pulling the tray out. 12–17 . FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 4. Loosen the screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the panel. On rear of drive. Slide the tape drive back into the SCSI tray. Assemble replacement DAT drive as shown in adapter kit instructions (packaged with kit). Remove all cables connected to Serial I/O Panel. remove term power jumper bit 1 (disables termination resistors). SCSI Interface Cable. 4. 10. and SCSI Tray Power Connector from the underside of the SCSI Tray and loosen the two captive screws. 9. Rotate the serial I/O panel down and out of the way with the cables still attached. 5. 2. with the cable marked DAT to the tape drive. Set switch settings on bottom center of drive as follows: 1–7: ON. Connect the power cable. Check rear jumper settings as shown. Static Sensitive Devices WARNING Note: This side up for use with P51 DAT tape faces up. Disconnect the SCSI Terminator. 8: OFF 3. REMOVE THE TRAY SLOWLY. TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR SCSI TRAY DAMAGE. Keep the screws for use later. Remove the SCSI Tray: 7. 2. The side of the ribbon cable marked. Place the SCSI Tray on its side and unfasten the screws that hold the DAT tape drive to the SCSI tray. 3. Remove the SCSI Tray faceplate by removing the two screws on the bottom of the faceplate. Ignore other jumpers. THE TRAY IS NOT ATTACHED TO THE COMPUTER IN ANY WAY. THE TRAY DOES NOT HAVE END STOPS. THE SCSI TRAY IS HEAVY AND ONCE THE SCREWS ARE LOOSENED. 8. Permanent damage to the static–sensitive boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6. Remove DAT Tape Drive: 1. Slide the tape drive out from the tray. Connect the SCSI ribbon cable to the DAT tape drive. Lay the SCSI Tray aside. DAT Tape Drive Installation: 1. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal grounding point on the computer chassis before continuing. IN ADDITION. Slide tape drive forward a couple of inches and remove SCSI Cable and power cables from the DAT Tape Drive.

Reattach the Serial I/O Panel. 12–20 46–307090P12 Computer DC Power Cable Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Secure the tape drive to the SCSI tray with the same 4 mounting screws. Loosen the two screws that hold the fan tray in place and slide the tray out of the Sun computer. Place SCSI Tray into Sun Computer. 9. 10. Use good service practices. Attach the replacement fan to the fan tray with the two (2) screws. Then type SYNC again and press Return. Reconnect SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator. 12–18 . Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. In approximately 15 to 30 seconds Unix will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. 4. 5.e. Use good ESD procedures. Remove the two screws that hold the defective fan. Reinstall the SCSI tray into the Sun computer. Password is Genesis. 2. Remove the power connector from the defective fan. 13. Once power is returned to the system. Remove the Terminator and SCSI Cable from SCSI Tray. Connect SCSI Power Cable to SCSI Tray. Disconnect the fan tray power connector. 8. i. check LEDs to verify the new DAT drive is operating properly. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Tighten the 2 screws underneath the SCSI Tray. 8. Remove defective fan. Then type halt and press Return. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. 4. 3. >. 3.. 7. Turn Sun Computer on. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. 12. 2. 9. 10. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. 11. Loosen the four captive screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the I/O Panel and set aside. 12–21 46–307090P23 Computer Fan in Rack Drawer 1. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners at the bottom front end of the cover. 14. 7.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6. Connect the fan power connector to the replacement fan and attach the fan to the fan tray. Manufacturer’s label should be facing upward. 6.

Remove the board using the board ejectors and carefully slide it from the slot. Remove the computer front cover. then computer. (If not. Reinstall the fan tray into the Sun computer. Remove the three (3) 1/4 turn screws from the bottom of the computer front cover. Turn the computer power OFF. Remove the four (4) screws from the computer cable tray. then verify if fan is working. 9. Then put on front cover. 2.) 13. 13. 10. 4. 14. re–check your work and troubleshoot problem. Seat the board fully using caution not to bend the EMC/EMI tabs. Adjust settings to match the old one if necessary. Using caution not to switch OFF the computer switch. This will bring the system to the boot prompt. Turn the computer power ON. 12. Make sure the computer boots with no problems. USE ESD PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING ALL CIRCUIT BOARDS!!! 8. 6. Connect SCSI Interface Cable to SCSI tray and also Terminator. attach it with the two captive screws and reconnect the Fan Tray Power Connector. Plug in Genesis computer to Console. replace the computer cable tray and front cover. Compare jumper and DIP switch settings on the new board with the old one. Remove the hex screw at the top and bottom of the board you plan to replace. 11. 5. Attach the Serial I/O Panel. 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11. 12–22 46–515270 LMO–2 (3–D Renderer) Board 1. 12. Install the hex screws in the top and bottom of the board. WARNING 12–19 . login as genesis and type haltSystem. turn on console. Shutdown systems applications using the system shutdown button under UTILITIES. If applications are not running and the system is at UNIX level. 7. Install the new board into the slot with the components facing to the right of the board. Remove the computer cable tray.

Remove the three (3) 1/4 turn screws from the bottom of the computer front cover. Seat the board fully using caution not to bend the EMC/EMI tabs. Remove the computer front cover. If applications are not running and the system is at UNIX level. Compare jumper and DIP switch settings on the new board with the old one. 3. 11. 7. re–check your work and troubleshoot problem. Remove the four (4) screws from the computer cable tray. 12. Install the hex screws in the top and bottom of the board. Remove the board using the board ejectors and carefully slide it from the slot. ****** Use ESD Precautions when handling all circuit boards!!! ****** 8.) 13. Remove the computer cable tray. Adjust settings to match the old one if necessary. 9. Remove the hex screw at the top and bottom of the board you are going to replace. Install the new board into the slot with the components facing to the right of the board. 5. 12–20 . This will bring the system to the boot prompt. Turn the computer power ON. replace the computer cable tray and front cover. Shutdown systems applications using the system shutdown button under UTILITIES. Using caution not to switch OFF the computer switch. 6. Make sure the computer boots with no problems. 2. 10.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–23 46–320144G1 Motorola MVME166GE Board (OC CPU) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. (If not. login as genesis and type haltSystem. 4. Turn the computer power OFF.

unfasten the Phillips screws that hold the drive and mounting bracket to the SCSI tray. Then type SYNC again and press Return. Attach the three cables to the rear of the drive. then remove the three cables from the rear of the drive. 7. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. 12–25 46–307575P1 Pioneer DD–U7001 Rewritable. Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. Remove the drive from the tray. Place the SCSI tray on its side and. 11. 2. 10. Starting at the applications level. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray.. > ).e. 1. 4. Return to ST1980N disk drive procedure. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. Attach the cabinet front cover. Install the SCSI tray into the cabinet and attach it with the two screws. Reformat the disk and install the software. Password is Genesis. 15. 5. 9. Then type halt and press Return. (i. 3.e. Check the disk drive jumper configuration. 12. MOD System Shutdown: The system software must be shut down (i. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–24 46–269587P1 Mounting ST1980N Dual Disks HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Replace a Disk Drive In The SCSI Tray: 1. Install the replacement drive in the SCSI tray. 14. 13. Install the Serial I/O Panel. 2. 8. A pop–up message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down ? Press the “YES” button to shut down the scanner. while supporting the drive. 6. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners at the front end of the cover. Connect the SCSI Interface cable. Connect the SCSI tray power connector. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet. 12–21 . Plug in the system power cord and turn on the system power. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. Connect all the cables to the Serial I/O Panel. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. 3. 4. Wait until you get to the prom monitor level. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. In about 15 seconds the screen returns to the character prompt.

12–22 . Remove the Controller Board. Install screws and tighten. 5. 2. 3. just while you are inserting the connector. Route New Ribbon Cable/Remove Old Ribbon Cable (If replacing WORM OD with MOD): These steps in this section are not necessary if WORM OD does not exist in computer. which will give the best fit to the bezel. 3. Remove the drive from the tray. 4. Make one Power Harness connection to the MOD drive under the small cable at the back of the drive. then remove the cables from the rear of the drive. 2. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Drive and loosen the four screws (two on each side of the Optical Disk Drive). Remove two SCSI Terminating Resistors from bottom of drive (look like PROMs). Remove old ribbon cable. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray. 3. Line up the lower two holes on each bracket with the holes on each side of the Drive. 2. 3. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Controller Board and loosen the three screws. Install new ribbon cable. Push the drive through the brackets and through the opening in the front of the tray (FROM THE INSIDE OUT) until the threaded holes in the drive are centered in the slotted holes of the brackets. Remove Optical Disk Drive Controller Board (if replacing WORM OD with MOD): 1. 1. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet. Position new MOD Drive between brackets where old Optical Disk Drive was installed. They will no longer be needed.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove the Tape Drive in the SCSI Tray (to access screws on optical drive): 1. Set the SCSI ID Switch Settings. Remove Front cover plate inside lower half of opening by removing two screws (one on each side of cover plate). 6. Then make a second Power Harness connection next to the SCSI connector of the MOD drive. 1. remove the four Phillips screws that hold the drive to the SCSl tray. Remove the metal plate and standoffs which rest underneath the Optical Disk Controller. Set Drive Select Jumpers to OFF (lower positions) on rear of drive. 2. 4. Position new ribbon cable to match old ribbon cable route. 2. It may be necessary to disconnect one end of the small ribbon cable. Place the SCSI tray on its side and. Remove the Optical Disk. This should leave 1/8 inch of the drive extending through the front of the tray. Remove the Optical Disk Drive (if replacing WORM OD with MOD): These steps in this section are not necessary if WORM OD does not exist in computer. Install MOD Drive: 1. 3. while supporting the drive.

Then type SYNC again and press Return. 4. 9. In approximately 15 seconds the screen will return to the character prompt.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 7. 4. 2. A pop–up message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down ? Press the YES button to shut down the scanner. Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners at the front end of the cover. After the addOD script runs. Type addOD <enter> 10.e. Load the HLFC tape into the tape drive. Reinstall Tape Drive and Reassemble Computer: 1. 6. Bring up Applications to complete the MOD installation. 11. 5. Attach the connector ends of the SCSI Ribbon Cable to the input and output ports in the bottom of the tray. connect the ribbon cable to the MOD drive. Starting at the applications level. 7. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. Pay attention to the location of pin #1 and the colored edge of the cable on all three connectors. Login as root on the OC: <suiteID>_OC0@login:root <enter> password:<default root password> <enter> 8. Reassemble computer covers.. MOD System Shutdown: The system software must be shut down (i. Wait until you get to the prom monitor level. Reconnect cable ribbon and power cable. 12–23 . Password is Genesis. i. Reinstall SCSI tray. 3. 3. Reinstall screws and tighten. >. 1. Then type halt and press Return. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. Make sure all peripherals are connected to the ribbon cable and respective power cables. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. Then.e. the software automatically reboots. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Power up computer. 12–26 46–307575P4 Pioneer DE–UH7101 Rewritable. 2.

Make one Power Harness connection to the MOD drive under the small cable at the back of the drive. Install screws and tighten. 2. Remove Front cover plate inside lower half of opening by removing two screws (one on each side of cover plate). while supporting the drive. Install new ribbon cable. Set the SCSI ID Switch Settings. which will give the best fit to the bezel. Remove two SCSI Terminating Resistors from bottom of drive (look like PROMs). 5. Push the drive through the brackets and through the opening in the front of the tray (FROM THE INSIDE OUT) until the threaded holes in the drive are centered in the slotted holes of the brackets. Remove the metal plate and standoffs which rest underneath the Optical Disk Controller. 3. Line up the lower two holes on each bracket with the holes on each side of the Drive. Remove the drive from the tray. then remove the cables from the rear of the drive. Remove Optical Disk Drive Controller Board (if replacing WORM OD with MOD): 1. remove the four Phillips screws that hold the drive to the SCSl tray. Install MOD Drive: 1. Remove old ribbon cable. Then make a second Power Harness connection next to the SCSI connector of the MOD drive. 2. 3. They will no longer be needed. 4. 3. Position new MOD Drive between brackets where old Optical Disk Drive was installed. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray. Position new ribbon cable to match old ribbon cable route. 12–24 . Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Controller Board and loosen the three screws.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove the Tape Drive in the SCSI Tray (to access screws on optical drive): 1. Set Drive Select Jumpers to OFF (lower positions) on rear of drive. 6. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Drive and loosen the four screws (two on each side of the Optical Disk Drive). This should leave 1/8 inch of the drive extending through the front of the tray. Remove the Optical Disk. It may be necessary to disconnect one end of the small ribbon cable. Remove the Optical Disk Drive (if replacing WORM OD with MOD): These steps in this section are not necessary if WORM OD does not exist in computer. 1. 4. just while you are inserting the connector. 3. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet. 2. Remove the Controller Board. Place the SCSI tray on its side and. 2. 2. 1. Route New Ribbon Cable/Remove Old Ribbon Cable (If replacing WORM OD with MOD): These steps in this section are not necessary if WORM OD does not exist in computer. 3.

Then. After the addOD script runs. Make sure all peripherals are connected to the ribbon cable and respective power cables. Reinstall screws and tighten. 9. the software automatically reboots. 4. Reconnect cable ribbon and power cable. 2. Reassemble computer covers. Reinstall Tape Drive and Reassemble Computer: 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 7. Reinstall SCSI tray. Power up computer. Bring up Applications to complete the MOD installation. Type addOD <enter> 10. 5. 6. 12–25 . 11. connect the ribbon cable to the MOD drive. Login as root on the OC: <suiteID>_OC0@login:root <enter> password:<default root password> <enter> 8. Load the HLFC tape into the tape drive. Pay attention to the location of pin #1 and the colored edge of the cable on all three connectors. 7. Attach the connector ends of the SCSI Ribbon Cable to the input and output ports in the bottom of the tray. 3.

Remove four (4) screws to GAI Bus Cover and then remove P1 connector from GAI card.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–27 46–282067P34 GAI Circuit Bd System Shutdown: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The system software must be shutdown (i. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. Reattach GAI Bus Cable Cover. 8. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray. 15. 17. Plasma Cable and GAI Serial Interface Cable. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 11. 9. 12–26 . Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. Starting at the applications level. Static Sensitive Devices 6.. If necessary. 2. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 7. 14. 3. 13. Turn on Sun Computer and console. Reconnect P1 GAI Bus Cable. Reinstall computer front cover. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. 5. 16. 10. 4. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane.e. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. Disconnect the following cables: GAI Serial Interface Cable and Plasma Cable. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 1. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a static–free environment. 12.

Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. 11. 10. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 9. 1. Starting at the applications level. Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 12–27 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–28 46–307090P17 GBM Circuit Bd (Old Style) System Shutdown: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The system software must be shutdown (i.. Label and disconnect any video BNC connections on Frame Buffer Board. Disconnect P2 Bus Cable from Frame Buffer. 7. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 15. 8. 16. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. Disconnect GAI Bus Cover.e. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 14. 3. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 4. Turn on console and Sun Computer. 6. 13. 12. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a static–free environment. If necessary. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer. 2. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 5.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–29 46–282067P35 GFB Circuit Bd System Shutdown: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The system software must be shutdown (i. 11. 12–28 . The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 14. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. 13. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. Reinstall Video BNC Cables to Frame Buffer Board. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. 5. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer. 4. 1. 6. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 19. 17. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. Reconnect P2 Bus Cable to Frame Buffer Board. Install GAI Bus Cover. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 3. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. If necessary. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. Starting at the applications level. 7.. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. Turn on console and Sun Computer. Disconnect P2 Bus Cable from Frame Buffer. 12. 18.e. 16. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). 2. 10. 9. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. Disconnect GAI Bus Cover. Label and disconnect any video BNC connections on Frame Buffer Board. 15. 8. Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a static–free environment.

press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 11. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. Please use good service practices. 6. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 12. 10. Slide the board out of the chassis.Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 7. 13. 2. 5. 12–29 . 4.. 8. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 3. 9. These are located at the bottom of the front cover.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–30 46–282067P36 GIP Circuit Bd System Shutdown: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The system software must be shutdown (i. 1. Remove four (4) screws attached to the Sun Computer’s Cable Tray. If necessary. Starting at the applications level. Locate the slot of the defective board. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer.e. 14. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. Turn on console and Sun Computer. 9. 12–31 CG29–515270 LMO2 Bd (Mother & Daughter) No specific procedure at this time.

In approximately 15 seconds the screen will return to the character prompt. Remove the Serial I/O Panel and set aside.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–32 46–307090P31 Power Indicator and Cable HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Then type SYNC again and press Return. Password is Genesis. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. 12–30 . 2. NOTE: This light is press fitted to cover. Install the new power indicator in the power supply cover. SCSI Ribbon No specific procedure at this time. 12–35 2101566 Cable. Attach the two wires to the Sun computer power supply terminal strip. 3. 5. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. 6. Then type halt and press Return. Remove the light from the power supply cover. 7. Please use good service practices. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners at the bottom front end of the cover. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. Loosen the two (2) screws that hold the power supply cover in place and remove the cover. 12–34 46–328012P1 Cable. SCSI Ribbon No specific procedure at this time. 8. SCSI Harness No specific procedure at this time. 12–33 46–307636G1 Cable. Remove the two (2) wires of defective power indicator from the Sun computer power supply terminal strip. 4. Please use good service practices. Please use good service practices. Note that the screws are captive to the cover and cannot be removed completely.

Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners at the bottom front end of the cover. There is a tight fit between the Optical Disk Controller Board and the fan. 2. 3. Then type halt and press Return. In approximately 15 to 30 seconds Unix will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level. (Look for the air flow arrow on the fan). Loosen the four captive screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the I/O Panel and set aside. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. 12–31 . 9. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. Pay attention the direction of air flow on the replacement fan. Remove the Terminator and SCSI Cable from SCSI Tray. To reassemble. 11. 7. >. Then type SYNC again and press Return. Password is Genesis.. Disconnect the fan tray power connector. 6. i. 4. 12. Remove 4 screws/nuts that secure the fan to the tray. therefore use needle nose pliers to remove the leads from the (+) and (–) fan DC power terminals from the fan. Secure the fan to the tray chassis using the same hardware removed in step 3. 8.e. 5. Connect the blue power lead to the (+) terminal and the black lead to the (–) terminal on the fan. · Remove the defective fan. reverse steps. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12–36 46–307681P1 SCSI Tray Fan HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Loosen the two screws that hold the fan tray in place and slide the tray out of the Sun computer. 10.

The drives can absorb up to 75g’s with power off. Connect all the cables to the Serial I/O Panel. 2. Install the Serial I/O Panel. Attach the three cables to the rear of the drive. 10. 4. Remove the drive from the tray. To install dual ST1980N disk drives. then remove the three cables from the rear of the drive. unfasten the Phillips screws that hold the drive and mounting bracket to the SCSI tray. 6. while supporting the drive. 3. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet. 9. Check the disk drive jumper configuration. 13. Install the replacement drive in the SCSI tray. see the procedure for Mounting Dual Disks.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–37 46–269587P1 Seagate ST1980N Magnetic Disc Drive HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CAUTION Do not move or bump the RP cabinets when they are running as you may cause damage/failures to the LSD and/or the HSD. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray. Connect the SCSI Interface cable. Be extremely careful when installing front covers and closing cabinet doors. Install the SCSI tray into the cabinet and attach it with the two screws. Connect the SCSI tray power connector. 8. Do not roll the cabinet when power is applied (and the drives are spinning). Reformat the disk and install the software. 12. Attach the cabinet front cover. 15. Plug in the system power cord and turn on the system power. 12–32 . 5. 11. 7. 14. Replace a disk drive in the SCSI Tray: 1. Place the SCSI tray on its side and. but only 2g’s when spinning.

12–39 46–307090P30 Serial I/0 Panel No specific procedure at this time. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 14. 9. Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 5. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 16.e. 12–33 . set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a static–free environment. Ensure that the front settings are positioned for board 0. 11. If necessary. Turn on Sun Computer and console. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. Reinstall Sun Computer front cover. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis.. Static Sensitive Devices 6. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 8. 2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–38 46–282067P53 Second ETHERNET Circuit Bd. 15. Reconnect Ethernet Cable to Board. 7. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 4. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. Computer (Inter–suite Computer Only) System Shutdown: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The system software must be shutdown (i. Starting at the applications level. 1. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. Remove ethernet cable from ethernet board. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. Please use good service practices. 12. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 3. 10. 13.

. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 10. 4. Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. Turn on Sun Computer and console. 11. 15. 7. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. If necessary. Reconnect Ethernet Cable to Board. Ensure that the front settings are positioned for board 0. Static Sensitive Devices 6. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 12–34 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–40 46–296604P1 VME ETHERNET 3207 Hawk Board System Shutdown: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The system software must be shutdown (i. 3. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computer’s Cable Tray. Starting at the applications level. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a static–free environment. 13. 8. Remove ethernet cable from ethernet board. 14. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 16. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 9. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. Reinstall Sun Computer front cover. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. 2. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 12. 5. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 1.e.

replace the computer cable tray and front cover. Turn the computer power ON. 5. 10. 6. 1. 3. 12–42 46–301976P1 Wren V Disk Drive System Shutdown: Shut down system software (ie Unix is down) and power down hardware. Remove the computer front cover. If applications are not running and the system is at UNIX level. This will bring the system to the boot prompt. Make sure the computer boots with no problems. Remove the computer cable tray. Remove the four (4) screws from the computer cable tray. 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–41 46–301975P1 VME. SCSI Controller HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Shutdown systems applications using the system shutdown button under UTILITIES. 4. Turn the computer power OFF. Turn console and computer off. Remove the hex screw at the top and bottom of the board you plan to replace. Remove the front cover of the computer. 2. (If not. Seat the board fully using caution not to bend the EMC/EMI tabs. 7. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners. 12. Remove the three (3) 1/4 turn screws from the bottom of the computer front cover. Remove the board using the board ejectors and carefully slide it from the slot.to access and remove any of the listed hardware. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. A pop–up message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down ? · · · Press the YES button to shut down the scanner Remove the Sun Computer Cover and SCSI Tray Faceplate. 4. Adjust settings to match the old one if necessary. Install the new board into the slot with the components facing to the right of the board. 12–35 . login as genesis and type “haltSystem”. 2. 9. re–check your work and troubleshoot problem.) 13. 3. Use ESD Precautions when handling all circuit boards!!! WARNING 8. Compare jumper and DIP switch settings on the new board with the old one. 11. Install the hex screws in the top and bottom of the board. press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Using caution not to switch OFF the computer switch. Starting at the applications level.

Secure SCSI Tray by screwing 2 screws to bottom of SCSI Tray. Remove power cable connector and the SCSI Interface Cable off the faulty WREN 5 Drive. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. Power up console and computer. locate the Drive Select header which is next to the 50 pin SCSI Cable Connector on the rear of the disk drive. · Loosen the two captive screws and lay SCSI Tray on its side. Install the Disk Drive with the four screws that you removed. 10. Loosen the four screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the panel. · Rotate the serial I/O panel down and out of the way with the cables still attached and unhook the cables from the SCSI Tray. Disconnect the SCSI Terminator and SCSI Interface Cable from the underside of the SCSI Tray. In addition. 12.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 5. Static Sensitive Devices Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal grounding point on the computer chassis before continuing. 2. Leave all cables connected to Serial I/O Panel. Remove two (2) screws from bottom front of SCSI Tray. Connect I/0 Panel with its associated cables. Pin 1 for Pin 1. 3. CAUTION The SCSI Tray is heavy and once the screws are loosened. These Termination Resistors are next to the SCSI Interface Cable. 10. 8. the tray is not attached to the computer in any way. 8. Place the SCSI Tray back to its original position. remove the tray slowly. As shown in the Picture. 13. Connect SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator to SCSI Tray. Connect SCSI Tray Power Cable. Permanent damage to the static–sensitive boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Verify that there are no jumpers installed on the header pins. power and SCSI). the tray does not have end stops. 6. 12–36 . 7. To avoid personal injury or SCSI Tray damage.e. Install Disk Drive: 1. 9. Refer to Load from Cold Procedures. 4. Connect Disk Drive Cables (i. Pull off the front cover. readjusting your grip to balance the tray every few inches. 5. Remove the SCSI Tray faceplate by removing the 2 screws on the bottom of the face. 9. Remove four (4) screws that attach the drive to the SCSI Tray. 11. On new drive remove remove the three Termination Resistors. Ensure cable has the correct orientation. · Remove the SCSI Tray 7. Reattach Sun Computer Cover. HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6.

If not. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 3. If not. 3. IC 1. 4. 12–37 . Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps. Remove seven 10–32 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Remove 4 screws (item 25849) to remove board. Remove System Keypad Board. 4. Set the bottom pan on the floor. proceed as follows: 5. Remove 6 screws (item 05773) which secure two aluminum spacers to console chassis. To replace the 18 Button (IP/View) Rubber Keypad. proceed as follows: · · · · · Remove cable and ground wire from the board. Remove ground wire from terminal J7. 12–44 46–287394P1 8 Button Rubber Keypad. Reassemble Console. Remove IP Keypad Board. Reassemble Console.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 Console 12–43 46–287766P1 18 Button Rubber Keypad HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Remove 4 screws (item 05773) which secure two aluminum spacers to console chassis. proceed as follows: 5. proceed as follows: · · · · · · Remove J1 to J6 from the board. Remove 6 screws (item 25849) to remove board. Remove spacers and rubber keypad. To replace the System Keypad Board. 2. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. To replace the IP Keypad. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. To replace the 8 Button (Scan/Image) Rubber Keypad. Remove spacers and rubber keypad. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. Set the bottom pan on the floor. Remove seven 10–32 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps. 2.

11. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. Remove spacers and rubber keypad. proceed as follows: 5. OC The speaker is located behind the swing–out panel which holds the plasma display. 2. Replace the speaker and reassemble the console. Set the bottom pan on the floor. Remove the bezel. 2. Remove System Keypad Board. To replace the 8 Button (Scan/Image) Rubber Keypad. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. remove five 6–32 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. 5. Remove 2 screws which secure the speaker mounting bracket to the console chassis.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–45 46–282921P1 8 Button Rubber Keypad. If not. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. using a 7/64 allen wrench. 10. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. GCP Board and Autovoice Board. Remove seven 10–32 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom. so do not try to remove it at this point. Remove 4 screws and 4 nuts which secure the speaker to its mounting bracket. Reassemble Console. 3. Remove 4 screws (item 25849) to remove board. Remove the black and white wires from the respective spade lug terminals on the speaker. 12–46 46–287429P1 8 Ohm. proceed as follows: · · · · · Remove cable and ground wire from the board. Remove seven 10–32 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. To replace the System Keypad Board. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. 9. Set the bottom pan on the floor. 8. 7. If not. 12–38 . 6. 6 Watt Speaker. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Removing the latch requires removing the 10–32 screw that holds it in place. Locate the speaker which is behind the swing–out panel. OC HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. From underneath the keyboard shelf. 4. Proceed as follows: 1. Remove 4 screws (item 05773) which secure two aluminum spacers to console chassis. 3. 4.

This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. 3. so do not try to remove it at this point. 12–39 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–47 46–282885P1 A/N Keyboard HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Remove 8 screws which secures keyboard to console chassis. 6. Remove the bezel. Removing the latch requires removing the 10–32 screw that holds it in place. Static Sensitive Devices 1. 7. CAUTION 12–48 46–264756G5 Autovoice Bd. Improper alignment may cause some keys to stick after depression. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. Refer to the picture for location of the Emergency Stop Button. This section describes the procedure for replacing the Autovoice Board located in the OC. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. Unscrew ground wire from keyboard circuit board. OC Be sure to properly align the new keyboard in the console cutout. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the console chassis before handling any circuit boards. Replace the keyboard by reversing the previous steps. 4. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. remove five 6–32 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. If not. 5. Remove defective keyboard. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Remove the Emergency Stop button to prevent damage when opening the plasma. using a 7/64 allen wrench. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. Be sure that console power is turned off. 5. If not. Remove seven 10–32 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 2. 4. 2. Set the bottom pan on the floor. 3. Remove seven 10–32 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Set the bottom pan on the floor. From underneath the keyboard shelf. 6. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom. Remove cables from the keyboard circuit board.

Also disconnect the black ribbon cable from J6 on the GCP Board. 2. J14. Remove the screw that affix the respective circuit breaker to the front panel of the power module. J5. 1. Otherwise skip to step 10. Turn twist lock at top of power module panel and swing front down (panel is hinged at the bottom). Remove the screw that affix the respective circuit breaker to the front panel of the power module. 12. 20 A. J3. Remove pedestal front door. Remove the lower housing cover by unloosening it’s (4) quick release fasteners. Replace the Autovoice Board and reassemble console. Inspect gasket material for visible tears. Remove the respective cables from the following connectors on the Autovoice Board: J8. 4. 12–50 46–271382P15 Circuit Breaker (1 Pole. 9.) CAUTION Before starting this procedure either unplug the console or shut off power from PDU to Console. Turn twist lock at top of power module panel and swing front down (panel is hinged at the bottom). Remove pedestal front door. 12–49 46–271382P6 Circuit Breaker (1 Pole. Remove wires from the circuit breaker that you want to replace. Remove the supper housing cover by unloosening it’s (4) quick release fasteners. J4. 5. Use protective cover to prevent scratching keyboard area. Swing out panel with Security Board to get access to the front panel of the Console Power Modules. Remove circuit breaker. Set cover aside. Replace Circuit Breaker. 10. 3. 12–40 . 15 A. 1. 6. 11. Leave cable interface as is and set aside. Swing out panel with Security Board to get access to the front panel of the Console Power Modules. Notice that the Autovoice Board is the small piggy back board on the GCP Board.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 Note: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 If console is Model 2118256 perform steps 8 and 9.) CAUTION Before starting this procedure either unplug the console or shut off power from PDU to Console. Remove the Autovoice Board from the GCP Board standoffs (6 screws). 5. 3. Remove wires from the circuit breaker that you want to replace. Replace Circuit Breaker. J6. Remove circuit breaker. 8. 2. 4. 6. Schedule replacement if necessary.

Remove pedestal front door. Remove pedestal front door. Remove circuit breaker. Remove 4 screws that secure power supply to swing panel. 12–41 . 5. 3. Remove wires from the circuit breaker that you want to replace. Do not remove cables from board. 1. 5. Replace Circuit Breaker. 12–53 46–301520P1 Console PS 1. Disconnect cable assembly. Remove pedestal front door. 20 A. 2. Remove the screw that affix the respective circuit breaker to the front panel of the power module. Disconnect all harnesses from top of power supply. 4. 3. 6. Replace Circuit Breaker. Turn twist lock at top of power module panel and swing front down (panel is hinged at the bottom). 12–52 46–271382P26 Circuit Breaker (4 Pole. 1. Swing out panel with Security Board to get access to the front panel of the Console Power Modules. 3. just lie it down in front of pedestal or let it hang. 6. Remove the screw that affix the respective circuit breaker to the front panel of the power module. Remove wires from the circuit breaker that you want to replace. Swing out panel with Security Board to get access to the front panel of the Console Power Modules. 30 A.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–51 46–271382P3 Circuit Breaker (2 Pole. 2. 2.) CAUTION Before starting this procedure either unplug the console or shut off power from PDU to Console. Instead. Remove Security Board (6 screws). 6. Remove circuit breaker. Turn twist lock at top of power module panel and swing front down (panel is hinged at the bottom). 4.) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CAUTION Before starting this procedure either unplug the console or shut off power from PDU to Console. 5. You have to break tie wraps. Replace power supply by reversing the above steps. 4.

Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. Reassemble the console. 5. 9. so do not try to remove it at this point. 6. 7. 12–42 . Locate the Emergency Stop button. peel off the old label from the button. 11.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–54 46–307619P1 Emergency Stop Button. 3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. 5. Remove the bezel. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. remove five 6–32 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom. Push the button back on to the switch actuator bar. Remove seven 10–32 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Locate the Emergency Stop button. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. 3. using a 7/64 allen wrench. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. remove five 6–32 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. 6. 10. 4. 7. If not. so do not try to remove it at this point. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Removing the latch requires removing the 10–32 screw that holds it in place. Remove the paper protector from the adhesive side of the new label and put the new label on the button. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. 2. Grasp the Emergency Stop button and pull it off of the switch actuator bar. 2. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. using a 7/64 allen wrench. 8. If not. 12–55 46–287759P1 Emergency Stop “Label” 1. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. OC HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. From underneath the keyboard shelf. If you are replacing the label. Removing the latch requires removing the 10–32 screw that holds it in place. Remove seven 10–32 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Remove the bezel. From underneath the keyboard shelf. 4. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom. Set the bottom pan on the floor.

Remove seven 10–32 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Console 1. Spin flywheel and verify that it spins freely. 4. 10. 12–43 . 2. If not. 3. 7. Reassemble console. To replace the encoder. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 9. 5. CAUTION This step is very important. Grab new knob and press firmly down to slide it on to the encoder shaft. hold the flywheel down against the encoder support plate with one hand while holding the new encoder in the other hand. Otherwise. Set the bottom pan on the floor. Insert the shaft of the new encoder up through the encoder support plate into the flywheel. Loosen set screw that secures encoder shaft to flywheel. You must hold down the flywheel before inserting the encoder shaft up through the support plate into the flywheel. 11. 9. Reconnect cable. 6. 8. If you are replacing the label. 11. Grab defective knob and firmly pull upward to remove. 2. 12–57 46–282986P1 Encoder Knob 1. Remove the paper protector from the adhesive side of the new label and put the new label on the button. 10. Reassemble the console. Push the button back on to the switch actuator bar. Unplug cable to circuit board. Slightly lift the flywheel up from support plate and tighten set screw. Note: Be sure that new Encoder Knob has compression spring prior to installation. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. peel off the old label from the button. Grasp the Emergency Stop button and pull it off of the switch actuator bar. 12–56 46–301046P1 Encoder Assembly. the compression spring and friction pin may pop out of the flywheel. Remove 3 nuts which secures the encoder to the encoder support plate.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8. Remove defective encoder.

12. Remove the four (4) standoffs and nuts that secure the GCP Board to the metal plate. so do not try to remove it at this point.J4. Be sure that console power is turned off. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan.J12. 6. 5. Use protective cover to prevent scratching keyboard area. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. Inspect gasket material for visible tears. Replace the GCP Board and reassemble Console. J6. Note: If console is Model 2118256 perform steps 8 and 9. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. J5.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–58 46–264380G7 Console GCP Board HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 This section describes the procedure for replacing the GCP Board located in the OC and IC. Leave cable interface as is and set aside. If not. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom.J6. remove the respective cables from the following connectors on the GCP Board: J1. J2. 1. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Otherwise skip to step 10. Remove the supper housing cover by unloosening it’s (4) quick release fasteners.J14 10. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used.J14. 9. Remove the four (4) screws that hold Autovoice to the GCP Board. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the console chassis before handling any circuit boards.J5. 4. Static Sensitive Devices 12–44 . J11. J4. Compare jumper settings and firmware rev. 2. Remove the lower housing cover by unloosening it’s (4) quick release fasteners. Removing the latch requires removing the 10–32 screw that holds it in place. J7. Next. J3. remove five 6–32 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Set cover aside. 11.J13. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. of old board to new board. 8. J9. If the Genesis console is used as an OC remove the autovoice PWA by removing J3. Schedule replacement if necessary. 14. Remove seven 10–32 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Remove the bezel. From underneath the keyboard shelf. 7.J8. Set the bottom pan on the floor. using a 7/64 allen wrench. 13. J10. 3.

Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. Press the slide rail buttons and remove monitor. grasp the monitor and pull it out of the console until the slide rails are fully extended. loosen the connector under the monitor and sliding it to the left or right while applying upward pressure to adjust the image monitors vertical display. THE MONITOR WEIGHS 70 LBS (32KG) THEREFORE. 3. The ground wire is still connected and should be long Enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. 10. Using the special pull–out tool attached on the right support leg of the console. After restoring power to the console. The bezel is still fastened to the console at bottom. REMOVE THE MONITOR USING TWO PEOPLE. Remove the bezel. Flip the latch by loosening the screw and flipping the tab horizontally. Remove seven 10–32x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 11. Locate the 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. 7. b. 8. a. WARNING 12–45 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12–59 46–282884P1 Image Monitor HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Insert a screwdriver into the slot of each clip. 4. If Image Monitor display has vertical deformations. reconnect cables and reassemble console. Replace monitor. Note: Do not try to remove the bezel at this time. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE MONITOR OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL SUBSEQUENT TO DROPPING THE MONITOR. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. Rotate the clip upward. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. If not disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 5. 6. From underneath the keyboard shelf. remove five 6–32 x 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. verify the image monitor is working properly. using a 7/64 allen wrench. 2. Disconnect the cables from the left side of the monitor chassis. 12. Set the bottom pan on the floor. 9.

7. 3. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. OC The microphone is located on the back of the bezel. Remove seven 10–32 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Install new microphone assembly. If not. therefore the bezel must be removed as follows: 1. 12–46 . From underneath the keyboard shelf. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. While holding the bezel with one hand. Remove the bezel. 3. 6. so do not try to remove it at this point. Reassemble console. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom. 5. remove five 6–32 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. Remove seven 10–32 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. 2. From underneath the keyboard shelf. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. 5. 12–61 46–320682G1 Microphone. If not. 4. Install new pot assembly. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom. While holding the bezel with one hand.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–60 46–317878G1 Intercom Pot Assembly. disconnect the harness wires to the microphone. so do not try to remove it at this point. remove five 6–32 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. using a 7/64 allen wrench. Set the bottom pan on the floor. disconnect the harness wires to the Pot Assembly. 6. Set the bottom pan on the floor. 4. Remove the bezel. using a 7/64 allen wrench. therefore the bezel must be removed as follows: 1. 7. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Reassemble console. OC HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The Intercom Pot Assembly is located on the back of the bezel. 2.

To replace the System Keypad Board. – Remove 4 screws (item 05773) which secure two aluminum spacers to console chassis.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–62 46–264508G1 IP Keypad Board HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. proceed as follows: – Remove System Keypad Board. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. Locate security board. Replace Security Board by reversing the above steps. 12–63 46–301195G2 Security Board 1. – Remove ground wire from terminal J7. 2. Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps. Remove seven 10–32 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 5. Set the bottom pan on the floor. – Remove spacers and rubber keypad. Remove seven 10–32 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 2. – Remove 4 screws (item 25849) to remove board. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. proceed as follows: – Remove cable and ground wire from the board. – Remove 6 screws (item 05773) which secure two aluminum spacers to console chassis. – Remove 6 screws (item 25849) to remove board. If not. 4. 5. 6. 12–64 46–264510G1 System Keypad Board 1. Remove pedestal front door. 3. To replace the IP Keypad. – Remove spacers and rubber keypad. proceed as follows: – Remove J1 to J6 from the board. 2. To replace the 8 Button (Scan/Image) Rubber Keypad. Reassemble Console. Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps. 5. Set the bottom pan on the floor. Remove Security Board (6 screws). proceed as follows: – Remove IP Keypad Board. If not. 4. To replace the 18 Button (IP/View) Rubber Keypad. Remove cable connectors from J20 and J21 on Security Board. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 12–47 . Reassemble Console. Remove screw that secures tie wrap to Security Board. 3. 4. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. 3.

NOTE: Do not remove circuit boards from the support plate. Be sure that console power is turned off. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. Inspect gasket material for visible tears. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Remove 2 screws that secure the circuit board support plate to the Touch Screen Assembly. Removing the latch requires removing the 10–32 screw that holds it in place. Remove the Emergency Stop button to prevent damage when opening the plasma. remove five 6–32 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. press down on the pivot shaft until the spring compresses. Schedule replacement if necessary. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the console chassis before handling any circuit boards. 8. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Note: If console is Model 2118256 perform steps 8 and 9. using a 7/64 allen wrench. 2. 9. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom. 11. Also do not remove cables from the circuit boards on the support plate. 10. Continue to press the pivot shaft downward until you can remove it. Refer to the picture for location of the Emergency Stop Button. Remove the lower housing cover by unloosening it’s (4) quick release fasteners. Otherwise skip to step 10. 6. 5. 12. 3. 13. Leave cable interface as is and set aside. so do not try to remove it at this point. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. Remove J7 from the Touch Screen Assembly. With your thumb. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. Static Sensitive Devices 12–48 . Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Remove the supper housing cover by unloosening it’s (4) quick release fasteners. Move the support plate (with circuit boards) away from the Touch Screen Assembly. Refer to the Picture. 1. 14. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. Remove the bezel.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–65 2119588 Touch Screen Assembly HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 This section describes the procedure for replacing the Touch Screen Assembly located in the OC or IC. Remove the defective Touch Screen and replace it. If not. From underneath the keyboard shelf. Remove seven 10–32 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 4. Set cover aside. Use protective cover to prevent scratching keyboard area. Remove J4 from the Touch Screen Assembly. Set the bottom pan on the floor. 7.

Remove seven 10–32 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. Be sure that console power is turned off. Install the new video relay assembly into the console panel.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–66 46–282936P1 Trackball Assembly HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Remove the video relay assembly. Unsolder the rectifier from the same two terminals of the defective relay. 2. Unsolder the yellow and orange wires from the two terminals of the defective relay. 4. 9. Remove the video relay 2–wire harness from the ty–rap which secures it to the top of the Console I/F Pane. Remove the video relay 2–wire harness from its mating connector. Remove the signal cable strain relief (4 screws). 12–49 . across the two terminals of the new video relay. Solder the rectifier. Disconnect video cables from the BNC connectors on top of the Console I/F Panel (J13. 2. removed from the old relay in step 7. 4. 7. disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. 6. Also solder the old 2–wire harness to the terminals of the new video relay. Remove 4 screws (item 18329) which secure the video relay to the top of the Console I/F Panel. 1. Reverse previous steps to install new trackball. 8. Set the bottom pan on the floor. disconnect one cable and remove 4 screws. 14 or 15). If not. 5. 3. 12–67 46–288872G1 Video Relay Circuit Board This section describes the procedure for replacing the video relay located in both the OC and IC. To remove the defective trackball. 3.

15. 10. Boards must never be placed on non–conductive surfaces such as white bench tops. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS.right side of Gantry. followed by the CTVRC. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. both DAS. 12. Remove old belt by cutting or reversing step #14. cathode tank and inverter. Open Rear and Front Covers. plastic covered books or non–conductive plastic bags. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. 11. 14. 9. 13. 6. Rotate Gantry so tube is at the 12 o’clock position. Remove scan window. 12–70 46–198495P1 Drive Belt 1. Turn off facility power to PDU– use tag and lock out procedure. To replace belt – first place the belt around the tube. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. 4. and lastly over the OBC. Use approved lifting methods. 2. Loosen Idler assembly to relieve drive belt tension by loosening three 3/8–16 bolts. Inverter Cover. 8. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag. you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–68 46–282884P3 Remote Board HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. 3. Remove and set aside Anode. Gantry (with EDAS) 12–69 Gantry Precautions GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. Please use good service practices. Replace Anode Inverter Cover. Static Sensitive Devices 12–50 . work over Anode inverter and tank. 7. Remove and set aside the Axial Brake assembly. Position Table to lowest elevation. Lock Gantry into the 12 o’clock position. 5.

2. Position table to lowest elevation. reverse steps 1–7. 2Adjust C–pulse: Refer to the C–Pulse Procedure. 17. fold belt and pull through the opening in frame where axial motor shaft protrudes. 20. 12–71 46–296058G1 Drive Belt Idler Pulley 1. Loop gear belt over brake shaft and around drive pulley. Properly position the drive belt on and around the gear ring. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Remove Stationary Pulley: 1. 21. 3. Open front cover. 9. Replace Axial Brake assembly. Remove Shoulder Belt. With the Drive Belt properly positioned on the gear ring. To finish reassembly. 2. Remove Tensioning assembly from Gantry by removing five 3/8–16 bolts. 2. 18. 3. but extraction of the broken blot may be faster than using an EZ out tool. 3. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lock–out procedures. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Make final tension adjustments on the drive belt by turning Idler Pulley Adjustment screw until spring has a compressed length of 0. 7.90 inches. Rotate Gantry by hand through 3 complete revolutions. 4. Remove scan window. 5. (0. Access is still restricted. Apply Loctite 242 to bolt threads and torque to 25 ft–lbs. 22. 8. Reattach Tensioning assembly to Gantry. Relieve tension on drive belt by loosening three 3/8 –16 bolts. 12–51 . Replace pulley and shoulder belt. 6. Identify which Idler Pulley needs replacement – Stationary or Tensioning. 23. Remove Pulley from Tensioning assembly by removing internal hex screw from back side of Tensioning assembly.024 m–kg) Note: On later model gantries (G3 or later) an access hole has been incorporated which may be used to turn out the set screw holding the pulley mounting bolt in the event the set screw breaks. Remove Tensioning Pulley: 1. Unlock Gantry.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 16. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. the idler pulleys. Perform preliminary idler assembly adjustment so belt is snug. Install new Pulley to Tensioning assembly. and the drive pulley. 24. 19. 4.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. 9. Use tag and lockout procedures.O. Adjust C–pulse: Refer to the C–Pulse Procedure. 10. 11.the idler pulleys. Perform preliminary idler assembly adjustment so belt is snug. Install and adjust new limit switch such that push roller is 0. 8. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Open Front Cover. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 12–73 46–220234P3 Fan. 5. 10. To reassemble. Turn off facility power to PDU. reverse steps 1–6. Turn off facility power to PDU.and the drive pulley on the axial drive motor. Remove scan window. 2. 12–52 . 5. Remove gantry side covers. 9. Position table to lowest elevation. 12–72 46–136334P23 F/C interlock switch 1. 8. 11. 3. Reconnect two (2) electrical connections. reverse steps. Red wire to Comm. 4. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 7.94 inches from metal support bracket. Disconnect Power Cord from Fan. Black wire to N. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 7. Open front cover. OBC 1. 2. 6. Remove scan window. Replace Fan. To reassemble. Use tag and lockout procedures. Lift top cover and engage prop rod.285 inches. 6. 8. 12. Loosen nut and remove limit switch. Make final tension adjustments on the drive belt by turning Idler Pulley Adjustment screw until spring has a compressed length of 0. Properly position the Drive Belt on and around the Gear ring. To reassemble. 4. Move table to lowest elevation. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. Rotate Gantry by hand through 3 complete revolutions. reverse steps 1–7. 7. 6. 12. 3. Remove and keep 4 screws holding Fan and Grill in place. Disconnect the two electrical connections at the front cover interlock limit switch. 9.

STC 1. Remove PWB using extractors. 7. Move table to lowest elevation.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–74 46–321246G1 RPSCOM Board HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Turn facility circuit breaker OFF. 8. Install new SCOM board assembly by reversing the above steps. Loosen 2 wing nuts holding card cage in place. Remove fan and grill from card cage. 8. 3. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. 2. Swing card cage 90 degrees to fully open position. Remove left Side Cover. 12–53 . Loosen two (2) wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. WARNING GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. 4. 9. Note: 12–76 46–183027P120 Filter Bd. Remove and set aside Left Side Cover. Remove 4 screws attaching fan to card cage. Loosen two (2) screws retaining front cover of STC and remove cover. Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into position. Note: 12–75 46–220234P3 Fan. 4. 5. 5. Install new fan and same grill by reversing above steps. 6. 3. Use approved lifting methods. 2. Remove gantry side covers. EDAS Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into place. Unplug power cable from fan. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on the right side of the gantry. 6. 7. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. tag and lock.

12–54 . you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. plastic covered books or non–conductive plastic bags. Use approved lifting methods. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: WARNING ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag. you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. Reduced Gain EDAS WARNING GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Boards must never be placed on non–conductive surfaces such as white bench tops. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. 12–77 46–183027P128 Filter Bd. Boards must never be placed on non–conductive surfaces such as white bench tops.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: WARNING Static Sensitive Devices ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. plastic covered books or non–conductive plastic bags.

3. Turn facility circuit breaker OFF. Remove left Side Cover. Lift Top Cover and engage prop rod. 4. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Remove and set aside scan window. 12. 5. Locate Line Filter mounted to OBC assembly. Replace Line Filter. Verify there is no voltage on the wires attached to the line filter. Remove scan window. 7. 4. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. Note wire location on Line Filter. Disconnect 4 leads from Line Filter. 6. 1. reverse steps. Note: 12–80 46–241601G2 Flex Circuit Assm 1. 8. 13. Pwr L. 10. CAUTION 12–79 46–297335P2 Filter. Remove two(2) 8–32 screws attaching line filter to STC Chassis and remove filter. tag and lock. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box on right side of Gantry. between X– Ray Tube and OBC Assemblies. Remove gantry side covers. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. Note the location of the leads going to the line filter on the right side of the STC Chassis. To reassemble. 3. 7. Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into position 12–55 . 2. 8. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. OBC HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–78 46–297335P2 Filter. 5. STC Do not connect any leads to Ground Terminal on Line Filter. 11. 3. 6. Turn off Axial Drive Switch. 2. 2. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3:00 position. Position table to lowest elevation. Pwr L. 4. Remove leads from line filter. 5. Remove Front Cover. 6. 9. Remove and keep 2 screws mounting Line Filter to OBC assembly. Install new filter by reversing the above steps.

12–82 46–327207G1 Front Cover Assm (G3 Gantry) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. Replace defective flex circuit. 14. Rotate Gantry until tube is at 9:00 position. 13. 2. 12–83 46–296870G1 Top Lens Assembly No specific procedure at this time. Locate Front microphone interface PWB on the inside of the front cover just below the laser window and remove the red and black leads from the terminal block by loosening retaining screws. Turn off facility power to PDU. 11. 6. To reassemble. Please use good service practices. Remove scan window. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Carefully remove the flex circuit from the detector by pulling the flex circuit connector from the pin header on back of the detector. HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8. reverse steps. 3. 8.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 7. Remove gantry side covers. 7. 9. and slide out of flex guide. 12–86 46–297488P1 Front Cover Microphone 1. and lock into position. Note connector locations for each flex circuit. Please use good service practices. Please use good service practices. 4. Remove other end of flex circuit connector from DAS circuit card. Open front cover. 12–84 46–296869G1 Side Lens Assembly 46–288938G1 Front Cover Mic Bd No specific procedure at this time. Note: Operator must be wearing a grounded wrist strap before performing the following procedure. 12. 5. Use tag and lockout procedures. 10. 12–81 46–296868G1 G1 Front Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. 12–85 12–56 . Open Front Cover. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Locate the flex circuits to be replaced. Remove DAS and detector covers from Gantry (4 pcs). Move table to lowest elevation.

10. Remove scan window. reverse steps. 12. Turn off facility power to PDU. (Be sure the red and black leads are in the slotted cutout which is a part of the bottom mounting hole. 4. Collimator 46–170021P52 Fuse (DAS) 3A. 3. Move table to lowest elevation. 9. 10.) 11. Next insert the two studs on the microphone into the two mounting holes in the front cover. Use tag and lockout procedures. 12–88 12–89 12–90 12–91 46–170021P30 Fuse (DAS) 2A. Remove gantry side covers. 12–87 46–170021P79 Fuse (30A. 12–57 . Note: Red lead to position 1 and black lead to position 2. 2. 8. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 4:00 position. Replace Fuse. Thread red and black leads through center hole on microphone interface PWB and place PWB over the two mounting studs on inside of cover and install the two mounting nuts. Move table to lowest elevation. Connect the red and black leads to the terminal block and reverse steps 1–7 to complete the installation. Turn off facility power to PDU.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 9. Open front cover. 700V) 45435967 Gate Driver/Filter Board 46–170021P52 Fuse. 11. 5. Remove scan window. Use tag and lockout procedures. 7. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Remove two (2) nuts from studs and remove microphone by pulling the device straight out from the front side of the front cover. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 6. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 5. 6. Remove gantry side covers. Install new microphone by threading the red and black leads through the bottom mounting hole in the front cover. 250V 1. Locate Fuse and remove cap from fuseholder. To reassemble. 2. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 350V 1. 4.

Remove scan window. Use tag and lockout procedures. 10. 8. Use tag and lockout procedures. 6. 12–93 46–170021P52 Fuse (3A 120V) 1. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power Assembly cover and remove cover. reverse the above steps.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 7. Open front cover. Remove scan window. 8. 10. 5.. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power Assembly is at the 3 o’clock position. To replace fuse. Locate fuses on inside surface of filament power assembly. Open Front Cover. 13. 11. Engage gantry rotational lock. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Turn off facility power to PDU. 6. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Remove gantry side covers. 13. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power Assembly cover and remove cover. Move table to lowest elevation. 12–58 . Turn off facility power to PDU. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 4:00 position. To reassemble. 3. Remove cap from fuse holder and remove fuse. 2. 12. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power Assembly is at the 3 o’clock position. 7. Engage gantry rotational lock. 9. 12–92 46–170021P15 Fuse. Filament Power Supply 1. reverse the above steps. 9. Locate fuses on inside surface of filament power assembly. 4. To replace fuse. Open Front Cover. Move table to lowest elevation. reverse steps. 10. HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8. Remove gantry side covers. 3. 11. Lift top cover and engage prop rod.. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 4. Remove cap from fuse holder and remove fuse. 5. Replace Fuse. 2. 11. 7. Locate Fuse and remove cap from fuseholder. 12. 9.

5. 3. Move table to lowest elevation. 4. Locate fuses on inside surface of filament power assembly. To reassemble. 12–95 46–170021P30 (2A 350V) & 46–170021P52 (3A. 46–170021P52 Filament Power Assembly Fuse 1. Use tag and lockout procedures. Remove gantry side covers. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 12–59 . Locate Fuse and remove cap from fuseholder. Turn off facility power to PDU. 4. Remove scan window. 12–96 46–170021P15. 5. 7. Remove gantry side covers. Engage gantry rotational lock. Replace Fuse. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 2. Open Front Cover. Turn off facility power to PDU. (DAS) 1. Use tag and lockout procedures. reverse the above steps. 13. 10. Move table to lowest elevation. 10. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 7. 6. 8. Remove gantry side covers. Use tag and lockout procedures. Remove scan window. Remove scan window. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power assembly cover and remove cover. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power Assembly is at the 3 o’clock position. Open front cover. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 2.. 5. reverse steps. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 9. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 8. 3. Turn off facility power to PDU. Remove cap from fuse holder and remove fuse. 9. 11. To replace fuse. 250V) Fuse. 3. 6. 11. Detector Heater HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 4:00 position. 12. 4. Move table to lowest elevation. 6. 2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–94 46–170021P52 & 46– 170021P74 Fuse.

5. Engage gantry rotational lock. Open front cover. 10. 8. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 12. 5.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 7. Open top cover and engage prop rod. The front cover assembly weighs less than 200 lbs. the Front cover may need to be removed to allow replacement of a Gantry Gas Spring. Turn off three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of gantry. Locate fuses on inside surface of filament power assembly. 10. 4. 9. Tube Cooling 1. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power assembly is at the 3 o’clock position. Open Front Cover. Remove scan window. 13. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power assembly cover and remove cover. reverse the above steps. HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8. 11. 9. 12–60 . Leave the spacer sitting in position for the time being. Position table to lowest elevation. 3. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 1. 12–98 46–296209P1 Counterbalancing Gas Spring Note: Due to alignment and dimensional variation of the Gantry Front cover. Position table to lowest elevation. the task of removing the Front Cover will require three people for a short period of time. 7. Tilt the gantry until the front stop on the pivot sector touches the loose spacer block left in position on the Base as described in step 6. 6. Rotate Gantry so that OBC is at the 3 o’clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 12–97 46–170021P74 Fuse. If necessary.. On right side of gantry. 2. Remove cap from fuse holder and remove fuse. remove the two (2) flat head screws holding the spacer block on the Base’s hard stop. 7. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. Stop tilting and remove the spacer block. 8. Remove fuse from fuse holder located at the top of the control assembly. Engage Indexer Pin and lock gantry 6. To replace fuse. 2. Replace fuse by reversing the above steps. 4.

Repeat steps 6. while a third person removes the two hinge pins on the left side of the gantry. 11. HOWEVER. continue pulling until the bottom end fitting is also freed. c. When the spacer block is removed. Monitor the relationship between the front fiberglass covers and the Gantry Base (on both sides of the Gantry) during tilting operations. STOP TILTING. such as on a blanket on the floor. e. CAUTION –– The gantry must be able to tilt +/– 30. Return gantry to zero degrees of tilt. Proceed to tilt with caution bearing in mind two issues: A) Gas Spring Length – Wiggle both gas springs as the two hard stops approach each other. f. With the spacer block in position the gantry will be able to meet this requirement. If interference occurs. IMPORTANT –– both gas springs will have to be monitored to ensure that they are not being extended past their fully extended length. If the top cover is left in the propped position. If it is necessary to remove the second gas spring. with the spacer block removed the gas springs will most likely prevent the gantry hardstops from coming all the way together. If interference is not an issue – proceed to tilt. stopping when one of the gas springs feels unloaded (reaches full extension). g. 12–61 . 7. Place the front cover horizontally on a clean protected surface. Remove the two (2) retaining clips from the ends of the gas spring that has reached full extension – even if it is not the gas spring that needs to be replaced. 12. Remove Front Cover by having two people lift the front cover. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Remove Front Cover a. DO NOT ROTATE THE GANTRY IN THIS STATE. 8 and 9 10.25 degrees and prevent enough tilt to exchange a gas spring. b. Note: The retaining clips must be removed prior to gas spring removal. Once the top end fitting is free. d. DO NOT force the gantry hard stops together – the gas springs may become damaged and rupture. the gantry is capable of tilting forward further than 30. Open front cover. Disengage the top cover prop rod and gently lower the top cover down onto the gantry. Remove the gas spring as detailed in steps 10 and 11. Return gantry to an upright position (zero degrees of tilt) and remove the front cover per the following steps. B) Front Cover interference – Due to dimensional variation in the Front Cover. h. it may fall rearward during tilting operations. Grasp the gas spring near the top end fitting and firmly pull away from the gantry. Disconnect electrical connection near the top hinge on left side of gantry. the Front Cover and/or Front Cover hinge doors may contact the Gantry Base during tilting operations greater than 30.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 9.25 degrees at a very minimum to meet system requirements.25 degrees. continue tilting the gantry until the second gas spring has reached full extension. Special handling will be necessary to protect the cover’s surface from becoming scratched. monitoring the gas spring length and go on to step 10.

Clean and inspect the ball studs. then the gas spring installation length is ACCEPTABLE. Note: THE TOP COVER MUST BE IN THE DOWN POSITION BEFORE TILTING OCCURS. Again.25 degrees. P/N 1000904P489 – 0. To verify that the new gas spring(s) will allow the system to meet the tilt requirement of +/–30. Then proceed to tilt toward zero degrees until the second gas spring fits on to the other two ball studs. place the first gas spring on the longest side first (longest meaning the side that has the greatest distance between ball studs). Remove one end fitting and install one flat washer. If the ball studs are worn or damaged. then: a. return the gantry to the zero degree tilted position as indicated by the tilt indicator bracket on the right side of the Gantry. then the gas spring length must be increased by utilizing a flat washer (ie.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 13. Replace Front Cover and reconnect the electrical connection c. Adjust/align Front Cover d. Firmly push the end fitting around the ball stud on both the top and bottom.062 Thk) as a spacer between the end fitting and gas spring. Install the gas spring in the rod down/tube up position.328 ID/ 0. IMPORTANT –– to effectively retain the gas spring in position around the ball stud. Replace the retaining clip on each end fitting. 18. If the spacer block CAN NOT be inserted due to lack of space between the two hardstops. If both gas springs have been removed. Torque to 40 ft–lbs. tilt the gantry to +30 degrees and –30 degrees as indicated by the display monitor located on top of the Front Cover. 12–62 . To ensure a successful gas spring replacement. Once the new gas spring is installed. Reinstall the spacer block to the Base hard stop using the two (2) flat head screws. use the spacer block as a test to ensure that the system has proper tilt capability. Adjust the tilt and install the gas spring. remove and replace using Loctite 242. Take the new gas spring(s) and ensure the end fittings are tightened down. 20.0384 m–kg) 14. Lower Top Cover 19. Please use good service practices. simply attempt to insert the spacer block between the base and pivot sector hardstops at the the time of gas spring installation. the retaining clip must be properly positioned through both openings in the end fitting. Tilt the gantry until the gas spring will fit on to the two (2) ball studs. Lift the Top Cover and engage the prop rod b. If the spacer block CAN be inserted. Apply Loctite 242 and tighten end fitting. 16. If the Front Cover was removed.500 OD/ 0. To complete reassembly. reverse steps 1–6 12–99 46–264958G1 Gantry Display Daughterboard No specific procedure at this time. 15. ( 0. 17.

9. 8. Refer to drawing. and tighten to a chain tension of 5 ±1 lbf. Open front cover. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 12. Install shipping brackets to secure gantry from tilting. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 11. 12–63 . Torque set screw. which holds potentiometer. Torque and use 242 Loctite on two (2) set screws. 12–101 46–278120P1 Gear Reducer 1. Remove set screw on output end of gear box. 14. Gantry must be at 0 degrees tilt to install brackets. Remove two (2) tilt chain locking bolts from adjusting block. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Install drive pulley to output shaft of new Gear Reducer. 6. 21.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–100 46–264896G1 Gantry Display Motherboard HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. 24. place the chain around the drive pulley and the two (2) idler pulleys. While repositioning the new gear reducer on the gantry base. Remove one (1) tilt chain adjusting bolt and washer. a. 18. 4. with Loctite 242 applied. with 242–Loctite applied. Tighten tilt chain locking bolts to 25 ft–lbs. 17. 7. Loosely attach the tilt chain adjustment block to the pivot sector with two (2) bolts. a. 10. Place chain on the ground and remove chain from drive pulley. Slide Pot assembly off output shaft of Gear Reducer Box. Slide Pot Assembly on output shaft of Gear box. Install three (3) bolts for each bracket. Adjust pot shaft into end of output shaft of gear reducer. Remove and set aside tilt motor. Replace the tilt chain adjusting bolt and washer. 25. 19. Turn off all three switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 3. Replace Tilt Motor. b. Loosely install set screw on output end of new gear reducer. Remove and set aside the drive pulley from the output shaft of gear reducer by removing two (2) set screws. 2. Please use good service practices. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. b. 20. 15. 26. 23. Remove Gearbox from Gantry. 5. Position with gears toward pulley. Position table to lowest elevation. Remove and keep four (4) bolts that secure gear reducer to the gantry base. 16. 22. 13.

Base Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. To reassemble. 5. 4. 9. Loosen 2 screws retaining front cover of STC and remove cover. 6. 2. Position Gantry at 0 degrees by aligning Gantry with tilt indicator on the right side of Gantry Base. Remove gantry side covers. 12–103 46–296377P1 Heurikon Bd. Move table to lowest elevation. 9. 7. 8. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. 6. OBC 1. 12–104 46–296377P1 Heurikon Bd. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. 30. To adjust potentiometer. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on the right side of the gantry. 2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 27. To reassemble. reverse steps. 7. Open only Left Side Cover. 29. Use good ESD procedures. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Put on grounding wrist strap. reverse steps. STC 1. 10. 4. Remove board from slot A7 by loosening 2 retaining screws and rotating ejectors. Note: Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into position. Install new board by reversing the above steps. 3. 3. 3. 8. 4. Remove and set aside Scom Circuit Board. Remove and set aside shipping brackets. 5. Unscrew top and bottom fasteners then remove board. Remove ribbon cable from serial port on front panel. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. 12–64 . Turn OFF power to the connected units. 28. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 2. Use good service practices. 12–102 46–297428P1 Grounding Strap. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. Place Board in Static Bag.

13. Rotate the Gantry so tube is at the 3 o’clock position. 22. Unlock and rotate Gantry so tube is at the 12 o’clock position. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 5.7 oz. Place rag around transformer tank connector well to absorb excess oil during Anode cable insertion. Rotate Card Cage 90 degrees and lock in place to gain access to Anode HV Transformer Tank. 20. Insert the Anode HV cable connector into Anode HV transformer well. 12–65 .) of dielectric oil to the anode HV connector well of the X–Ray Tube. 11. Repeat steps 11–13 to remove Anode HV Cable connector from X–Ray tube HV connector well. 3. Wipe excess oil from tube. 24. Position table to lowest elevation. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. 12. 15. 29. Ground the end of the cable to the Gantry Frame to verify no voltage. Unscrew two cable clamps to remove Anode HV Cable from rotating base. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Tighten nut with spanner wrench. 25. 2. 2Wipe excess oil from tube. 7. 21. 6. 28. 23. 19. Reattach Anode cable to rotating base using existing screws and cable clamps. Lock Gantry in place. Place rag around Anode HV Cable connecter opening on transformer tank. 8. Open front cover. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. Wipe excess oil from HV cable connector and HV transformer tank connector well. 9. 4. On left side of Gantry unscrew two wing nuts holding STC card cage in place. Place rag around tube connector well to absorb excess oil during Anode cable insertion. Add 20 ml (0.7 oz) of dielectric oil to the well of the HV Anode transformer tank. add 20 ml (0. Insert the Anode HV Cable connector into Anode HV well of X–Ray tube. With the tube at the 3 o’clock position and the Gantry rotational lock engaged. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. (Wipe well clean prior to rotating Gantry) 14. Lock Gantry into the 12 o’clock position. 16. Use spanner wrench to loosen nut retaining Anode HV cable connector to HV transformer tank and remove cable. 27. 10. Tighten nut with spanner wrench. 17. 26. Cut all remaining ty–raps and remove cable from Gantry. 18. Rotate Gantry until tube is at the 12 o’clock position.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–105 46–195120G16 HV Anode Cable HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1.

Restore power to the Gantry. Use tape to hold rags in place. 2. Tighten ty–raps on rotating base (Qty2). 12. Wrap rag or paper towel around both ends of the Anode HV cable. Use ty–raps as required to dress cables so minimum loop exists on each end. remove rags and wipe up excess dielectric oil found near the HV Anode Cable ends. Rotate the Gantry at a speed of 1 Revolution per second. Ground the end of the cable to the Gantry Frame to verify no voltage. 33. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Lock Gantry into the 12 o’clock position. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. Place rag around Cathode HV Cable connecter opening on transformer tank. After completing hand rotation. Unscrew two ty–raps to remove Cathode HV Cable from rotating base. Tighten down two wing nuts to secure STC in place. 35. Rotate Gantry until tube is at the 12 o’clock position. 8. checking to make sure the Anode cable does not catch on any stationary components. for several revolutions. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedures. 4. 16. 12–66 . Position table to lowest elevation. 10. 13. 31. 41. (Wipe well clean prior to rotating Gantry). Use spanner wrench to loosen nut retaining Cathode HV cable connector to HV transformer tank and remove cable. To reassemble. Repeat steps 10–12 to remove Cathode HV Cable connector from X–Ray tube HV connector well. 6. 39. Return STC to its original position. 9.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 30. 11. 38. Rotate the Gantry so that the tube is at the 3:00 position. Stop gantry and shut down power. 36. Cut all remaining ty–raps and remove cable from Gantry. Wipe excess oil from HV cable connector and HV transformer tank connector well. 34. 12–106 46–195120G16 HV Cathode Cable 1. 14. Check to ensure that no dielectric oil is leaking from the tube or transformer tank wells. 5. Rotate Gantry by hand through two complete revolutions. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. (Reverse steps 4 and 2) 37. 40. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 7. 15. 3. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 32. reverse steps. Open front cover. Unlock Gantry. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window.

Note Leave ty–raps loose around cable until final adjustment. 26. 12–107 46–288512G1 I/O Board 1.7 oz) of dielectric oil to the well of the HV cathode transformer tank. 38. 25. 23. 29. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. Restore power to the Gantry. Tighten ty–raps on rotating base (Qty 2). (Reverse steps 4 and 2) 35. 32. 2. add 20 ml (0. 21. 20. Add 20 ml (0. Install new ty–raps (Qty 2) using existing screws. 4. 30. 27. reverse steps. for several revolutions. 31. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedures. Lock Gantry in place. 19. remove rags and wipe up excess dielectric oil found near the HV Cathode Cable ends.) of dielectric oil to the cathode HV connector well of the X–Ray Tube. 3. Check to ensure that no dielectric oil is leaking from the tube or transformer tank wells. Rotate Gantry by hand through two complete revolutions. checking to make sure the cathode cable does not catch on any stationary components. Unlock and rotate Gantry so tube is at the 12 o’clock position. Use tape to hold rags in place. Insert the cathode HV cable connector into cathode HV transformer well. 33. 28. 24. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 36. 37. 5. Place rag around transformer tank connector well to absorb excess oil during cathode cable insertion. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 12–67 . Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 34. Stop Gantry and shut down power. To reassemble.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 17. Wipe excess oil from tube. 18. Put on grounding wrist strap.7 oz. With the tube at the 3 o’clock position and the Gantry rotational lock engaged. 22. Use ty–raps as required to dress cables so minimum loop exists on each end. Wipe excess oil from tube. Insert the Cathode HV Cable connector into Cathode HV well of X–Ray tube. Rotate the Gantry at a speed of 1 Revolution per second. 39. After completing hand rotation. Place rag around tube connector well to absorb excess oil during cathode cable insertion. Wrap rag or paper towel around both ends of the cathode HV cable. Tighten nut with spanner wrench. Tighten nut with spanner wrench. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock.

6. Remove four (4) nuts mounting Intercom PWB cover to bracket and remove cover with PWB from assembly. Turn off facility power to PDU. Replace Fuse and fuseholder cover. Replace Fuse and fuseholder cover. Remove four (4) screws mounting PWB to cover and remove PWB. lock and tag. 3. Open Gantry 2. 12. 11. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap before starting the following procedures. Remove gantry side covers. Install new board by reversing the above steps. 12–109 46–288766G1 Intercom Circuit Bd 1. 4. Note location of each lead. Remove two AC leads from line filter. Remove four (4) screws mounting assembly to gantry and remove assembly from gantry. Unscrew fuseholder cover. Move table to lowest elevation. Use tag and lockout procedures. lock and tag. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. Remove scan window. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6. Anode 1. Unscrew fuseholder cover. 12–108 46–296516G1 Indexer Assm No specific procedure at this time. 7. Open Gantry 2. Remove 25 pin sub D connector from Intercom PWB. 9. 10. 3. 14. Cathode 1. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Remove DC connector (J3) from Assembly. 7. Open rear gantry cover. 4. 5. Install new Intercom PWB by reversing the above steps. Place board in Static Bag. 2. 12–110 54358P25 Inverter Fuse (120 VAC). Please use good service practices. 13. Turn facility power OFF. Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3:00 position. 12–68 . Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3:00 position. Turn facility power OFF. 3. 8. 12–111 54358P25 Inverter Fuse (120 VAC). 4. 8.

Open Gantry 2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 12–115 54358P18 Inverter Fuse (600V). Remove 2 screws. Replace Fuse and fuseholder cover. 2. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. Unscrew fuseholder cover. Remove 4 Screws and Inverter Cover. Anode 1. Cathode 1. 7.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12–112 54367P50 Inverter Fuse (550VDC). Verify Capacitor Voltage on C5 and C6 is 0 VDC. 3. Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3 o’clock position. Turn facility power OFF. Open Gantry 2. Remove 4 Screws and Inverter Cover. Turn facility power OFF. 6. 4. 5. 6. Remove 2 screws. 12–69 . 12–114 54358P18 Inverter Fuse (600V). Cathode 1. 5. Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3 o’clock position. 4. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap. lock and tag. Replace Fuse. 4. 12–113 54367P50 Inverter Fuse (550VDC). Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3:00 position. Replace Fuse. Open Gantry HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 2. 2 lockwashers and 2 flat washers that mount fuse to brass standoffs. 2 lockwashers and 2 flat washers that mount fuse to brass standoffs. Turn facility power OFF. Verify Capacitor Voltage on C5 and C6 is 0 VDC. lock and tag. 4. lock and tag. Replace Fuse and fuseholder cover. 3. Turn facility power OFF. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. 12–116 46–321064G1 kV Circuit Bd 1. lock and tag. Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3 o’clock position. 3. Unscrew fuseholder cover. Anode 1. 3. 7. Open Gantry 2. 3.

Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 6. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. Place board in Static Bag. 12–70 . Install new board by reversing the above steps. Place board in Static Bag. 3. 8. 4. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 3. Place board in Static Bag. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 12–117 46–321198G1 KV Circuit Bd 1. Install new board by reversing the above steps. Install new board by reversing the above steps. 2. Please use good service practices.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. Put on grounding wrist strap. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. Please use good service practices. 2. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 6. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 8. 12–119 46–296938G1 G1 Left Side Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. 7. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. 5. 12–118 46–196464P1 Lead Weight Use the Gantry Static Balance Procedure when adding or replacing lead weights. 7. 12–121 46–288886G1 mA Circuit Bd 1. 8. 7. 4. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 5. 12–120 46–327202G1 Left Side Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. Put on grounding wrist strap. 6.

5. 3. 12. 5. 12. 4. 3. Remove two 8 pin electrical connectors. 2. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. Place Boards in Static Bag. To remove connectors pull firmly in the Z–direction. To complete reassembly. Open front cover. by removing four 6–32 hex nuts. Remove and keep CPU Board from slot A8 by loosening 2 screws on front plate of Board assembly Place in a static bag. 2. 7. reverse steps.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–122 46–296263P1 Micro Stepper Drive (Aperture) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 9. 10. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Remove and keep ribbon cable from front of CPU Board. 4. 14. Remove Circuit Boards from slots A1 through A6 by rotating ejectors and removing Boards from Card Cage. Remove gantry side covers. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. 8. Open front cover. Turn off all three switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. one from the top and one from the bottom (when collimator is in the 3 o’clock position) of the Aperture Micro Stepper drive. 7. Position table to lowest elevation. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 13. 12–71 . 12–123 46–296080G1 OBC Assembly No specific procedure at this time. 11. 11. Remove Micro Stepper Drive. 12–124 46–264660G1 OBC Backplane 1. Please use good service practices. 9.. Replace Micro Stepper Drive. Use tag and lockout procedures. Lock Gantry into position by engaging indexer pin lock. Turn off facility power to PDU. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Move table to lowest elevation. 13. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3:00 position. 10. 8. 6. Rotate Gantry until Collimator is at the 3 o’clock position. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Put on grounding wrist strap. Remove scan window.

Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 6 o’clock position.from OBC Backplane. Remove Filament Power Connector J17 from OBC Backplane. 20. Remove Ground Strap connecting OBC Backplane to Chassis. 30. To reassemble. 26. Remove 2 coaxial cables. Remove and keep 2 screws assembling Collimator Connector Bulk Head to OBC assembly. 27. 32. 24. J4 and J5 from OBC Backplane. 23. 18. 28. 17. 19.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 15. 8. 12–72 . Use tag and lockout procedures. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Remove J9 connector which leads AC Power to OBC. Remove scan window. Disconnect 5 connectors J1 through J5 attached to Control assembly. Install Circuit Boards in A1 and A6 to align Backplane to Card Cage then securely tighten 8 mounting screws. Replace Backplane. 22. 3. from OBC backplane inside of Card Cage. 16. Remove gantry side covers. Disconnect DAS DC Power Connector J 29. 31. 7. Rotate Gantry OBC to the 3 o’clock position. 5. Move table to lowest elevation. Turn off facility power to PDU. Remove DC Power Connector. J6. Remove and keep 2 screws holding Harness Ground Bracket to OBC Chassis. 2. Using a short screw driver remove 8 screws mounting OBC Backplane to Card Cage. Remove Backplane. CAUTION Note: Carefully check locations before installing connectors. Open front cover. 12–125 46–297603G1 OBC Thermistor 1. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Remove ty–raps mounting cables to control assembly brackets. 21. 33. reverse steps. Remove control assembly and bracket from Gantry. Remove 4 screws retaining control assembly bracket to OBC and Casting. 25. J9. Install Backplane and replace all 8 screws but do not tighten. 4. Remove 6 (six) 96 Position Connectors from J3 on slots A1 through A6 on OBC Backplane. Remove ribbon cable. 6. Remove 8 Fiber Optic Link Connectors from OBC Backplane.

16. Use tag and lockout procedures. 9. 2. Use tag and lockout procedures. 8. 4. 6. Remove gantry side covers. Make sure voltage selection jumper located near AC input terminals is in the 115 VAC Position.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 9. 14. Remove two (2) screws mounting power supply to OBC and remove supply. The remaining 3 screws are located on the opposite side of the Card Cage. 10. 5. 12. 11. Loosen 4 captive screws on DAS PS Assembly and remove cover. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Install new power supply by reversing the above steps. reverse steps. CAUTION 12–126 46–296317P1 OBC–STC PS. 11. Turn off facility power to PDU. Replace Thermistor. Turn off facility power to PDU. 10. 7. Unscrew Thermistor from OBC Chassis. Remove and set aside Power Cord from Fan. Rotate gantry OBC to the 2 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. 12. a. Verify there is no voltage on the leads connected to power supplies. Remove two (2) nuts mounting Z Bracket near the center of the power supply and remove bracket. STC 1. Move table to lowest elevation. Remove left Side Cover. 13. When reconnecting leads to power supply be sure to observe marking on leads for correct location. Three Screws are located in the base of the DAS PS Assembly. Remove and keep 6 screws mounting fan housing to OBC Chassis. Detach J8 Connector from OBC Chassis. 12–73 . Remove scan window. To reassemble. OBC Use care to route through thermistor leads so that fan housing will not pinch leads. 3. 1. b. Remove and set aside Fan Housing. Remove and keep 2 screws mounting cables to fan housing. Remove all leads from each end of power supply. 2. 13. Open front cover. 17. 12–127 46–296317P1 OBC–STC PS. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 15.

2. two (2) signal and one (1) power. 7. 8. Remove seven leads from DC output (bottom) of Power Supply. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. 5. Remove two (2) nuts retaining power supply Z bracket and remove bracket. 4. 3. a stationary board (buffer) must be removed–refer to their procedures for a detailed explanation. 10. c. Please use good service practices. 10. 12–74 . Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Replace Power Supply by reversing the above steps. Remove two (2) of the four (4) bolts. CAUTION See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 3. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. 4. 8. Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into position. To remove either of the signal brush blocks. b. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Note: Use care to ensure power supply lead connections are correct. Remove brush block from the brackets. Open rear cover. 9. There are three (3) brush blocks. Remove small connector with single black lead (J1) from DC output area of Power Supply (bottom). 9. 5. 12–128 46–264832P1 SCA–LAN Board. Remove Brush Block: a. the grounding strap must be removed from the power brush block. Remove two(2) AC input leads from Power Supply. 6. 6. 7. To remove the power brush block the grounding strap must be removed from at least the power brush block bracket. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. hold the brush block against the brackets and remove the remaining screws with the other hand. If the power brush block is being replaced. Remove the slip ring covers. With one hand. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. STC No specific procedure at this time. one on the top of the block and one on the bottom. as well. Position table to lowest elevation. Remove two (2) screws fastening Power Supply to front flange on card cage and remove Power Supply. 12–129 46–297837G1 Power Brush Block Assm ETC 1.

Rotate Gantry manually and check that the brush tips are centered between the track barriers. There are five high power modules and three low power modules. Remove. 7. 8.035 m–kg) 12. pull the module up. (Skip step 12 if replacing entire assembly) 12. Open rear cover. Compress brush tip springs against the slip ring tracks and hold brush block against the brackets. Low 2257529 Replacement 1. Remove the grounding strap at the power brush block bracket before you remove the power brush block. Repeat this procedure on the other side of the module. With one hand. Read The Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris before you start this procedure. Hold Brush Block in the correct position and align brush tips with slip ring tracks. Refer to the corresponding procedures for a detailed explanation. 13.254 +/– . Place brush block on a hard surface with the tips in the up position. The Gantry contains three (3) brush blocks: two for signal and one for power. and engage prop rod. 4. b. 12–129A S/A Pwr Brush Asm 2238140-2. CAUTION Avoid inhalation USE AND FOLLOW TAG AND LOCK OUT PROCEDURES. Remove the slip ring covers. Turn off facility power to PDU. a. Remove Brush Block: a. Tighten all four (4) screws to 22+/– 3in–lbs. one on the top of the block and one on the bottom. Remove and install replacement modules: a. 12–75 . 11. Remove brush block from the brackets. or just enough to keep the tab from snapping back into the slot. Remove. High 2257517. b. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box. push the tab on the module out of the locking position. Open top cover. reverse steps 1–9. 2. and remove the remaining screws with the other hand. Center both top and bottom of brush tips for all brushes by adjusting brush block. While pushing the tab out of the locking slot.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 11. on right side of Gantry. and set aside. Remove two (2) of the four (4) bolts. DANGER 3. and set aside. c. b. e. Gantry scan window. Install Brush Block: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 a. Only pull the module out 2 mm. Position table to lowest elevation. Remove the stationary buffer board or stationary terminator to access and remove either of the signal brush blocks. but do not tighten. 9. 6. b. both gantry side covers. (0. To reassemble. To remove a module. 5. hold the brush block against the brackets. 10. d. Install all four (4) screws.

With the tabs on each side of the module out of the locking slot. pull the module straight out of the brush block housing.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Figure 12-1 Power Module Push Tab Figure 12-2 Power Module Tab c. 12–75A .

15. Reassamble Gantry. Hold the Brush Block in position. Align the replacement module in slots and push into brush block housing until the module tabs snap into the locking holes. Install all four (4) screws. Install Brush Block: a.035 m-kg) 14. Adjust the brush blocks up against the set screws on the bracket to center the top and bottom of the brush tips on the ring. and align the brush tips with the slip ring tracks. but do not tighten. 12–75B . d. Tighten all four (4) screws to 22 +/-3in-lbs. c. 13.254 +/-0. (0. e.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Figure 12-3 Module Removal d. Manually rotate Ganty while you check that the brush tips are centered between the track barriers. Compress the brush tip springs against the slip ring tracks. and hold the brush block against the brackets. b.

12–131 46–183027P91 Processor Bd. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. 7. Remove scan window. Turn off all three switches on status control box on right side of Gantry. you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. 2. Move table to lowest elevation. Boards must never be placed on non–conductive surfaces such as white bench tops. Open front cover. 6. EDAS WARNING GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag. 5. EDAS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. plastic covered books or non–conductive plastic bags. 12–75C . CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. Use approved lifting methods. Turn off facility power to PDU. Static Sensitive Devices 12–132 46–288308G1 Printed wire assembly. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Please use good service practices. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. Laser Control 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 12–130 46–183027P95 Power Filter Assy. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3.

Position table to lowest elevation. Remove 4 screws which mount control assembly to the back side of the OBC. Remove the J1 connector from the laser control PWB and remove board. 12–134 46–264698G1 No specific procedure at this time. CHECK THE PART NUMBERS OF THE PWBS ON YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ORDERING REPLACEMENT PARTS.) 10. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8. Check the part numbers of the PWBs on your system before ordering replacement parts. 4. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 11. 9. Attach Grounded Wrist Strap. Remove the seven (7) 4–40 screw and one (1) 1/4–20 ground screw fastening the Buffer PWB to the slip ring and remove Buffer PWB from Gantry. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. locate the laser control PWB and remove the four (4) mounting screws attaching PWB to Control assembly. 12–135 46–321054G1 or 46-264702G1 or 2238323 Rotating Terminator Board WARNING NOTE: THERE ARE THREE (3) TYPES OF BUFFER AND TERMINATOR PWBS. Install new laser control PWB by reversing the above steps. Rotate Gantry so that OBC is at the 3 o’clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. Install the new Rotating Buffer PWB by reversing the above steps. Remove connectors J1 through J5 from control assembly. 12. Open rear cover. CAUTION See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. From the bottom of the control assembly. Locate the rotating buffer PWB on the inside surface of the slip ring. 6. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 5. 12–76 . 1. 7. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. 2. 9. 12. (The Buffer PWB has two coax cables connected to it. 11. 8. Disconnect the two (2) coax cables connected to J1 and J2 on the Buffer PWB. Please use good service practices. 12–133 46–321058G1 or 46-264698G1 or 2253794 Rotating Buffer Board Note: There are three (3) types of buffer and terminator PWBs. 10. 3. 13.

Attach a Grounded Wrist Strap. 1. 9.) 10. Attach grounded wrist strap. 3. 10. 3. Remove eight (8) 4–40 screws fastening the Stationary Buffer PWB to the brush block assembly. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. Remove slip ring covers. 9. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 5. Disconnect three cables at connectors J1. Please use good service practices. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Open rear cover. (The Terminator PWB has no cables attached to it. 4. Position table to lowest elevation. Install the new rotating terminator PWB by reversing the above steps. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 5. J2 and J3. Locate the rotating terminator PWB on the inside surface of the slip ring. Open rear cover. See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 7. 4. 8. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. 1. 2. Check the part numbers of the PWBs on your system before ordering replacement parts. CAUTION 12–136 46–264702G1 No specific procedure at this time. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 11. 8. 11. 6. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. CAUTION 12–77 . 7. Position table to lowest elevation. Remove the seven (7) 4–40 screws and one (1) 1/4–20 ground screw fastening the terminator PWB to the slip ring and remove terminator PWB from Gantry. 12–137 46–321056G1 or 46-264696G1 or 2253794 Stationary Buffer Board Note: There are three (3) types of buffer and terminator PWBs.

Open top cover and engage prop rod. Remove terminator PWB from Gantry. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. 12–78 . 5. 1. Position table to lowest elevation. Attach a Grounded Wrist Strap. CAUTION 12–140 46–264700G1 RCOM Bd 1. Install new board by reversing the above steps. 12. Put on grounding wrist strap. Turn facility circuit breaker OFF. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 2. 12–139 46–321052G1 or 46–264696G1 or 2238323 Stationary Terminator Board Note: There are three (3) types of buffer and terminator PWBs. 8. 4. Remove the Stationary Buffer PWB from the Gantry. 11. 5. 7. 13. 6. 3. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 9. Replace terminator PWB by reversing the above steps. Place board in Static Bag. 2. Open rear cover. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. tag and lock. Remove seven(7) 4–40 screws fastening the terminator PWB to the brush block assembly. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Check the part numbers of the PWBs on your system before ordering replacement parts. Remove slip ring covers. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. 4. Install the new Stationary Buffer PWB by reversing the above steps. 10. 3. 8. See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 9.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 12. 7.

Next insert the two studs on the microphone into the two mounting holes in the rear cover. 2. 8. 8.To reassemble. Lift Top Cover and engage prop rod. 7. Remove gantry side covers. 10. Turn off all 3 switches on the status Control box on right side of Gantry. 12–143 46–229342P1 Rear Cover Lamp 1. Remove and keep Retaining Ring from inside of Cover. Open rear cover. Please use good service practices. 6. 2. 5. 10. Remove scan window. which is located in upper center portion of the rear cover. Locate Rear Microphone Interface PWB on the inside of the rear cover near the top of the cone and remove the red and black leads from the terminal block by loosening retaining screws. Turn off facility power to PDU. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 9. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Remove two (2) nuts from studs and remove microphone by pulling the device straight out from the outside of the rear cover.) 12–145 12–79 . Use tag and lockout procedures. 7. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Disconnect 2 wires leading to Lamp. Please use good service practices. 12–142 46–327212G1 Rear Cover Assm (G3 Gantry) No specific procedure at this time. 6. 10. Move table to lowest elevation. 9. Replace Lamp and retaining ring. 4. reverse steps. 3. Open Rear Cover. 4. Remove scan window. Install new microphone by threading the red and black leads through the bottom mounting hole in the rear cover. 12–144 46–288938G1 Rear Cover Mic Bd 46–297488P1 Rear Microphone 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–141 46–296898G1 G1 Rear Cover Assm HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. 3. (Be sure the red and black leads are in the slotted cutout which is a part of the bottom mounting hole. 5. Turn off facility power to PDU– use tag and lock out procedures.

Please use good service practices. Please use good service practices.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11. Remove Circuit Board from slot 6 on OBC. Use ejectors to remove Ribbon Cable connectors from front of CPU card and OBC Backplane. 8. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 12–150 2100664 Rotating Harness. Turn facility circuit breaker OFF. Loosen 8 screws and remove Front Cover from OBC assembly. Note: Red lead to position 1 and black lead to position 2. 6. Attach Ground Wrist Strap. 4. Place Board in Static Bag. 10. OBC 1. 7. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. 12. 11. 12–146 46–297445P1 Ribbon Cable. To reassemble. 12–149 46–297291G1 Rotating Harness. tag and lock. Replace Ribbon Cable. Please use good service practices. 5. 12. 12–148 46–327201G1 Right Side Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. 12–80 . 3. Turn off all three switches on status control box. Gantry – (Use with 5V Laser) No specific procedure at this time. Thread red and black leads through center hole on microphone interface PWB and place PWB over the two mounting studs on inside of cover and install the two mounting nuts. Please use good service practices. Open Cable Clamp holding Ribbon Cable located next to CPU Card. Gantry (Use with 12V Laser) No specific procedure at this time. 9. reverse steps. Connect the red and black leads to the terminal black and reverse steps 1–7 to complete the installation. 12–147 46–296937G1 G1 Right Side Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. 2.

3. 3. While holding the top and bottom portions of the scan window together. 6. Turn OFF power to the connected units. from back side of scan switch assembly.) Carefully set revolution counter assembly aside leaving leads connected for reassembly later. grasp both sides of the scan window and move them together while lightly pulling up until the window can be freed from between the front and rear covers. Install Scan Window: 1. Remove lower screw from scan switch assembly mounting flange. 5.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–151 46–327086G1 RPSCOM to Gantry Bulkhead. J1 and J2. 2. 4. 2. Install new scan switch assembly by reversing the above steps. To remove the Scan Window grab the window at the top and pull firmly downward. 12–152 46–296993G1 Scan Switch Assm 1. 12–81 . Use good service practices. 4. Use good ESD procedures. 75 Ohms HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. working both sides of the window into position. 3. Disconnect main harness connectors. 4. Note: Place all switches on the scan switch assembly in the OFF Position before turning on power. Turn off facility power to PDU. Once the initial seating of scan window is complete. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. nest the scan window at the bottom of the opening between the front and rear covers (Figure 4) such that the rivets are in the 6 o’clock position. Remove right side cover. Verify that the window is properly positioned with the rivets at the 12 o’clock position and the mylar window slit at either the 3 or 9 o’clock position. Use tag and lockout procedures. starting at the bottom and finishing at the top. With the scan window deformed as shown in Figure 3. let the window unfold slowly. 12–153 2101967 Scan Window Remove Scan Window: 1. (This screw is located behind the bracket containing the revolution counter and service switch connector and also mounts this bracket to the gantry. Before installing the scan window ensure that both the front and rear covers are in the closed position. Continue pulling until the top of the scan window is in contact with the bottom portion of the scan windows. 2. Remove upper screw from scan switch assembly and remove assembly from gantry.

5. 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 12–154 46–297475G1 SCOM Bd HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Remove left Side Cover. b. Remove PWB using extractors. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. as well. Remove Brush Block: a. 3. 3. Remove the slip ring covers. 10. refer to their procedures for a detailed explanation. a stationary circuit board must be removed. one on the top of the block and one on the bottom. Compress brush tip springs against the slip ring tracks and hold brush block against the brackets. 46–297839G1 Signal Brush Block ETC CAUTION See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 4. Remove brush block from the brackets. Position table to lowest elevation. Remove two (2) of the four (4) bolts. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. 2. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. With one hand. To remove the power brush block the grounding strap must be removed from at least the power brush block bracket. If the power brush block is being replaced. Open rear cover. 11. 2. There are three (3) brush blocks. Turn off facility power to PDU. 6. Open top cover and engage prop rod. the grounding strap must be removed from the power brush block. 6. 5. Install Brush Block: a. b. 7. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. two (2) signal and one (1) power. 7. Hold Brush Block in the correct position and align brush tips with slip ring tracks. Install new SCOM board assembly by reversing the above steps. Note: 12–155 Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into position. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. c. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. 4. 9. hold the brush block against the brackets and remove the remaining screws with the other hand. To remove either of the signal brush blocks. 12–82 . Loosen 2 screws retaining front cover of STC and remove cover. Use tag and lockout procedures. 8. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers.

Remove and install replacement modules: a. Gantry scan window. 9. 13. c. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box. 2. Remove two (2) of the four (4) bolts. 1. 7. 12. USE AND FOLLOW TAG AND LOCK OUT PROCEDURES. Open rear cover. 11. Terminator These screws remove the signal module Figure 12-4 Signal Brush Block Module 12–83 . To reassemble. and engage prop rod. Remove brush block from the brackets. 8. DANGER 3. on right side of Gantry. hold the brush block against the brackets. HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Install all four screws. d.254 +/– 0. Refer to the corresponding procedures for a detailed explanation. Position table to lowest elevation. Center both top and bottom of brush tips for all brushes by adjusting brush block. Remove. but do not tighten. one on the top of the block and one on the bottom. and set aside. reverse steps 1–9. 5. Remove. (0. Remove the stationary buffer board to access and remove either of the signal brush blocks. both gantry side covers. Remove the grounding strap from at the power brush block bracket before you remove the power brush block. Open top cover. 6. e. Turn off facility power to PDU. and remove the remaining screws with the other hand. The Gantry contains three (3) brush blocks: two for signal and one for power. b. and set aside. 12–155A S/A Signal Brush Block 2238141-2 or Signal Brush Module 2254362 CAUTION Avoid inhalation Read The Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris before you start this procedure.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 c. - 10. Remove Brush Block: a. Tighten all four (4) screws to 22 +/– 3 in–lbs. Remove the slip ring covers. Rotate Gantry manually and check that the brush tips are centered between the track barriers. With one hand. 4.35 m–kg). Place the signal brush block on a hard surface with the tips down and remove the two screws that attach the module to the brush block body.

By removing this portion of the middle hinge. Remove the top cover. 11. Remove the Rear Cover by having two (2) people grabbing the bottom of the cover on each side near the swing doors. 12–156 46–297840G1 or 46-296001G1 or 2239006 (ETC and S/A) Slip Ring Assm Precondition: 2 Serviceman are needed to replace this part. 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 b. a. Manually rotate Gantry while you check that the brush tips are centered between the track barriers. 7. Remove the rear cover portion of the middle hinge used to hold the top cover in place. the top cover can be moved laterally to the right to free the top cover from the rear cover. 1. and align the brush tips with the slip ring tracks. Reassemble Gantry. e.035 m-kg) 13. Set the top cover aside. Install all four (4) screws. Hold the Brush Block in position. Disconnect the top cover gas spring at the top cover by removing the retaining clip and grasping the gas spring and firmly pulling outward. b. While lifting on the Rear Cover Assembly. 5. 2. An additional person will be needed for approximately 5 minutes. 12–83A . c. 14.254 ±0. out of the way of the rear cover removal process. 12. 9. a third person needs to guide the pivot pins out of the pivot arm on each side. and hold the brush block against the brackets. 6. Disconnect two (2) electrical connections leading to the top and rear covers located on the inside of the rear cover’s left hinge arm. (2 people are required). 10. Install Brush Block: a. CAUTION See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. Let the gas spring swing down and hang from the rear cover support. (0. Adjust the brush blocks up against the set screws on the bracket to center the top and bottom of the brush tips on the ring. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. d. 4. Start with prop rod engaged. Insert the replacement module and tighten the screws. Also disconnect the two (2) wires leading to the rear cover lamp and the harness leading to the rear cover microphone. b. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. but do not tighten. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. Open Rear cover. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 8. Compress the brush tip springs against the slip ring tracks. Position table to lowest elevation. Tighten all four (4) screws to 22 ±3in-lbs. Reinstall the retaining clip into the gas spring for safe keeping.

One Service person should push against the back face of the Slip Ring. from the slip ring. 20. Remove and keep two (2) Lexan terminal covers that cover the electrical junctions between the gantry and the slip ring. 15. 13. Rotate Gantry until final set of bolts are in the access holes. 26. they must be placed in anti–static bags. If space permits. three (3) BNC connectors (J1. Remove both the Rotating Buffer Board and the Rotating Terminator Board by removing seven (7) 4–40 socket head cap screws and one (1) 1/4 –20 screw per board. they must be placed in anti–static bags. two (2) signal and one power. CAUTION See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. Remove and set aside the six (6) Brush Block Brackets. Repeat steps 24 and 25 until six (6) bolts have been removed. 21. 27. Once the two (2) boards are removed from the Slip Ring. 14. 25. The Power Brush electrical connections and the grounding strap must be disconnected prior to removal. on the Stationary Buffer Board. DO NOT STAND SLIP RING ON END. Remove and set aside the three (3) Brush Blocks. 18. Note: There is a cutout on the Slip Ring and a pilot on the bearing flange to hold Slip Ring in place provided there is pressure against the back face of the Slip Ring. 23. 24. including the two (2) Ground Strap connections. Remove two (2) BNC Connectors (J1 and J2) from Rotating Buffer Board. 28.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 12. lay cover horizontally on blanket on floor. 22. 12–84 . Remove the two (2) Slip Ring Covers. Rotate gantry until one bolt is located in each of the two (2) access holes. Open the front cover and remove two (2) access panels. LIE IT FLAT. Disconnect all cable connections on the inside of the Slip Ring. Each bracket is retained by a shoulder screw and a socket head cap screw. Each Brush Block is held in place with four (4) bolts. 16. Once the two (2) boards are removed. NOTE: The epoxy Slip Ring is fragile and extreme care should be used in handling. 17. Also. Place Rear Cover against the wall and on top of a blanket to prevent scratching. and pull Slip Ring off bearing flange. Rotate Gantry until another set of bolts are located in the access holes. one person on each side. Remove both the Stationary Terminator Board (seven(7) screws) and the Stationary Buffer Board (eight (8) screws) by removing the appropriate number of 4–40 socket head cap screws. 19.J2 and J3) need to be disconnected. Each cover is held on by two (2) 1/4 –20 screws. Remove and keep two (2) bolts located in the access holes. Attach Grounded Wrist Strap. 29. Remove Slip Ring assembly by grasping Slip Ring with both hands.

Remove and keep the 2 detector mounting nuts from each detector mount. Note: 12–157 A third person is needed for a short period of time to install the Rear Cover. The hoist should be connected to the hole which is drilled into the main detector plate at the center of the detector. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE TO YOURSELF OR OTHERS. Install the remaining six (6) screws.0048 m–kg) 35. Carefully swing the detector off its mounts and out into the gantry. Note: Make sure Slip Ring is flush against Bearing Flange before tightening screws to 5 ft.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 30. 4. The hoist cable should be pulled snug. Use a small amount of 242–Loctite. reverse steps 1–22. NEVER PERFORM A PROCEDURE ON THE GANTRY UNTIL THE GANTRY SCAN DRIVE IS IN THE OFF POSITION. POSSIBLE INJURY COULD RESULT FROM BEING STRUCK BY THE MOVING GANTRY. 6. 33. 31. 9. BE SURE THE LOCKING PIN IS ENGAGED IN THE LOCKED POSITION BEFORE REMOVING THE DETECTOR. Install 2 of 8 Slip Ring Mounting Screws.0048 m–kg) 34. To reassemble. Install the hoist. 32. 8. Turn off the Scan Drive power switch. 5. Remove the cables and label them so they can be reinstalled into the same location. hold the Slip Ring next to Bearing flange and rotate the bearing and /or Slip Ring to align the black line on the inside of Slip Ring with the small hole on the bearing flange pilot. (0. Carefully disconnect all 47 flex cables from the Detector and DAS. Make sure you do not damage or lose any of the mounting hardware. WARNING WARNING 12–85 . 2. Mount Slip Ring onto Bearing Flange (One Person should continue holding the Slip Ring onto Bearing Flange while the other person performs step 32. 7. 10. Remove the DAS covers.–lbs. Check torque of all eight (8) screws a second time to 5 ft–lbs. Rotate the gantry so the tube is at 45 degrees. To replace the Slip Ring. Disconnect the 3 Heater Controller Cables which connect the detector to the detector heater. Open all gantry covers. Lock the gantry in position at 45 degrees. 3. 46–313423G1 Solid State (SS) Detector Kit 1. NOTE: Torque screws to 5 ft–lbs. (0. WHEN THE GANTRY COVERS ARE OPEN.

POSSIBLE INJURY COULD RESULT FROM BEING STRUCK BY THE MOVING GANTRY. Verify that all mounting hardware is present and in place. Do not tighten the mounting bolts. If the resistance is not infinite you may have the fiber washers wrong. After the rough alignment is complete. Check and adjust 3. 4. 18. 17. If a torque wrench is not available the nuts should be tightened finger tight and tightened 1/2 half a flat with a wrench. 12. Mechanically align the detector to the base plate. 16. tighten the outside nut to 25 ft–lbs while holding the inside nut to keep it from turning. Remove the DAS covers. 3. Make sure you do not set the detector on any cables. Turn off the Scan Drive power switch. Connect one lead of a DVM to the Frame of the detector and one lead to the gantry rotating base. 15. There should be an infinite resistance measured. WARNING WARNING 12–86 . Rotate the gantry so the tube is at 45 degrees. BE SURE THE LOCKING PIN IS ENGAGED IN THE LOCKED POSITION BEFORE REMOVING THE DETECTOR. Verify that the detector is isolated from ground. 1. Carefully lower the detector onto a skid. 13.5 inches across the full arc of the detector.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11. WHEN THE GANTRY COVERS ARE OPEN. 14. When the inside nuts have been torqued. Since there are no longer shocks. At this time it is possible to change damaged mounting hardware. Lock the gantry in position at 45 degrees. torque the inside detector mounting nut to 25 ft–lbs. Open all gantry covers. 6. Disconnect the 3 Heater Controller Cables which connect the detector to the detector heater. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE TO YOURSELF OR OTHERS. CAUTION 12–158 46–241600G806 SS Detector Do not over tighten. 5. the detector can be twisted and damaged by excess force. 2. Swing the detector into position and install the washer and nuts. The detector should be installed using the hoist and the hole which is the center of the detector mounting plate. NEVER PERFORM A PROCEDURE ON THE GANTRY UNTIL THE GANTRY SCAN DRIVE IS IN THE OFF POSITION.

Carefully lower the detector onto a skid. 8. CAUTION Do not over tighten. Do not tighten the mounting bolts. Verify that the detector is isolated from ground. 9. torque the inside detector mounting nut to 25 ft–lbs. 10. Since there are no longer shocks. Please use good service practices. If a torque wrench is not available the nuts should be tightened finger tight and tightened 1/2 half a flat with a wrench. Check and adjust 3. Mechanically align the detector to the base plate. 17.5 inches across the full arc of the detector. 11. Perform the following checks after completion of this procedure: · Alignments · · · · · · Q–Cal Crosstalk Calibration DAS integration Alpha Vector Cal N number check/adjust Image Series 12–159 46–241600G6 SS Detector Kit No specific procedure at this time. 14. After the rough alignment is complete. At this time it is possible to change damaged mounting hardware. Make sure you do not set the detector on any cables. Make sure you do not damage or lose any of the mounting hardware. 15. 12–87 . Verify that all mounting hardware is present and in place. Carefully disconnect all 47 flex cables from the Detector and DAS. The hoist should be connected to the hole which is drilled into the main detector plate at the center of the detector. The hoist cable should be pulled snug. If the resistance is not infinite you may have the fiber washers wrong. Remove the cables and label them so they can be reinstalled into the same location. The detector should be installed using the hoist and the hole which is the center of the detector mounting plate.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 7. Connect one lead of a DVM to the Frame of the detector and one lead to the gantry rotating base. 12. Install the hoist. There should be an infinite resistance measured. 13. the detector can be twisted and damaged by excess force. 16. When the inside nuts have been torqued . 18. Carefully swing the detector off its mounts and out into the gantry. Swing the detector into position and install the washer and nuts. Remove and keep the 2 detector mounting nuts from each detector mount. tighten the outside nut to 25 ft–lbs while holding the inside nut to keep it from turning.

3. 3. 2. 4. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 4. 5. Position table to lowest elevation. 7. Use good ESD procedures. Refer to the Micro Stepper Drive Procedure for details. Through the cut away in the Micro Stepper Drive mounting plate. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 12. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 3. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. reverse steps. Use good service practices. Gantry Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Lock Gantry into position by engaging indexer pin lock. Open front cover. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. To reassemble. 10. 12–88 . Rotate Gantry until Collimator is at the 3 o’clock position. Replace Stepper Motor Drive 13. 12–162 46–296664P1 Stepper Motor Drive (Filter) 1. 11. 2. disconnect the two (2) 6 pin electrical connector from the front of the Stepper Motor Drive. To gain access to the Bow–Tie Filter Stepper Motor Drive. 8. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Turn off all three switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. the aperture Micro Stepper Drive must be removed. 6. 9. and remove four 8–32 bolts holding the Stepper Motor Drive. Use good service practices.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–160 46–297092G1 Stationary AC Harness HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 12–161 46–296748G1 Stationary Harness. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Make sure all safety precautions are taken.

4. 6. and the table footswitch cover. reconnect harness to table. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. 2. 6. Turn off facility power to PDU. 8. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 2. Install new switch by reversing the above steps. 12–89 . 12–165 46–287264P1 Terminator. Note: 12–164 46–221880P24 Terminal Strip. 5. Please use good service practices.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–163 46–136343P12 Switch. Position table to lowest elevation. STC Assm No specific procedure at this time. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into position. 3. 10. Base No specific procedure at this time. Cut and remove the ty–raps used to retain the harness. 4. 12–167 46–296363P1 Tilt Motor 1. Remove and set aside the center and right inside Base Covers. 9. Use tag and lockout procedures. 5. Replace Motor. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 3. Note: One of the four mounting holes is not used 11. Open front cover. Remove the Tilt Motor Power harness to the table connection point and disconnect. 12–166 46–296145P1 Tilt Chain No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 7. Remove the three bolts that mount motor to gear reducer. STC Assm HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. and ty–rap harness to base. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. Slide Motor off gearbox. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 7. Please use good service practices. Remove the retaining nut from the front of the toggle switch and remove the switch from the chassis. 12. Remove two leads from the back of the toggle switch on the right side of the STC Chassis. Remove left Side Cover.

EDAS (Slot 55) GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Turn off facility power to PDU. Open Rear Cover. 15. which holds the faulty fan in place. 6. To complete reassembly. 12. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. No overhang is permissible. Use tag and lockout procedures.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 13. 9. Loosen/remove the three (3) screws and washers as needed. 10. Place fan guard on to new fan. To reassemble. Install key into motor shaft. 15. plastic covered books or non–conductive plastic bags. 7. reverse steps. 12–90 . Locate which of the four (4) fans need to be replaced. 3. 14. Align key with keyway in Gearbox. Attach Motor to Gear Box. Remove and set aside gantry scan window. NOTE: Apply Loctite 242 to three bolts. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 12–169 46–220247P2 Top Cover Fan 1. 4. Use approved lifting methods. 11. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. Disconnect the electrical connection on the fan to be replaced. 5. Reconnect electrical connection. Boards must never be placed on non–conductive surfaces such as white bench tops. Install new fan into top cover. 14. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: WARNING ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag. reverse steps. CAUTION Key must be fully inserted into motor shaft. 12–168 46–183027P90 Timing Bd. Remove fan from top cover. you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. 13. 2. 8. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. Remove fan guard from faulty fan.

Return gantry to zero degrees of tilt. Remove scan window. remove the two (2) flat head screws holding the spacer block on the Base’s hard stop.25 degrees. Monitor the relationship between the front fiberglass covers and the Gantry Base (on both sides of the Gantry) during tilting operations.25 degrees at a very minimum to meet system requirements. CAUTION: The gantry must be able to tilt +/– 30. THE FRONT COVER MAY NEED TO BE REMOVED TO ALLOW REPLACEMENT OF A GANTRY GAS SPRING. Open front cover. Leave the spacer sitting in position for the time being. Front Cover Removal a. 9. HOWEVER. the gantry is capable of tilting forward further than 30. Stop tilting and remove the spacer block. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of gantry. B) Front Cover interference – Due to dimensional variation in the Front Cover. 3. 7. DO NOT force the gantry hard stops together – the gas springs may become damaged and rupture. Proceed to tilt with caution bearing in mind two issues: A) Gas Spring Length – Wiggle both gas springs as the two hard stops approach each other. On right side of gantry. 1. 8. 12–91 . 2. THE TASK OF REMOVING THE FRONT COVER WILL REQUIRE THREE PEOPLE FOR A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME. Engage Indexer Pin and lock gantry 6. If interference is not an issue – proceed to tilt. Tilt the gantry until the front stop on the pivot sector touches the loose spacer block left in position on the Base as described in step 6. monitoring the gas spring length and go on to step 10.25 degrees and prevent enough tilt to exchange a gas spring.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–170 46–297738P1 Top Cover Gas Spring HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 NOTE: DUE TO ALIGNMENT AND DIMENSIONAL VARIATION OF THE GANTRY FRONT COVER. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 5. Return gantry to an upright position (zero degrees of tilt) and remove the front cover per the following steps. When the spacer block is removed. 4. If interference occurs. With the spacer block in position the gantry will be able to meet this requirement. the Front Cover and/or Front Cover hinge doors may contact the Gantry Base during tilting operations greater than 30. b. stopping when one of the gas springs feels unloaded (reaches full extension). IF NECESSARY. STOP TILTING. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Position table to lowest elevation. THE FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY WEIGHS LESS THAN 200 LBS. with the spacer block removed the gas springs will most likely prevent the gantry hardstops from coming all the way together. IMPORTANT – both gas springs will have to be monitored to ensure that they are not being extended past their fully extended length. c.

P/N 1000904P489 – 0. Place the front cover horizontally on a clean protected surface. 16. 15. Remove the gas spring as detailed in steps 10 and 11. If it is necessary to remove the second gas spring. continue tilting the gantry until the second gas spring has reached full extension. Install the gas spring in the rod down/tube up position. Adjust the tilt and install the gas spring. Remove Front Cover by having two people lift the front cover. then the gas spring length must be increased by utilizing a flat washer (ie. ( 0. 12. Once the top end fitting is free. If the ball studs are worn or damaged. If the spacer block CAN NOT be inserted due to lack of space between the two hardstops. Firmly push the end fitting around the ball stud on both the top and bottom. Apply Loctite 242 and tighten end fitting. Then proceed to tilt toward zero degrees until the second gas spring fits on to the other two ball studs. Tilt the gantry until the gas spring will fit on to the two (2) ball studs.500 OD/ 0. h. while a third person removes the two hinge pins on the left side of the gantry. remove and replace using Loctite 242. 12–92 . it may fall rearward during tilting operations. Again. If both gas springs have been removed. 13. then the gas spring installation length is ACCEPTABLE. 8 and 9 10. Clean and inspect the ball studs.328) ID/ 0. Remove one end fitting and install one flat washer. such as on a blanket on the floor. g. Remove the two (2) retaining clips from the ends of the gas spring that has reached full extension – even if it is not the gas spring that needs to be replaced. Take the new gas spring(s) and ensure the end fittings are tightened down. e. IMPORTANT – TO EFFECTIVELY RETAIN THE GAS SPRING IN POSITION AROUND THE BALL STUD. use the spacer block as a test to ensure that the system has proper tilt capability. DO NOT ROTATE THE GANTRY IN THIS STATE. Special handling will be necessary to protect the cover’s surface from becoming scratched. Grasp the gas spring near the top end fitting and firmly pull away from the gantry. Repeat steps 6. Note: The retaining clips must be removed prior to gas spring removal. Disconnect electrical connection near the top hinge on left side of gantry. To verify that the new gas spring(s) will allow the system to meet the tilt requirement of ±30. place the first gas spring on the longest side first (longest meaning the side that has the greatest distance between ball studs). Disengage the top cover prop rod and gently lower the top cover down onto the gantry. f.0384 kg–m) 14.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 d. Torque to 40 ft–lbs. If the top cover is left in the propped position.25 degrees.062 Thk) as a spacer between the end fitting and gas spring. continue pulling until the bottom end fitting is also freed. simply attempt to insert the spacer block between the base and pivot sector hardstops at the the time of gas spring installation. 11. Replace the retaining clip on each end fitting. If the spacer block CAN be inserted. 7. THE RETAINING CLIP MUST BE PROPERLY POSITIONED THROUGH BOTH OPENINGS IN THE END FITTING.

3. 4. Replace thermostat assembly. 20. If the Front Cover was removed. Disconnect two (2) electrical connections. Replace Front Cover and reconnect the electrical connection c. Once the new gas spring is installed. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box of right side of gantry. 3. 5. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 17. 2. 5. Turn off facility power to PDU. 2. Reconnect the two electrical connections. Note: Top cover must be in the down position before tilting occurs. return the gantry to the zero degree tilted position as indicated by the tilt indicator bracket on the right side of the Gantry. Lift the Top Cover and engage the prop rod b. Position table to lowest elevation. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Please use good service practices. Use tag and lockout procedures. 12–173 46–297396P1 Tube Cooling Relay 1. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. Remove and set aside gantry scan window. 10. Lower Top Cover 19. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 12. To ensure a successful gas spring replacement. 6. Adjust/align Front Cover d. then: a. Remove four (4) screws and thermostat assembly. 9. Locate thermostat assembly on left side of gantry top cover. 12–93 . tilt the gantry to +30 degrees and –30 degrees as indicated by the display monitor located on top of the Front Cover. Open Rear Cover. one from each side of the thermostat assembly. 8. 11. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 7. Reinstall the spacer block to the Base hard stop using the two (2) flat head screws. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. To complete reassembly. 4. reverse steps 1– 12–172 46–296936G1 Top Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. reverse steps 1–6 12–171 46–297797G1 Top Cover Thermostat Assm 1. 18. To complete reassembly.

Rotate Gantry so that OBC is at the 3 o’clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. Turn off the Gantry Power. Then. disconnect the pump and fan (4 pin mate–n–lok) power system cable and the ground strap from the top of the tube unit. 9. Install new relay by reversing the above steps. Pull the cable terminal out of the receptacles. 7. Soak up any oil in oil wells with paper towels. (12 pin connector) system cable on top of the tube unit. Ground the ends of the cable to the Gantry frame to ensure no voltage.D. 8. 12. 5. 10. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Disconnect the system stator cable from the 4 pin mate–n–lok connector on front of the tube unit. 8. 13. Open front cover. 9.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6. 1. Clean up any oil that drips from the cable terminal. Remove the anode and the cathode cable by first loosening each cable locking ring with the spanner wrench. Remove connectors J1 through J5 from control assembly. Use tag and lockout procedures. 11. 4. 3. POSSIBLE INJURY COULD RESULT FROM BEING STRUCK BY MOVING PARTS ON THE ROTATING STRUCTURE. 2. 7. Note: Right side is referenced when viewing the Gantry from the table side. Attach the hoist to the crane and tube. 6. Remove 4 screws which mount control assembly to the back of the OBC. Flip the AXIAL DRIVE ENABLE and 550 VDC (HVDC) ENABLE switches to the OFF position. From the bottom of the control assembly locate the tube cooling relay (normally closed) and remove the four (4) leads attached to positions 1 through 4. Rotate the Gantry until the locking pin lines up with the desired positioning hole in the Gantry. Lock the Gantry in place using the locking mechanism. These switches are located inside of the Gantry facing the *right side cover. 12–174 46–309500G1 X–Ray Tube Tube Change: Remove Old Tube WARNING: BE SURE THAT THE LOCKING PIN IS ENGAGED IN THE LOCKED POSITION BEFORE REMOVING THE TUBE UNIT. Remove retainer bolt and raise the gantry crane to its uppermost position and insert locking pin. WARNING 12–94 . Turn off facility power to PDU. Remove two (2) nuts attaching relay to chassis and remove relay. Also disconnect the tube I. Rotate the failed tube unit to the 3 o’clock position. This procedure involves opening the Gantry Covers for access to the tube mounting interface.

Lower the failed tube unit on to the floor with the tube unit resting on fans.D. First. resistors. Remove four 3/8–16 hex nuts and two mounting bars. 11. After every tube change. 12. Next.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 10. To shut down the system. proceed as follows: Note: Words on the command line below that are underlined followed by <ENTER> means to type that word and then press the ENTER key. <suiteID>_OCOsd<ENTER> The system will shut down to the PROM monitor level as indicated by the caret prompt (>). Tube Failure Codes: The following Tube Failure Codes are used for tube tracking. This protocol is required so that the system can interrogate the proper config file that contains information on the tube I. the mounting bars must be removed in the order indicated. remove the upper mounting bar and the associated hex nuts. To start up the system from PROMmonitor level. but answer “N” to not start applications. remove the lower mounting bar and the associated hex nuts. proceed as follows: > b <ENTER> Boot Unix. · AI: Image Artifact · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · BG: Broken Glass CA: Casing Arcing CB: Casing Bubbles/Particles Seen CL: Casing Oil Leak GS: Grid Short OC: Other–Cathode Related OE: Tube Loss Due to Failure Elsewhere OF: Open Filament OG: Arcing OH: Other–Housing Related OL: Generator Overload OR: Other–Rotor Related PF: Overheat/Pump Failure PT: Pulled Tube (No Failure) RF: Frozen Rotor RN: Noisy Rotor SD: Shipping Damage/Error SS: Stator Open/Stator Short XL: Low X–Ray Output 12–95 . shutdown the software and then start it up again. CAUTION To minimize the chance of injuring your hand. Use these codes to report the reason a tube was changed.

12–96 . Secure the Tube Unit to the rotating structure using the four 3/8–16 hex nuts and two mounting bars. Be careful not to lose the rubber quad ring. Re–tighten the locking ring and torque to 7 ±1ft. etc. 3. Using the hoist. 6. Rotate the cable strain relief as required for clean cable dress.–lbs. Connect the tube pump and fan power cable to the 4 pin mate–N–lok connector. Note: Install the top mounting bar before the bottom one for ease of installation. Torque to 11 ±1 ft. DO NOT USE THE TUBE. break the oil seal between receptacle and housing. Over tightening may deform the cable plug sealing surfaces.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Install New Tube: 1. Pour transformer oil (917) into the receptacle to a depth of 0.lbs. Use tag and lockout procedures. Remove the plastic cap plug from each cable receptacle on the tube unit. Connect the tube I. Align the cable terminal orienting key with the notch in the receptacle. twist the receptacle. Torque the 3/8–16 hex nuts to 30+/–1 ft. Slowly insert the cable to engage the connector pins and to fully seat. Note: The spanner wrench is specifically designed for use with a torque wrench in tightening the high–voltage cables on the tube unit. lift the new tube unit up and position the four 1” mounting holes on the tube support bracket over the four threaded studs on the gantry tube support plate. then tighten the locking ring using a spanner wrench and a torque wrench. 5. The moly filter is identified by 2 dots on the filter at one end of the port.375”. 8. If the new tube unit was in a cold environment during transport or storage. Wet the rubber quad ring in the new tube unit lightly with transformer oil (917) and install it back into the slot at the top of the receptacle retaining ring. 2. allow it to warm to room temperature prior to installation. Turn off facility power to the PDU. 4. Visually inspect the port to verify that the fixed moly filter is present. mate–N–lok. keeping it centered. 10. 11. cable to the 12 pin mate–N–lok connector on top of the tube. It must be used for accurate torque readings when installing the high–voltage cables. connector on front of the tube unit near the oil pump. and disrupt internal wiring. Engage the cable locking ring.. CAUTION Do not over tighten the locking ring. If the filter is not present. 7.D. Position the 3 alignment pins on the tube support bracket into the alignment holes on the Gantry Tube Support Plate. Connect the system stator cable to the 4 pin. 9. Connect the grounding strap to the 1/4–20 ground stud on the top of the tube unit. Back off on the cable locking ring without disturbing the cable plug.–lb.

remove the toweling and wipe up all excess oil. It should then be crimped over the top of the locking ring and secured with tape to the plastic cable strain relief. Return the Gantry to the 3 o’clock position. Control D. Two inch wide strips cut from a paper napkin have been found suitable. · · · · · · · · · · · [L1 b] type sd –i ( this will bring down applications software). Run Changetube This program will keep tube usage statistics on the new tube for tube warranty data and trend analysis. wrap the cable strain relief and locking ring with a single layer of absorbent paper tissue. changeTube · Run this program when you change your tube. 17. Then position the tube at the 6 o’clock position. 13. locking ring. Turn gantry power on and wait at least 10 minutes for the filament to warm before doing alignments. WASH THEM NOW! WARNING 12. Bring up applications Type st (Should be in /w directory) ALIGNMENTS: refer to System Service Manual General Service Manual · Plane of Rotation (POR) · · · X–Ray Beam on Window (BOW) Isocenter Center Body Filter (CBF) and SAG 12–97 . To detect any subsequent oil leakage. enter Insert S/N <serial number> From OCO root prompt. Return crane to normal storage position. The bottom edge of the paper should be wrapped around the top end of the cable horn on the tube unit and secured with tape. enter the number which corresponds to your tube type From Housing S/N. 16. The top edge should extend up over the threads of the cable locking ring. Repeat with a dry rag. Carefully wipe up all excess oil. to exit back to genesis. Type su Enter password: <root password> Type changeTube Enter failure code for removed tube <failcode> From the menu on the screen. 14. Disconnect hoist from tube and crane. Remove paper after leak check. 15. Wipe off the cable horns. Wrap the cable horns with paper toweling held in place with tape. Be sure to install and tighten crane storage retaining bolt. and strain relief with a rag damp with alcohol. The paper should readily show when it is wet with oil so that a leak can be detected.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 IF OIL GETS ON THE HANDS.

12–98 . and spits while you run the Tube Heat Soak and/or Seasoning Tool. Select the |Season| function when you encounter tube spits. · · · · · · Touch |Utilities| Touch |CT Tools| Touch |Heat Soak & Season| Touch |Heat Soak & Season| (for new tube installations) Press (Start Scan) when it flashes. repeat the process up to four times before you pull the tube. If the previously mentioned errors occur during the seasoning steps. If the errors continue. Use only on a MX_165_CT_I Select the |Heat Soak & Season| tool every time you install a new x–ray tube. touch |Resume| and press (Start Scan) when it flashes. shoot–throughs. image streaks and/or scan aborts on the currently installed tube. Touch |Cancel| when the tool completes Select the Large Focal Spot for every scan.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 GENERATOR CALIBRATIONS: refer to System Service Manual General Service Manual · kV Meter Verification · · · · · · · mA Meter Verification Calibration of HV Tank Feedback Resistors Install NEW TUBE program Auto mA Calibration KV Rise and Fall Times Verification of Internal Scan Timer Heat Soak and Seasoning Note: Monitor the system for high voltage overcurrents.

1 0. monitor the system for high voltage overcurrents. lbs.0sec) S R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R When you run the Tube Heat Soak and/or Seasoning program(s).1 0. Exposure Time Accuracy: Begin with the top level plasma. Remove the paper towels after several revolutions of the gantry.1 0. Use the Large Focal Spot parameter with the following Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning protocols: TABLE 12–2 TUBE HEAT SOAK AND SEASONING PROTOCOLS MX 165 CT I kV Scan Group Warmup Heat Input Anode Soak 1 Anode Soak 2 Casing Soak 1 Casing Soak 2 Casing Soak 3 Seasoning 1 Seasoning 2 Seasoning 3 Seasoning 4 Seasoning 5 Seasoning 6 Seasoning 7 Seasoning 8 Seasoning 9 Note: 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 90 100 110 120 130 135 140 145 150 100 300 300 300 300 300 300 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 24 25 9 45 45 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 15 2 2 5 1 12 12 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 mA # of scans ISD (sec) Scan Time (sec) 2 3 3 1 2 2 1 0. · Touch |Cancel| 12–99 . to proceed. If the errors continue.1 0. to absorb excess oil. Upon completion of the high voltage stability test. repeat the process up to four times before you pull the tube. the message log displays the scan times. and press (Start Scan) when it flashes. shoot–throughs. replace the paper toweling around the tube locking rings. If these errors occur during the seasoning steps.1 Pre Group Delay (sec) 2 2 3 2 60 0 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Static/ Rotate (4.|3| Touch |CT Tools| Touch |Genrator Charact| Touch |Monitor Enable| Now. torque the locking ring on each H.1 0. and execute the following sequence of softkeys. Also.1 0. or 84 ±12 in.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The HiSpeed Advantage Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning function supports only the MX_165_CT_I x–ray tube. and tube spits. touch |Resume|.V. lbs.|2|. · Touch |Utilities| · · · · Touch |1|.1 0.1 0. cable (at the tube) to 7 ±1ft.

0 smallFOV largeFOV largeFOV largeFOV largeFOV largeFOV Helical Scans: Selected Time Required Technic · 15. 120 kV. centered at 0.0 3. mA and scan times. 40. · Q–Cal · · · · · Crosstalk Calibration Calibration Procedure. otherwise your message log will be filled with kV.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 Scout Scan Time: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Take the following scout scans at the distances called out below using 120kV 40mA and record the scan time that is displayed in the message log on the HHS data sheet. 30.0 30. Allow a minimum of 60 minutes before continuing these scans. 300. CALS: Refer to System Service Manual General Service Manual and System Operator Guide.6sec 0. Scan the water portion of the QA phantom at the following: · Small. Look for thermal bands. 200 mA. 480 Axial and Helical Time: Take the scans in the tables below using Applications mode (Scan Rx) using 120kV and 40 mA Axial Scans · Selected Time FOV · · · · · · 0.0cm. 4 sec (from a cold tube) · · · 1mm. 25. 1slice 10mm. 12–100 . A cold X–Ray tube is required for the thermal test. Standard Cals N# Check/Adjust QA Noise Test Thermal Test The thermal test should only be run if you suspect cold tube/hot tube image problems. · Distance in mm: 20. 0. 20slices 1mm. Use a 14cm x 14cm ROI box.0 120kV/40mA/10mm/S70–170 · · Note: 28.6sec 1. It is a failure if the means vary more than 4 counts between the two 1mm scans or from images 1 to 20 for the 10mm scans. 150.0. 1slice Check images for artifacts that vary with temperature.0 120kV/40mA/10mm/S135–I135 120kV/40mA/10mm/S145–I145 When complete go back into Generator Charact and toggle off Monitor Enable.0 4.0 2.

5. 6. Loosen four (4) captive screws on Filament Power assembly cover and remove cover. Measure voltage across filter capacitor to verify that bleeder resistor has dissipated energy to a safe level.04 from the surface of the rotating base casting. 12. 11. Turn off facility power to PDU. 13. Install new supply by reversing the above steps. 12–101 . Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. White. Disconnect Red lead from fuse. Adjust the stud to a height of 1. Remove gantry side covers. Use tag and lockout procedures. 14.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–175 46–297460P1 Tube Studs HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Tube Stud Replacement Procedure: 1. to transformer terminal two (2). Remove scan window. 8. 15. to transformer terminal one (1). 9. Note: Input leads: Black. Open Front Cover. Unsolder Black and White wires from terminals one (1) and two (2) on the transformer. 4. 3. 4. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power assembly is at the 3 o’clock position.. Engage gantry rotational lock. 7. Follow all Safety Instructions detailed in Tube Installation procedures. Replace Tube (See Tube Installation Instructions). 10. Move table to lowest elevation. 16. 5. Remove Tube (See Tube Removal Instructions). Disconnect Black lead from filter capacitor by removing screw from negative terminal. Follow the procedure as outlined in step 2 above. Remove and save four (4) bolts mounting Filament Power Supply to gantry and remove supply.90 ±0. 12–176 46–296701P1 38V Filament Supply 1. Remove the damaged stud(s) using double 3/8–16 nuts and a 9/16 wrench or an adjustable wrench. Apply Loctite 271 to one side of the replacement stud and install this side into the rotating base casting. 2. Follow all Safety Instructions detailed in Tube Removal procedure. 2.

Open top cover and engage prop rod. 12–102 . Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. Boards must never be placed on non–conductive surfaces such as white bench tops. plastic covered books or non–conductive plastic bags. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Open front cover. 12–179 45561210 Anode (Transformer Tank) 1.V. plastic covered books or non–conductive plastic bags. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. & 54).53. Rotate gantry so that Anode H. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. 8. EDAS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. Use approved lifting methods. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. 2. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. Supply is at the 9 o’clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 5. Position table to lowest elevation. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. Boards must never be placed on non–conductive surfaces such as white bench tops. you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag. 12–178 46–183027P129 ADC Bd (Reduced Gain EDAS) GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Use approved lifting methods. 3.52. 7. 6. 4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–177 46–183027P111 ADC Bd (SLOT 51. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol.

Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 22. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. 28. Attach hoist to lifting bracket on bottom of Anode H. Cut ty–raps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly. 3. 4. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. Measure voltage on two large capacitor to verify 0 volts. Loosen two (2) wing handled screws holding STC Chassis in place and rotate card cage 90 degrees to lock into position. 16. 13. After installation is complete rotate gantry to verify cable clearance and to drain excess oil from H. 15. 25. 26. 17. Transformer Tank. Use rags or paper toweling to wipe excess oil from H. 14. Remove cables J1 and J2 from measurement PWB on HV Transformer Tank.V. 12–103 . 12. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver board. Note: Install four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts and torque to 25 ft–lbs (3. cable connector and tank well. Use hoist to lower transformer tank to floor. 21.V. 27. Ground the end of the HV cable to the Gantry frame to ensure no voltage. Remove two (2) inverter output leads from H.V. Again wipe excess oil with rags or toweling. Supply is at the 3 o’clock position. Transformer Tank and remove slack from chain. cable strain relief.V. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2. 2. 12–180 45435960 Anode Inverter 1. Use spanner wrench to remove high voltage cable connector from H. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Attach hoist to boom arm in gantry. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. Use spanner wrench to tighten securely and wipe excess oil with rags or toweling. Before installing HV Cable Connector add 20 cc of dielectric oil to the HV Connector well in the HV Transformer Tank. Position table to lowest elevation.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 9. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 18. 20.V. Disconnect 550VDC cable from capacitor PWB. Disengage gantry rotational lock and rotate gantry so that Anode H. 23. Install new transformer tank by reversing the above steps. Remove four (4) bolts which fasten transformer tank to rotating base. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fasten inverter assembly to H.462 m–kg). 19. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly.V. 5. 24.V. Verify no voltage on the 550VDC cable. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. 10. 11.

V. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. Turn off facility power to PDU . Open front cover. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver PWB. 16. 11. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. 12-104 . Remove two(2) inverter output leads from H. Cut ty-raps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly. 5.V. Open front cover. 7. 10. 11. Open top cover and engage prop rod. To install new inverter assembly reverse the above steps. 8. Note: Use Loctite 242. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2. Disconnect 550 VDC cable from capacitor PWB. and install four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts and torque to 25 ft-lbs (3.use tag and lockout procedure. 4. 9. 10. 15. 6. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB.V. 17. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver PWB. 13. Disconnect 550 VDC cable from capacitor PWB. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 8. 13. 14. Rotate Gantry so that anode inverter is at the 3:00 o'clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 12. 16. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. 9. Position table to lowest elevation. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 12-181 46-297703P1 Anode Inverter 1. Cut ty-raps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. 2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13 HSA±RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100 6. 7. Measure voltage on two large capacitors to verify 0 volts. 3. 15. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fastens inverter assembly to H. 12. Remove two(2) inverter output leads from H. 18. Rotate Gantry so that anode inverter is at the 3:00 o'clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 14.462 m-kg). Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2. Measure voltage on two large capacitors to verify 0 volts.

12. Remove Scan window. Disconnect electrical connection to Axial Brake. 5. Remove 6 screws and washers that mount measurement board to HV Supply. 12-182 45554264 or 2100553 Anode Transformer Tank Measurement Bd 1. 6. Unplug connectors J1. 12-105 . Mount replacement brake onto torque plate. 8. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Rotate Measurement Board to 3:00 position. 7. 2.and J6 10. Remove hex nut and key. Once the brake is energized. To do this turn on the gantry 120VAC switch ONLY on the status control box on right side of gantry. 9. To install new inverter assembly reverse the above steps.462 m-kg). Engage Manual Indexer Pin Lock to prevent gantry rotation. 10. J5. 12-183 46-297875P1 Axial Brake 1. Carefully pry measurement board off High Voltage Tank. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 7. 8. Lift top cover and engage prop rod.J2. To assemble the hex nut to the brake shaft and aperture plate. 11. Open front cover. 9. Open top cover and engage prop rod. and install four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts and torque to 25 ft-lbs (3. power must be restored to energize the brake. Remove four bolts holding brake to torque plate and remove brake. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Turn off facility power to PDU . 2. Note: Carefully align connector pins from Interface Measurement Board to Round Interface Board on High Voltage Supply. Replace Measurement Board. 12. 4. 3. Turn off all three switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 11. 5. 6. the aperture plate can be aligned with the hex nut on the brake shaft.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13 HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SER VICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100 17. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 3. Position table to lowest elevation. 4. Remove and keep three set screws on aluminum hex nut on end of brake shaft.use tag and lock±out procedures. 18. Note: Use Loctite 242.V. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. Open rear cover. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fastens inverter assembly to H.

Apply 242 Loctite sparingly to three set screws. reverse steps 1–7. 4. and remove coupling. 14. 15. 9. 2. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 4. Disconnect Axial Motor Encoder electrical connections. Move table to lowest elevation. To finish reassembly. 12. Insert key. Use push–to–release tab to rotate card cage back into position. Install new Axial Control PWB by reversing the above steps. 12–106 . Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. Dimension from the outer surface of the brake to the outer surface of the hex nut to be 0. Loosen three screws of Idler Tensioning assembly Loosen Tensioning Bolt until spring is unloaded. 8. Remove BNC Connector from front of Axial Control PWB and use extractors to remove PWB. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 7. 6. 9. 6. 11. Loosen 2 screws retaining front cover of STC and remove cover. Adjust hex nut.370 ±0. Position table to lowest elevation. HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 14. 13. 12–184 46–264806G1 Axial Control Bd 1. 2. Rotate gantry until screw of coupling is in–line with access hole in Aluminum Encoder fixturing plate.288 m–kg). 16. Remove left Side Cover. 7. and remove Encoder fixture plate assembly. Loosen screw on motor shaft side of coupling. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC chassis.010 inches.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 13. 10. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. and torque to 25–30 in–lbs. 8. Remove four (4) bolts attaching fixturing plate to motor. and loosen screw. Remove and set aside Axial Brake. 3. Note: 12–185 46–296158P1 Axial Motor 1. Remove plastic cover from access hole in Aluminum Encoder fixturing plate. Open front and rear covers. Turn off three (3) switches on status control box on the right side of the gantry. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. (0. Remove gantry side covers.

a.285 inches from pilot on Motor Mounting flange. and the drive pulley on the axial drive motor. move the new motor into proper position. 18. Replace Encoder/Fixturing Plate assembly. Loosen screw on Encoder side of coupling. Rotate the Gantry by hand through three (3) complete revolutions. Swing motor around pivot sector and out of Gantry and lower to the floor. (. Apply 242 Loctite to four mounting bolts and torque to 25 ft–lbs.024 m–kg) 6.024 m–kg) 3. the two idler pulleys. Re–Assemble the Gantry: 1. Install coupling to motor shaft. Torque tensioning adjustment plate bolts to 25 ft–lbs. Torque bolts to 25 ft–lbs. Remove and keep bottom two motor bolts. Retension drive belt by turning idler pulley adjustment screw until spring has a compressed length of 0.024 m–kg) 12–107 . Place hoist into working position and attach hoist strap around motor centered on housing. (. 16. (. To gain clearance for removal of Axial Motor mounting hardware rotate gantry until sagittal laser bracket is positioned near axial motor. a. b. 7. a. Attach the Pulley to the new Motor Shaft and position 0. 19. c. b. Use 242 Loctite on screw. c. Apply 242 Loctite to set screws and torque to 25 ft–lbs.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 15.285 inches. 5. b. 20. Cut ty–raps to free cable from motor. (. 4. Once Axial Motor has been removed from Gantry loosen two 3/8 inch set screws on axial drive pulley and remove pulley from motor shaft. Remove and set aside electrical box cover on motor. Using the hoist. Install Brake Assembly. Perform preliminary idler assembly adjustment so belt is snug.024 m–kg) 2. Remove all slack in hoist strap. Remove remaining two bolts securing motor. Reinstall power cables and secure cable to motor with large ty–raps. Properly position the drive belt on and around the gantry gear ring. 17. Install Encoder/fixturing plate assembly by sliding encoder shaft into coupling and aligning plate mounting holes. d. 21. Remove and keep all 3 conductors of cable.

Restore gantry scan window and covers. Slightly loosen the 3 sync clamps that hold the axial motor encoder in place. 12–108 . h. Tighten the 3 sync clamps to fasten the encoder in the current position. 9. 10. Adjust the C–Pulse. HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 a.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 8. c. Turn on facility power to the PDU. b. Restore system power and verify system operation. Rotate the Gantry until the tube reaches the 12 o’clock position. Please use good service practices. Turn off facility power to the PDU. g. d. Note: Both the STC and DAS power switches must be on. f. Turn on the 120V power switch on the status control box on the right side of the gantry. Place a torpedo level on the machined surface beneath the the collimator and level the gantry. 12–186 46–296320G1 Axial Motor Assm No specific procedure at this time. Note: Do not loosen the sync clamps too much or you will have trouble maintaining the encoder position when the clamps are tightened. Rotate the Axial Motor Encoder until the C–Pulse Light on the Status Control Box remains lit. e.

and loosen screw. 5. Position table to lowest elevation. 7. Disconnect Encoder electrical connection. 16. Turn on the 120V power switch on the status control box on the right side of the gantry. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Remove Encoder from fixturing plate. g. Note: Both the STC and DAS power switches must be on. Rotate the Axial Motor Encoder until the C–Pulse Light on the Status Control Box remains lit. Slightly loosen the 3 sync clamps that hold the axial motor encoder in place.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12–187 46–296854P1 Axial Motor Encoder HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. d. Remove and set aside Gantry Scan Window. 9. Restore gantry scan window and covers. 6. 11. Note: Do not loosen the sync clamps too much or you will have trouble maintaining the encoder position when the clamps are tightened. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Turn off facility power to the PDU. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 3. b. a. Rotate the Gantry until the tube reaches the 12 o’clock position. Adjust the C–Pulse. Loosen/remove three (3) synclamps holding encoder to aluminum fixturing plate. reverse steps 8–12. Use tag and lockout procedures. c. 15. h. Open Front Cover. 14. f. Turn on facility power to the PDU. 12. 4. Tighten the 3 sync clamps to fasten the encoder in the current position. 13. 8. Place a torpedo level on the machined surface beneath the the collimator and level the gantry. Turn off facility power to PDU. Remove plastic cover from access hole in aluminum encoder fixturing plate. e. 2. 12–109 . Restore system power and verify system operation. To reassemble. Rotate gantry until screw of coupling is in–line with access hole in aluminum encoder fixturing plate. 10.

From the rear of the gantry remove the two (2) screws attaching the Board mounting bracket to the main bearing frame and remove assembly from gantry. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 3. 12. 4. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Position table to lowest elevation. Open Rear Cover. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Turn off facility power to PDU–use tag and lockout procedure. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Remove three (3) screws mounting PWB to bracket and remove PWB. 14. 12–189 46–186462G1 Azimuth Circuit Bd 1. Remove left side slip ring cover (as viewed from rear facing forward). Rotate gantry so that tube is at 12 o’clock position. Please use good service practices.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–188 46–296157P1 Axial Motor Pulley HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. 11. 6. 2. Wear grounded wrist strap for steps 12 through 14. Remove two screws fastening PWB cover to right side of upper front main bearing frame and remove cover. 10. 5. 9. Disconnect cable from J1 on circuit board. 12–110 . Open front cover. 8. 13. 7.

To install new backplane reverse the above procedure. 5. 11. from bottom of slot in optical detector. Please use good service practices. 12. 3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of the gantry. Remove left Side Cover. Store all circuit boards in static bags. Loosen 2 screws retaining front cover of STC and remove cover. Remove BNC Connector from front of Axial Control PWB and use extractors to remove PWB. and centered radially back between the slot opening. Remove Ground Strap between the backplane and chassis. Remove two screws from bottom of card cage which fastens the harness bracket to chassis. 18. 12–192 46–183027P94 Backplane–Right. Remove CPU PWB by loosening two (2) captive screws in the front bezel and use extractors to remove from card cage. Loosen two (2) screws retaining the rear STC cover and remove cover. 14. Move table to lowest elevation. Remove three 96 position connectors from Backplane. Turn off facility power to PDU. Please use good service practices. 16.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 15. Remove J4 connector from Backplane inside of card cage. Remove two (2) terminator assemblies from old Backplane. 19. 13. 8. Use tag and lockout procedures. 12–190 46–264802G1 Backplane. 10. Remove gantry side covers. 15. Install new PWB by reversing the above steps. Use extractors to remove SCOM PWB. STC 1. 4. 7. a. 17. Press release tab and rotate card cage into its retracted position. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. 9. EDAS No specific procedure at this time. 12–111 . 2. Using a short screwdriver remove eight (8) 6–32 screws mounting the Backplane to the card cage and remove the Backplane PWB from the STC assembly. 12–191 46–183027P112 Backplane–Left.1 inches ±0. Note: Adjust PWB– center flag in optical detector slot on PWB. Flag depth should be adjusted to 0. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis.02 in. 6. EDAS No specific procedure at this time. 20. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. 21. Remove J5 and J6 BNC Connector from Backplane.

Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Anode AC Pwr Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 12–196 46–296943G1 Cable. AC/Pwr. Use good service practices. 2. Use good ESD procedures. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Use good service practices. Use good ESD procedures. 12–194 46–296948G1 Cable. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 3. 12–112 . Turn OFF power to the connected units. Use good service practices. Axial Drive Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 3. 4. Turn OFF power to the connected units. EDAS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 4. 4. 12–197 46–296947G1 Cable. 2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–193 46–296564G1 Base Harness HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 12–195 46–183027P104 Cable. Use good service practices. 3. 2. 4. 3. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Analog. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. 2. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good ESD procedures. 3. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Use good service practices. Use good ESD procedures. EDAS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1.

Use good ESD procedures. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 12–200 46–183027P103 Cable. 12–199 46–296949G1 Cable. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. DC/Pwr. Ribbon. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 12–201 46–266838G1 Cable. Use good service practices. 3. 2. 3. 12–113 . 4. 2. Use good service practices. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. EDAS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 2. Use good ESD procedures. 2. 3. 3. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Cathode AC Pwr HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. EDAS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Use good service practices. Use good service practices. Digital. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Use good ESD procedures. 4. 4. Use good ESD procedures. EDAS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–198 46–296942G1 Cable.

Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. 7. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. Use approved lifting methods. 4. 12–204 12–114 . Remove cables J1. Inverter No specific procedure at this time. Verify 550 VDC or 120 VAC is not present. 2. 8. 13. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. plastic covered books or non–conductive plastic bags. 9. Position table to lowest elevation. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver board. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. 12–203 53214P40 Capacitor. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag.J2 and J6 from measurement PWB. Open front cover.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–202 46–183027P89 Cal/Aux Bd. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. to the Gantry frame to ensure no voltage at end of cable. 12. Boards must never be placed on non–conductive surfaces such as white bench tops. 45561211 Cathode (Transformer Tank) 1. 6. Measure voltage on two large capacitor to verify 0 volts. 10. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. EDAS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 WARNING GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. 15. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. 3. 5. Ground the ends of the H. Use rags or paper toweling to wipe excess oil from High Voltage Cable Connector and tank well. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Rotate gantry so that Cathode HV transformer tank is at the 3 o’clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 11. 14.V. Please use good service practices. Use spanner wrench to remove high voltage cable connector from high voltage transformer tank.

12–205 45435962 Cathode Inverter 1. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 10. 5. 17. Attach hoist lifting chain to eyebolt on transformer tank and remove slack from chain. Again wipe excess oil with rags or toweling. 9. 18.V. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure.V. Position table to lowest elevation.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 16. 21. cable strain relief. 11. 24. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Cut ty–raps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly 19. Rotate Gantry so that cathode inverter is at the 3:00 o’clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. Verify 550 VDC or 120 VAC is not present. Cut ty–raps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly. 15. 25. 20. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2. Open front cover.V. Use spanner wrench to tighten securely and wipe excess oil with rags or toweling. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2. 4. After installation is complete rotate gantry to verify cable clearance and to drain excess oil from H. 3. Note: When installing four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts torque to 25 ft–lbs (3. 14. Before installing HV Cable Connector add 20 cc of dielectric oil to the HV Connector well in the HV Transformer Tank. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. 12–115 . 8. Disconnect 550VDC cable from capacitor PWB. 7. Measure voltage on two large capacitor to verify 0 volts.462 m–kg). Attach hoist to boom arm in gantry. 16. Remove two(2) inverter output leads from H. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. 22. 12.V. 13. Remove two (2) inverter output leads from H. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. Install new transformer tank by reversing the above steps. Use tool to remove four (4) bolts which fasten transformer tank to rotating base. Disconnect 550 VDC cable from capacitor PWB. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. 6. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fasten inverter assembly to H. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver PWB. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. Use hoist to lower transformer tank to floor. 23.

9.use tag and lock-out procedures. 10. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver PWB. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. Disconnect 550 VDC cable from capacitor PWB. 3. Turn off facility power to PDU .462 m-kg).V. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Measure voltage on two large capacitor to verify 0 volts. 18.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13 HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100 17. 18. To install new inverter assembly reverse the above steps. 11. 4. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 5. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. Open top cover and engage prop rod. Rotate Gantry so that cathode inverter is at the 3:00 o'clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 2.V. To install new inverter assembly reverse the above steps.V.462 m-kg). Cut ty-raps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly. 5. Remove two(2) inverter output leads from H. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. Open front cover. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fastens inverter assembly to H. 14. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. 13. 16. 15. use Loctite 242 and torque to 25 ft-lbs (3. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fastens inverter assembly to H. Position table to lowest elevation. Note: When installing four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts. Note: When installing four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts. 12-207 45554264 or 2100553 Cathode Transformer Tank Measurement Bd 1. Turn off facility power to PDU . 4. 8. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 6. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. 7. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2. use Loctite 242 and torque to 25 ft-lbs (3. 12. 17. 2. 12-206 46-297703P2 Cathode Inverter 1. 3.use tag and lockout procedure. 12-116 . Position table to lowest elevation. Lift top cover and engage prop rod.

7. Remove 6 screws and washers that mount measurement board to High Voltage Supply. (See Table 12–3. J5. 12–208 46–296300G4 Collimator Assm The SmartBeam collimator.and J6 10. 9.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 10 6. Unplug connectors J1. Systems with G1. backwards compatible with G1 Excess parts removed from collimator assembly.4 or RP2. Note: Carefully align connector pins from Interface Measurement Board to Round Interface Board on High Voltage Supply. · TABLE 12–3 HSA COLLIMATOR HISTORY Model Number 46–296300G1 46–296300G2 46–296300G3 46–296300G4 46–296300G5 Comments Original HiSpeed Advantage Collimator Aperture modified to reduce x–ray scatter.2 software to enable operation of the SmartBeam filter. HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8. Rotate Measurement Board to 3:00 position. Failure to update the software could result in Image Quality and dose issues. backwards compatible with G1 and G2 More durable Aluminum Carbon (AlC) SmartBeam filter replaces Teflon filter in collimator. Open front cover. RP 1. 11.4 or RP2. and eventually. Carefully pry measurement board off High Voltage Tank.5 software releases.J2. replaces the G3 version in forward production. G2 or G3 collimators: You must install RP1.) · · The system requires an option key and RP1. but the presence of the SmartBeam filter increases the required number of scans per kV. backwards compatible with G1.6 and RP 2.2 release software and calibrate the system when you replace one of the older collimators with the G4 version. G3. as FRU for the installed base of G1. The Calibration procedures remain the same. G2. below. The system automatically adjusts the screens to show the correct number of scans. 12. Remove scan window. Provides higher reliability 12–117 . Replace Measurement Board. 46–296300G4. G2 and G3 collimators. G2 and G3 collimators Backward compatible with G1. and G4 with HSA–ZE.

Align collimator: Verify that the table has been withdrawn from the tube and the detector field of view. 3. 5. Also. Available functions for CBF and SAG alignment are: · Default CBF Scan (Also used for SAG calculation) · · List/Select DD Files Store DD Result File Results display for CBF and SAG are: · Success of failure of scan performed. 14. J4 at OBC. If the Calculated CBF values is not in specification (373. 8.75 ±0.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 10 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. the SAG will be calculated and displayed. Update the Collimator characterization table by entering the corresponding numbers from the Collimator Rating plate. · Touch |CBF Scan| (Push scan enable when lit) Upon completion of the scan the average centroid value for the CBF will be automatically displayed along with the collimator movement recommendations. Also. 15. Disconnect the J1 harness from left side of Collimator. Turn off facility power to PDU– use tag and lock–out procedure. 12–118 . Remove hardware. Remove old Collimator.2). washers. if any. the collimator will have to be adjusted by the amount displayed on the CRT via the following steps: Wait 5 minutes between exposures. · · Collimator adjustment recommendations (if required). the last ISO Air.J3. Disconnect J2. the average of the small and large spot isocenter value will be displayed. 13. Remove and keep four (4) 1/4–20 bolts. 6. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. SAG measurement value. · Touch |CBF and SAG| Note: On the CBF and SAG screen. The sequence of sort keys required to perform a CBF and SAG scan/calculation is as follows. Open Front Cover. Turn off all three switches on status control box on right side of Gantry. beginning from the tube alignment screen. 11. 4. Position table to lowest elevation. 12. Rotate Gantry until the Collimator is at the 6 o’clock position. Disconnect the electrical connections to the Collimator. Remove scan window 7. Replace Collimator. Nothing shall obstruct the attenuation of the X–Ray beam to detector window. 10. and lock washers that hold collimator in place. Verify the Large Air ISO Air CAl is selected. Lift Top Cover and engage prop rod.DD filename will be the default isocal applied for CBF and SAG calculation. 9. 2. Note weight is 42lbs. Remove and keep two nuts on adjustment bracket from right side of collimator. (19kgs).

Put on grounding wrist strap. 2. 12–210 46–321276G1 Collimator Bd 1. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 5. Repeat CBF scans and this adjustment until the CBF specification is satisfied. 2. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. Zero out the gauge and loosen the four mounting bolts of the collimator which are located at the four slotted holes of the collimator. 5. CRT displays CBF adjustments in up and down direction. 8. Remove gauge and holding fixture from Gantry. 7. 6. 4. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 5. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. Place board in Static Bag.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Mount the gauge and its nonmagnetic holding fixture to the special mounting bracket of the collimator. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 12–119 . Record the CBF and SAG values on data sheet. 3. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap. and DOWN = collimator movement to the left. Put on grounding wrist strap. lbs. 4. (120 ±12 in. Install new board by reversing the above steps. lbs). 6. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. Install new board by reversing the above steps. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. The torque requirement on the four lock bolts is 5 ±0. Bolt down the collimator. 2. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 7. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box.5 ft. To reassemble. reverse steps. Adjust the 3/4 inch bolt (located at the end of the collimator) to move the collimator right or left the required amount. 3. 3. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 8. 16. 12–211 46–321276G1 Collimator II Bd 1. 12–209 46–288856G1 Collimator Bd 1. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. UP=Collimator movement to the right. Place board in Static Bag.

Move table to lowest elevation. 13.S. 8. Remove gantry side covers. 3. 4. 12–212 46–251198P37 Collimator PS 1. Use tag and lockout procedures. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. e. 7. Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures) 16. Install new supply by reversing steps 11 through 14 above. Place board in Static Bag. Connect negative voltmeter lead to –OUT terminal on power supply. Engage gantry rotational lock. Open Front Cover. 11. Unsolder Black and White leads from terminals: one (1) and (2) on the Power Supply Transformer. d.5VDC. 5. 2. 12. 12–213 46–296885P1 Communication PS 1. 14. 6. Collimator P. Unsolder Red and Black leads from (+) and (–) power supply output terminals. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power assembly cover and remove cover. Reassemble Gantry by reversing steps 1 through 10 above. Input leads: Black to transformer terminal one (1) White to transformer terminal two (2) Output leads: Red to PWB terminal (+) OUT Black to PWB terminal (–) OUT 15. 2. b. c. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. Move table to lowest elevation. 7. Turn voltage adjustment pot to adjust the output voltage to 39. Energize 24hr AC Pwr on Gantry. Use tag and lockout procedures. 8.5 ±0. 3. Turn off facility power to PDU. output checks: a. Remove scan window. 10. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power assembly is at the 3 o’clock position. Remove gantry side covers. Install new board by reversing the above steps. Turn off facility power to PDU. Remove and save four (4) screws mounting collimator power supply to gantry. 12–120 . 9.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6. Connect positive voltmeter lead to +OUT terminal on power supply.

Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures). 6. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 13. Remove two AC leads from line filter. 7. 5.25 VDC. Install new power supply by reversing steps 9 through 13 above. 4. Connect positive voltmeter lead to pin 1 of J3. Communication P. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. output check: a.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 4. Remove four (4) screws mounting power supply to bracket and remove supply. Note location of connector for later replacement.S. Remove four (4) screws mounting assembly to gantry and remove assembly from gantry. Turn the voltage adjustment pot to adjust the output voltage to read 12. Remove scan window. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Open rear gantry cover. Remove DC connector (J3) from assembly. Remove 25 pin sub D connector from Intercom PWB. c. 8. 12–215 45435961 CTVRC Power Module 1. 7. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Turn off facility power to PDU. Move table to lowest elevation. Connect negative voltmeter lead to pin 2 of J3. Energize Gantry 24hr AC power. d. 5. Note location of each lead. 3. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 2. e. 16. 6. Use tag and lockout procedures. 10. 12–214 46–288858G1 CTVRC Control Board 1. 11. 12–121 . 15. Install new board by reversing the above steps. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 o’clock position and engage rotational lock. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. Place board in Static Bag. 14. Put on grounding wrist strap. b. 9. 2. 12. 3. Remove three (3) connectors from power supply.0 ±0. Reassemble Gantry by reversing steps 1 through 8 above. 8.

Remove gantry side covers. 3. Remove mounting hardware from switch and remove switch from base of DAS power supply assembly. 5. Remove two (2) leads from DAS power supply switch. 14. 8. 4. Remove gantry side covers. 8. Disconnect Stator Cable connector from X–Ray Tube (J10). 15. 2. Remove and keep 4 bolts that mount CTVRC to Filament Power assembly. Use tag and lockout procedures. 19. reverse steps. 10. Turn off facility power to PDU. Rotate gantry so that OBC is at the 3 o’clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 16. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 6. Loosen four (4) captive screws on DAS Power Supply cover and remove. 7. Remove CTVRC.J9) from Gate Driver/ Filter Board. 7. 20. Replace CTVRC. Open front cover. Remove 550 Volt leads from CTVRC control board. 17. 4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. Move table to lowest elevation. Turn off facility power to PDU. 12–217 46–251198P30 DC PS (EDAS). 18. Engage gantry rotational lock. 2. 5. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power assembly is at the 3 o’clock position. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 7. Remove scan window. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Loosen four (4) captive screws on Filament Power assembly cover and remove cover. 9. 12. Remove 2 Feedback connectors (J3. 6.. 12–216 46–136343P12 DAS Pwr Switch 1. Remove 120 Volt AC connector (J6) from Board. 3. Measure voltage across filter capacitor to verify that bleeder resistor has dissipated energy to a safe level. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Use tag and lockout procedures. 6. Remove scan window. 12–122 . Install new switch by reversing the above steps. 15V 1. Remove hardware that mounts support bracket to back of CTVRC base. 13. Open Front Cover. 11. To reassemble.

b. DAS P. c. 7. 4. Connect positive voltmeter lead to +OUT terminal. 8. 10. d. 5V 1. Lift top cover and engage prop rod.25 VDC. e. 12–218 46–251198P26 DC PS (EDAS). 11. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3:00 position. Remove scan window. 9. b. Use tag and lockout procedures.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8. Unsolder Leads from Power Supply. Open front cover. 12–123 . 12. 6. 14.S. Remove 2 standoffs from Power Supply near Regulator Board. Remove 4 standoffs mounting Power Supply to DAS assembly. Remove 2 screws and 2 nuts mounting Power Supply to bracket near transformer. output check: a. Note: ITEM 46–251198P26 only a. Remove 4 standoffs mounting Power Supply to DAS assembly. Reassemble Gantry by reversing steps. Move table to lowest elevation. Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures). Turn the voltage adjustment pot to adjust the output voltage to read between 15.0 and 15. Loosen 4 captive screws holding DAS Power Supply Cover and remove. Replace Power Supply. 5. Remove gantry side covers. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 13. 12. Replace Power Supply. 9. Turn off facility power to PDU. 11. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3:00 position. Connect negative voltmeter lead to –OUT terminal. Unsolder Leads from Power Supply. Note: Note Location of Leads connected to Power Supply. 2. 10. Energize Gantry 24hr AC power. Loosen 4 captive screws holding DAS Power Supply Cover and remove. Note: Note Location of Leads connected to Power Supply.

reverse steps. Energize Gantry 24hr AC power. c. 6. 2. 12–124 . 4. Move table to lowest elevation. 7.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 13. Connect positive voltmeter lead to the red lead on output filter capacitor. 14. Use tag and lockout procedures. Use an insulated screwdriver of the appropriate size to rotate the voltage adjustment potentiometer on the power supply regulator PWB until the output voltage falls between 5. d. Open Front Cover. The voltage reading should be 23–32 VDC. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures). To reassemble. White to transformer terminal three.00 and 5. Remove gantry side covers. b. 13. DAS 5V Power Supply Output Check: Attach appropriate measuring devices to the DC output terminals of the DAS 5V supply. Output leads :Red to Filter Capacitor Terminal marked (+). 5. 15. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 11. Unsolder Black and White leads from transformer terminals one (1) and three (3). 13. Detector Heater P. Turn off facility power to PDU.25 VDC. Turn OFF the AC power to gantry. Reassemble Gantry by reversing steps 1 through 10 above. output check: a. Measure voltage across filter capacitor to verify that bleeder resistor has dissipated energy to a safe level.. Install new power supply by reversing steps 12. Black to remaining capacitor terminal. 14. 14. Remove and save the four (4) screws mounting the Detector Heater Power Supply to the gantry. 12.S. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power assembly is at the 3 o’clock position. Loosen four (4) captive screws on Filament Power Assembly cover and remove cover. 12–219 46–297104P1 Detector Heater PS 1. 8. Remove scan window. Note: Input leads:Black to transformer terminal one (1). 10. Connect negative voltmeter lead to the black lead on output filter capacitor. 17. 15. 16. 9. 3. Engage gantry rotational lock. Remove Red and Black leads from output capacitor by removing the two screws connecting the leads to the filter capacitor. Turn ON the Gantry AC power at the A1 panel and service switch box.

From the bottom of the control assembly locate the detector heater relay (normally open) and remove the four (4) leads attached to positions 1 through 4. Align Laser light. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO THE EYES. 13. 13. Turn off facility power to PDU –use tag and lockout procedure. Position table to lowest elevation. Open Front Cover. 12. 8.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–220 46–188067P1 Detector Heater Relay HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Bottom – (12V) WARNING WARNING: NEVER STARE INTO THE LASER ALIGNMENT LIGHT BEAM. 12–221 46–297301G3 Diode Laser. Turn off facility power to PDU. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. 3. Use tag and lockout procedures. 8. Remove 4 screws which mount control assembly to the back of the OBC. 10. reverse steps 2–9. 1. 4. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 2. Rotate Gantry so that OBC is at the 3 o’clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. Replace new laser assembly. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. Position the table to lowest elevation. Install new relay by reversing the above steps. (Right Side –G1. 14. 3. 5. Remove connectors J1 through J5 from control assembly. Left Side –G2 Bottom–G3) 2. 11. 7. 5. 12–125 . 11. Disconnect the electrical connection at the LASER Assembly to be replaced. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 9. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 9. Remove two (2) nuts attaching relay to chassis and remove relay. Remove appropriate LASER Assembly by removing three (3) bolts. Determine which of the three assemblies need to be replaced. Open front cover. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 10. Reconnect electrical connections. Remove scan window. 7. To reassemble. 6. 12.

1. 12. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 9. Position the table to lowest elevation. LS – (12V) WARNING NEVER STARE INTO THE LASER ALIGNMENT LIGHT BEAM. Remove appropriate LASER Assembly by removing three (3) bolts. 7. 11. 1. 6. 5. To reassemble. Replace new laser assembly. 14. Turn off facility power to PDU. 12. 13. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 12–223 46–297301G2 Diode Laser. Position the table to lowest elevation. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Turn off facility power to PDU. Remove scan window. (Right Side –G1. Left Side –G2 Bottom–G3) 2. Determine which of the three assemblies need to be replaced. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 11. 14. Reconnect electrical connections. Left Side –G2 Bottom–G3) 2. 3. 8. reverse steps. 3. 4. 4. Replace new laser assembly. 5. 12–126 . Align Laser light. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. Bottom – (5V) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 WARNING WARNING: NEVER STARE INTO THE LASER ALIGNMENT LIGHT BEAM. 10. 9. 8. 6. Open Front Cover. reverse steps 2–9. To reassemble. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. (Right Side –G1. Remove appropriate LASER Assembly by removing three (3) bolts. Disconnect the electrical connection at the LASER Assembly to be replaced. Align Laser light. Reconnect electrical connections. Disconnect the electrical connection at the LASER Assembly to be replaced.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–222 46–327058G3 Diode Laser. Remove scan window. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO THE EYES. Use tag and lockout procedures. Open Front Cover. Determine which of the three assemblies need to be replaced. 10. Use tag and lockout procedures. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO THE EYES. 13. 7.

Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 4. Remove scan window. Position the table to lowest elevation. 12. 10. 7. Left Side –G2 Bottom–G3) 2. 1. 9. 6. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO THE EYES. 12–127 . Replace new laser assembly. 9. Disconnect the electrical connection at the LASER Assembly to be replaced. 4. 13. Reconnect electrical connections. 12–225 46–297301G1 Diode Laser. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO THE EYES. Determine which of the three assemblies need to be replaced. 1. Open Front Cover.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–224 46–327058G2 Diode Laser. 8. 3. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. Use tag and lockout procedures. LS – (5V) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 WARNING WARNING: NEVER STARE INTO THE LASER ALIGNMENT LIGHT BEAM. Reconnect electrical connections. Turn off facility power to PDU. Left Side –G2 Bottom–G3) 2. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 11. 7. Position the table to lowest elevation. Replace new laser assembly. (Right Side –G1. 10. Align Laser light. Determine which of the three assemblies need to be replaced. 5. 11. Turn off facility power to PDU. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 14. (Right Side –G1. Use tag and lockout procedures. Remove appropriate LASER Assembly by removing three (3) bolts. Open Front Cover. Remove appropriate LASER Assembly by removing three (3) bolts. 8. 3. 12. reverse steps 2–9. 6. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Disconnect the electrical connection at the LASER Assembly to be replaced. To reassemble. RS – (12V) WARNING WARNING: NEVER STARE INTO THE LASER ALIGNMENT LIGHT BEAM. 5. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Remove scan window.

Turn off facility power to PDU. Remove scan window. Install the two bearings on the pin and install on the support arm. Align Laser light. 4. reverse steps 2–9. Disconnect the electrical connection at the LASER Assembly to be replaced. Remove appropriate LASER Assembly by removing three (3) bolts. Remove the two nylon 8/32 x . 1. 2.500 machine screws holding the cover plate and remove cover plate 4. Remove the four 1/4x20 machine screws holding gantry module 2. 12.25 machine screws holding the support arms and standoffs and remove the support arms and standoffs 5. Open Front Cover. reverse steps 2–9. Left Side –G2 Bottom–G3) 2. Complete this assembly procedure on both support arms. (Right Side –G1. 11. 6. 12–128 . 12–226 46–327058G1 Diode Laser. 9. Replace new laser assembly. 8.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 13. Align Laser light. Remove the four 1/4x20 x 3. HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 14. Install Gantry Display: 1. 13. 5. 12–227 46–296341G1 Gantry Display Assm Gantry Display Replacement Procedure Remove Gantry Display: 1. To reassemble. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 7. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. Remove the two cable clamps from the left support arm. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO THE EYES. RS – (5V) WARNING WARNING: NEVER STARE INTO THE LASER ALIGNMENT LIGHT BEAM. 10. 6. Attach two cable clamps to the left support arm. To reassemble. Disconnect the display cable and remove the gantry display from the support arms 3. Remove the two bearings on the pin from the support arm. Reconnect electrical connections. 3. Position the table to lowest elevation. Perform this task for both arms. 14. Use tag and lockout procedures. Determine which of the three assemblies need to be replaced.

12–230 46–296221P15 32kVA Xfmr. To reassemble. 2. reverse steps. 2. 3. Disconnect wires from C4. The gantry display installation is now complete. CR1–CR3 1. F13 1. Replace Varistor. Pry fuse out. F10–F12 1. NOTE: DO NOT PRY ON FUSE. NOTE: DO NOT PRY ON FUSE. Attach the Gantry module to the display assembly with four 1/4x20 x .500 machine screws 5. Remove and keep 3 screws from bar. 2. Replace Fuse. 4. reverse steps. 3. Mount the cover plate to the support arms with two nylon 8/32 x . F14–F16 1. Remove bolt and washer. 6. Remove screw next to Varistor. 4. Remove screws. CR4–CR6 1. 2. 12–229 46–170026P17 32 kVA Xfmr. 2. WARNING WARNING 12–129 . Remove bolt and washer. 12–232 46–313346P1 32kVA Xfmr. To reassemble. Power Distribution Unit (PDU) 12–228 46–170026P14 32kVA Xfmr. Route and connect the display cable and attach the gantry display to the support arms making sure that display is seated properly.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 3. Leaving wires attached to bar remove bar to Varistor screws that hold varistor to fuse panel. Replace Fuse.C5 and C6. 12–231 46–170021P85 32kVA Xfmr. Replace Fuse. Mount the support arms and the standoffs to the Gantry with four 1/4x20 x 3.25 machine screws.nuts and washers and disconnect wires.75 machine screws. 4.

4. F4–F6 1. 8. 5. Replace Fuse. 3. Safety Check:Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. Remove 2 screws on right side mounting bracket of Amplifier.TS1–L2. Unplug connector J2 from DCRGS Regulator Control Board. 12–237 45433453 AC Inductor 1. reverse steps. Use fuse puller to remove fuse from fuseholder. 2. Loosen 4 screws and washers that mount AC Inductor to DCRGS main panel. Replace Fuse. 7. Replace Fuse. To reassemble. The check should be between TS–1. Pry out end of fuse with screwdriver or fuseholder. Unplug Connector J7B from SCR Bridge Gate Driving Board.1. and TS1–L3. Replace AC Inductor. Remove Amplifier. 3. 12–130 . 2. 4. Remove 3 screws from each mounting bracket at top of amplifier. 3. Use fuse puller to remove fuse from fuseholder. 7. 6. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 12–236 46–170021P84 32kVA Xfmr. Loosen 2 screws on left side mounting bracket of amplifier. reverse steps.T2 and T3. F17–F19 (Top Board) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. F7–F9 1. 2. Disconnect and set aside Cable from J1. F20. 2. Remove 3 wires from SCR Bridge Terminals –TS1–L1. Pry Fuse out. Disconnect and push aside wires from TB–401.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–233 46–170021P44 32kVA Xfmr. 12–238 46–296136P1 Westamp Amplifier 1. To reassemble. 6. 2. Remove 3 leads from Backup Contactor Terminals: T1. TS–2 and TS–1 or TS–2 to ground. 12–235 46–170021P86 32kVA Xfmr. 12–234 46–170021P96 32kVA Xfmr. F21 (Top Board) 1. Replace Fuse. Replace Fuse. 2. 5. Pry Fuse out.

6. 12. The check should be between TS–1. Remove and keep 4 screws from standoff. reverse steps. 3. Note: The spacers will fall out when you remove the screws. Remove 3 wires from Backup Contactor Input Terminals L1–L3. 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–239 46–297910P1 Allen Bradley Servo Amplifier HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 14. 8. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Remove the cover. Remove the nut attaching the ground lead to the ground stud located at the lower right corner of the Servo amplifier. Remove connectors J1. 11. Remove the ground lead from the stud. Replace Circuit Board. 5. S–2 and TS–1 or TS–2 to ground. Remove 3 wires from Backup Contactor Output Terminals T1–T3. 4. 3. Remove four (4) position option connectors from the Logic Control PWB. 12–241 54261P92 Backup Contactor 1. J2. 7. Remove connectors from TB1 and TB2 and the left side of the Logic Control PWB. 2. Remove and keep 3 screws and washers that mount Backup Contactor to DCRGS Main Panel. reverse steps. Remove and set aside cable from J1. To reassemble. Remove and Replace Backup Contactor. 9. Remove seven (7) leads from the terminal strip on the right side of the amplifier and keep. Loosen three (3) screws fastening Logic Control PWB cover to Servo amplifier. 2. Remove the four (4) nuts attaching the axial interface PWB cover to the Servo assembly. and J3 from axial interface PWB. 12–240 46–288748G1 Axial Drive Filter Bd 1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. 10. Remove three (3) screws fastening Logic Control PWB cover to Servo panel. 13. To reassemble. Remove and keep the three (3) nuts mounting the Servo amplifier to the Servo panel. 4. Lift and remove cover. 4. 5. Replace by reversing the above steps. 12–131 . 6. Remove the Servo amplifier.

12–244 46–296409P1 Capacitor 6100 microF 350V electrolytic WARNING AFTER POWER IS OFF. Please use good service practices. Replace Capacitor. Remove 2 wires from terminals. 2. With Safety Glasses short terminals with screwdriver. Remove 4 screws and washers on right side of DCRGS Panel that allow Main Panel to swing out. To reassemble. ALLOW 45 SECONDS FOR THE CAPACITOR TO PARTIALLY DISCHARGE. Note: Insure correct polarity of capacitor. 6. 7. 3. 12–245 46–296206G1 Ckt Bkr Assm (West AMP) No specific procedure at this time. Loosen Capacitor Bracket. 46–296206G1 Circuit Breaker Assm (West AMP) No specific procedure at this time. 1. Remove and set aside Cover by removing 2 screws. reverse steps. Please use good service practices. 12–243 53214P33 Capacitor 1. Safety Step:Verify no Voltage on Capacitors C1and C2. 2. 5. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 3. 5. 4. 12–246 12–247 12–132 . Please use good service practices.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–242 46–229598P3 Blue Switch. 6. 46–327109G1 Ckt Bkr Assm (Allen Bradley) 1. To reassemble. 2.TS–2 and TS–1 or TS–2 to ground. PDU HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. 4. 3. Loosen screw in mounting clamp. Remove leads from terminals of Capacitor to be replaced. Remove Capacitor. J2 and J3 from the Axial Interface PWB. Remove cover. Remove connectors J1. reverse steps. Remove (4) position options connectors from Logic Control PWB. The check should be between TS–1. Remove (4) nuts attaching Axial Interface PWB cover to Servo Assm. 4. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly.

12–248 46–170021P29 Ckt Bkr Assm. Remove Servo Amplifier. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. Loosen (3) screws fastening Logic Control PWB cover to Servo Amplifier. Replace. Remove Circuit Breaker Cover and 4 sets of attaching hardware. Remove and keep 7 leads from terminal strips on right side of Servo Amplifier. 6.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. 14. 12–251 46–221905P21 Ckt Breaker: 15 Amp 2 P. located at the lower right corner of the Servo Amplifier. Lift off cover and set aside. 12–250 46–221905P2 Ckt Breaker: 15 Amp 1 P CB16. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. Remove nut attaching ground lead to ground stud. Remove 3 nuts mounting Servo Amplifier to Servo Panel. 2. 10. Pry out fuse. To reassemble. 3. 2. Remove and keep four (4) screws from Cover. 2. 11. CB14 1. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. 2. 3. 18. To reassemble. Gently pry fuse out of holder. 12–249 46–297069P1 Ckt Bkr Assm. 9. 21. 22 1. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. 13. 4. F4–F6 1. Replace by reversing the above steps. reverse steps. 12–133 . Remove and keep four (4) screws from Cover. 8. To reassemble. F1–F3 1. 12–252 46–221905P3 Ckt Breaker: 20 Amp 1P CB19 1. Remove (3) screws fastening Logic Control PWB cover to Servo Panel. Lift and remove cover. 12. Lift off cover and set aside. 3. reverse steps. Remove and set aside cover and 4 sets of hardware. Remove connectors from TB1 and TB2 on left side of Logic Control PWB. Remove ground lead from stud. 3. 2. 5. 20. 7. reverse steps.

PDU No specific procedure at this time. 5.4.6. To reassemble. Please use good service practices. A 1 and A 2.23 (Allen Bradley Modification ) 1. Loosen wire retaining screws.5. 12–254 46–221905P32 Ckt Breaker: 25 Amp 3P CB1. 5.13. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. PDU 1. Remove and set aside cover and 4 sets of hardware. Remove and keep 4 screws from Cover. reverse steps. Lift off cover and set aside. To reassemble. 12–256 46–296138P1 Contactor. 2. 5. reverse steps. 3. reverse steps.3. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. To reassemble. 3.11. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. Remove and keep 4 screws from Cover.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 3. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. 5.11 1. 12–257 46–297456P1 FRU 1. 12–134 . 4. reverse steps. 6. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. 2. Lift off cover and set aside.14. 4. 4. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. 2. reverse steps. Remove and keep 4 screws from Cover. 12–255 46–221905P35 Ckt Breaker: 40 Amp 3P CB23 1.6. 3. Lift off cover and set aside. and 6. To reassemble. Remove and set aside Contactor mounting hardware and Contactor. 12–253 46–221905P32 Ckt Breaker: 25 Amp 3P CB1. Remove wires from terminals 1. Loosen screws at terminals 2. 4. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. 4. 5. 2. 3. To reassemble.

Replace DC Inductor.) DCRGS STC Interface Cable from DCRGS Regulator Control Bd. Static Sensitive Devices 1. TS2–3. TS1–3. Remove wires from SCR Bridge TS2 –plus and TS2– minus. Disconnect 550 Volt (HVDC) Return Wire from TS2–1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. Remove wire from DCRGS assembly. Remove 4 screws and washers that mount DC Inductor to DCRGS Main Panel.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 12–258 45433455 DC Inductor HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Disconnect Wires · · · · · · · · · · 3. 8. · · · · Verify Voltage Check at Terminal. The Check between TS–1 and TS–2 with TS–1 or TS –2 to Ground. (J4). 7. Disconnect 550 Volt (HVDC) Cable Shield from DCRGS ASM Ground Stud Disconnect 120 Volt (AC) Terminal from SCR Bridge (Gate Firing Bd. 12–135 . 3. 12–259 45433770 DCRGS Do not touch Circuit Boards unless you are wearing Ground Strap. 5. Loosen 8 screws that mount DCRGS assembly to PDU Cabinet. Verify there is no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals at PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Set 50/60 Hz jumper at J10 of the Enerpro SCR Bridge (Gate Firing Board) in the proper position. The check should be between TS–1. F2 and F3 Two wires to Back up Contactor coil (A2 & A1) Two wires to auxiliary contact of Back up Contactor (13 & 14) Disconnect three input wires from 480 Volt (VAC) fuses on DCRGS ASM Disconnect 550 Volt (HVDC) Output Wire from TS1–1. 4. Unplug connector J3 from DCRGS Regulator Control Board. TS–2 and TS–1 or TS–2 to ground. To reassemble. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. 4. 6. Replace DCRGS. Remove wire from DCRGS assembly. 5. reverse steps. Proceed with Safety Check. Three wires from Back up Contactor on DCRGS ASM Three wires from F1. Strip 1 and 2 (TS 1& 2).

Repeat for remaining 3 screws and set aside fan. 3. reverse steps. J3. 2. 12–264 54367P40 Fuse. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. Please use good service practices. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. J2. Using a 7/64 hex driver place screwdriver through unused mounting hole to remove screw that holds fan to grill. 5. Please use good service practices. 2. Remove 4 screws from the top of the PDU that hold Fan assembly to PDU while holding Fan assembly with one hand. J6. J4. Remove 4 screws and washers holding DCRGS Control Board to SCR Bridge. 12–263 46–203134P5 Filter. PDU No specific procedure at this time. 6.TS–2 and TS–1 or TS–2 to ground. 3. Please use good service practices. Remove and Replace Fuse. DCRGS 1. 12–261 46–296407G1 Display Assm No specific procedure at this time. Remove 480 Volt Safety Cover from DCRGS Regulator Control Board. 2. and J7. 12–136 . To reassemble. Remove and replace Board. TS–2 and TS–1 or TS–2 to ground. 5. J5. 4. Detach Connector from Fan Assembly. To replace. Unplug connectors from DCRGS Regulator Control Board–J1. 12–265 46–229598P1 Green Switch. PDU No specific procedure at this time. The check should be between TS–1. reverse the above procedure.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–260 45433754 DCRGS Control Bd HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly The check should be between TS–1. 12–262 46–297803P1 Fan Assm. 4. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. PDU 1.

Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Turn OFF power to the connected units. To reassemble. Remove hardware at terminals and push aside wire end. Remove and keep 4 screws. 12–137 . Use good service practices. Unplug wires at back of Indicator. 12–268 46–297041G1 Harness. To reassemble. Please use good service practices. External Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 4. 12–267 46–297039G1 Harness. Remove screw at top and bottom of panel. Reverse to reassemble. Pry off retaining ring from back of Lamp. Indicator is attached to panel. 3. 3. Ckt Breaker Assm. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Use good service practices. Replace Inductor. 6. 3. 4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–266 46–297479G1 Guard Assm HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. Ckt Breaker Assm. 4. 5. reverse steps. Unplug Harness from back of Panel. 3. Elapsed Time 1. 12–269 46–296127P1 Indicator. Servo Output 1. 125V. Remove and keep 3 screws and nuts holding Indicator to panel. 2. 4. 2. 2. 12–271 46–229342P2 Lamp Assm. Use good ESD procedures. Remove Spade Terminals from Lamp assembly 2. reverse steps. Green. Remove Indicator. DS1–DS6 1. 12–270 46–327154P1 Inductor. Separate panel and Indicator assembly from PDU. 2. Internal Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 3. Use good ESD procedures.

Loosen 2 screws and washers that mount current Transformer (T1) to DCRGS Main Panel. 7. TS–2 and TS–1 or TS–2 to ground. 4. Install new heater element. 3. Discard ring and lamp. reverse steps. Fully depress reset button on K1 relay to enable. 2. Remove and set aside Loopback Connector. Wait for at least 1 minute after power off for capacitors to discharge. 12–276 46–264888G1 PWA Relay Ctrl PRECONDITION: Check Label and follow safety instructions. 5. 3. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS Asm. The check should be between TS–1. 12–275 45433456 Output Current Transformer 1. 1. Disconnect wires from back of Lamp. 2. 4. 6. 4. Remove (2) screws which fasten the heater element to the K1 relay. To reassemble. Replace lamp. 4. 3. Unplug connector J7 from the DCRGS Control Board. 6. Replace Transformer. 12–273 46–297594G1 Loopback Connector No specific procedure at this time. Detach all connectors. reverse above using new board.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–272 46–229342P2 Lamp Panel Assm. to panel and set board and hardware aside. 12–274 46–222200P1 O/L Relay Element 1. Replace (2) screws which fasten heater element to K1. Unplug all cables. 3. Remove 4 spacers and 7 screws that hold the Relay Control Bd. 5. reverse the above steps. Remove the heater element. To replace. Please use good service practices. To reassemble. Remove and set aside Front Cover and 4 sets of mounting hardware. Remove the wire from DCRGS TS1–2 and remove wire from current Transformer (T1). 12–138 . 2. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. DS1–DS4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 2. 5.

Remove and keep mounting screws from contactor base. Remove corner screws holding the rear plate to the AP and remove rear plate. Remove 2 leads from auxiliary contact. To reassemble. unplug cords going into J1 and J2. 5. At the back of the AP. Reconnect cables to J1 and J2. Axial Drive 1. 4. Replace Relay. 7. 12–278 46–186852P2 Relay Contactor. 12–139 . 15A. Disconnect wires going to the receptacle. 12–280 46–194361P17 Rem Box Light No specific procedure at this time. 2. Reconnect 3 screws on the outside. Remove leads from 6 contact terminals. 4. 6. 6. 3. 3. Axial Drive Current Sensing No specific procedure at this time. Insert new receptacle. 2. Reconnect wires to the receptacle. Pull out the receptacle. reverse steps. 5. 4. 125VAC HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove old receptacle: 1. 12–279 46–327087P1 Relay. Reattach 4 corner screws.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–277 46–278446P1 Receptacle. Install new receptacle: 1. Reinstall back plate. Remove 3 screws from the outside. Pull the receptacle assembly out. 5. Please use good service practices. 2. Remove and keep 2 screws mounting auxiliary contact to main contactor body. 6. Remove 2 leads from relay coil. 3. Please use good service practices.

5. 4. 50W. Remove and replace Resistor. The check should be between TS–1. and TS2– (plus) and (minus). 12–283 46–296415P2 Resistor. 6. Note the placement of the washers. Safety Step: Verify no Voltage on Capacitors. 2.TS–2 and TS–1 or TS–2 to ground. nuts and washers holding wires to the resistor terminals. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. 6. 3. 2. reverse steps. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. Replace Resistor. 6. Unplug connector J4 from SCR Bridge Gate Firing Board. Slide Resistor out. Remove nut from long resistor mounting bolt. Remove leads from ends of resistors. 25 Ohm. To reassemble. 5. reverse steps. 3. Remove 4 screws and washers on right side of DCRGS Panel that allow Main Panel to swing out. 12–282 46–221454P77 Resistor. To reassemble. 10%. To reassemble. 5. 1%. Slide resistor. Remove wires from terminals TS1–L1. The check should be between TS–1. 3.TS–2 and TS–1 or TS–2 to ground. 12–140 . Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 12–284 45433454 SCR Bridge 1. 300W. L3. reverse steps. Remove and keep 2 screws. 4. 4.To reassemble. 4. centering washers and insulating washers to the side to remove. L2. One mounting bracket at right edge of resistor. 2. Wirewound 1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. 3. Replace Resistor. 3 Ohm. Remove bolt from resistor bracket. reverse steps. Ribwound 1. Remove screws. 2. C1 and C 4. Unsolder 2 leads of Resistor. Remove 12 screws and washers holding SCR Bridge to DCRGS Main Panel.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–281 53396P01 Resistor HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Remove and replace SCR Bridge.

12–291 46–241971P26 5V PS (ST–CT AP). 3. Remove all cables attached to the power supply. 3. 5. Lift fuseholder cap off and pull out fuse. Re–install screws removed in step 2. To reassemble. Slide power supply out of the AP. 2. 3. Re–attach cables removed in step 1. reverse steps. Replace fuse. 12–288 46–170021P14 Filter PWB F1–F2 1. Remove all cables attached to the power supply. 6. Turn fuseholder cap a quarter turn. 2. 4. 3. SRU 12–289 46–313053G1 24V Resistor Assm No specific procedure at this time. 3. Gently pry fuse out of holder. Remove screws attaching the power supply to the AP. 3A 1. Verify +5VDC ±5% at AP backplane bus bars. Lift fuseholder cap off and pull out fuse. Replace fuse. 2. Re–attach cables removed in step 1. Re–install screws removed in step 12–290 12–141 . 12–287 46–170021P94 Servo Assm.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–285 46–297574G1 Servo Assm HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 5. Insert new power supply. 46–241971P72 5V PS (ST–CTC AP) 1. Please use good service practices. 2. 7. 4. Remove screws attaching the power supply to the AP. 6. 7. Slide power supply out of the AP. Remove Circuit Breaker Cover and 4 sets of attaching hardware. Insert new power supply. 150A 1. 2. 12–286 46–170021P74 Servo Assm. Turn fuseholder cap a quarter turn. Verify +5VDC ±5% at AP backplane bus bars. 10A 1.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–292 46–241971P68 AP Fan HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove old fan: 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. At the back of the AP. Install new fan: 1. 4. then slide the face plate off. 5. Use good ESD procedures. 2. 2. Replace the fan. remove 4 of the 6 screws on the top of the AP that attach the fan to the face plate. 12–293 46–296817P1 BNC 50–Ohm Terminator No specific procedure at this time. remove the 2 remaining screws on the top of the AP. Use good service practices. Set new fan on plate and attach with 4 screws removed previously. 2. SRU Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Re–connect power and ground cables to the fan. 4. Slide face plate on and fasten 2 screws on either the left or right side of the face plate. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3/60 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 6. Use good ESD procedures. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Remove power and ground cables from the fan. 3. Tighten the 6 screws on top of AP attaching fan to face plate. 12–295 46–297711G1 Cable. 5. Remove the 4 screws holding the fan to the plate. 3. 4. Slide the fan out. 12–294 46–296816P2 BNC T–Connector. Please use good service practices. 12–142 . 3. 2. Remove 2 screws on either the left or right side of the face plate. Slide fan assembly back into AP. 3. At the front of the AP. Use good service practices. 7. 4.

2. 4. 2. 4. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 3. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Use good service practices. PS to 098 Harness Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 12–297 46–296454G5 Cable. Backplane to PS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–296 46–296451G3 Cable. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. DASIOP to Gantry Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 12–300 46–297096G1 Cable. 3/60 SCSI to Wren HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 60’ Coaxial BNC Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 4. Use good ESD procedures. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 12–299 46–237686G2 Cable. 3. Use good service practices. 2. 2. 12–143 . Use good ESD procedures. Use good service practices. Use good service practices. Use good service practices. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 2. Use good ESD procedures. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 4. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 4. 12–298 46–296862G1 Cable. 3. Make sure all safety precautions are taken.

Run the HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk (HSD) Preparation and Media Defect Management software. 2. Insert new high speed disk drive: (See page 12–148 for additional information) 1. 4. 3. 2. HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk Procedure. Make sure the replacement Disk hasn’t introduced any new problems. If you must format the disk. Insert new disk drive assembly. 8. Tighten 2 screws that attach the tray assembly to the scan chassis. and related information. Slide the tray back in the scan chassis. 6. Reattach cable cover. 12–303 46–313030G1 High Speed Disk Drive Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. 9. 3. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement Disk corrects the problem. Disconnect all cables. Remove high speed disk drive: 1. Remove cable cover. 7. 4.) 10. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. Remove the 4 screws attaching the HSD to the tray. Check high speed disk jumper settings on the new HSD. 12–302 46–296532P1 Front Panel Maxi No specific procedure at this time. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 12–144 . 6. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. (See page 12–145. run disk_util from usr/g/bin. Please use good service practices. Pull the tray assembly out and set aside. 7. Remove the 2 screws that attach the tray to the scan chassis. 5. 3. Remove cable strain relief.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12–301 46–313027G1 Fan Assm for Scan Chassis HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. immediately follows this procedure. · The disk utility procedure. 2. b. Reconnect all cables. Check system operation: a. Reattach cable strain relief. 5. Please use good service practices. Attach 4 screws removed earlier to the new HSD.

Load Diskutil 2. Access diskutil through a menu option within the SRU Diagnostics Main Menu. Select |Utilities| 2. To Load: 1. |3| 3. |2|. or by logging into the SBC and manually changing directories into: SBC0@. Check Disk/Controller Parameters 6. you can access them through the Applications Utilities (Step 7. Replace the High Speed Disk 4. Select Option 4 from the following menu selections: 1=Maxisys 2=MaxiBld 3=SRUExer 4=DiskUtil 5=Quit Hint: You must run Applications in order to load the CT Advanced Service Tape. Select |1|. Save the Defect List to SCSI Drive File 3. Reset the Scan File Database Load DiskUtil The CT Advanced Service Tape contains the proprietary High Speed Disk Utilities (diskutil). Is the Tape Ready? Select |YES| when ready. Add “New” Bad Blocks 5. To Execute: 7.). Recommended: load SRU Diags during installation and leave them on the disk. Note: Wait until the AP shuts down 8.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk Procedures (for 46–313030G1) The HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk procedures describe how to: 1. Once you load the SRU Diagnostics on the SBC SCSI Disk. and an |SRU Diags| button appears. Install Proprietary CT Advanced Service Tape 5.SuiteID>:/usr/g/service/tools/added_tools/SRUDiag Use this procedure to access the HSD Disk Utility whenever HSD problems prevent Applications from starting. 6. Select |SRU Diag Button| to open a shell window. 12–145 . The SRU Diagnostics load. Select |Add–A–Tool| 4.

The Maxi–HIB functions use the AP Driver. Upon completion of the disk initialization. then reads the Xylogics Controller and HSD parameters.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Save Defect List 1. so the AP must be downloaded. · The Initialize command opens the AP Driver. 3. Use one of the previously described methods to enter proprietary Utilities. Choose Option 4 on the Main Menu to Initialize the AP. Select Option 8 to go to the Process Defects Menu. 5. 2. the Main Menu appears. PROCESS DEFECTS MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Initialize a Defect List 5 Display a Defect List 6 Process Defects on Partition 7 Add Defect to Remapped Sector List 8 Show Remapped Sector Info 9 Zero out Remapped Sector Info 12–146 . x.xx 4. MAIN MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Initialize 5 Configure 6 Test 7 Format 8 Process Defects MAIN>>>4 Open ap passed Read drive parameters passed Read controller parameters passed Read format parameters passed Xylogics 754 Controller Finished setting structures Finished reading remapped sector list –––––> GENERAL ELECTRIC/XYLOGICS DISK UTILITY REV.

. . . The defect list Reads/Writes to/from the working memory area of DiskUtil. Compare this list to the Mfg. 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Read Defect List from a File.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6. Select Option 4 to Initialize a Defect List · The Initialize Defects List menu contains several functions used to create or manipulate a defect list. The program pauses after each defect page. SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) · 12–147 . plus defect growth (if any). 5 Read Defect List from Disk (Xylogics Format) 6 Read Manufacturers Defect List 7 Enter Defect List Manually 8 Display Defect List 9 Clear Defect List 10 Add Defect to List 11 Remove Defect from List 12 Write Defect List to a File 13 Write Defect List to Disk (Xylogics Format) INITIALIZE DEFECT LIST MENU 7. . list supplied with every drive. 14 18 17 17 . Select Option 5 to append the disk list to the working memory list. and prompts you to quit or continue the defect display. From the Process Defects Menu. MAIN>>>5 Do you want to append onto the current Defect List? (y/n) >>>y Cylinder Value? >>> 1633 Head Value? >>> 0 CYLINDER HEAD SECTOR STATUS 10 14 15 . You should not see any “unprocessed” defects at this point. The defect list from disk must contain the same defects that appear on the Mfg list. . . · This list of the Cylinder and Head locations of each defect can be fairly long on some drives. 1631 10 0 0 . . 1 . .

Go to the new directory location on the OC. 2. (example: xylforfinaldefects_yr_mo_day) MAIN>>>12 Do you want a printable fiel of the list? (y/n) >>> y Enter the name of the file to write to>>>finaldefects_yr_mo_da Defect List written to: ”finaldefects_yr_mo_da” Do you want a XYLOGICS–format file of the list? (y/n) >>> y Enter name of a XYLOGICS–format file to write to>>>xylfordefects Defect list written to “xylfordefects_yr_mo_day” 9. 1. · Label the DAT. 6. Change directories to access the files you plan to move. then: a. Do NOT start Applications. · Verify the files moved to the new directory. Open a shell and log into the SBC. Create a Text File on the SBC. Load a tape into the OC tape drive and copy the files to DAT tape. Quit out of DiskUtil. Example session: <suiteID>ocO:rlogin <suiteID>sbco [ENTER] <suiteID>_sbc0: cd/usr/g/bin [ENTER] <suiteID>_sbc0: cp *finaldefects*<<suiteID>oc0:tmp [ENTER] <ctrl>d <suiteID>oc0: cd /tmp <suiteID>_oc0: 1s –1a <suiteID>–oc):tar –cvf/dev/nrst8 * 7. so you can archive them to tape. Move the files to the OC. Save to DAT Tape (Optional) 1. Exit from the SBC. 4. 3. Give the file a special SBC Text File name. Select Option 12 on the Initialize Defects Menu. This creates a special hex format file on on the SBC Drive Type/enter the name of the SBC file you plan to save in Xylogics format.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8. 2. · c. Remove the Tape. and save the it with the rest of the system state tapes. Replace the High Speed Disk Note: This procedure describes the software reconfiguration process that occurs after the physical disk replacement. b. 5. 12–148 . Save the merged list from working memory to a Unix File stored in usr/g/bin directory on the SBC. Turn ON the Scan Chassis power.

Select |SRU Diag| to open a shell window. 11. · · · Wait until the AP shuts down. 7. 8. · Read the parameters. and display the output. and the reads the Xylogics Controller and HSD parameters. The Initialize command opens the AP Driver. When the Disk Utility main menu appears. per minute: Alt. Enter DiskUtil 5. Choose Option 4 to initialize the AP. The replacement High Speed Disk should arrive already formatted and labeled for CT use. Partition: Alt. and verify the replacement drive was correctly formatted and labeled for CT use. and compare it to the list sent with the drive. Head: Checksum: 0 0 0xbe64 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 20 3600 Magic Number: 0xdabe Partition: “a” Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: “b” Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: “c” Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: “d” Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: “e” Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: “f” Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: “g” Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: “h” Starting Cylinder 0 9. Select Option 7 from the Format Menu to READ the Disk Label. 12–149 . Reset the Scan File DataBase. See page 12–158 for details. 10. You should not have to format and label the disk. Reload the system calibration database from the save system state tape. 7 Process Defects MAIN >>> 7 Input Diskname>>> singlesabre New Settings: Label: <<singlesabre> Alt Secs per cyl: 0 Gap1: 0xffff Gap2: 0xffff Interleave: 1 Data Cylinders: 1633 Alt. 4. 6. initialize the disk. Recommended: Read the disk label and verify its parameters. Display the disk defect list.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 3. When the initialization completes. See page 12–147 for details. Cylinders: 2 Heads: 15 Sectors per Track: Revs. display the Format Menu.

and has been running successfully for some time. to open the Process Defects menu. Select Option 8. 6. and a bad defect growth occurred. the defect may have corrupted the data. Check to see which scan file and cal vector were in use when the error occurred. Select |SRU Diag| to open a Shell window. and you may have lost the corresponding calibration and/or scan file. Enter DiskUtil 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 12. 5. and any scan files. ApError (076 00064 00061) IOPB Error Hard Data ECC Error MXLOG VMEbus Error Hard Data ECC error – cylinder = 349 Track = 14 Sector = 0 2. · Use Applications to acquire several scans. From applications. You may only have to acquire a single cal vector and/or test scan to correct the problem. Note: If the Calibration Data or scan files reside on the bad sector. 4. 12–150 . if necessary. This software uses the defect list to Read to/Write from the working memory area of DiskUtil. then continue to the next step. option 4 Process Defects Menu 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Initialize a Defect List 5 Display a Defect List 6 Process Defects on Partition 7 Add Defect to Remapped Sector List 8 Show Remapped Sector Info 9 Zero out Remapped Sector Info · Use the Initialize Defect List menu functions to create or manipulate a defect list. The following are errors that might indicate that a bad sector may be affecting a scan or calibration file on the High Speed Disk. Note: If this is a “New” Disk Drive. save Calibration Data. · Wait until the AP shuts down. Add “New” Bad Blocks 1. Start DiskUtil. Initialize the Defect List. Verify system scanning functions. If the System is in a “Known” state. Option 4. then verify that all controller and disk Parameters are correctly configured before continuing. and verify that you corrected the problem.

and writes the cylinder and head where the defect is stored. . 14 18 17 17 . . 1 . The program pauses after each defect page. . . . SLIPPED (ON TRACK) (for example) (for example) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) INITIALIZE DEFECT LIST MENU CYLINDER HEAD SECTOR STATUS 12–151 . 5 Read Defect List from Disk (Xylogics Format) 6 Read Manufacturers Defect List 7 Enter Defect List Manually 8 Display Defect List 9 Clear Defect List 10 Add Defect to List 11 Remove Defect from List 12 Write Defect List to a File 13 Write Defect List to Disk (Xylogics Format) MAIN>>>5 Do you want to append onto the current Defect List? (y/n) >>>y Cylinder Value? >>> 1633 Head Value? >>> 0 10 14 15 . and prompts you to quit or continue the defect display. By this point you should not have any “unprocessed” defects.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 7. Select Option 5 to append the disk list to working memory list. 1631 10 0 0 . . · Some drives have fairly long lists. 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Read Defect List from a File. . .

Select Option 10 to add a defect to the list. Process Defects on Partition PROCESS DEFECT MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Initialize a Defect List 5 Display a Defect List 6 Process Defects on Partition 7 Add Defect to remapped sector 8 Show Remapped Sector Info 9 Zero out Remapped Sector Info DEFECT>>> 6 (This is to process merged defects) 12–152 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8. 1. Defect Menu INIT>>> 1 Process Merged Defects Notes have been entered into this display. Select option 6. · Obtain the Cylinder. Please review it in it’s entirety prior to attempting this procedure. Head and Sector numbers from the MXLOG. Type/enter 1 to Quit Out of the Init. 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Read Defect List from a File 5 Read Defect List from a Disk (Xylogics Format) 6 Read Manufacturers Defect List 7 Enter Defect List Manually 8 Display Defect List 9 Clear Defect List 10 Add Defect to List 11 Remove Defect from List 12 Write Defect List to a file 13 Write Defect List to Disk (Xylogics Format) INIT >>> 10 *** Enter in Cylinder Value >>> 349 *** Enter in Head Value >>> 14 *** ENter in Sector Value >>> 0 INITIALIZE DEFECT LIST MENU 9.

PHYSICAL CYLINDER 10 14 15 1631 HEAD SECTOR STATUS 10 0 0 14 18 17 17 1 SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SECTOR SLIPPING on Partition complete Do you want to see the Defect List? (y/n) >>> n DEFECT >>> 4 2. Do you want to continue? (y/n) >>> y Starting Cylinder: 0 Blocks: 490500 Do you wish to preserve the data sectors (y/n) >>>n (DO NOT USE THIS OPTION) Track Slipping Cylinder xx Head xx Sector xx (New Bad Sector Slipping in process) *** Warning: Cylinder xx. Do you want to process this defect? (y/n) >>> y (Last chance to abort defect processing.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 PROCESS DEFECTS will slip defective sectors for each track using all available spares at the end of the track. An attempt is made to preserve all data sectors. Select option 13 to Write the Defect List to Disk INITIALIZE DEFECT LIST MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Read Defect List from a File 5 Read Defect List from Disk (Xylogics Format) 6 Read Manufacturers Defect List 7 Enter Defect List Manually 8 Display Defect List 9 Clear Defect List 10 Add Defect to List 11 Remove Defect from List 12 Write Defect List to a File 13 Write Defect List to Disk (Xylogics Format) 12–153 . 3. Select Option 4 to display the Initialize Defect List Menu. Sector xx has status Sector mapped.) SECTOR SLIP ON ENTIRE PARTITION Example output: Note: Any sector remaps to a spare cylinder that occur with more than 3 bad sectors on a given track will also be indicated. Head xx. Any remaining defective sectors will be remapped to alternate cylinders.

Controller Type: 754 Flag Byte: 0x5 Uses DEC std 144 bad sector forwarding: YES Controller does track mapping: NO Controller formats only full track at a time: YES Controller formats only full volume at a time: NO Controller Base Address: 0xee40 12–154 . Verify that all Controller Information. Select Option 5 to display the Configure Menu. They must match for proper HSD Operation. Check all the READ parameters and information in options 4 through 9 of the Configure Menu. 4. appears as follows: CONFIG >>> 4 Read controller parameters passed. CONFIGURE MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Read Controller Information 5 Read Controller Parameters 6 Read Drive Parameters 7 Read Partition Tables 8 Read Format Parameters 9 Read Configuration Information 10 Read Diagnostics 11 Write Controller Parameters 12 Write Drive Parameters 13 Write Partition Table 14 Write Format Parameters 3. using diskutil. 2. Option 4. Option 4. Main Menu. Compare those values with the examples below.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 INIT >>> 13 Cylinder Value? >>> 1633 Head Value? >>> 0 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Defect List written to Cylinder: 1633 Head: 0 Sector: 0 INIT: Save Defect List Save the defect list to a file on the SCSI Disk. Initialize the AP. (See page 12–146.) To Check Disk and Controller Parameters 1.

Option 6. Option 5.3. Option 7.2 ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED 256 Byte Throttle Value DISABLED ENABLED Parameter Byte 0x09: 0x18 Read Ahead ENABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Command Optimization DISABLED EPROM Part Number 0x2297 6. Verify that all Drive Parameters.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. Data Cylinders: Heads: Data Sectors: Spare Sectors: Total Sectors: 1633 15 20 3 23 Alternate Cylinders: 2 Revolutions per Min: 3600 7. Verify that all Controller Parameters. appear as follows: CONFIG >>> 5 Parameter Byte 0x08: 0x44 Responds to Address Modifiers: 0x2d and 0x29 Enable DMA Timeout Checksum Generation Disable ACFAIL 32–bit Transfer Mode Auto–Update Bus Release On Request: 0 us Throttle Dead Time Parameter Byte 0x0a: 0x96 ECC Mode 2 Retry Before Correction ENABLED Auto Seek Retry Firmware Delay Overlap Seeks Throttle Byte : 0x00 EPROM Release: 2. appear as shown: CONFIG >>> 6 Read drive parameters passed. Verify that the Drive Partition Table. appear as shown: CONFIG >>> 7 Partition ”a” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”b” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”c” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”d” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”e” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”f” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”g” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”h” Starting Cylinder: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 490500 12–155 .

10. Option9.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 8. appear as shown: CONFIG >>> 8 Field1: 0x01 Field2: 0x0a Field3: 0x1b Field4: 0x14 Sector Size: 2048 Field6: 0x0a Field7: 0x03 Alt. Verify that all Format Parameters. Option 8. you may Label the Disk. Sector Size: 512 9. appear as shown: CONFIG >>> 9 Controller: xlc0 Drive: x10 Slave Number: 0 Drive Status: 0x3 ONLINE ATTACHED Controller Type: 754 Interrupt Priority: 0x04 Interrupt Vector: 0x45 Bus Type: 0x1000 Controller Base Address: 0xee40 After you confirm and verify the Controller and Drive Parameters. Verify that all Configuration Parameters. Write Label. Option 8 FORMAT MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Format Disk 5 Format Track 6 Surface Analysis 7 Read Label 8 Write Label 9 Process Defects 10 Configure FORMAT >>> 8 (Write Label) 12–156 .

per Minute: Alt. Partition: Alt. Cylinders: Heads: 15 Sectors per track: Revs.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Input Diskname>>>singlesabre (Use this name as shown) New Settings Label: <<singlesabre> (All parameters must be as shown) Alt Secs per cyl: 0 Gap1: 0xffff Gap2: 0xffff Interleave: Alt. Head Magic Number: Checksum: 0 0 0xdabe 0xbe64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 490500 20 3600 1 2 Data Cylinders: 1633 Partition ”a” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”b” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”c” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”d” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”e” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”f” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”g” Starting Cylinder: Partition ”h” Starting Cylinder: Primary label written to disk: Backup label to block 490481 Backup label to block 490483 Backup label to block 490485 Backup label to block 490487 Backup label to block 490489 Do you want to continue? (y/n) >>> y (Last change to abort writing disk label.) (Primary Label) 12–157 .

4. Start reconfiguration on the OC. Press <L1>–B to toggle plasma to boot terminal c. 3. genesis@<SUITE>_OC0: sdservice (Shutdown applications to UNIX level. password: XXXXXX c. b. login: genesis (Skip this step if you already see the genesis@<SUITE>OC0 prompt. 5. Start Reconfig on the OC 2. a. The System Parameters Screen appears on the Plasma Screen. the User must be root. Select |Accept| to update your changes. genesis<SUITE>_OC0> su (Become superuser) b. password: XXXXXX e. If the system applications are currently running.) 2. root@<SUITE>_OC0> reconfig (Start reconfiguration) d. 3. |Accept| the reconfig 4. When Regen Database completes. run reconfig on both the OC and SBC.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 Reset Scan File DataBase HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 After you replace the HSD. type/enter sdservice at the genesis prompt on the system console to shutdown the system.) d. e. When the OC finishes. TAONINC 12–158 . Shutdown System applications: a. Select Reset Database option. WHEN YOU SELECT “YES” TO REGEN DATABASE YOU DESTROY ALL CALIBRATION AND IMAGE DATA ON THE SYSTEM. run reconfig on the SBC Procedure: 1. In order to run reconfig. Select |YES| to Regen Database. select |Continue| to display the next screen. 1.

there are two new question prompts: · · Hint: During defect processing. In order to run reconfig. any defect will be processed without asking for permission to do each one individually. No specific procedure at this time. when correcting a bogus header diskutil prints messages that say “Incorrect Header .. the User must be in root: a. 7. Changes 1. 12–304 46–296528G1 Maxi Bd Assm w/ 3/60 plus LAN Bd. diskutil checks for a corrupted header and corrects it if necessary. When ‘Add sector to remap list’ is exercised. WHEN YOU SEE THESE. the question “reprocess this defect?” will be asked for each previously processed defect.20”. the sector is permanently placed in the defect list with status “SECTOR MAPPED.20) DiskUtil Release Notes 1. Please use good service practices. Upon completion of the OC reconfig.10 12–159 .” “Header Corrected to cyl n head n trk n” THESE ARE INFORMATIONAL MESSAGES. When reconfig finishes. root@<SUITE_SBC> reconfig (This starts reconfig on the SBC without operator intervention) d. password: XXXXXX c.0 (diskutil rev 1. When “Process Defects on partition” is chosen. exit from the SBC and from superuser mode.. Skip old (already marked as processed) defects? (y/n)>>> If the user replies ‘y’. which is the behavior of diskutil 1.1 10/14/92 14:36:02 ====================================== These changes reflect diskutil that announces itself on startup as “REV 1. When slipping a sector. start the SBC reconfiguration. root@<SUITE>_OC0> rlogin <SUITE_SBC> b. 2.” 3. genesis@<SUITE_OC0>: st [ENTER] Diskutil Release Notes ====================================== Release notice for DiskUtil:0 ZB5. genesis@<SUITE_OC0>: cd /w [ENTER] b. YOU CAN IGNORE THEM. Start Applications a. THERE IS NO ERROR THAT NEEDS ATTENTION. If the reply is ‘n’.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6.

Disconnect the cables to the SBC/Maxi–HIB Assembly. · · · · · · SCSI Cable: 46–296451G3 Serial Port A Cable: 46–297711G1 Serial Port B Cable: 46–297123G1 Ethernet Cable: 46–296454G2 AP Parallel Cable: 46–297673G4 Abort Line Cable: 46–297565G1 4. Remove the 4 AMP screws from the front face plate. Install the 2 screws in the center of the front face plate to the center board holders on the maxi–HIB. 3. Using ESD precautions. 4. making sure not to lose the bushings. Carefully connect the maxi–HIB to the P4 adapter on the 3/60 SBC while sliding the board in the front face plate. remove the new maxi–HIB from the shipping box and place it on the anti–static bag on top of a flat surface. Remove the 3 nylon screws and washers to disassemble the maxi–HIB. Lay the board assembly on a flat table. Lift up on the P1 connector to disconnect it from the maxi–HIB. Unscrew the 8 retaining screws holding the 3/60 Maxi Board assembly to the Scan Chassis. 5. Shutdown Applications Software and Unix on the SBC. 12–160 . 14. Remove the thumb releases. Install Board: 1. This will leave the holder/extractors as part of the front face plate assembly. Pull the LAN card away from the face plate. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. as shown here. slowly pull board assembly out of the scan chassis. 5. 10. Check Maxi–HIB jumper settings. 3. 7.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–305 46–264834P1 Maxi–HIB HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. 6. Remove the left and right board holders from the maxi–HIB by removing 1 screw from each board holder on the solder side of the maxi–HIB. Lay the board assembly flat on the table. 12. 2. 13. Place the maxi–HIB in an anti–static bag. Install the 4 AMP screws through the face plate to the maxi–HIB connectors. 9. Using ESD precautions. 11. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. Lift up on the P4 bus on the center edge of the board to remove it from the 3/60 board and face plate. Remove the LAN card by removing the 3 nylon screws (46–208922P23) and washers (46–230523P4) from the top of the LAN card. preferably on top of the anti–static bag. 2. Remove Board: 1. 8. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis 3. 2.

Place the maxi–HIB in an anti–static bag. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. 15. Disconnect the cables to the SBC/Maxi–HIB Assembly. preferably on top of the anti–static bag.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6. 4. 8. Reconnect the cables previously removed. Remove the LAN card by removing the 3 nylon screws (46–208922P23) and washers (46–230523P4) from the top of the LAN card. 8. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis 3. Remove the 4 AMP screws from the front face plate. Lay the board assembly on a flat table. 7. Tighten eight (8) assembly front panel screws. 11. Install the LAN card onto the maxi–HIB. Install the 2 screws in the center of the front face plate to the center board holders on the maxi–HIB. Check jumper settings on the maxi–HIB. Remove the thumb releases. Secure with 3 nylon screws and washers. 5. Remove the left and right board holders from the maxi–HIB by removing 1 screw from each board holder on the solder side of the maxi–HIB. Install Board: 1. 14. Using ESD precautions. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. 13. 9. Install the 4 AMP screws through the face plate to the maxi–HIB connectors. 6. Install the left and right board holders onto the maxi–HIB using the 1 screw used in disassembly. 12. Slide the 3/60 maxi assembly back into the scan chassis. 12–306 46–264890G1 Maxi–HIB Adapter Bd Remove Board: 1. Lift up on the P1 connector to disconnect it from the maxi–HIB. 6. Lay the board assembly flat on the table. Remove the 3 nylon screws and washers to disassemble the maxi–HIB. Lift up on the P4 bus on the center edge of the board to remove it from the 3/60 board and face plate. Unscrew the 8 retaining screws holding the 3/60 Maxi Board assembly to the Scan Chassis. slowly pull board assembly out of the scan chassis. 7. making sure not to lose the bushings. 2. Carefully connect the maxi–HIB to the P4 adapter on the 3/60 SBC while sliding the board in the front face plate. 10. Apply enough pressure to ensure the assembly is properly seated in the backplane. Using ESD precautions. 5. 12–161 . 4. as shown at the right. 9. 3. remove the new maxi–HIB from the shipping box and place it on the anti–static bag on top of a flat surface. This will leave the holder/extractors as part of the front face plate assembly. Install the left and right board holders onto the maxi–HIB using the 1 screw used in disassembly. Pull the LAN card away from the face plate.

Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Use good ESD procedures. 4. 2. Use good service practices. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 4. Use good service practices. 8. 4. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 9. 4. Apply enough pressure to ensure the assembly is properly seated in the backplane. 3. 3. 2. Use good service practices. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 12–311 46–297098G1 Sabre Interconnect to 096 and 097 harnesses Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 12–307 46–297673G4 MaxiHIB to HCHIOP Cable Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 12–162 . 12–309 46–296841G1 Power Distribution Cable–Scan Chassis Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 12–310 46–296840G1 PS to Backplane Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Use good ESD procedures. 4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 7. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Use good ESD procedures. Slide the 3/60 maxi assembly back into the scan chassis. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Use good ESD procedures. Secure with 3 nylon screws and washers. 2. 3. 2. Tighten eight (8) assembly front panel screws. Reconnect the cables previously removed. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Install the LAN card onto the maxi–HIB. Use good service practices. 3. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 12–308 46–278722G1 Power Cable–SRU Cabinet Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Use good service practices. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Make sure all safety precautions are taken.

4. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 60–pin Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–312 46–297097G1 Sabre Interconnect to 098 Harness HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. SBC Remove Scan Chassis Power 1. preferably on top of the anti–static bag. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. slowly pull board assembly out of the scan chassis. 12–163 . Unscrew the 8 retaining screws holding the 3/60 maxi board assembly to the scan chassis. Use good service practices. Disconnect the following cables to the SBC/maxi–HIB assembly: · · · · · · SCSI Cable: 46–296451G3 Serial Port A Cable: 46–297711G1 Serial Port B Cable: 46–297123G1 Ethernet Cable: 46–296454G2 AP Parallel Cable: 46–297673G4 Abort Line Cable: 46–297565G1 2. Use good service practices. 2. Remove Board: 1. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 12–313 46–297043G2 Sabre to Xylogics Cable. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. 26–pin Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 12–315 46–264832P1 SCA–LAN Bd. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. Use good service practices. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Using ESD precautions. 2. 2. 4. 4. 4. 3. Lay the board assembly on a flat table. 12–314 46–297043G1 Sabre to Xylogics Cable. 3. Use good ESD procedures. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. Make sure all safety precautions are taken.

6.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. remove the metal plate by loosening the 2 screws at the top. Attach metal plate using the 2 screws removed earlier. Install Board: 1. 4. Remove cable 46–297096G1 3. 4. 12–164 . 3. Remove incoming line power. sliding the BNC connector through the front face plate. Reattach cables 46–296840G1. Tighten 8 assembly front panel screws. 46–297096G1. From the back of the scan chassis. At the front of the scan chassis. Carefully pull up the LAN card. 2. Verify power supply voltage. 12–316 46–296183P1 Scan Chassis +5. Reconnect incoming line power. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. Install new power supply: 1. 5. 2. Using ESD precautions. Slide the tray assembly into the scan chassis. Remove ±12V cables. 6. Push down on the LAN at P5 until the card clicks into place. 2. 3. ±12. Remove the 3 nylon screws (46–208922P23) and washers (46–230523P4) from the top of the LAN card. 5. 2. remove +5V cable assembly (46–296840G1). thus disconnecting it from the maxi–HIB connector and pulling the BNC connector through the front face plate. Remove the 4 screws attaching the power supply to the tray. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. and connecting P1 on the LAN to P5 on the maxi–HIB. Remove power supply: 1. Reconnect the cables previously removed. Install the LAN card by placing it over the maxi–HIB. Slide the tray assembly out of the scan chassis and lay on a flat surface. 3. 6. 5. using 4 screws removed earlier. 4. attaching it to the maxi–HIB. Attach new power supply to tray. remove the new LAN card from the shipping box and place it on the anti–static bag on top of a flat surface. +24V PS Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. 7. Install the 3/60 maxi–HIB assembly into the scan chassis. Install the 3 nylon screws and washers. Apply enough pressure to ensure the assembly is properly seated in the backplane. and ±12V. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis.

4. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. 12–320 46–264830G1 Scan Chassis Backplane Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. Remove the cable strain relief. Please use good service practices. At the back of the scan chassis. Attach new power supply to tray. Verify power supply voltage. “complete” No specific procedure at this time. 12–318 46–296799G1 Scan Chassis Assm No specific procedure at this time. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. Reattach the 2 screws holding the tray assembly to the scan chassis. 2. Install new power supply: 1. Reattach the cable strain relief. Remove power supply: 1. 6. 2. Remove all cables to the power supply. This allows access to the back of the –5V power supply. 5. Please use good service practices. Take note of where the cables are connected to ensure you reattach them properly. At the front of the scan chassis. remove the 4 screws attaching the fan plate to the scan chassis. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. Remove the cable to the system disk drive. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. 3. 3. Slide the tray assembly out and place it on a flat surface. using the 4 screws removed earlier. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 12–319 46–297244G1 Scan Chassis Assembly. Slide the tray assembly back into the scan chassis. 4. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 6. reattach all the cables removed earlier. 3. 12–165 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–317 46–296186P1 Scan Chassis –5V PS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. 3. including the cable to the system disk drive. 5. remove the 2 screws attaching the tray assembly to the scan chassis. At the back of the scan chassis. 2. 7. Remove the 4 screws attaching the power supply to the tray.

Replace fan(s). 5. Reconnect J6 power cable. 7. Remove 4 screws attaching each fan to the tray. Remove power cables to the fans. 5. 8. Disconnect the following cables to the SBC/Maxi–HIB Assembly: · · · · · · SCSI Cable: 46–296451G3 Serial Port A Cable: 46–297711G1 Serial Port B Cable: 46–297123G1 Ethernet Cable: 46–296454G2 AP Parallel Cable: 46–297673G4 Abort Line Cable: 46–297565G1 2. Carefully remove the 10 screws attaching the backplane to the scan chassis. 5. Disconnect power on the scan chassis at J4 and J6. 3. Remove screw attaching tray assembly to the scan chassis. 4. Press the thumb release buttons and slide the board out as far as the cables will allow. 2. 3. 9. Check backplane jumper settings on the new scan chassis backplane. 2. The back of the scan chassis: 7. 4. Install new board on alignment pegs. 6. Reconnect cables: white to J12 (+5V). Reconnect J4 power cable. 3. Reattach the board and the 10 screws that you removed earlier. slide the xylogics controller board the rest of the way out.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove Board: 1. 12–321 46–229909P1 Scan Chassis Boxer Fan Remove Fan: 1. Reconnect cables and return power to the system. slowly pull 3/60 maxi board assembly out of the scan chassis and set aside. Slide tray assembly out of scan chassis. Disconnect the cables from the high speed disk. Using ESD precautions. 8. 12–166 . Remove the nut and washer attaching +5V and ground power supply cables at J12 and J13. 4. black to J13 (ground). 6. and set it aside. Install new board: 1. Unscrew 8 retaining screws holding the board assembly to the scan chassis. Remove the screws at the top and bottom of the xylogics controller board. Slide board assembly back into scan chassis.

Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. Reattach the board and the 10 screws that you removed earlier. 12–323 46–297857G1 ST 1480 Disk Drive Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. 2. 3. Fasten the 2 screws holding the tray assembly to the scan chassis. 4. power. Disconnect the ground. power and ribbon cables from the drive. Fasten new fan(s) to tray using 4 screws removed earlier. Reconnect the ribbon. Check 1480 disk jumper settings on the new system disk drive. Disconnect ribbon cable strain relief. 3. black to J13 (ground). 3. and ground cables. Remove 2 screws holding the tray assembly to the scan chassis. Reconnect cables: white to J12 (+5V). 2. 7. 12–322 46–221328P13 Scan Chassis Pwr Switch/Ckt Bkr 1. 2. Slide board assembly back into scan chassis. 4. 5.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Replace Fan: 1. Slide the assembly out halfway. Tighten screw attaching tray assembly to scan chassis. Slide the tray assembly into the scan chassis. Reattach the ribbon cable strain relief. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. 12–167 . 3. Reconnect cables and return power to the system. Install new disk drive: 1. 4. Reconnect J4 power cable. Slide tray assembly back into scan chassis. 2. 8. Remove disk drive: 1. Attach power cables to fans. Install new board on alignment pegs. 6. 4. Check jumper settings on the new scan chassis backplane. Remove 4 screws holding the drive to the tray. 5. 2. Reconnect J6 power cable. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 6. 3. 5. Place new disk drive on the tray and attach with 4 screws on the bottom of the tray.

3. 2. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. Insert new board. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 5. Insert new board. 5. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 4. 12–327 46–241971P10 ST–CT Cache 1. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. Insert new board. 12–329 46–237328P54 ST–CT Master 1. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 3. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. Insert new board. Insert new board. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12–325 46–237328P69 ST–CT 512kB Public Memory 1. 5. 2. 3. 12–328 46–241971P21 ST–CT Chassis with boards No specific procedure at this time. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 3. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. 5. 12–168 . 4. 5.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–324 46–237328P67 ST–CT 4MB Main Memory HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 4. Please use good service practices. 2. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 4. 12–326 46–241971P12 ST–CT BPC 1. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. 4.

Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–330 46–241971P14 ST–CT MMC HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 4. 3. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. 5. 3. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. 4. Check jumper settings on new board. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. 12–332 46–241971P11 ST–CT SMP MUX 1. 4. Insert new board. 2. 2. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 5. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 4. 12–169 . 3. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 5. 6. 12–333 46–237328P57 ST–CT/ST–CTC ACP 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 4. 12–334 46–237328P58 ST–CT/ST–CTC ACU 1. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 3. 6. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 5. 2. Check jumper settings on new board. Insert new board. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 5. Insert new board. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. 2. 2. Insert new board. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 12–331 46–237328P53 ST–CT Slave 1. Insert new board. 3. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out.

12–336 46–278330P11 ST–CT/ST–CTC DASIOP 1. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. 4. 2. 5. 5. 3. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 2. 12–337 46–278330P9 ST–CT/ST–CTC HCHIOP 1. Check DASIOP jumper settings on new board. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 3. Insert new board. 3. 6. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. Insert new board. 4. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. 12–170 . Check jumper settings on new board. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 2. Check HCHIOP jumper settings on new board. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 2. 3. 6.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–335 46–237328P62 ST–CT/ST–CTC BP HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. Insert new board. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 3. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 4. 5. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. 6. 6. 12–338 46–237328P55 ST–CT/ST–CTC IOC 1. 4. 2. 12–339 46–278330P4 ST–CTC 4MB Main Memory 1. Insert new board. Check IOC jumper settings on new board.

Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 3. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. Use good ESD procedures. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. 12–342 46–278330P6 ST–CTC Scache 1. 4. Insert new board. 5. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 2. 3. 4. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 5. 5. 2. 3. Use good service practices. 3. 12–171 . Insert new board. 12–344 46–266700P3 Wren IV Disk Drive Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. 12–341 46–278330P2 ST–CTC MSP 1. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. 2. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–340 46–278330P7 ST–CTC BPCIM HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 2. 2. 4. 12–343 46–297123G1 STCT to 3/60 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. Insert new board. 3. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 4. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. Immediately place board in anti–static bag. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out.

Reattach the plastic cover. 4. Check jumper settings on the new system disk drive. 3. 12–172 . Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 2. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 3. Reattach the ribbon cable strain relief. 2. Remove 2 screws holding the tray assembly to the scan chassis. 3. Reattach the cables from the high speed disk. 2. Disconnect ribbon cable strain relief. 6. 3. Replace the xylogics controller board. 3. 5. power and ribbon cables from the drive. 5. 5. 6. 2. Disconnect the ground. Fasten the 2 screws holding the tray assembly to the scan chassis. 8. 4. Slide the assembly out halfway. Remove Board: 1. Remove the plastic cover by removing the screws. Place the board on the anti–static bag on a flat surface. Remove 4 screws holding the drive to the tray. Install Board: 1. Place new disk drive on the tray and attach with 4 screws on the bottom of the tray. slide the board out as far as the cables allow. Reconnect the ribbon. 2. 5. Slide the xylogics controller into the card guides in the scan chassis. 7. 6. 12–345 46–297694G1 Xylogics Controller Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. Disconnect cables from the xylogics board. Check xylogics jumper settings on the new xylogics controller board. Remove the 3 screws attaching the xylogics controller to the frame kit. Press the thumb release buttons. Install new disk drive: 1. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. Disconnect the cables from the high speed disk and slide the xylogics controller board the rest of the way out. 4. Slide the tray assembly into the scan chassis. 4. Reattach cables to the new xylogics controller board. Insert and tighten the screws at the top and bottom of the plate. and ground cables.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove disk drive: 1. Remove the screws at the top and bottom of the board. until you feel it lock into place against the backplane. power.

12–350 46–208718P9 3/4” dia. Position the clamp in the proper orientation. then install with the screw. then install with the screw. 12–347 46–208718P12 1” dia. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. Clamp Note: This clamp. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. is the second clamp holding the main harness to the backside of the ETC PWA chassis. then install with the screw. 2. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 Table 12–346 46–208718P1 1 1/4” dia. and the underside of the right z–channel. holds the large. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. 1. is used in various places to hold harness branches to the base frame. Clamp Note: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 This clamp. 3. 2. Clamp Note: This clamp. 3. 12–173 . ETC PWA chassis. 3. 3. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. main harness bundle to the right side of the base frame. is used in various places to hold harness branches to both z–channels. 3. holds the harness branch next to and under the right control panel. Position the clamp in the proper orientation. 12–348 46–208718P5 1/2” dia. 1. 1. marked as TA713D12. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. Clamp Note: This clamp. 1. front leg. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. marked as TA713D8. 2. marked as TA713D11. marked as TA713D16. 12–349 46–208718P8 11/16” dia. 2. then install with the screw. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. marked as TA713D20. Position the clamp in the proper orientation. 1. Clamp Note: This clamp. 2. Position the clamp in the proper orientation. then install with the screw. Position the clamp in the proper orientation.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–351 46–208718P2 5/16” dia. holds the small. note the positions of the wires. 2. and remove the cover from the table. 4. 3. To install the Power Switch. 12–174 . Remove the Base Covers. Remove the two screws attaching the cover hinge to the U–bracket. reverse above steps. and both z–channels. front leg. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. the right Table Side Covers and right Side Panels. 5. 3. For the best access. 3. Clamp Note: This clamp. Fully elevate the table. Loosen the nut holding the power switch and remove the switch from the hole. Remove the left Base Covers. On the Power Assm. 6. then loosen the screw terminals to remove the wires. Position the clamp in the proper orientation.. 2. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. 12–354 46–296592P1 Actuator Cover 1. 3. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. marked as TA713D5. remove the screws attaching the outlet cover and move the cover aside to gain access to the power switches. 1. fully elevate the table. 1. 12–353 46–297093P1 AC/DC Power Switch 1. is used in various places to hold harness branches to the base frame. then install with the screw. marked as TA713D14. Note the positions of the wires. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. Position the clamp in the proper orientation. Clamp Note: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 This clamp. 7. then install with the screw. 2. main harness bundle to the floor of the base frame. Refit the Base Covers. 2. and slide the pin out to release the spring. 12–352 46–208718P11 7/8” dia. 4. Remove both of the clips securing the spring pin to the actuator cover.

Elevate the table so that the distance between the bottom outer edge of the cal.63 ±0. 11. fully elevate the table. making sure to connect the wires to the W and C terminals. plate and bar to their storage positions. also remove the Actuator Cover. and then tighten the screw. loosen the two screws holding the cal. the nut plate is trapped. If removing the Upper Limit Switch. the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover. Side Cover and Base Covers. on the right. To adjust the Upper Limit Switch. 2. 7. Loosen and remove the two nuts securing the Magnet Rod to its plate at the upper end of the actuator. at the UPPER LIMIT SWITCH position. Do not tighten the screw before adjusting the switch position. move the plate fully outward in its slots. Remove the Base Covers. loosen the screw and slide the switch up along the actuator until free. Make sure to center the cover in the rear leg opening before tightening the hinge screws. Remove the Base Covers. Loosen the clamping screw on the switch. 4. remove the cal.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. 12–175 . plate. but may slide down the actuator. To install the actuator cover. remove its screw and two washers. 5. and slide the switch upward until at least 1 of the magnet tube is below the switch. Return the cal. and the center mark on the upper. 12–356 46–296561P11 Actuator Magnet Rod 1. Attach a continuity device to the W and C terminals. rear leg pivot pin is 36. 10. position the bar so that it is parallel to the rear surface of the base frame. If servicing the Upper Limit Switch. rear leg pivot pin is 14. Slowly slide the switch downward until the switch opens. on the right side of the base frame. fully elevate the table. reverse the above steps. Using the same hole. 6. 2.03. rear corner of the base frame. For the best access. Slide the Magnet Rod out of the actuator.03. 12–355 46–296561P10 Actuator Limit Switch 1. and slide the switch downward as far as possible. Elevate the table so that the distance between the bottom of the cal. and place the spring in the notch on the spring pin. Refit the Actuator Cover (if removed) and the Base Covers. Loosen the clamping screw on the switch. To install either limit switch. and then tighten the screw. and re–tighten the screws. bar from its storage position. Attach a continuity device to the W and C terminals. 3. plate. If removing the Lower Limit Switch. 9. reverse the above steps. bar and the center mark on the upper. 8. Slowly slide the switch upward until the switch opens.51 ±0. To adjust the Lower Limit Switch. Remove the wires from the switch. 6. and tighten the screw. 4. Refit the Side Panels. 3. For the best access.

The pin should now be easy to remove. Lift and remove the Actuator from the table. Turn the motor hex drive by hand until the upper pin is loose and can be easily removed. 5. Side Panels and the Base Covers. but the lower gas spring mounting pin is still at the back of the slot in the lower mounting block. 2. the Actuator is still under load. both Actuator Limit Switches must be adjusted per their procedure. CAUTION 8. 12–358 46–296561P1 Actuator. To install the Magnet Rod. Cut the ty–wraps and remove the clamp holding the limit switch wires to the Actuator. reverse the above steps. Since the strength of the magnets vary. and remove them. or mechanically with the hex drive on the end of the motor. fully elevate the table. if it is not. For the best access. 2. Retract the Actuator with the power supply or the hex drive. 12–176 . Refit the Actuator Cover. Remove the Actuator Cover U–bracket by removing four screws. Side Panels and the Base Covers. Refit the Actuator Cover. Raise the table until the Actuator is unloaded. Remove and keep the E–ring from the lower mounting pin and slide the pin out. 4. Slide the Magnet Rod out of the actuator. 9. reverse the above steps. THERE SHOULD BE NO WEIGHT ON THE CRADLE. Remove the Base Covers. 6. 4. the Actuator is in tension due to the force produced by the gas springs. 6. 5. To install the Magnet Rod. 7. but do not allow Actuator to fall when the rod end clears the upper mounting block. Disconnect the motor wires and ground strap. 6. BOTH ACTUATOR MOUNTING PINS MUST BE LOOSE BEFORE BEING REMOVED. Loosen and remove the locknut from the upper Actuator mounting pin. Remove the Base Covers. Fully elevate the table. Since the strength of the magnets vary. 3. both Actuator Limit Switches must be adjusted per their procedure. Note the positions of the two bumper washers and spacer. When the table is fully elevated. the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover. The table must be elevated further with a power supply. 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. 12–357 2100671 Actuator Magnet Rod 1. which occurs when gas springs are fully extended. Do not over shorten the Actuator. the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover. Table Elevation 1. Loosen and remove the two nuts securing the Magnet Rod to its plate at the upper end of the actuator.

Retract the Actuator with the power supply or the hex drive. the spacer fits inside the bumper washer. Fully elevate the table. Cut the ty–wraps and remove the clamp holding the limit switch wires to the Actuator. but the lower gas spring mounting pin is still at the back of the slot in the lower mounting block. On the right side. On the right side. 4. Refit the Actuator Cover. Adjust both Actuator Limit Switches per their procedure. but do not allow Actuator to fall when the rod end clears the upper mounting block. To install the Actuator. Reconnect the motor wires. The table must be elevated further with a power supply. the Actuator is in tension due to the force produced by the gas springs. BOTH ACTUATOR MOUNTING PINS MUST BE LOOSE BEFORE BEING REMOVED. The pin should now be easy to remove. Turn the motor hex drive by hand until the upper pin is loose and can be easily removed. Make sure that the lower pin is coated with Molykote grease and that the E–ring is correctly installed. 2. and spaces the rod end away from the mounting clevis. and remove them. Side Cover and Base Covers. if it is not. Refit the Side Panels. Loosen and remove the locknut from the upper Actuator mounting pin. 12–359 2103043 Actuator. When installing the Upper Mounting Pin. Torque the locknut to 40 ft–lbs. 7. Make sure that the lower pin is coated with Molykote grease and that the E–ring is correctly installed. 6. Raise the table until the Actuator is unloaded. 3. 11. or mechanically with the hex drive on the end of the motor. which occurs when gas springs are fully extended. the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover. THERE SHOULD BE NO WEIGHT ON THE CRADLE.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 10. the bumper washer fits over the shoulder on the hex–side of the pin. reverse the above steps. make sure to center the cover in the rear leg opening before tightening the hinge screws. noting the polarity. Remove the Base Covers. and spaces the rod end away from the mounting clevis. 12–177 . Lift and remove the Actuator from the table. Do not over shorten the Actuator. Torque the locknut to 40 ft–lbs. Remove the Actuator Cover U–bracket by removing four screws. Ty wrap the limit switch harness in place. Table Elevation 1. CAUTION 8. When the table is fully elevated. 5. To install the Actuator. on the left side. the Actuator is still under load. 9. and place the spring in the notch on the spring pin. Disconnect the motor wires and ground strap. 12. Remove and keep the E–ring from the lower mounting pin and slide the pin out. reverse the above steps. Note the positions of the two bumper washers and spacer. the spacer fits inside the bumper washer. make sure there is one bumper washer on either side of the rod end. When installing the Upper Mounting Pin. make sure there is one bumper washer on either side of the rod end. the bumper washer fits over the shoulder on the hex–side of the pin. on the left side. 10. making sure to connect the wires to the W and C terminals of each switch. 13.

4. 4. Refit the Actuator Cover. and adjust the cam per the Int. Ty–wrap the limit switch harness in place. Elevation Encoder 1. and adjust the Encoder Table Elevation for the C–pulse per its procedure.060 5. 13.250 with 32–35 oz. Cradle Drive 1. per its procedure. 2. Refit the Side Panels. 7. For best access. For best access. Adjust both Actuator Limit Switches per their procedure. Refit the Cradle Drive Assm. so that the belt deflects . 12. 12–362 46–297332P1 BNC. With 4–6 oz applied at the mid–span of the belt. fully elevate the table. Refit the Side Panels and Base Covers. reverse the above steps. 50 Ohm. loosen the two screws attaching the Elevation Encoder Assembly to the base. T–Connector. 5. Loosen the switch cam. 3. and slide it toward the drive roller. 6. Remove the Cradle Drive Assm. 12–361 46–170047P7 Belt. tighten the four screws. and place the spring in the notch on the spring pin. making sure the splice is at the mark on the large sprocket. Table Note: This connector is located on the SCA–LAN PWB on the table ETC PWB. Remove the Base Covers and left Side Panels.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 11. and set it on a work surface. Loosen the coupler screw. 2. Matrix Switch Table procedure. fully elevate the table. 12–178 . and slide toward the large sprocket. reverse the above steps. To install the belt. To remove the belt from the sprockets.050/. 6. applied at the mid–span of the belt. To install the belt. tighten both screws. make sure to center the cover in the rear leg opening before tightening the hinge screws. Note that the right–angle BNC connectors must be positioned by the plastic support. Adjust the position of the motor so that the belt deflects . 12–360 46–221532P18 Belt. loosen the four screws holding the motor. Adjust the position of Elevation Encoder Assm. 3. 1. The BNC T–Connector is removed and installed by rotating the knurled ring. noting the polarity. Side Cover and Base Covers. Reconnect the motor wires. making sure to connect the wires to the W and C terminals of each switch. To remove the belt from the pulleys.

Carriage No specific procedure at this time. then install the screws. 2.. ETC The Cable Support is located on the ETC PWA. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. 2. Large. Upper Pin Actuator HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 The two Bumper Disks are located at the front leg attachment point for the Actuator. 12–364 46–221597P2 Bumper. Refer to the SCA–LAN Bd ETC procedure. and positions the BNC–TEE connector. Cradle No specific procedure at this time.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–363 46–297350P1 Bumper Disk. Refer to the following procedures: Home Int. then install the screws. Switch Table. Pot Assm Long. 12–368 46–208580P19 Cam Follower. and is stored in the bottom of the right z–channel. Large u–shape Note: This clamp. Home Latch Assm Table. 12–369 46–296232G1 Carriage Assm. Please use good service practices. 1. Remove the clamp by removing the two attaching screws. marked as TA06101SZ12CR. is the first clamp holding the main harness to the backside of the ETC PWA chassis. Long.. 1. Table No specific procedure at this time. Table The Cal. Long. 12–371 46–297648P1 Clamp. Position the clamp. under the Cradle Drive Cover. Carriage No specific procedure at this time. Encoder. Remove the clamp by removing the two attaching screws. 12–366 46–297576P1 Cal Pin. Small u–shape Note: This clamp. Please use good service practices. 12–365 46–297253P1 Cable Support. Encoder Assm Table. Long. 12–367 46–208580P18 Cam Follower. 12–370 46–297338P1 Clamp. Limit Switch Table. Position the clamp. 12–179 . marked as TA06306SZ20CR. Small. Please use good service practices. Encoder Assm Table. Pin is used in various procedures to position the cradle/carriage at specific locations. 2. Please use good service practices. holds the upper main harness branch to the side of the right z–channel.

2. 12–374 46–297420G1 Cradle Assm 1. but do not tighten all six screws. position the Cradle laterally on the drive rollers so that the same gap exists between the sloped sides of the Cradle and the guide rollers. 9. or removing the four screws. 12–375 46–264370G1 Cradle Drive Amp 1. 3. 7. Remove the servo amp cover by loosening the captive screws. Please use good service practices. if the Cradle/carriage is free to move when the Cradle is removed. fully elevate the table. 12–373 46–297721P1 Connector. Remove the Cradle Assm per its procedure. Remove the Cradle Drive Cover by loosening the two captive screws. fully elevated the table. The Cradle Drive Amplifier is located toward the outside of the table. Remove and keep the six plug buttons covering the bolt holes in the Cradle. 12–180 . 3. For the best access. reverse the above steps. Tape Switch. 8. 2. Remove the left Base Covers. 4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–372 46–297722P1 Connector. position the rear end of the Cradle over the carriage and align the screw holes. Start. To install the Cradle Drive Amp. fully elevate the table. making sure the carriage is latched. Detach all of the wire connectors. the carriage could quickly move toward the gantry. 5. Loosen and remove the six screws. For the best access. Also remove the right Table Side Covers. Make sure that the cradle/carriage is not resting against the latch. Verify that the Cradle/carriage is at the home position and latched before removing the Cradle. Please use good service practices. Female HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. 4. Remove the seven screws attaching the Amp to its mounting bracket. Looking through the gantry bore at the end of table. Male No specific procedure at this time. 5. 6. 12–376 46–296235G1 Cradle Drive Assm 1. Refit the Base Cover. Tape Switch. and damage the longitudinal encoder assembly.. 3. To install the Cradle. Tighten the six screws to 13 ft–lbs and replace the plug buttons. 10. For best access. 2. Lift the Cradle upward to remove from the table. 6.

6. 12–379 46–220277P11 E–Ring. and lift the entire assembly upward. 12–378 46–288226G1 Cradle Release Switch No specific procedure at this time. manually unlatch the carriage and slowly move it fully toward the gantry until it is against the bumper stop. 7. 12–380 46–220277P15 E–Ring. 2. J18 on right side. the carriage must be moved toward the gantry. Disconnect the ground strap from the Z–Channel. 8. fully elevate the table. 12–377 46–296594P1 Cradle Drive Cover 1. Cradle Drive Cover and Cradle. Please use good service practices. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. To install the Cradle Drive Cover. and then downward. Grasp the carriage. Refer to the Gas Spring Table procedure. 12–382 46–288410G1 E–Stop Switch. removing it from the bottom. and torque the six screws to 13 ft–lbs. Lower Pin Actuator This E–Ring secures the lower Actuator mounting pin at the clevis block in the base frame.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 4. reverse the above steps. Please use good service practices. Table No specific procedure at this time. For best access. Tilt the front roller of the Cradle Drive downward. Please use good service practices. reverse the above steps. Loosen the two captive screws at the rear of the cover. 5. 3. Table Gas Spring Pin This E–Ring is used to secure both Gas Spring mounting pins. then backward. and slide the cover forward off the two mounting pins. and unplug the wire connectors: J21 on left side. Note: Do NOT allow the carriage to move unimpeded or you will damage the encoder assembly when the carriage hits the stops. Refit the Side Cover. Be careful not to disturb the Longitudinal Encoder cable. To install the Cradle Drive. 12–381 46–297432P1 E–Stop Button. In order to not dislodge the longitudinal encoder cable from its spool. making sure to center the Cradle between the guide rollers. 12–181 . Table No specific procedure at this time.

Remove the servo amp cover by loosening the captive screws. On the Power Assm. Adjust the position of Elevation Encoder Assembly so that the belt deflects . Table HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. fully elevate the table. 1. Remove the left Base Covers. noting the positions of the wires. 5. 2. 2. To install the Outlet. 12–384 46–296633G1 Elevation Encoder Assm 1. fully elevate the table. 6. fully elevate the table. 9. applied at the mid–span of the belt. Slide the Assembly toward the large sprocket. Adjust the Int. 3. Note the positions of the wires. 7. Loosen and remove the two screws attaching the Elevation Encoder Assembly to the table base. reverse the above steps. 4. Refit the Base Cover. To install the Elevation/Tilt Amp. Note that the white wires connect to silver screws.250 with 32–35 oz. remove the screws attaching the Outlet cover and pull it outward to gain access to the wire connections. and cut the ty–wraps. To install the Elevation Encoder Assembly. The Elevation/Tilt Amplifier is located toward the inside of the table.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–383 46–278446P1 Electrical Outlet. Detach all of the wire connectors. Refit the Side Panels and the Base Covers. 10. or removing the four screws. 8. For the best access. so that the belt can be removed. 5. 2. The elevation axis must now be characterized. 4. Matrix Switch Table per their procedure. Remove the left Base Covers. 5. Disconnect the Encoder cable from the table harness at the J15 connector on the backside of the ETC mounting panel. Remove the seven screws attaching the Amp to its mounting bracket. 12–385 46–288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amp. reverse the above steps.. then loosen the screw terminals to remove the wires. tighten both screws. and the green/yellow wire goes to the green ground screw at the corner of the outlet. 12–182 . 4. the black wires connect to the brass screws. Remove the Base Covers. Adjust the encoder C–Pulse position per the Encoder Table Elevation procedure. Refit the Base Cover. 6. For the best access. reverse the above steps. For the best access. 3. 11. 6. 3. Remove the Encoder Assembly from the table. and the left Side Panels..

Rotate the encoder shaft by turning the thumbwheel until the C–Pulse is found. 7. Detach all connectors. allowing the thumb wheel and the spacer to slide off shaft. as indicated by the specific LED. 3. Attach all connectors. 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–386 46–296854P1 Encoder. on the ETC PWB. 9. and cut the ty–wraps. For the best access. Turn facility circuit breaker OFF. and the center mark on the upper. Place the spacer on the Encoder shaft and insert the shaft through the block and the thumb wheel. To reassemble. Replace ETC Board. fully elevate the table. move the plate fully outward in its slots. 8. tighten the three servo clamps.01. loosen the two set screws holding the thumb wheel (if equipped) to the encoder shaft. and verify that the LED is still lit. making sure the Encoder is fully seated in the block. 5. Disengage the three servo clamps holding the Encoder to the mounting block by turning each clamp 1/2 turn ccw. plate. 2. Return the cal. lock. and the left Side Panels. 4. On the Elevation Encoder Assembly. 12. and re–tighten the screws. rear leg pivot pin is 30. Remove the Base Covers. loosen the screw on the encoder–side of the flexible coupling. 8. To install the Encoder. Push the thumbwheel against the spacer and the Encoder. On the right side of the base frame. Connect ETC Board to CPU Board. 5. if equipped. Disconnect the Encoder cable from the table harness at the J15 connector on the backside of the ETC mounting panel.44 ±0. plate. Remove the Encoder from the table. 6. Refit the Side Panels and the Base Covers. Tighten the flexible coupler screw that clamps the Encoder shaft. Pull the Encoder away from the block. 6. 13. at the C–PULSE position. Note: Install 12 screws kept in step 1. Remove and keep 12 screws. reverse the above steps. 4. reverse steps. Elevate the table so that the distance between the bottom of the cal. With the Encoder cable pointing within ±45 degrees of downward. Table Elevation HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. tag. 7. 10. 12–387 46–264368G1 ETC Bd 1. loosen the two screws holding the cal. 12–183 . plate to its storage position. 2. Detach ETC Board from the CPU Board. tighten the two set screws in the thumbwheel. 11.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–388 46–296788G1 ETC Chassis Assm HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. one retainer and two flat–head rivets. Note the position of the Fan connector (lower left corner) and the direction of air flow (toward the CPU PWA). Table No specific procedure at this time. Remove the left Base Covers. fully elevate the table. 12–390 46–297664P1 Filler Cover Spring. Remove the three screws attaching the Fan to the power assembly bracket. For the best access. 2. four per cover. Remove the two screws attaching the guard to the Fan. Table No specific procedure at this time. Unplug the Fan connector. reverse the above steps. 12–184 . a fixed receptacle. Remove the Base Covers. 4. The kit includes the short stud. two per cover. 2. If equipped. a floating receptacle with two shouldered spacers. fully elevate the table. To install the Fan. two retainers and two flat–head rivets. 12–393 46–296129G1 Footswitch Assm No specific procedure at this time. 4. 7. or removing the four screws. noting the Fan connector position and the direction of air flow. 3. 3. Servo Amps 1. Please use good service practices. Remove the fuse from its holder. 5. 12–389 46–229455P1 Fan. Table ETC 1. The kit includes the long stud. 12–395 46–170021P15 Fuse. 6. Refit the Base Covers. 8. Remove the servo amp cover by loosening the captive screws. For the best access. Please use good service practices. 12–394 46–296821P1 Front End Cover. Please use good service practices. remove the plastic Fuse cover. 12–391 46–297896G1 Fixed Dzus Fastener Kit The Fixed Dzus Fasteners are used to secure the table base covers. Please use good service practices. 12–392 46–297895G1 Floating Dzus Fastener Kit The Floating Dzus Fasteners are used to secure the side table covers. 5.

6. Please use good service practices.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6. When the table is fully elevated. To install the fuse. 12–185 . Raise the table until the Gas Springs are fully extended. Fully elevate the table. 3. reverse the above steps. BOTH GAS SPRING MOUNTING PINS MUST BE LOOSE BEFORE BEING REMOVED. 5. WI. BOTH ARE TO BE RETURNED TO ***** GEMS Recycling Center Ace Warehouse Attn: Paul Neumiller 2200 E. 4. Carriage No specific procedure at this time. 7. reverse the above steps. Long This Ground Strap is only used between the table base frame and the Power Assm. Refit the Base Covers. which occurs when the lower Gas Spring mounting pin is loose in its slot. it may result in an explosion. and that the E–Rings are correctly installed. WARNING 12–397 46–297155G2 Ground Strap. 12–399 46–218193P1 Guide Wheel. Table 1. or mechanically with the hex drive on the end of the motor. Short This Ground Strap is used at ten locations: the Cradle Drive to the left z–channel. The table must be elevated further with a power supply. 2. and the Actuator to the base frame. 53110 If a pressurized spring is thrown out and accidently compacted. To install the replacement Gas Springs. or closest to the front table leg. Remove both Gas Springs. both z–channels to the front leg. the right Side Panels. 12–398 46–297155G1 Ground Strap. each Side Panel to its z–channel. the front leg to the base frame. 11 Cudahy. Remove the E–Rings from the top and bottom Gas Spring mounting pins and remove the pins from their mounting blocks. THERE SHOULD BE NO WEIGHT ON THE CRADLE. making sure that the Gas Spring pressure chambers are UP. MOST LIKELY ONE OF THE GAS SPRINGS WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED. the Actuator is in tension due to the force produced by the Gas Springs. 12–396 46–296891P1 Gas Spring. the rear leg to the base frame. College Ave. Refit the Side Panels and Base Covers. ground bar. BLDG. Remove the Base Covers.

2. 6. 4. 3. Switch. 2. reverse the above steps. Remove the Base Covers. terminals.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–400 46–297448P1 Handle Extension. fully elevate the table. pin. Return the cal. making sure to connect wires to the COM and N.O. and the Cradle Drive Cover to access the cal. reverse the above steps. Remove the right Table Side Covers. holding the chassis to the center of the table base. Adjust the position of the switch in the bracket with the two nuts. Table Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Please use good service practices. For best access. For the best access. Use good ESD procedures. Disconnect the wires going to the switch. 4. Cradle HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. 12–401 46–297088G1 Harness. 4. fully elevate the table.03 out of the Home Position. so that it actuates when the carriage equals 0. and remove the switch from its bracket by removing one nut. and then out of the card guide. Loosen the captive screw on the ETC chassis assm. 5. 6. pin to its storage position. Refit the Base Covers. 2. Pivot the chassis panel so that the Heurikon PWA is horizontal. Power Assm. Please use good service practices.50 ±0. 3. 3. Slide the Heurikon PWA away from the ETC PWA slightly to disconnect it. Use good service practices. Actuator Cover No specific procedure at this time. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 5. 12–403 46–297678P1 Hinge. as determined by the calibration pin. Table 1. 12–186 . Refit the Side Cover and Cradle Drive Cover. 12–402 46–296377P1 Heurikon Bd. ETC 1. To install the switch. 12–404 46–136334P23 Home Int. To install the Heurikon PWA. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Loosen and remove the one screw attaching the Heurikon PWA to the chassis assm.

5. plate. MTX SWITCH S2 position. To install the Latch Assembly. 6. Preload.005. Adjust the set screw in the latch clevis block. plate. so that the clearance between the outer edge of the latch bar and the outer edge of the carriage latch block is . Refit the Rail Cover. pin to its storage position. 4.035/. rear leg pivot pin is 29. at the INT. making sure to connect the wires correctly. 8. Elevate the table so that the distance between the bottom of the cal. 7. Tighten the two screws.050 ±0.050 +/–. 12–187 . Table HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. and then return the cal. Install the Cradle.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–405 46–296233G1 Home Latch Assm. Adjust the position of the solenoid bracket. Detach the wires connected to switches. but do not tighten the four attaching screws. 14.14 ±0. 4. 3. reverse the above steps. loosen the two screws holding the cal. 5. Remove the four screws attaching the Latch Assembly to the z–channel. 12. Remove the two screws attaching the switches to the bracket. pin in the home position to hold carriage in place. For best access. and the center mark on the upper. so that the outer edge of the latch bar overlaps the outer edge of the carriage latch block by .03. Tighten the two screws. 6. fully elevate the table. 7. Remove the right Table Side Covers. Remove the Servo Amp Assm. reverse the above step. 12–406 46–136334P57 Int. Adjust the position of the spring bracket.00Tighten the jam nut. move the plate fully outward in its slots. Remove the Cradle Assm and the right side Rail Cover. 3. and re–tighten the screws. Tighten the two screws. Adjust the switch–to–cam clearance before tightening mounting screws as follows: Position the switches so that a . Adjust the position of the entire Latch Assembly in its slots. the Cradle Drive Cover and the Side Cover. Install and tighten the cal. 2. Matrix Switch. pin. 11. To adjust the actuation point.125 13. For best access. **** ±0. and the Cradle Drive Cover to access the cal. 10. on the right side of the base frame. when the solenoid plunger is fully bottomed. 2. Remove the left Base Covers. To install the switches.005.045 gap exists between the roller and the outside cam surface when the roller lever is contacting the switch housing. so that the spring has . fully elevate the table. so that the distance between the carriage latch block and the forward edge of the latch bar opening is . Disconnect the harness at the terminal strip. Tighten the four screws. 8. when the latch bar is against the set screw. Table 1.050 9.

12–407 46–297687P1 Intercom Speaker. noting that the screwdriver slot in the fastener will be horizontal when the fastener is properly engaged. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Tape Switch These two Jumper Plugs are used to simulate the presence of each Side Cover Tape Switch. Remove the two nuts attaching the Speaker and grill. reverse the above steps. Loosen the cam clamping screw and rotate the cam so that switch S2 (closest to center of the table) is riding on the outside surface of the cam. Note that the fasteners are captive. 6. Now turn the cam CW (as seen from the left side of the table) until S2 actuates. Use good ESD procedures.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 9. fully elevate the table. and then tighten the cam clamping screw. Use good service practices. 2. Turn each of four Dzus fasteners one–quarter turn CCW to release the cover. reverse the above steps. Please use good service practices. 12–408 46–297805G1 Jumper Plug. Refit the Servo Amp Assm and base covers. To install the speaker. 12–188 . 6. fully elevate the table. 4. 10. To install the Left Base Cover. 12–411 46–327096G2 Left Base Cover. 2. 4. 5. Table Rear Cover Assm Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 2. 3. Remove the right Side Panels. Table 1. 3. Table 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Verify the setting. For best access. Refit the Side Panels. 3. Refer to the Table Side Covers procedures. Table PS No specific procedure at this time. 12–410 46–221914P3 Lamp Assm. For best access. Remove the two nuts attaching the speaker cover. when the cover is removed from the table. 12–409 46–297431G1 Jumper.

Disconnect the Tape Switch from the harness. For best access. reverse the above steps. washers. and the Cradle Drive Cover to access the cal. 5. 6. Encoder Assm Cover. Table No specific procedure at this time. 2. making sure to thoroughly clean the mounting surface with alcohol. 12–189 . Remove the right Side Panels. pin. and the two fishpaper spacers. Remove the four screws. 4. making sure the panel is free to float after the screws have been tightened. fully elevate the table. Test the Tape Switch for proper operation. reverse the above steps. To install the Control Panel. and the adhesive from the rear leg. Remove the right Table Side Covers. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. 12–415 46–170012P67 Locknut. 3. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. 3. fully elevate table. 2. 2. 6. 5. 12–417 46–296234G1 Longitudinal Encoder Assm. Disconnect the ribbon cable(s) and connector J1. fully elevate the table. 12–413 46–296827P1 Left Filler Cover. Remove the protective strip from the adhesive and press the switch firmly in place. Remove the Cradle Assm and the right side Rail Cover. spacers. 4. 12–414 46–297698P1 Leg Tape Switch 1. Remove the Table Side Covers. Remove the Long. For best access. Refit the Side Cover. Refit the Side Panels. Upper Pin Actuator This Locknut secures the upper Actuator mounting pin. 12–416 46–170012P81 Locknut.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–412 46–296909G1 Left Control Panel HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 3. by removing the two locknuts. For best access. Table 1. Upper Pin Actuator This Locknut secures the upper Actuator mounting pin. To install the Tape Switch. 4. Remove the Tape Switch. 5. 7. Please use good service practices. Remove the Front End Cover by removing the two screws.

Also. 17. detach the stranded steel cable from the carriage by removing the shoulder screw and spacer from the carriage. Disconnect the encoder from the table harness at the J16 connector on the right z–channel. Remove one turn of cable preload. Encoder Assm. making the electrical connections. Tighten the pot clamp and then verify the setting. Note: Do NOT allow the carriage to move unimpeded or you will damage the encoder assembly when the carriage hits the stops. Loosen the clamp holding the pot sprocket to the pot shaft. While holding the carriage. 8. manually release the latch and slowly move the carriage toward the gantry. Also unplug the pot connection at J17. Remove the Long. 9. Tighten the clamp. 7..80 0. making sure that the cable is properly preloaded. slowly move the carriage to the home position and install and tighten the cal. pin. While firmly holding onto the eyelet. Loosen the clamp holding the cable spool to the encoder shaft. To install the Long. Note: The cable is under about 2 pounds of tension.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 6. by bringing the eyelet from its position on the carriage to along side of the Long. Turn the encoder thumbwheel until the C–pulse is found. After installing the encoder assembly. 16. the Cradle. and attaching the cable to the carriage with the shoulder screw and spacer. from the table by removing the two attaching screws. Refit the Front End Cover. Grasp the carriage. manually unlatch the carriage and slowly move it fully toward the gantry until it is against the bumper stop. making sure that the voltage on the pot increases. the Side Cover and the Base Covers. and then anchor the eyelet to the first hex spacer on the encoder assembly with a ty–rap. make sure that the pot. and then verify that the LED is still lit. sprocket clamp is loose. NOTE: The pot will be damaged if it is mechanically turned past the zero VDC position. as indicated by the specific LED on the ETC PWA. Encoder Assm. 18. Remove the calibration pin. and turn the pot shaft with a small screwdriver until 0. Factory replacement assemblies will have the initial three turns of preload already applied and the eyelet anchored to the hex spacer. Encoder Assm. Attach a DVM to terminals # 2 and # 1 (GND) of the pot. 13. 15. Releasing it and allowing the cable spool to unwind freely will damage the encoder assembly. 12. 11. 12–190 . thereby maintaining the initial three turns of preload on the spool.01 VDC is measured. The longitudinal axis must now be characterized. reverse the above steps. 14. 10.

7. Remove the Cradle Drive Cover. Table Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 5. as determined by the cal. pin to its storage position. Use good ESD procedures. To install the switch. 3. 5. Refit the Cradle Drive Assm. 12–419 46–278310P1 Lower Pin. Remove the four screws and washers attaching the motor to the cradle drive frame. Adjust the position of the motor so that the belt deflects . and set it on a work surface. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 6. Disconnect the motor wires from the terminal strips. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. reverse the above steps. 8. tighten the four screws. 12–421 46–278575P1 Motor. and remove the switch from its bracket by removing one nut. 2. 4. Cradle Drive 1. making sure to connect wires to the COM and N. 3. Actuator This Pin secures the lower end of the Actuator. To install the Motor. 12–191 . Loosen the two set screws securing the pulley to the motor shaft. Disconnect the wires going to the switch. per its procedure. fully elevate the table. 2. reverse above steps. so that it actuates when the cradle/carriage is at its maximum travel position. 2. and remove the pulley.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–418 46–136334P23 Longitudinal Limit Switch. making sure that the motor pulley is aligned with the drive roller pulley. fully elevate the table.060 with 4–6 oz applied at the mid–span of the belt. Refit the Side Cover and Cradle Drive Cover. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. 4. Remove the Cradle Drive Assm.C. Return the cal. and that one of the set screws is positioned over the shaft flat. 12–420 46–296991G1 Main Harness. pin. For best access.050/. Table HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 3. 4. Use good service practices. terminals. Adjust the position of the switch in the bracket with the two nuts. For best access. 6.

3. 9. Use good service practices. 10. 3. Encoder Assm Cover. Use good ESD procedures.. 6. 4. 12–427 46–296433G1 Power Harness. Disconnect the Pot Assembly from the table harness at J17. Table Side Panel These eight Pivot Tubes are used at each Side Panels pivot point. Tighten the pot clamp and then verify the setting. 12–426 46–297117G1 Power Harness. Use good service practices. 12–423 46–297552P1 Pivot Tube. 12–192 . and then remove the Cradle Assm. Attach a DVM to terminals # 2 and # 1 (GND) of the pot. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Loosen the two servo clamps. Remove the Cradle Drive Cover. 5. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 4. 4. To install the Pot Assm. by removing the two locknuts. 3. Use good ESD procedures. making sure that the sprocket is contacting the plastic spacer. downward off the sprocket. Loosen the clamp holding the pot sprocket to the pot shaft. Remove the Long. 12–424 46–297036G2 Pot Assm. pin to its storage position. fully elevate table. For best access. pin at the home position. Table 1. Return the cal.80 ±0. Please use good service practices. Refit the Front End Cover and the Cradle. Refer to the Gas Spring Table procedure. and turn the pot shaft with a small screwdriver until 0. Cradle Drive Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 12–425 46–296791G1 Power Assm No specific procedure at this time. Encoder 1. 2. 7. Install the cal. making sure not to lose the plastic spacer on the pot shaft.. 8. reverse the above steps. 2. Refer to the Side Panels procedures. 11. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. and slide the Pot Assm. and refit the Cradle Drive Cover. Remove the Front End Cover by removing the two screws. Long. Table Gas Spring HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 These two Pins are used to mount each end of the Gas Spring pair.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–422 46–297436P1 Pin. Make sure all safety precautions are taken.01 VDC is measured.

Remove the four screws. Turn each of four Dzus fasteners one–quarter turn CCW to release the cover. 4. Table No specific procedure at this time. Disconnect the wires from both ends of the lower power supply. 7. 2. reverse above steps. 5. Disconnect the ribbon cable(s) and connector J1. Please use good service practices. Tape Switches No specific procedure at this time. fully elevate the table. 12–433 46–296909G2 Right Control Panel 1. To install the Quad Output PS. Please use good service practices. 3. 2. Refit the Base Covers. The Quad Output PS is the lower power supply. Remove the left Base Covers. 4. Remove the servo amp cover by loosening the captive screws. Note that the fasteners are captive. fully elevate the table. 12–193 . reverse the above steps. 6. 3. and slide the power supply out. Elevation & Cradle Amps 1. Table HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. fully elevate the table. and the two fishpaper spacers. To install the Right Base Cover. noting that the screwdriver slot in the fastener will be horizontal when the fastener is properly engaged. For best access. 6. Refit the Base Cover. 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–428 46–296317P1 Quad Output PS. To install the Relay. or removing the four screws. 12–430 46–170053P11 Relay. making sure to connect the wires correctly. Remove the Table Side Covers. fully elevate the table. 2. spacers. Remove the Table Drive PS. Table 1. Refit the Table Drive PS. 12–429 46–297430G1 Rear Cover Assm. washers. 5. 12–432 46–327096G1 Right Base Cover. For the best access. 4. Remove the lower two attaching screws from the right side of the Power Assm main bracket for the Quad Output PS. For best access. Slide the wire retainer to the side and pull out the specific Relay from its socket. For best access. 12–431 46–170053P13 Relay. 2. reverse the above steps. 3.

7. Encoder Assm Table procedure. Remove the servo amp cover by loosening the captive screws. cable to the carriage. 4. reverse the above steps. For the best access. For the best access. 7.. Refit the Base Covers. Loosen the captive screw on the ETC chassis assm. ETC 1. fully elevate the table. 4. Refer to the Long. 5. Cable This Shoulder Screw is used to attach the eyelet of the Long. Remove the Base Covers. 12–194 . Actuator cover The Roller is used to move the Actuator Cover. 12–436 46–264832P1 SCA–LAN Bd. making sure to reconnect all the servo amp connectors. 12–434 46–296827P2 Right Filler Cover. 6.. To install the Servo Amp Assm. 6. 3. 6. reverse the above steps. its mount and two roll pins. Table No specific procedure at this time. fully elevate the table. 2. Pivot the chassis panel so that the chassis is horizontal. Detach all the connectors from both servo amps. to unplug the connector. To install the Control Panel. reverse the above steps. Remove the left Base Covers. and is attached to the rear leg. Loosen the four screws attaching the servo amp bracket to the base frame. 12–435 46–297894G1 Roller Kit. 3. Encdr. The kit is an assembly of the roller.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. or removing the four screws. Refit the Side Cover. Encoder Assm. 12–438 46–170024P4 Shoulder Screw. Please use good service practices. to remove it from the table. Lift the PWA straight away from the ETC Board. Disconnect the BNC–TEE connector from the SCA–LAN Board. making sure the panel is free to float after the screws have been tightened. Refit the Base Covers. 2. holding the chassis to the center of the table base. 5. Loosen and remove the 3 screws attaching the SCA–LAN Board to the ETC Board. and slide the entire assembly out and up. 12–437 46–297059G1 Servo Amp Assm 1. To install the SCA–LAN Board.

reverse the above steps. and slide the bracket in its slots until the side panel pivot points are free to move. Remove the ground strap connection from the z–channel. Remove two flat–head screws for each panel. To install the Side Panel. Refit the Side Cover and Base Cover. RF. To install the Side Panel. If needed. LR. For best access. Remove the appropriate Base Covers and Table Side Covers. 12–440 46–296578P1 Side Panel. For best access. 3. 5. To install the Side Panel. fully elevate the table. Remove the ground strap connection from the z–channel. Table HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 5. reverse the above steps. For best access. 6. reverse the above steps. noting the horizontal terminal orientation. and slide the bracket in its slots until the side panel pivot points are free to move. 4. fully elevate the table. 3. Remove two flat–head screws for each panel. LF. loosen the two screws securing the upper mounting bracket. 4. fully elevate the table. noting the horizontal terminal orientation. Refit the Side Cover and Base Cover. 2. Remove two flat–head screws for each panel. Table 1. Remove the appropriate Base Covers and Table Side Covers. loosen the two screws securing the upper mounting bracket. 6. that secure the Pivot Tube to its bracket. that secure the Pivot Tube to its bracket. If needed.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–439 46–296584P1 Side Panel. 12–195 . 4. 5. 12–441 46–296583P1 Side Panel. Table 1. Remove the appropriate Base Covers and Table Side Covers. 2. Refit the Side Cover and Base Cover. noting the horizontal terminal orientation. Remove the ground strap connection from the z–channel. and slide the bracket in its slots until the side panel pivot points are free to move. 2. loosen the two screws securing the upper mounting bracket. If needed. 6. that secure the Pivot Tube to its bracket. 3.

procedure. that secure the Pivot Tube to its bracket. Use good service practices. Refit the Side Cover and Base Cover. 12–444 46–296972G1 Solenoid Assm. noting the horizontal terminal orientation. For best access. 12–443 46–297118G1 Signal Harness. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. Encoder Assm Table. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 12–448 46–170490P54 Spring. To install the Side Panel. 2. 12–196 . Refer to the Actuator Cover procedure. 5.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–442 46–296577P1 Side Panel. Remove the appropriate Base Covers and Table Side Covers. fully elevate the table. Table No specific procedure at this time. 4. 2. and slide the bracket in its slots until the side panel pivot points are free to move. Use good ESD procedures. If needed. Remove two flat–head screws for each panel. 3. Table Encoder Cable This Spacer is used to space the eyelet of the Long. 12–445 46–296946P1 Spacer. Home Latch Assm. 6. loosen the two screws securing the upper mounting bracket. Refer to the Long. Refer to the Home Latch Assm Table procedure. Cradle Drive Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Please use good service practices. Table HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. reverse the above steps. 12–446 46–296771P1 Spacer. Upper Pin Actuator This Spacer is used to space the upper Actuator mounting joint away from the left side of the clevis in the front leg. cable away from the carriage. Actuator Cover This Spring is used to hold the Actuator Cover against the Roller. Table This Spring is used to hold the Home Latch bar engaged in the carriage latch block. RR. 4. 12–447 46–170490P20 Spring. Encoder Assm. 3. Remove the ground strap connection from the z–channel.

to release the cover. to release the cover. Turn each of two Dzus fasteners one–quarter turn CCW. 3. Also. remove the Tape Switch Jumper Plug from its storage position. 6. Refit the Base Covers. 5. For best access. If any of the table drives will be used.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–449 46–327097G2 Table Cover. 8. 12–451 46–296316P1 Table Drive PS 1. fully elevate the table. Remove the Base Covers. Test the Side Cover Tape Switch for proper operation. and then lift the cover upward to clear the four pins engaged in the z–channel. Remove the upper two attaching screws from the right side of the Power Assm main bracket attaching the Table Drive PS. making sure to connect the wires correctly. remove the Tape Switch Jumper Plug from its storage position. 4. 6. 2. note that the screwdriver slot in the fastener will be in line with the Side Cover when the fastener is properly engaged. For best access. The Table Drive PS is the upper power supply. Right Side 1. and then lift the cover upward to clear the four pins engaged in the z–channel. and plug into the harness connector. 6. 7. To install the Side Cover. 5. Turn each of two Dzus fasteners one–quarter turn CCW. 2. fully elevate the table. To install the Side Cover. Remove the power supply hold down bracket. making sure to return the jumper plug to its storage position. reverse the above steps. and remove. Tip the bottom of the cover outward slightly. fully elevate the table. Test the Side Cover Tape Switch for proper operation. Left Side HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. and slide the power supply out. making sure to return the jumper plug to its storage position. 2. Remove the screws attaching the outlet cover and move the cover aside to gain access to the power supplies. and plug into the harness connector. reverse the above steps. 3. 5. note that the screwdriver slot in the fastener will be in line with the Side Cover when the fastener is properly engaged. and remove. 12–450 46–327097G1 Table Cover. Also. To install the Table Drive PS. 4. 4. 12–197 . For best access. 3. Disconnect the wires from both ends of the power supply. If any of the table drives will be used. Tip the bottom of the cover outward slightly. reverse above steps.

by removing the two shoulder screws. Remove the Tape Switch from the cover by peeling away from adhesive. If possible. Remove the protective strip from the adhesive and press the switch firmly in place. To install the Tape Switch. 6. Route the wires through the holes in the cover with the shorter wires toward the connector bracket. Remove all the adhesive from the cover. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Table Side Cover HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. 8. and pulling the wires through holes in the cover. Refit the Side Cover. 46–183027P92 No specific procedure at this time. making sure to thoroughly clean the mounting surface with alcohol. 3. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–452 46–297698P2 Tape Switch. 4. 12–453 46–296770P1 Upper Pin. Remove the connector from the bracket in the Side Cover. Actuator This Pin secures the upper end of the Actuator. Remove the terminals from the connector. reverse the above steps. Be extremely careful when installing front covers and closing cabinet doors. 9. 5. fully elevate the table. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. Remove the Table Side Covers. 2. 1. Shutdown Applications software 3. For best access. CAUTION Static Sensitive Devices 12–198 . 4. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. The drives can absorb up to 75g’s with power off. Please use good service practices. 7. 2. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. but only 2g’s when spinning. 12–454 SCU 12–455 46–297907P14 High Speed Disk Remove Disk: Do not move or bump the RP cabinets when they are running as you may cause damage/failures to the LSD and/or the HSD. Do not roll the cabinet when power is applied (and the drives are spinning). Save System State to save system files. depending on fault. Test the Tape Switch for proper operation. 10. Cut the ty–raps attaching the Tape Switch wire from the four brackets.

Remove the Disk Power cable and Ground wire. 12. 11. 7. 6. Disk should be pre–formatted and Surface analyzed. which is linked to ZuesCALS. Be sure to use the same screws as removed from the old drive. This runs ctzload. 2. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the disk to spin down. Carefully and slowly pull–out the tray making sure the cables do not get caught on anything. 12–199 . If you must format the disk. Run Reconfig on the SBC. Power connector. and Ground wire. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. 12. b.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. Make sure the replacement Disk hasn’t introduced any new problems. which in turn starts the script CopyFileToHSD. 9. Remove the Disk drive from the vertical position and remove the 4 screws from the bottom side of the tray holding the Disk drive to the tray. Run Reconfig on the OC and select Regen Database. The cables are long enough so that the tray can be pulled out and hung vertically on the extended screws. Remove the Data cable and Terminator from the back of the disk. Screw the Disk Drive Tray in place. Terminator. Hook up the Data cable. 8. 7. CopyFileToHSD copies the two golden scanfiles onto the HSD. Run the HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk (HSD) Preparation and Media Defect Management software.) 3. 4. 5. Carefully slide the Disk Drive Tray back into position making sure the cables do not get pinched. This builds the 450 scan files on the HSD. Disk Drive Installation: 1. 8. Put the drive into a anti–static bag. Mount the Disk Drive to the tray. 10. login as root and run format* from the OC or SBC. 11. 6. Unfasten the 2 Disk tray thumb screws. 9. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 10. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement Disk corrects the problem. Check the new Disk Drive’s switch and/or jumper settings. ZuesCALS runs sconfig. Check system operation: a. (Longer screws can penetrate the drive and damage it.

3. 4. 7.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–456 46–297907P13 HSDC Board HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove Board: 1. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. Slide the board out and place in a anti–static bag. 5. 6. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Shutdown Applications software 2. Static Sensitive Devices 12–200 . Disconnect the Data cable from the front of the board. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running.

5. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. depending on fault. 12. 5. 10. 4. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 7. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the disk to spin down. exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Check system operation: a. but only 2g’s when spinning. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Remove the Disk drive from the vertical position and remove the 4 screws from the bottom side of the tray holding the Disk drive to the tray. Put the drive into a anti–static bag. using your hand. The drives can absorb up to 75g’s with power off. Make sure the replacement board hasn’t introduced any new problems. b. Remove the Disk Power cable and Ground wire. Check the new board’s switch and/or jumper settings. Then. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. If possible. Remove Disk: 1. 8. 12–457 46–269587P1 Local System Disk (LSD) Drive CAUTION Do not move or bump the RP cabinets when they are running as you may cause damage/failures to the LSD and/or the HSD. Be extremely careful when installing front covers and closing cabinet doors. Remove the SCSI Ribbon cable from the back of the disk. Shutdown Applications software 3. 6. Do not roll the cabinet when power is applied (and the drives are spinning). Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 4. Re–connect the Data cable to the SDDC board. 3. 6. The cables are long enough so that the tray can be pulled out and hung vertically on the extended screws. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. Save System State to save system files. 2. 11. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement board corrects the problem. Carefully and slowly pull–out the tray making sure the cables do not get caught on anything. 9.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Install Board: 1. Static Sensitive Devices 12–201 . Unfasten the 2 Disk tray thumb screws. 2.

10. 7. TB2 is labeled L. & Gnd. 9. 4. 11.) 3. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 8. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Power connector.. 8. Power off the RP Power Supply by Red power switch. 4. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Disconnect the 5VDC sense lead at J1. 7. Carefully slide the Disk Drive Tray back into position making sure the cables do not get pinched. 9.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Install Disk Drive: 1. Static Sensitive Devices 12–202 . 3 wires. Shutdown Applications software 2. N. Verify the Disk functions correctly. both the Line and Neutral are Line Input. 2. 6. Disconnect the AC Input wires to the supply at Terminal TB2. 5. Start the SBC S/W load at Disk partition and label. Disk should be pre–formatted and Surface analyzed. Disconnect the 5VDC output leads at terminals V1 and V2. and Ground wire. Remove the supply from the tray by the 4 mounting screws on the bottom of the tray. Remove the Power supply tray from the RP Chassis. – SAFETY – 5. Be sure to use the same screws as removed from the old drive. (Longer screws can penetrate the drive and damage it. Screw the Disk Drive Tray in place. Disconnect the wires going to Terminal TB1. however in this configuration. 10. Remove incoming 208VAC to the chassis by unplugging the power cord at the rear of the RP Chassis. Verify the wires are correctly labeled to match the Terminal strip labeling. Hook up the SCSI Ribbon cable. Mount the Disk Drive to the tray. Load System State back on. Check the new Disk Drive’s switch and/or jumper settings. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. 3. 12–458 46–297907P16 RP VME Power Supply (±5 VDC and ±12 VDC) Remove Power Supply: 1. 6.

b. 5. Check the voltage select switch and set for the 208VAC position. 3. Check system operation: a. 11. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement board corrects the problem. Then. 2. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 6. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 3. exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Boot the SBC and verify the Disk functions correctly. 3. Install Board: 1. using your hand. Turn on the RP Chassis via the power switch. Shutdown Applications software 2. – SAFETY – 7. Make sure the replacement board hasn’t introduced any new problems. 12–459 46–297907P12 AP–120 Board Remove Board: 1. 4. Slide the board out and place in a anti–static bag. 2. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. Install the Power Supply to the Tray. Verify all leads are properly connected and are not shorted together! 8. Static Sensitive Devices 12–203 . Re–connect the 5VDC output leads at terminals V1 and V2. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. 4. 10.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Install Power Supply: 1. Plug in the 208VAC line cord at the rear of the RP Chassis. Re–connect the wires going to Terminal strip TB1. Check power supply output voltages. Re–connect the 5VDC sense lead at J1. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. Install the Tray into the RP Chassis. 6. 9. 5. Check the new board’s switch and/or jumper settings. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. 5. 4.

The absolute maximum voltage which. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector.4V to –12. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. the FEP will draw no more than 16 milliamps. Power Supply Requirements: The FEP PWA uses the following supply voltages: 1. Under normal operating conditions.0V.0V to 13. 3. Check system operation: a. 6. The maximum current the FEP will draw is 115 milliamps. Make sure the replacement board hasn’t introduced any new problems.5V. will cause damage to the FEP is –0.0V. 2. Shutdown Applications software 2. Then. relative to LGND. 3. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch.6V. the FEP will draw no more than 8 Amps.6V. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Check the new board’s switch and/or jumper settings. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. and P3 VME connectors.25V. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement board corrects the problem. The absolute maximum voltage range is –2. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. 3. relative to LGND. +5V. the FEP will draw no more than 80 milliamps. Normal operating voltage is –11. if exceeded.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12–460 46–327036G1 FEP Board HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove Board: 1. Normal operating voltage is 11. +12V This voltage supplies the FLASH RAM’s during re–programming and is obtained from the P1 VME connector. 5. 5. The maximum current the FEP will draw is 36 milliamps. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. The maximum current the FEP will draw. relative to LGND. Static Sensitive Devices 12–204 . –12V This voltage supplies the DC/DC converter for conversion to –5V and is obtained from the P1 VME connector. This voltage supplies the digital logic on the FEP and is obtained from the P1. Slide the board out and place in a anti–static bag. above which the board can be considered faulty is 13 Amps. 4. P2. 4.75V to 5. Under normal operating conditions.4V to 12.5V to 2. b.5V to 7. Install Board: 1. Under normal operating conditions. using your hand. 2. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. Recommended DC operating voltage under which the FEP will function normal for this supply is 4. The absolute maximum voltage range is –13.

3. 3. 7. 5. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. Shutdown Applications software 2. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Shutdown Applications software 2. 5. 6. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12–461 46–297907P11 BPP Board HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove Board: 1. or carefully move them aside to be able to remove the SBC. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. Static Sensitive Devices Static Sensitive Devices 12–205 . Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. 3. 4. b. using your hand. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement board corrects the problem. Then. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Check system operation: a. Check the new board’s switch and/or jumper settings. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Slide the board out and place in a anti–static bag. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. Make sure the replacement board hasn’t introduced any new problems. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Install Board: 1. Either disconnect the SDDC Data cable and LAN cable form their respective boards. 4. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. 6. Slide the board out and place in a anti–static bag. 2. 4. 5. exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 12–462 46–297907P19 SBC Board Remove Board: 1.

Make sure the replacement board hasn’t introduced any new problems. Check system operation: a. exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. 7. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. 6. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 6. 4. Check the new board’s switch and/or jumper settings. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. Static Sensitive Devices 12–206 . Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. 2. Then. 8. 5. 2. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. 4. 12–463 46–327135P1 CLA Board Remove Board: 1. using your hand. 6. Attach the anti–static wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement board corrects the problem. Tip into the SBC and record the new Ethernet number. b. Shutdown Applications software 2. Re–connect the LAN cable to the CLA board. 3. 3. 5. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. Re–connect the SDDC Data cable and LAN cable if previously removed. Install Board: 1. 7. Verify the board functions correctly. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. 4. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. Then. 3. Disconnect the LAN cable from the front of the board. Check the new board’s switch and/or jumper settings. using your hand.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Install Board: 1. Reconfig the S/W for the new Ethernet number. 5. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. Slide the board out and place in a anti–static bag.

Turn the fan tray over so the bottom of the tray is facing up and remove the four Phillips head screws from the finger guard for the defective fan. Please use good service practices. Tighten with a Phillips screwdriver. 5. through the tray. Holding the fan in this position. 5. Plug in the Mate–N–Lock connector on the fan tray. The yellow wire connects to + and the black wire connects to negative.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–464 46–297907P17 Fans HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Remove Fan: 1. Remove (3) screws securing transceiver bracket to cabinet. Remove cable clamp and cables on defective transceiver unit. Position the fan tray so the top of the tray is facing up (finger guards down). 12–466 46–287532P2 ETHERNET Transceiver Replacement instructions for Transceiver Unit 46–287532P2 1. 6. Disable power to SCU cabinet 2. 4. 8. and into the mounting holes on the fan. Replace Fan: 1. Remove (2) screws holding transceiver unit to transceiver bracket. Place the power switch to the on (1) position. 2. Unplug the Mate–N–Lock connector from the bottom of the fan tray. 3. Remove defective transceiver unit. turn the fan tray over so the bottom of the tray is facing up. Place the power switch in the off (0) position. 7. 4. 3. Insert the four Phillips head screws through the mounting holes on the finger guard. Check Transceiver switch and/or jumper settings. 12–465 46–297907P29 RP Chassis Backplane No specific procedure at this time. 2. Making sure that the air flow indicator arrow on the side of the fan points up. Remove the front cover to expose the chassis. position the fan over the four empty mounting holes. and using pliers connect the two power wires to the fan. 9. 6. Insert the fan tray into the fan tray enclosure and tighten the thumb screws on the front of the chassis. 4. 3. 12–207 . Be sure that the power switch is in the off (0) position. Verify that all the fans are working and all exhausting in the same direction. 5. Carefully turn the fan tray over so the top of the tray is facing up and using pliers disconnect the two power wires from the fan. Loosen the thumb screws on the front of the chassis and slide out fan assembly. 6. Replace the chassis front cover.

Reassemble new transceiver unit to transceiver bracket and bracket to cabinet in reverse order. 2. Remove coaxial terminator cap from defective transceiver unit and mount to new transceiver unit in same position. 2. 12–208 . 4. Use good service practices. 3. Xylogics to HSD Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 4. 4. 12–467 46–296861G8 Cable. RPJ5 to XCVR#2 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 4. Use good ESD procedures. Use good service practices. Use good service practices. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 8. Use good ESD procedures. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Use good ESD procedures. 3. 2. 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 7. 4. Reconnect (2) cables and secure cable to transceiver bracket using same cable clamp. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Use good service practices. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 3. 12–469 46–296454G10 Cable. Use good ESD procedures. 9. 12–470 46–327070G1 Cable. 12–468 46–296861G9 Cable. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Serial RP J3 to OC GAI Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 2. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. RPJ6 to XCVR#1 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Use good service practices. 2. XCVR#2 to XCVR#3 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Use good ESD procedures. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 12–471 46–297907P27 Cable.

Turn OFF power to the connected units. 4. 7. 2. Use good service practices. OC to XCVR#2. 50 Ohm Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Use good service practices. Use good ESD procedures. 3. 2. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Use good service practices. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 4. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 4. 2. Use good ESD procedures. 80 Feet Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. ETHERNET Board to Bulkhead HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 2. 12–476 46–297907P23 Cable. Use good ESD procedures. RP to ETC. Use good service practices. 12–475 46–296454G12 Cable. 3. Use good service practices. 4. 12–474 46–296861G11 Cable. 75 Ohm. 12–209 . SCSI cable CPU to LSD Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–472 46–327100G1 Cable. Use good ESD procedures. 4. 3. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 80 Feet. Gantry Bulkhead to RP Bulkhead. 2. 3. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Turn OFF power to the connected units.5 Feet. 50 Ohm Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Use good ESD procedures. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 3. 12–473 46–297748G4 Cable. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Turn OFF power to the connected units.

3. Use good service practices. Use good ESD procedures. 3. 4. 12–210 . Use good service practices. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Turn OFF power to the connected units. VME Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Use good service practices. 2. 2. 2. 4. Use good ESD procedures. 12–479 46–296817P1 50 Ohm Terminator With Chain Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 12–480 46–313020P1 50 Ohm Terminator With Ground Lead Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Use good ESD procedures. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 4. 3. Turn OFF power to the connected units. RP Chassis Power Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. 3. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. Use good service practices. 4. Use good ESD procedures. HSD Power Cable HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–477 46–297907P26 Cable. Use good service practices. 12–481 46–297907P30 Cable. 4. 3. Use good ESD procedures. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 12–478 46–297907P25 Cable.

but do not tighten the two thumb screws yet. remove the two bundled DC power lines marked V1+ and V1– from the DC output terminals (labeled V1 and V1 RTN) using two 7/16–inch socket wrenches. Disconnect the 4–wire DC power plug from connector J3 of the drive. Cut the tie wraps securing the power cable harness to the inside wall of the chassis. Disconnect the AC power cable from the chassis power receptacle. Loosen the thumb screws on the disk drive mounting plate. and slide the mounting plate out until you feel the nuts on the bottom catching on the chassis. Use good ESD procedures. carefully slide the HSD drive back into the chassis. 9. Remove the V2+ and V2– lugs from V2 and V2– on TB1. UNSWITCHED LINE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT THE BACK OF THE ON/OFF SWITCH. 14. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 4. Hang the plate on the bolts provided on the front of the chassis. Use good service practices. carefully slide the LSD mounting plate back into the chassis. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 8. Then lift the mounting plate slightly so that you can pull the mounting plate all the way out. USE EXTREME CAUTION IN THIS AREA. 2. 4. 7. 3. 6. 12–483 46–297907P24 LSD Power Cable Remove Cable: 1.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12–482 46–327071G1 Cable. Exposure Interlock RP to PDU HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Be sure that the power switch is in the off (0) position. At the power supply. 10. 15. 13. Loosen the thumb screws connecting the disk drive assembly to the front of the chassis. 3. Hang the mounting plate on the bolts provided on the front of the chassis. 5. and carefully slide the disk drive plate all the way out. Remove the front cover to expose the chassis. Remove the power cable harness. WARNING 12. Disconnect the 40pin Molex connector on the DC power cable from the DC power connector on the drive. 11. To provide space to work in the power supply enclosure. To provide space to work on the HSD. 12–211 . 2. but do not tighten the two thumb screws yet.

Locate the two lugs connected to the yellow wires marked –V2. 9. Carefully slide the LSD mounting plate out all the way out. Note: Try to maintain clearance around the voltage adjustment potentiometer marked V2. Hang the mounting plate on the bolts provided. 3. Holding these in place. Install tie wraps attaching the power cable harness to the inner surface of the outside chassis wall. USE EXTREME CAUTION IN THIS AREA. WARNING: Do not confuse these wires with the black wires marked V3+. 6. Carefully slide the HSD drive plate out all the way out. Connect the 4–pin Molex connector to the DC power connector J15 on the HSD drive. 8. Be sure that the power switch is in the off (0) position. Insert the bolt through the terminal marked V1. 11. and insert a Phillips head screw and tighten the lugs onto V2– on TB1. The yellow wire (marked F6+) connects to the + connector. but do not tighten the thumb screws yet. 2. Connect the 4–wire Molex connector to the drive. 15. connect the two DC power lugs to the fan. 10. Tighten the connection using two hex wrenches. 12–212 . Put a lock washer nut on the bottom of the 7/16–inch bolt. Insert the bolt through the terminal marked V1 RTN. NOTE: Try to maintain clearance around the voltage adjustment potentiometer marked V3. 14. 12. Locate the two lugs connected to the yellow wires marked +V2. Insert a 7/16–inch bolt through the two power lugs on the red bundled DC power lines. The black wire (marked F6–) connects to the – connector. 1. Beginning at the split in the power cable harness. To provide space to work on the LSD. Holding these in place. 4. carefully slide the HSD disk drive plate back into the chassis. 16. Using pliers. place the disk drive power harness lug (marked V1–) over the 7/16–inch bolt from the bottom. Disconnect the AC power cable from the chassis power receptacle. Hang the disk drive plate on the bolts provided on the front of the chassis. 5. 7. place the disk drive power harness lug (marked V1+) over the 7/16–inch bolt from the bottom. and insert a Phillips head screw and tighten the lugs onto V2 on TB. Tighten the connection using two hex wrenches. Route the other end of the power cable harness up and to the back of the disk drive assemblies. 13. Put a lock washer nut on the bottom of the 7/16–inch bolt. pull all slack in the cables toward the front of the chassis so that there is enough slack for the HSD drive plate to fit correctly in the chassis.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 Replace Cable: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 WARNING UNSWITCHED LINE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT THE BACK OF THE ON/OFF SWITCH. Insert a 7/16–inch bolt through the two power lugs on the red bundled DC power lines.

Please use good service practices. 12–488 2107544–2 Digital Controller Board No specific procedure at this time. 12–485 46–297907P18 Scan Chassis Power Switch No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12–491 2107544–5 Right Backplane No specific procedure at this time. wear properly grounded wrist strap) when handling all boards. 18. Please use good service practices. Tighten the thumb screws on both the HSD drive plate and LSD mounting plate assemblies.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 17. Take appropriate precautions (e. 19. Please use good service practices. Please use good service practices. 12–487 2102234 Converter Board No specific procedure at this time. Secure the power cable harness with tie wraps to the inside chassis wall in the power supply compartment.g. Place the power switch in the on (1) position. 21. Static Sensitive Devices 12–486 2119740 & 2107544 Hp–das Assembly (w/wo Rating Plate) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12–490 2107544–4 Left Backplane No specific procedure at this time. 12–484 46–297907P10 Empty Scan Chassis (Includes the VME backplane) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 20. 12–213 . Replace the front cover. HP–DAS & Power Supplies THE CIRCUIT BOARDS ARE VERY STATIC SENSITIVE!! Static sensitive components may be damaged if not handled in a static free environment. Slide the HSD drive plate assembly back into the chassis. Please use good service practices. 12–489 2107544–3 Analog Controller Board No specific procedure at this time.

12–502 2119747 DC Power Harness No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12–501 2126738 AC Power Harness No specific procedure at this time. 12–495 2107544–9 Dog House Cable #2 No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12–498 2108472 Right Cover No specific procedure at this time.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12–492 2107544–6 Inter–chassis Cable HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12–496 2107544–10 Center Cover No specific procedure at this time. 12–493 2107544–7 Filter Box No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. Please use good service practices. Please use good service practices. 12–499 46–251198P41 6v Power Supply No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. Please use good service practices. Please use good service practices. 12–500 46–251198P42 5v/ ±15v Power Supply No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices 12–214 . Please use good service practices. 12–497 2108473 Left Cover No specific procedure at this time. 12–494 2107544–8 Dog House Cable #1 No specific procedure at this time.

A room–layout template is first used to determine the position of the gantry and table. which are drilled with the gantry and table in place. Please read and follow this procedure. gantry or the two interface areas between table and gantry should be higher than the support areas for the table and gantry. Note: If gantry covers must be removed to allow maneuvering of the gantry into the scan room. and then the table is positioned relative to the gantry with three alignment bars. No part of the floor surface within the table. Review Illustrations A–1 and A–2 to familiarize yourself with this procedure. the gantry and table are supported by adjustable leveling pads. positioning and leveling of all HiSpeed Advantage RP Subsystems. A–1 . Preinstallation HiSpeed Advantage 2. A1–2 Table/Gantry Installation Without Floor Plates Floor And Room Preparation Support areas of the main table. The items listed below will be required to install an HSA system per this procedure. The gantry is positioned. and gantry must rest on solid concrete or other basic flooring. Instead. A1–2–1 Overview The following procedure will provide detailed instructions on how to position. The system is then leveled and anchored. not on resilient tile or carpeting which may slowly yield over a period of time and disturb alignment of table to gantry. level and anchor the gantry and table in RP/HSA CT systems with a floor mounting system that does not utilize baseplates. the system itself locates the holes. refer to section 1–1–10. Floor structure must be capable of withstanding both the occupied weight of table and Gantry as well as the individual contact area loading of these components Method and placement of anchoring. or through bolts.x. Note: Before continuing with installations make sure site is prepared in accordance with the direction 2126732–100.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 APPENDIX A1 – INSTALLATION Position Subsystems A1–1 A1–1–1 Position and Mount Subsystems Introduction This section contains information on mounting. the template is no longer used to locate and drill the anchor holes. must not reduce structural strength of floor. four for the gantry and five for the table. Beside there being no baseplates.

Two Short Alignment Bars. used to turn the adjusters after the anchors are in place. P/N 2110944. P/N 2106205. and contains the following special tools (see Illustrations A–1 and A–2): D D D D D D D A1–2–4 Guide Pin Bolt. P/N 2110953. P/N 2106495. used to position the table relative to the gantry. P/N 2107863. It shows the location of the gantry and table along with the required operating and service clearances. Long Alignment Bar #3 (in two pieces). used to center and guide the bit when drilling the anchor holes. used to vacuum debris out of the anchor holes.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–2–2 Pre–Installation Template HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 The room–layout paper template. must be obtained by the installing personnel. Although the template shows the locations of the anchor holes (both primary and redundant) for floor structure considerations. P/N 2106369. Adjuster Tool. P/N 2110003. 8” 2 Hammer Large straight blade screwdriver 4 foot level 1/ ” Allen wrench 8 D D D D D D D D D 9” torpedo level 2” drive socket wrench 1/ ” drive 3” long extension 2 1/ ” drive 6” long extension 2 9/ ” socket 16 3/ ” deep well socket 4 11/8” socket 11/2” socket 1/ ” drive torque wrench: 2 0–100 N–m (0–100 ft–lbs) 1/ A–2 . used to position the gantry over its first anchor hole. Drill Bushing. P/N 2106475 (in two pieces). Required Common Tools and Supplies D D D D D D D D D Masking tape Extension cord Shop Vacuum Cleaner Hammer Drill 1/ ” or 13mm masonry bit. #1 & #2 P/N 2106368. Spanner Wrench. Vacuum Attachment (funnel). min. is available for site planning. except for the first gantry hole. used to turn the adjusters when leveling the system. if necessary. used to position the table relative to the gantry. A1–2–3 Installation Tool Kit The installation tool kit. the templates are NOT to be used to locate and drill the anchor holes.

It is crucial to the performance of the anchor that this hole be drilled perpendicular to the floor. aligning it with any existing cable trough. Remove the paper templates from the floor and discard. If this anchor hole can not be used due to interference from reinforcement rods in the concrete or other interference. If necessary. At the left front corner of the gantry base. Layout the two paper templates. Before lowering the gantry into place. 6. remove carpet/tile flooring as shown on the templates. 3. With the dollies. but stop when the leveling pads are approximately 3 mm above the floor. remove the adjuster shipping bolt. The mounting surface must be free of material which may interfere with the positioning and leveling of the system. or location #1. Vacuum all debris from the inside of the hole by placing the funnel tip inside the hole and the vacuum hose in the funnel. When establishing the room layout. Clear the hole of debris several times while drilling to prevent the drill bit from binding. as shown in Illustration A–6. Note the locations of the anchor holes in regard to any structural particularities in the floor. lower the gantry evenly until the guide pin extends into the hole. 3. Lower the gantry down onto the floor and remove the dollies. A1–3–2 Drill the First Gantry Anchor Hole: 1. which also threads into the leveling pad. 2. hole at the location shown on the gantry template. Replace it with the guide pin bolt. and the three other adjuster shipping bolts. Remove all the transportation packaging from the gantry except for the dollies. if necessary. Clean the area. use the guide pin and hole as a pivot and carefully rotate the gantry into its correct position as established by the templates. make sure the leveling pads are present and positioned against the base. A1–3–3 Position the Gantry: 1. 4. a second person can visually insure perpendicularity throughout the drilling operation. Wheel the Gantry into position as shown on the template with the guide pin over the hole. align the scan and table centerlines. With one person drilling the hole.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–3 A1–3–1 Detailed Procedure Establish the Room Layout: HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. A–3 . Also vacuum the debris from the surrounding area when finished. The next step fixes the front left corner of the gantry. Now place the table template over top. Tape the template to the floor. Remove the guide pin bolt from the left front adjuster. 5. 3. Drill one 13mm (1/2”) diameter. and tape it to the floor. and remove any old baseplates. 2. 2. move the Gantry (and templates) to another location. insure that all operating and service clearances shown on the templates are available. 110 mm (4 3/8”) deep. This hole will be the left front anchor hole for the gantry. Put Gantry template down first.

the level is unacceptable for use and must be adjusted (if possible) or replaced. Before leveling operations begin. 4. there must be NO unloaded or floating adjusters that would allow the gantry to rock. use only adjusters #3 and #4. and for each location. there are two machined extensions welded to the base. can be raised during its leveling procedure. 2. Gantry leveling location “A” needs to be leveled with a 9” torpedo level. When leveling at location “C”. Also note that if the gantry is positioned in a “valley” on the floor. The gantry is properly leveled when all three readings show the bubble to be centered between the lines of the glass cylinder at the same time. D D D D D D D A–4 . and therefore the gantry is at its lowest possible height. Now rotate the level end for end (maintaining the same mounting surface on the level) and place it in the same position. or permit the base frame to twist when the anchors are tightened. 3. When leveling at location “A”. use only adjusters #1 and #2. Also be sure that the level sits flat on the machined portion of the extensions and does not ride up onto the neighboring fillets or welds. maximum. Take note of the bubble’s specific location within the glass cylinder. “A”. Also note: D Each of the four adjusters must carry a portion of the gantry weight. “B”. which may not be in the “valley”. the level is acceptable for use. Gantry leveling locations “B” and “C” are to be leveled with a 4’ level. all leveling will require that the gantry be raised. use adjuster pairs #1 & #2 and #3 & #4 on each side of the gantry. 11/8” socket and the 1/2” drive socket wrench to turn each adjuster as required below. To loosen. & “C” (see Illustration A–3). and only adjust 1 turn at a time. If the bubble comes to rest in the same location within the glass cylinder.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–3–4 Level the Gantry: HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Loosen all the adjuster lock rings. place the screwdriver at an angle in the slot of the lock ring and strike the screwdriver with the hammer in the direction to loosen the lock ring. Remember to wipe the leveling surfaces clean prior to leveling. The 4’ level will bridge these two extensions. then it may have to be raised an initial amount so that the table. check the accuracy of the levels. Use the adjuster tool. The adjusters are used to level the gantry. The indicating mark on top of the adjuster is used to aid in incrementing the adjuster’s rotation. If not. Level the gantry by systematically rotating through the three gantry leveling locations. When leveling at location “B”. Place the level on a flat surface. Since the leveling pads are already against the bottom of the base.

#3. #1 and #2. If the joint is loose. Assemble two halves of the long alignment bar. make sure the leveling pads are present and positioned against the base (see Illustration A–6). by inserting the pin and rotating the handle. Lower the table until the leveling pads are approximately 3 mm above the floor. Make sure the joint is tight after the handle has been rotated. 3. 5. 7. Make sure all the bars are fully seated on their mating surfaces. Extreme care must be taken to prevent damage to the ETC and CPU PWA’s. and the serial number on each half of the bar must be the same. and the four side panels. disconnect the ground straps at the z–channel. Alignment bar #1 must be removed temporarily so that the front dolly can be rolled out. the tip of the expanding pin can be tightened. 2. thereby causing the pin to expand to a larger diameter. Before lowering the table into place. and loosen the lock rings. Adjust the position of the table as needed until the three alignment bars can be fit into the 3/4” alignment holes in the gantry base and the 1/2” alignment holes in the table base as shown in Illustration A–2. 6. 8. Note that the halves are matched sets.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–3–5 Position the Table: HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Wheel the table into its approximate position relative to the gantry. remove the table base cover center support bar. Remove the table left and right upper side covers. Also. Remove all the transportation packaging from the table except for the dollies. After the dolly is removed replace the alignment bar. Once the alignment bars are in place. 4. The far end of the table can then be “pivoted” until the long alignment bar will fit. The short alignment bars. It is recommended that the short alignment bars be installed first. Remove the five adjuster shipping bolts. lower the table to the floor and remove the transportation dollies. A–5 . are identical and therefore interchangeable.

The table is properly leveled when all three readings show the bubble to be centered between the lines of the glass cylinder at the same time. Level the table to the gantry by systematically rotating through the three table leveling locations. The level is placed on the machined surfaces of the alignment bars. Location “G” can also be used to verify the table levelness. Note that there must be no unloaded adjusters at locations #1 through #4. & “F” (see Illustration A–3). Tighten the lock rings at all locations #1 through #7 with the hammer and screwdriver. and map out the adjustments necessary to get these three locations level. When leveling at location “D”. When leveling at location “E”. #8 and #9 are used to level the table. Recheck all the leveling locations. “D”. At table locations #5 and #6. all leveling will require that the table be raised. 3. 2. and therefore the table is at its lowest possible height. The adjusters and adjuster tool are used in the same manner as they were on the gantry. screw each adjuster downward until it is tight against its leveling pad. use adjuster #7. use adjuster #8. Since the leveling pads are already against the bottom of the base. Make sure the adjusters at locations #5 and #6 are loose and unloaded. The 4’ level is used at all the table leveling locations. Make initial measurements at the three locations. “E”. Make sure these surfaces are clean and that the level is not resting on the radiused surface on alignment bar #3. When leveling at location “F”. use adjuster #9. Each adjuster should be a little more than hand tight. 2. Also note: D D Only locations #7. A–6 . “A” through “F”.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–3–6 Level the Table: HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. D D D D D D A1–3–7 Tighten the Lock Rings: 1. but be sure not to unload any of the other table adjusters.

#6 and #7. can now be drilled with the system in place. using the 13mm (1/2”) bit. The minimum table anchoring requirement is to have three anchors. These locations provide compressive support for the table. Also. and centered within the adjuster. D D D A1–3–9 Redundant Anchor Hole Locations: D If an anchor hole within an adjuster can not be used due to interference from reinforcement bars in the concrete or other interference. locations #5. as shown in Illustration A–4. Open both front and rear gantry covers. This is most important for the three table anchor holes. 2. Note that the minimum gantry anchoring requirement is to have four anchors. Remove the gantry scan window and prop open the top cover. at locations #2 through #7. Care must also be taken when drilling at location #7 to avoid hitting the actuator motor lead. The remaining six anchor holes. No anchor holes are drilled at locations #8 and #9. Place the drill bushing inside each adjuster to keep the hole vertical. one each at locations #5. but are not anchored. Remove lead if necessary. Vacuum all debris from the inside of each hole by placing the funnel tip inside the hole and the vacuum hose in the funnel. Follow the same procedure. Also note: D D D D Mark the drill bit 195 mm (711/16”) from the tip of the drill bit with tape to indicate hole depth. but mark the drill with tape at 170 mm (611/16”). #6 and #7. then use its redundant anchor location. Clear each hole several times while drilling to prevent the drill bit from binding. 3. Drill each hole until the mark on the drill bit is even with the top of the drill bushing. since it will allow the maximum amount of horizontal alignment capacity when centering the cradle on isocenter later during system testing. D A–7 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–3–8 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes: HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. Care must be taken not to injure yourself on the gantry cover brackets. Also vacuum the debris from the surrounding area when finished. one in each corner. outlined above. place a piece of cardboard over the ETC and CPU PWA’s to prevent damage and dust contamination.

5. Tighten all the anchors at locations #1 through #7 and torque to 75 +/–6 N–m (55 5 ft–lbs). Remove gantry shipping bolts and brackets per Illustration. 6. and re–pack the install kit. 2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–3–10 Install the Anchors: HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 1. ground straps and the center support bar. Close all Gantry covers and re–install the scan window. A–8 . and positioning the nut as indicated in Illustration A–5. Remove the three alignment bars. Place an anchor in each hole and hammer the anchor downward until the anchor is fully inserted as shown in Illustration A–5. assemble the anchors by adding the 1/4” thick washer under the regular anchor washer. The only anchors acceptable for use are Hilti Kwik–Bolt II. including covers. 3. per P/N 2106573. 7. 4. 1/2” diameter by 8” long. Before installing the anchors. Re–install all the table parts that were removed during the install.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–1 LEVELING PAD AND ANCHORING DETAIL HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 A–9 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–2 INSTALL AND LEVEL OF TABLE AND GANTRY HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 A–10 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–3 GANTRY AND TABLE LEVEL LOCATIONS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 A–11 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–4 GANTRY AND TABLE ANCHOR LOCATIONS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 A–12 .

TYPICAL HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 ILLUSTRATION A–6 LEVELING PAD STARTING POSITION A–13 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–5 ANCHOR BOLT.

Locate and install (4) M6 x 25 screws and (4) M6 lock washers from the back of the gantry cover into the control assembly and tighten. Position control assembly on right side of gantry cover over round cutout.500 machine screws. Connect the 2 cable ends of 2118210 to J1 and J2 on the back of the control assembly. item 10. 4. to the support arms. 3. 2. Mount the support arms. Install on the left side of the gantry per steps 3 and 4. A1–5 Install Gantry Mounted Table Controls Note: New gantries shipped with systems come with a left and right control panel that will be mounted to the gantry. 6. 8. item 4. 4. The gantry display installation is now complete. A–14 . Locate right side control assembly. Mounting instructions: 1. item 6. as shown on drawing. 7. item 2. 5. item 8 as shown on drawing. with two nylon 8/32 x . Attach the Gantry module. and the standoffs. on pin. Refer to illustration A–7. item 3. Attach two cable clamps. item 5. item 11. Mount the cover plate. as shown on drawing.25 machine screws. as shown on drawing. 2. 5. Locate the left side control assembly. for reference. this drawing is provided with every system: 1. Note: J1 and J2 positions are interchangeable. to the gantry with 4 1/4 x 20 x 3. item 4.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–4 Assemble and Install Gantry Display HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Refer to display installation drawing. to the display assembly with four 1/4 x20 x . item 4. 3. item 12 to the left support arm as shown on drawing.75 machine screws. Install two bearings. 46–297720 . item 9. Complete this assembly procedure on both support arms. Remove side covers. and install on the support arm. 6. Connect the cable 2118210 to J1 on the back of the control assembly. Route and connect the display cable as shown on drawing and attach the gantry display to the support arms making sure the display is seated properly.

Table Install Table Footswitch assembly mounting hardware 10–32 black oxide screws s/c 61221 (2) __ 29 14 _ + 16 (757.2 mm – 760. 46–297427P1.4 mm) ” 1 __ 16 ” Table Footswitch assembly Gantry A–15 . not to the ground bus on the footswitch assembly.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–7 GANTRY MOUNTED CONTROLS INSTALLATION HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 A1–6 Install Table Footswitch ILLUSTRATION A–8 TABLE FOOTSWITCH ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION Install Table Footswitch Assembly as shown in Illustration A–8 There are two plates attached to the table. the braided grounds from the gantry are installed under these plates.

and remove panel as appropriate. Remove dollies. and 4 at the bottom of the unit. Return dollies. 3. Take care when maneuvering the unit. 2. Securely anchor unit to wall and floor. included in the bag that contains the PDU keys. 3. A–16 .5cm (6”) between the PDU and back wall. Leave at least 15. part number 2133533. 2. Roll the PDU into position on its permanently mounted casters. it tends to be top heavy if tilted from front to rear. · The PDU has 6 anchor points. Unit is very heavy. in the now–empty dolly bolt holes in the PDU. 2 at top rear. Use the dollies to move the PDU into position. 5. or PDU part number 2113764) A1–7–1 Position the CT Compact HVDC Power Distribution Unit (2133533) 1. Run the main input power conductors and ground through flexible metal conduit (attached between the PDU chassis and room ductwork) so you can move the PDU away from the wall during service. to allow cooling air to circulate.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 A1–7 Power Distribution Unit Note: HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Your site installation has either the CT Compact PDU. CAUTION A1–7–2 Position the Power Distribution Unit (2113764) 1. 4. Install the 8 plugs. Establish cable access.

ILLUSTRATION A–9 SCU FRONT AND REAR VIEWS Reconstruction Processor CC2 A1 Backplane CC2 A1 A1 Transceiver 1 CC2 A3 A1 Transceiver 2 CC2 A3 A2 Transceiver 3 CC2 A3 A3 Sun Host Computer CC1 Power Panel CC2 A2 A–17 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 A1–8 Scan Control Unit HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Position the Scan Control Unit to provide proper access to rear of the unit.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–9 Install Operator Console HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Position the console at its intended position to ensure correct access to console and good visibility of the patient on the table. If the console is installed free standing. Illustration A–11. console must be installed on risers. If console height is raised 4 inches. support feet must be secured to both pedestals as shown in Illustration A–10. ILLUSTRATION A–10 CONSOLE SUPPORT INSTALLATION PLUG BUTTON SCREW SUPPORT LEG LEVELING SCREW SUPPORT LEG SCREW LEVELING SCREW PLUG BUTTON M287997A A–18 .

This must be vertical within + 1_. Check the guide slot in the cradle end to be sure that it is clean. If the angle is less than 90_. This PCN is scheduled for implementation 3Qtr’94. remove them and recheck the angle. A1–10 Install Phantom Holder Installation A1–10–1 Mount and Level Phantom Holder 1. first check to be sure that there are no washers on the mounting block. mount it per Illustration A–12. If there are no washers present. Using the mechanics level with the supplied bracket. A–19 . then check the verticalness of the phantom mounting surface. Reinstall the phantom holder. Mount the phantom holder to the cradle by inserting the tab on the phantom holder into the slot on the end of the cradle. verify that the angle meets the specified range. –0_ to be acceptable. 3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–11 4 INCH CONSOLE RISERS HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 PCN 189081 is shown. Place cradle in the un–extended position. If washers are present. check the phantom holder for any interference between the holder and the cradle. Verify the holder is mounted solidly against the end of the cradle. D 4. adjust the angle of the mounting block using the adjustment on the back of the phantom holder. D If the angle is greater than 91_. Clamp the holder in position with the draw catch located at the bottom of the holder. 2. this PCN allows for the optional mounting of the legs to the high rise kit.

BLOCK ANGLE ADJUST PHANTOM MTG. Note: Mounting the phantom on the Phantom holder may move it out of spec.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 5. (See Illustration A–12.) ILLUSTRATION A–12 PHANTOM HOLDER SHIM BETWEEN THIS SURFACE WHEN REQUIRED 0 90 +1. PHANTOM MTG. It is advisable to quickly recheck the phantom holder angle whenever remounting the phantom holder to the cradle. BLOCK ct2714 DRAW CATCH R2714A A–20 . Note that the specified tolerance on the vertical angle is only valid when the cradle is un–extended and there are no phantoms mounted to the holder. Because each phantom is different. These two external factors can substantially affect cradle deflection and may result in an out of tolerance condition on the phantom holder angle. you may have to turn the Z axis mounting block angle adjustment knob to vertically align the phantom. –0 PHANTOM REF.

3.. which attaches to the raceway pan if floor troughs are used. Discard the cover plate. ( See illustrations A–13 and A–14) 5. 4. Remove the two hinge pins. 1. Release front cover top right strut. 46–297628G1. 46–297627P1.) to the rear of the gantry base at the midway point with four screws. A1–12 Gantry Strip Down For Restricted Access Gantry cover removal for access through a 39 inch door.(lightly tap from the bottom) one at the top and one at the bottom. install the raceway pan. WARNING: Carefully open front cover. Lift top cover and support with bracket. Remove gantry shipping dollies if fitted. Loosen the set screw on the upper and lower hinge pin. 2. COVER WEIGHT IS APPROXIMATELY 150 LBS.46–297624P1. and four washers. 6. (see Illustration A–14). (lower portion of the rear raceway assembly. a. Remove front right side lock bolt c. Remove the front cover. b. 12–277. IT REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE COVER SAFELY AND WITHOUT DAMAGE. ILLUSTRATION A–13 GANTRY FRONT COVER HINGE Detail A Gantry Front Shroud Hinge A–21 . Open front cover as follows.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–11 Gantry Base Covers HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 Before running any cables to the gantry. 46–170015P2.

Push the rear shroud back. (see Illustration A–15). Lift the cover clear of the Gantry. Open rear cover: a. Unscrew the center top cover hinge from the rear shroud. c. 4. WARNING: COVER WEIGHT IS APPROXIMATELY 120 LBS. Disconnect the power cable from the top cover. 2. Lift the rear shroud up to remove from the gantry ILLUSTRATION A–15 GANTRY REAR SHROUD Hinge Pin Retaining Ring A–22 . IT REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE COVER SAFELY AND WITHOUT DAMAGE 5. Carefully lay cover face down on a protected flat surface. Slide the top cover to the left to remove the cover. Remove Gantry Rear Shroud: 1. d. Remove the retaining rings from the hinge pins on the upper right and left sides of the shroud. b. Unbolt the rear shroud from the gantry base by removing the four mounting bolts 3. Remove the gantry top cover.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–14 GANTRY COVER HINGE DETAIL HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 Detail A Hinge Pin Set Screw 7.

Remove two (2) shipping brackets between Gantry base plate and pivot structure (Illustration A–16). check the alignment of the 0 degree tilt characterization plate and the tilt indicator bracket. A–23 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 6. Adjust gantry tilt (if necessary) to align the 0 degree mark with the indicator. To check that the Gantry’s plane of scan is perpendicular. The Gantry is shipped in the “zero” tilt position. 7. ILLUSTRATION A–16 SHIPPING BRACKETS Shipping Brackets Install Table/Gantry raceway as shown in Illustration A–8.

must be done along with system cabling. some raceway work such as cutting and fitting covers at equipment locations must be done after cabling is complete and when equipment is placed. Contractor supplied wiring should be completed in so far as possible before system cabling is started. The system furnished cables are shipped with the system. Each end of a system cable has a label and color near the connector. Interconnect Cable Installation HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 The sequence of system cabling will in part be dictated by the individual component layout and whether the installation uses conduit.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 Power. This indicates the component and the jack identifier of the component. where raceway is used. wall duct. A1–13 Cable Identification All system cables (except groundwire) are identified using the system component designators as listed below. In addition. or a raised computer floor. Ground. CC2 CT2 CT1 PM MC OC WL DS MT Scan Control Unit (SCU) contains CCI cabinet Gantry Patient Table Power Distribution Unit Multiformat Camera (Lasercam) Operator’s Console X–Ray on Warning Light Scan Room Door Interlock Switch Magnetic Tape A–24 . System ground cabling. floor duct.

TABLE A–1 Cable Color Code Subcomponent Gantry Table PDU Console SCU Computer Color Blue Yellow Red Green Orange Brown A–25 .blue.orange. Table A–1 indicates which color is associated with which subcomponent.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 A1–14 Cable Color Identifiers HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 The ends of the cables are marked with a color. to help with the cable installation. either red.green or brown.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 A1–15 OC Console and Computer Power and Ground Connections Illustration A–17 shows the power interconnections between the OC and the PM. ILLUSTRATION A–17 OC POWER & GROUND GND to CT1 Table Raceway Ground Bus Connection #10 OC Power to PM 12 CONSOLE (REAR VIEW) INDICATES CABLE NUMBER A–26 .

3.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–16 OC Computer Power Connections HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustration A–18 shows the cable interconnections internal to the console Power Module.W4 INDICATES CABLE NUMBER 3 2 1 DETAIL A A–27 .4. ILLUSTRATION A–18 CONSOLE POWER CONNECTIONS CT3229A SEE DETAIL A 7 6 5 4 12 Console Power TS1 1.2.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–17 OC Console I/O Panel and Cable Connections HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustrations A–18 and A–19 show the cable interconnections to the console I/O panel. ILLUSTRATION A–19 CONSOLE I/O PANEL LOCATION PANEL A10 R2986 A–28 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–20 CONSOLE I/O PANEL CONSOLE SWING PANEL (A11) HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 CONSOLE ON–OFF SWITCH (S1) IMAGE MONITOR REMOTE BOARD (A11A1) CONSOLE POWER SUPPLY (A11A3) (BACK OF SWING PANEL) SECURITY BOARD (A11A2) VIDEO RELAY (A10A1) J12 1 CONSOLE POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE (A12) (FRONT) MONITOR EXTRACTION TOOL (BACK OF SWING PANEL) MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (A13CB1) AUXILIARY CIRCUIT BREAKERS (A13CB2=CB5) J13 J14 J15 5 J13 CONSOLE I/F MODULE (A10) 4 J10 J1 J3 J4 J8 J9 2 3 6 8 INDICATES CABLE NUMBER R2987 A–29 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–18 OC Computer Panel and Cable Connections HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustrations A–21 and A–22 show the cable interconnections to the computer panel. ILLUSTRATION A–21 GENESIS COMPUTER PANEL CC1–A2 J11 J8 J1 2 3 J2 SECURITY LOCK J1 MUX PORT R2988 INDICATES INTERCONNECT CABLE NUMBER A–30 . The GENESIS computer chassis CCI is located in the SCU cabinet CC2.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–22 GENESIS COMPUTER BOARD CONNECTIONS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 GENESIS FRAME BUFFER MOTOROLA MVME167 CPU EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY HAWK ETHERNET (OPTION) 1/2 INCH 9 TRACK TAPE CONTROLLER (OPTION) GENESIS APPLICATIONS INTERFACE GENESIS INTERPOLATOR PROCESSOR EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY BULK MEMORY SERIAL PORT A 6 SERIAL PORT B PLASMA 4 GAI SERIAL ETHERNET 46–307082G1 MONITOR VIDEO SCSI 5 INDICATES INTERCONNECT CABLE NUMBERS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 R2989 A–31 .

ILLUSTRATION A–23 SCU CHASSIS REAR INTERCONNECTIONS Indicates cable number 9 CC2 A1J2 EXP INTERLOCK 7 CC2 A1A1A3 DAS DATA FEED THRU TO FEP FRONT PANEL 1 CC2 A3A1 D LAN R2962 A–32 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–19 SCU Cable Connections HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustrations A–23 shows the cable interconnections to the SCU rear panel.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–20 Gantry Cable Connections HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustrations A–24 and A–25 show the cable interconnections to gantry. ILLUSTRATION A–24 GANTRY CABLE CONNECTIONS (DETAIL A) A1 A5 panel Detail A A1 TS 1 Detail B Gantry Indicates Cable Number 8 CONSOLE–GANTRY–SIGNAL CT2 A1A5 J1 1 D LAN CT2 A1A5 J3 J1 PDU–GANTRY SIGNAL 14 J3 J5 7 DAS DATA (FIBER) CT2 A1A5 J5 J2 J4 J6 A1A5 Panel EXP INTERLOCK 9 CT2 A1A5 J4 Detail A A–33 .

(2nd from top in OBC) D D 2113764 PDU with DCRGS board: Move JP1 to the position “A” DCRGS position 2133533 PDU without DCRGS board: Move JP1 to the position “B” NO DCRGS position 4. Remove the OBC cover 3. install TS1 terminal strip connections. Replace OBC cover. Turn OFF the Axial Drive Enable switch in the Gantry display box. Locate Jumper JP1. 2. Turn ON the Axial Drive Enable switch. A–34 . ILLUSTRATION A–25 GANTRY CABLE CONNECTIONS (DETAIL B) Indicates cable number Detail B 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 17 15 Axial Motor Power from PM 550V DC from PM 120V AC from PM 16 A1 TS 1 A1–20–1 Verify DCRGS Jumper Location on CTVRC board 1. on the edge of the CTVRC board.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 As shown in Illustration A–25. 5.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–21 Table and A7 Panel Connections HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustrations A–26 shows the cable interconnections to table. ILLUSTRATION A–26 TABLE CONNECTIONS A2A7 PANEL A2A7 PANEL (DETAIL A) HiSpeed Advantage Table DETAIL A 13 TILT CONTROL TILT MOTOR J1 FTSW J2 J3 J5 FTSW TABLE POWER 10 J6 18 J8 J7 TABLE SYNC–GANTRY DISPLAY–TABLE CONTROLS. DLAN A2A7 Panel Indicates cable number A–35 .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 A1–22 PDU Connections

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

Illustrations A–27 shows the PDU area designators.
ILLUSTRATION A–27 2113764 PDU AREA DESIGNATORS

PDU

DCRGS Detail A A2 Panel A6 Panel Servo Amplifier Assy. Detail B A1 Panel Fuses A5 Panel

Control Bd

Power Distribution

Power Input Detail D A3 Panel

A4 Panel I/O Detail C
DCRGS= Direct Current ReGulated Supply.

A–36

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustrations A–28 shows the PDU A2 panel connections.

ILLUSTRATION A–28 2113764 PDU A2 PANEL

DCRGS

TS1–1 (red)
DCRGS Control Board

GND

550V DC

TS2–1 (Black)

A2 Panel
550VDC POWER

17

Indicates Cable Number

Detail A

A–37

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustrations A–29 shows the PDU Servo Amp connections.

ILLUSTRATION A–29 2113764 PDU A1 SERVO AMP ASSY CONNECTIONS

TS3–3 (Black)

TS1–3 (White)

90V DC at 1 sec scan speed

TS2–3 (Red)

A1 Panel Axial Motor Power 15 Indicates Cable Number

Detail B

A–38

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustrations A–30 shows the PDU power input connections.

ILLUSTRATION A–30 2113764 PDU I/O A4 CONNECTIONS

PDU–GANTRY–SIGNAL 14 Future Option

J1

J2 J6
OC Power 12

Table Power 10

J3

J5
CC2 Power 11

J4

Gantry 120VAC 16

Indicates Cable Number

DETAIL C A4 Panel

A–39

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Illustrations A–31 shows the PDU power input connections.

ILLUSTRATION A–31 2113764 PDU POWER INPUT CONNECTIONS

A3 F1

A3 F2

A3 F3

TS1

Vault Ground from A1 Disconnect NEUT SPARE

L1 L3 L2

A3 J2

A3J6 Door Interlock Switch 1/0 Ground to Table Junction Raceway
Note: All power and ground cables should exit the rear of the PDU

Room Warning Light

DETAIL D

A–40

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6
ILLUSTRATION A–32 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 PDU AREA LOCATIONS

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

SERVO AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY A1 PANEL

PDU CONTROL BOARD A6 PANEL

TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY (in back) A5 PANEL
AC POWER DISTRIBUTION A3 PANEL HVDC SUPPLY A2 PANEL

INPUT POWER A3 PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTORS BULKHEAD A4 PANEL

A–41

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6
ILLUSTRATION A–33 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 HVDC SUPPLY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

TS1–1 (Red)

Ground

TS2–1 (Black)

PDU 2133533 A2 Panel – HVDC SUPPLY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

PDU 2133533

46–297080G1 (for Non EMC Gantry)

13
2118143 (for EMC Gantry) Install Shield Clamp tightly around exposed Cable Shield at lower left of PDU. (EMC Gantry only)

Indicates Cable Run Number

NOTE: EMC gantry has 4–position TS1 Non–EMC gantry has 12–position TS1 (TS1 stands for Terminal Strip 1).

A–42

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

ILLUSTRATION A–34 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 AXIAL SERVO AMP PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

TS1–1 (Black) TS1–2 (Red)

TS1–3 (Shield)

PDU 2133533 A1 Panel – Axial Servo Amp Panel

PDU 2133533

46–327155G1 (for Non EMC Gantry)

14

2118145 (for EMC Gantry)

Install Shield Clamp Tightly Around Exposed Cable Shield at Lower Left of PDU. (EMC Gantry only)

Indicates Cable Run Number

NOTE: EMC gantry has 4–position TS1 Non–EMC gantry has 12–position TS1 (TS1 stands for Terminal Strip 1).

A–43

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6
ILLUSTRATION A–35 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 A3 PANEL

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

CB1

Table 24 hr Console Relay control PWB Tilt/elevation drive Cradle GPDU service outlet Table service outlet SCU Gantry DCRGS 120vac

CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5

PDU 2133533

A3 Panel

A–44

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6
ILLUSTRATION A–36 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 INPUT POWER PANEL CONNECTIONS

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

INPUT POWER PANEL

“Parking position” for “Neutral” wire, if present

Ground (To wall ground)
L1 L2 L3

PDU 2133533 TB1

L1 = Phase A from wall L2 = Phase B from wall L3 = Phase C from wall

A3 Panel

A–45

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

ILLUSTRATION A–37 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 A4 PANEL – CONNECTOR BULKHEAD (BOTTOM VIEW)

A4 PANEL – CONNECTOR BULKHEAD

J3

NOT USED J4 J2

17
2118141 X J6 N.C.
HVDC Keyswitch

16
J5
2119603 Non EMC 2118142 EMC

15
2118146

12
2118139

Indicates Cable Run Number

PDU 2133533 1 2 1 2
X–Ray Warning Light Door Interlock Ground from Footswitch Ground Bar

See next page for details of how to install X–ray Warning Light and Door Interlock.

A4 Panel Door Interlock & X–ray Warning Light

A–46

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6

HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100

ILLUSTRATION A–38 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 X–RAY WARNING LIGHT AND DOOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT

PDU A4 PANEL

External Power source for Warning Light

Room X–Ray Warning Light

External Low Voltage (<30v) Power Source for X–ray Warning Light Relay Coil

Ground Neutral
X–Ray Warning Light Connections

Hot
Door Interlock

1 2 1 2 3 4 OUT IN Neutral Hot

External Relay

Neutral Hot

X–Ray Warning Light Circuit

X–Ray Warning Light

Door Interlock

PDU A4 PANEL

1 2 3 4

1 2

Normally Open Switch

Door Interlock Circuit
Note: Connect a door interlock to the system, to prevent X–Ray: remove the jumper from the door interlock connections on the PDU A4 panel, and connect a normally open switch across them. The Interlock circuit prevents X–Ray when you open the scan room door.

A–47

This will cause excessive ground currents and can NOT be tolerated. #1/0 gauge stranded copper. If there is ANY continuity.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–23 System Ground Connections HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 Refer to Illustration A–39. The CT system ground MUST be totally isolated between A1 and the VAULT ground. contact your District CT engineer for assistance. Using a Beckman 3030 or equivalent. the wire is tied to conduit or other buss bar in an intermediate panel or panels. Arrange for electrical code inspection. Ask the electrician to show you the Ground VAULT connection. and disconnect the wire from that point. At this point. A–48 . you MUST physically inspect the System Ground wire run between A1 and VAULT Ground. Be certain that power is OFF at A1. measure the resistance between the open wire and the VAULT ground bar using the High ohm range. If you have any questions. then disconnect the incoming Ground wire (located at the top of the isolated ground block) in A1. The wire used must be at minimum.

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂ ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â ÂÂÂ 2 Ground Braids (Part of Gantry) OPERATOR’S CONSOLE (OC1) #10 TO PM LINE PRINTER (LP) (OPTION) TO CONSOLE (OC) VCR TO CONSOLE (OC) TO CONSOLE (OC) A–49 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–39 SYSTEM GROUND TO POWER VAULT GROUND HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 A1 Power Disconnect GANTRY (CT2) ROTATING ASSEMBLY FRAME TILT MECH FRAME #1/0 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PM) G #1/0 TABLE/GANTRY JUNCTION RACEWAY #2 T Part of Gantry #2 TABLE (CT1) #2 #2 SCU (CC2) + (CC1) #10 TO PM #10 POWER GND #10 POWER GND TO SCU (OPTION) TO OC SLAVE MONITOR (SM) (OPTION) NOTES: SHIELD/SIGNAL GROUNDS ARE NOT SHOWN. = GND WIRE IN SUPPLIED CABLE. DISK UNITS ARE LOCATED IN CC1 AND SCU.

Some components have sufficient room for storage of excess cable lengths. Try to obtain as neat a job as possible. Keep signal and control cables away from power cables and power wiring. it may be necessary to provide a separate means of storing excess cable if a computer floor is not used. locate the signal cables in a separate section of the raceway. Check for reasonable cable routing. Use suitable tools and judgment. taking into consideration necessary take–up distances for equipment maintenance. In a few instances. Ensure that all connections are tight. When laying cables in a raceway. The tables are laid out so that they can be used as a checkoff for each component during cabling. etc. Include all visible connections. especially ground connections. All contractor wiring should be complete to the point of equipment placement. The list contains all system cables and cables for the three most common options. A–50 .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1–24 System Cable Checklist HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 This section lists the system cables that need to be installed.

2 * Note: Wire Sized according to Direction. XXXXXXX. HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 RUN REF. Preinstallation.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 CONTRACTOR /CUSTOMER SUPPLIED WIRING Ring out all wires before connecting. Recommended Power Distribution System A–51 . Power Requirements Section.# REF # CONNECTION OR WALL BOX AWG # CONNECTION CONNECTION TO 1 Power Source * * * * #1/0 2 A1 #1 #1 #1 #1/0 4A 4B 4C NEUTRAL GND 4A 4B 4C GND CONNECTION A1 L1 A1 L2 A1 L3 A1 NEU A1 GND PM A3 TB1 L1 PM A3 TB1 L2 PM A3 TB1 L3 PM A3 Power Input GROUND LUG A1 Motor Starter Circuit A1 Motor Starter Circuit A1 Ground PM A3 J2 1.2 CHECKED AND INSTALLED Date & Initial 3 SEO #14 (2) #14 (2) #14 (2) Power Power Ground Warning Light Low Voltage Control Circuit (see Illustration A–40) Scan Room Door Interlock Switch (see Illustration A–41) 10 WL #14 (2) 11 DS (Scan Room Door Interlock) #14 (2) PM A3 J6 1.

50 N. Switch Customer Supplied A–52 .2 A3 K3 Fuse 24 Volt Secondary Room Warning Lamp Customer Supplied ILLUSTRATION A–41 TYPICAL CUSTOMER SUPPLIED SCAN ROOM DOOR INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION TO PM A3 J6 1.2 To Relay Control Circuit Board J3 46.O.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 ILLUSTRATION A–40 TYPICAL CUSTOMER SUPPLIED SCAN ROOM WARNING LIGHT AND CONNECTION TO PM HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 AC Line Voltage AC Line Voltage A3 J2 1.

TS2:3. 3 Gantry 24 Hour Power CT2 A1 TS1:5. GND CT2 A1 A5 J3 CT2 A1A5 J1 A–53 . 6. 2. 8 550VDC Power CT1 A2 A7 J5. TS3:3 PM A4 J4 PM A2 TS1:1. TS2:1. 11 Axial Motor Power CT2 A1 TS1:1. DLAN ETC–STC CT2 A1 A5 J4 PM A4 J3 PM A4 J5 PM A4 J6 Connection part of Gantry PM A4 J2 PM A1 TS1:3. Gantry Table Controls. 10.0 Forward Production Cable # 1 2 P/N 2118150 46–297746G3 or From CC2 A3 A1 DLAN CC1 A2 J2 Security Lock Installed CT2 A1A5J3 OC A10 J10 To Installed 46–278687G24 or 46–278687G30 3 46–297746G6 or CC1 A2 J1 Mux Port OC A10 J1 46–278687G25 or 46–278687G31 4 46–297747G3 or Label CC1 A1A9 CC1 GAIBOARD–PLASMA OC A10 J12 46–296675G7 or 46–296675G9 5 46–297748G3 or 46–296674G9 or Label CC1 A1A10 CC1 FRAMEBUFFER–MON VIDEO OC A10 J13 46–296674G7 6 46–297746G9 or 46–278687G26 or Label CC1 A1A1 CC1 CPUBD–SERIALA Imaging Computer Boot Link OC A10 J3 46–278687G32 7 8 2117848–2 2118149 CC2 A1 J7 OC A10 J4 Console–Gantry Signal OC A10 J8 OC A10 J9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2118148 2118141 2118139 2118140 2118220 2118146 46–327155G1 2119603 46–297080G1 2115811 CC2 AIA1 Exposure Interlock CT1 A2A7 J10 Table/PM AC Power CC2 Computer Cabinet Power OC A12 P1 Operator Console Power CT1 A2 A7 J2 Tilt Control CT2 A1A5 J2 PDU–Gantry Signal CT2 A1 TS1: 9.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 SYSTEM CABLES FOR System Catalog B7998J or B7998M (Gantry 2119732) Software Version 2. J1 Table Sync. Gantry Display.

DLAN ETC–STC CT2 A1 A5 J4 PM A4 J3 PM A4 J5 PM A4 J6 Connection part of Gantry Harness PM A4 J2 PM A1 TS1:3. 2.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 SYSTEM CABLES FOR System Catalog B7999EM (Gantry 2113719) Software Version 2. TS2:1. 11 Axial Motor Power CT2 A1 TS1:1. TS2:3. J1 Table Sync. TS3:3 PM A4 J4 PM A2 TS1:1. 3 Gantry 24 Hour Power CT2 A1 TS1:5. 6. 8 550VDC Power CT1 A2 A7 J5.0 Forward Production EMC Compliant Systems Cable # 1 2 P/N 2118150 46–297746G3 or From CC2 A3 A1 DLAN CC1 A2 J2 Security Lock Installed CT2 A1A5J3 OC A10 J10 To Installed 46–278687G24 or 46–278687G30 3 46–297746G6 or CC1 A2 J1 Mux Port OC A10 J1 46–278687G25 or 46–278687G31 4 46–297747G3 or Label CC1 A1A9 CC1 GAIBOARD–PLASMA OC A10 J12 46–296675G7 or 46–296675G9 5 46–297748G3 or 46–296674G9 or Label CC1 A1A10 CC1 FRAMEBUFFER–MON VIDEO OC A10 J13 46–296674G7 6 46–297746G9 or 46–278687G26 or Label CC1 A1A1 CC1 CPUBD–SERIALA Imaging Computer Boot Link OC A10 J3 46–278687G32 7 8 2117848–2 2118149 CC2 A1 J7 DAS Data (Fiber) OC A10 J4 Console–Gantry Signal OC A10 J8 OC A10 J9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2118148 2118141 2118139 2118140 2118220 2118146 2118145 2118142 2118143 2115811 CC2 AIA1 Exposure Interlock CT1 A2A7 J10 Table/PM AC Power CC2 Computer Cabinet Power OC A12 P1 Operator Console Power CT1 A2 A7 J2 Tilt Control CT2 A1A5 J2 PDU–Gantry Signal CT2 A1 TS1: 9. Gantry Display. Gantry Table Controls. GND Connection Part of Gantry Harness CT2 A1 A5 J3 CT2 A1A5 J1 A–54 . 10.

AWG# CONNECTION Connection To P.M. all ground cable connections between subsystems should be made according to the following table and illustrations.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 System Grounds Note: HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 To minimize electrical noise on the system grounds. Connection To A1 DISCONNECT GROUND PM A3 GROUND LUG Refer to Illustration A–40 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS POSITION #8 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS POSITION #9 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS POSITION #10 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS POSITION #11 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS POSITION #12 CT2 BASE FRAME CT2 BASE FRAME CHECKED AND INSTALLED 1/0 #1/0 BUILDING VAULT GROUND A1 DISCONNECT GROUND Refer to Illustration A–40 CT1 GROUND BUS (PART OF TABLE) CT2 BASE GROUND STUD (PART OF GANTRY) OC GROUND STUD #2 #2 #2 #1/0 PM A3 GROUND BUS TAB Refer to Illustration A–40 CC2 #2 GROUND BRAID GROUND BRAID CT1 BASE FRAME CT1 BASE FRAME ILLUSTRATION A–42 CT1 (TABLE) RACEWAY GROUND BUS Gantry Side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Table Side A–55 .

follow these steps: 1. 48kW. type “st” at the Genesis level prompt. Locate the key slots on the pedestal under the operator’s console.x Series FSPGR Option 2102281 B7999KJ Helical Option 46–328315G1 B7996C B7998RH HSA VX to HSA 46–297878G1 B7998JR Z. which is reserved for security keys. then the system will permit only 700mm scouts (not 1000mm). Note: D A–56 . 100kv.x Series 2. the 100 kV button is not visible. Treat them as you would any electronic chip or circuit board. there won’t be a SmartPrep button on the home screen. With the key.x Series 2. Prerequisite for Smart Key Z. 4. A1–25–2 Verify Installed Options Bring up applications and check the screens to see which features are enabled: D D D If there’s no Smart Tools key.x Series 1. RP FAST Option is Prerequisite Enables Cine and Helical Options Function Enables DentaScan HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 Test Output OP_CT_DENT Restrictions Site Specific OP_CT_SMART OP_MR_SPGR OP_CT_HELI OP_MR_CINE Site Specific Site Specific OP_CT_LITE Site Specific Power Option for RP 46–297878G1 B7998KJ 1.x Series=60 sec 1. the limit is 60 seconds. Insert option keys in any position in any row except the top one.x Series 1. 2 Sec. Enables 1000mm scout. Then press Enter. ISDs (not 1 second). then the system will permit Cine or Helical scans of up to 40 seconds. If there’s no Cine/Helical key. press Shutdown at the Utilities menu. by opening the OC pedestal panel.x Series Enables 1000mm scout.x Series Enables Smart Options.x Series 2.x Series OP_CT_LITE Site Specific RP Fast Cycle Option 46–297878G2 B7998RF OP_CT_FAST Site Specific A1–25–1 Install Option Keys Option keys contain a static–sensitive chip. and avoid exposing keys to magnetic fields. Enables Faster Reconstruction Time. 1sec ISD. If there’s no DentaScan key.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 A1–25 Option Keys Key DentaScan Option Part#/CAT# 46–218316G1 B7992D Effectivity HLA Z. If there’s no Power key.x Series=30 sec 1. and 32 kW (not 48 kW). 60 sec Helicals with Helical Key. 48kW. 1sec ISD. To bring applications down. then the DentaScan button on the Image Analysis screen appears as a dashed box and is unavailable. Also. Use caution when inserting keys to avoid bending the pins in the key. 2. To install an option key. To bring applications back up. 3.

8 TS1–1.6.4.2.Rev 6 GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS A1–26 System Interconnect ILLUSTRATION A–43 HISPEED ADVANTAGE INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM PM CC2 A1 J1 SCU Power 1 1 RUN # 6 OC A12 TS1 1.11 CT2A1A5 J2 RUN # 4 PM A4 J6 RUN # 5 Security Lock MUX Port Plasma Video Monitor Video Image Computer Boot Link RUN # 8 2 3 OC A10 J10 J1 500VDC (HVDC) Power 120VAC Axial Motor Power PDU–Gantry–Signal TABLE CT1 A2A7 J2 CT1 A2A7 J5 17 16 15 14 PM A2 TS1:1. TS2:1. PART OF GANTRY RUN # 9 RUN # 7 ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂ ÂÂ A–57 Console–Gantry– 8 Signal CT2 A1A5 J1 * * Tilt Control 13 RUN # 3 Table Sync– 18 Gantry Display– Table Controls CC2 A1A2 J2 CC2 A1A1A3 DAS DATA CC2 A3A1 Exp Interlock DAS Data D LAN 9 7 1 (OPTICAL OR COAXIAL) CT2 A1A5 J4 J5 J3 D LAN CT1 A2A7 J1 10 CT1 A2A7 J10 RUN # 1 PM A3 TS1–A TS1–B TS1–C A1 L1 L2 L3 L1 Table Power PM A4 J3 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM L2 L3 NEUT * * TABLE FRAME DIRECTION 2106358–100 TABLE JUNCTION RACEWAY * PM A3 GND LUG PM A3 GND TAB RUN # 4 GROUND BUS POSITIONS 9 10 12 11 8 RUN # 2 .3 (FILTER L1. TS3:3 PM A4 J2 SEO 4 J12 5 J13 6 J3 OC A10 J4 J8 RUN # 7 J9 RUN # 9 * * = ARRIVES AS PART OF ASSEMBLY = CABLE NUMBER = GROUND BRAID.TS2:3. GND PM A4 J4 PM A1 TS1:3.W4 CONSOLE PM A4 J5 COMPUTER CC2 (CC1) CC1 A2 J2 CC1 A2 J1 CC1 A1 A9 PLASMA CC1 A1 A10 MON VIDEO CC1 A1 A1 SERIAL A Console Power 12 GANTRY CT2 A1 TS1–5.L2.GND) TS1–9.2.10.3.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358–100 Notes: A–58 .

Follow established local calibration processes. then tighten each bolt 50 to 70% of desired value.) Never use a torque wrench to loosen a tightened fastener. Do not attempt to straighten a bent “Beam” or non adjustable wrench. Always approach the specified torque slowly.) Calibrate the tool on a regular schedule. Use the specified torque value for the HV tank mounting fasteners. Then set the wrench to the required torque and tighten slowly until the wrench “Just Clicks”.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION 2106358-100. a. 12. Spring tension is the basis of “Clicker” type torque wrenches. If the desired torque is 66 N-m on 4 bolts.) Never lubricate a fastener unless specifically instructed.0 Recommended Torque Wrench Practices 1. Always approach the desired torque evenly and slowly.) b. Calibration should be performed to ensure accuracy.) 4. This will ensure correct torque settings throughout the range of the tool.) 6. Position one hand at the axis of rotation and one hand on the tool handle. Do not drop or shock the tool. a.) Always clean fastener threads to reduce friction. A spring’s tension changes with temperature. DEFAULT TABLES SHOULD BE USED ONLY IF THE SERVICE DOCUMENTATION DOES NOT SPECIFY A TORQUE VALUE.) 8. Loctite is considered in the design. REVISION 13 HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Appendix B Torque Section 1.) c.) 9.) Minimize the angle as much as possible.) 2.) Hand location is important. 11. Always allow the tool to reach room temperature.) Figure B-3 illustrates the effects not being perpendicular. This is not a speed wrench.) Always release the tension on the torque wrench to prevent “spring set” on adjustable or “clicker” type torque wrenches. There is less than 2% error for up to 10 degrees of tilt from the desired angle. Appendix B – Torque B-1 . 13.) b. It will damage them requiring replacement. Internal damage can occur.) Replace Nylon nuts if they are finger loose. Always use the torque wrench with a 90 degree angle whenever possible. a. 3. Never use a “Universal Joint” with a torque wrench. The 25 degree tilt is the physical limit of a Bondhus Ball End Hex key. 10.) Replace fasteners or clean threads using a tap or die. Permanent damage of the internal mechanism can occur due to excessive strain. The angle of the universal joint can change the torque value by more than 50%.) ALL FASTENERS HAVE A TORQUE REQUIREMENT. It must be used when specified. 5. d. Never use a tap to clean thread inserts. Do not attempt to calculate the sin angle correction. Replace it. This give the user stability and accurate torque repeatability.) b.) 7. compressed air. Fasteners should thread easily using finger pressure. brass brush.

NOTICE FASTENER SIZE M3 M4 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 TOOL SIZE HEX KEY 2. the default values can then be assumed to apply.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION 2106358-100. only use a calibrated torque wrench.2 Lbf-In 1.9 +/.20 8 . The use of a torque wrench may appear complicated because there are several standards and metrics.0.16 1/4 .3 48.General Torque Cross Reference .2 Lbf-Ft 33.0 . Use Table B-1 and Table B-2 only as a last resort.7 N-m 5 +/.0. All Fasteners use either “flat and lock washers” or loctite.0 General Torque Cross Reference Table B-1 and Table B-2 are provided as default references only.5 Lbf-Ft 6. These drawings call out specific instructions as notations.23 N-m TOOL SIZE HEX KEY 5/16 3/16 9/64 TOOL SIZE SOCKET 9/16 7/16 5/16 Table B-2 Default Torque Values as Specified by GEMS CT for Lightspeed QXI and Previous Many service operations on this CT scanner require a torque wrench.5 mm 7 mm 10 mm 13 mm 16 mm 18 mm 24 mm TORQUE IN N-M 1 2. This torque wrench kit has wrenches that measure inch pounds and foot pounds.36 N-m 20 +/.26 +/.7 +/.8 14 28. If the Service documentation does not contain specific torque values.2.1.9 19 38.7 5.32 TORQUE IN STEEL 25 +/. First.4 160 TORQUE IN LBF-FT 1.85 +/.3 7.7 N-m 15 +/.0. Note: The Illustrated Parts List contains Engineering drawings that should also be used as a reference.9 117.9 20. where needed.2 Lbf-In 2.4 66. Using conversion factors and the conversion chart below can simplify that task. Use the appropriate replacement procedure to verify the correct torque requirement for each specific fastener.2 Lbf-Ft 27.7 N-m 8 +/. These items must be used as specified.0.8 +/.1 Lbf.4 70 168 - Table B-1 Default Torque Values as Specified by GEMS CT for Lightspeed Plus and Forward FASTENER SIZE 3/8 .8 TORQUE IN LBF-IN 8.2. Use a torque wrench that is on a Calibration schedule and is approved by GEMS-AM Service.1 +/. B-2 Section 2. The kit that can be used that is on a regular Calibration schedule is kit number 46-268445G1.5 mm 3 mm 5 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 14 mm TOOL SIZE SOCKET 5.Ft 10. REVISION 13 HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Section 2.23 N-m TORQUE IN ALUMINUM 20 +/.

23 Table B-3 Torque Conversion Cross Reference TORQUE CONVERSION FACTORS • • • • • • • To convert Kgcm to foot-lbs.88 6.8 8. multiply Kgcm by 0.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION 2106358-100. multiply lbf-ft by 1.868 1.7 17.5 7. To make conversions to Kgcm and Newton meters.9 7.0 34.8 173.98 1. use the following conversion table. multiply lbf-in by 0.2 Foot lbs (Ft-lbs) 1.4 26.8 69.96 2.4 78.42 39.90 5.3 5.5 4.4 2.6 3. multiply Kgcm by 0.6 260.2 2.6 4. or calculate using conversion factors.5 21.3 5 5.0 60.61 29.74 2.81 19. multiply N-m by 0.2 14.8508 To convert N-m to foot-lbs. Kilogram Centimeter (Kgcm) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 Inch lbs (in-lbs) 0.1 6.73756 To convert foot-lbs to N-m.8679 To convert Kgcm to N-m.11298 Appendix B – Torque B-3 .86 7.0981 To convert N-m to inch-lbs. make any necessary conversions for the torque wrench you are using.3558 To convert inch-lbs to N-m.8 6.4 347.1 86.94 3.07233 To convert Kgcm to inch-lbs. multiply Kgcm by 0.9 3.85 8. REVISION 13 HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Second.92 4.7 43.7 28.83 9. multiply N-m by 8.9 Newton Meters (Nm) 0.2 6.4 52.The units of measure are typically marked on most torque wrenches.

Note: The length of a standard square drive extension has no effect on torque since it is along the axis of rotation.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION 2106358-100. See Figure B-1 and Figure B-2. REVISION 13 HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Section 3.Torque Formula . 90 degrees Torque 1 Figure B-2 Formula for 90 Degree Accessory Usage B-4 Section 3.0 . This same principle can be applied when using accessories with the torque wrench. B A Conversion Formula DR = Torque Wrench Length X Torque Desired Torque Wrench Length + Accessory Length Torque Wrench Length = A Accessory Length = B = 25 mm =1 inch Desired Torque = T = 66 N-m = 49 ft-lb Dial Reading = DR = AxT A+B Square Drive Center Accessory Center Handle Center Figure B-1 Formula to adjust for Straight Line Accessory Torque 2 When the Wrench and Accessory are at Right Angles Torque 1 = Torque 2 Set Dial Reading for exact desired Torque.0 Torque Formula T = R x F x sin (angle) Where: T = Torque in N-m R = Distance from axis of rotation F = Force Applied Sin(90) = 1 From this formula we can see that it is necessary to apply the force at a 90 degree angle to the axis of rotation to achieve accurate fastener torque. See Figure B-3.

REVISION 13 Desired Angle 25 degrees Maximum Actual Angle HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Using Ball End Hex Bit Torque is reduce by a factor of 0. sin (90 . Figure B-3 Formula when not at 90 Degree to Axis of Rotation Appendix B – Torque B-5 .90 = 59.GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION 2106358-100.906 66 N-m x 0. Extension length has no effect on torque value since it is the axis of rotation.90 @ 25 degree offset. 66 N-m / 0.90 = 73.25 degrees) = sin (65 degrees) = 0.33 N-m The dial setting to achieve 66 N-m at the bolt.4 N-m What the bolt feels.

the friction between the bolted materials absorbs the stress and the bolt itself feels little to no load. In short.25% +/. Therefore. a properly designed and tightened joint. but training needs and tool expense increase. Fc = Fp .GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION 2106358-100. Tension force (Ft). sideways or sliding force of bolted materials. Other methods are available. A ¼” drive “feels” different than a ½” drive. Shear force (Fs).10% +/. Anti-seize compounds can reduce the needed torque up to 20%.1% As demonstrated in Table B-4. • • • • Preload force (Fp). bolt stretch. The components of a bolted joint can be defined as.15% +/. after the “G Force” load is calculated for each component. The “Feeling” method also changes with the tool. PRELOAD MEASURING METHOD “Feeling” Torque Wrench Angle Torquing Indicating Washer Fastener Elongation Strain Gauge Table B-4 Torque Method Accuracy ACTUAL PRELOAD FORCE ERROR > 35% +/.0 Torque Wrench Accuracy It needs to be clearly understood that “torque” is an indirect measure of tension or “preload force”. The design standard applied is a safety factor of 8 on all fasteners.5% +/.Torque Wrench Accuracy . CT Engineering has taken into account the variability of using torque wrenches. Various studies have been performed on the effectiveness of torque wrench accuracy. Clamping force (Fc).Ft With shear force. resistance of bolted materials. B-6 Section 4. Lubricants can also significantly change the effects of torque versus preload force. This is to ensure clamping force is maintained without exceeding the strength of the fastener. There are other factors that need to be considered as well. not using a torque wrench is the worst case event.0 . REVISION 13 HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Section 4. The following conclusions have been made. Fastener material has a large effect on torque versus preload force. torque measurement is an economical method of achieving a properly tensioned joint. difference of preload and tension forces.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HSA–RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358–100 1 .

NB–918 P.CT SERVICE ENGINEERING.A.O. Fax: (414) 785–5874 .S. BOX 414 MILWAUKEE WISCONSIN 53201–0414 U.